By the sa me Author

U n i for m with t h is Wo r k :
S S
O I RI A ND THE P N
EG Y T I A
R ES U R REC T I ON . 2 V o lu m es
Wi t h 2 00 I ll t
u s ra t io ns

L O N D O N

P U B LI S H E R TO
P H I L I P

T HE
L E E

M ED I C I
\V A R N E R

S OC l ET Y , LT D .
THE B OO K OF TH E D EA D :
THE PA PY R US OF A NI , SR EC IB
RE RER E LE
'

A ND T ASU OF THE T MP S
OF E GY PT , A B OU T B C . 1450

I N TWO VO L U M E S VO L U M E I
 H E PA PY R U S O F A NI
A RE P R O DU C T I O N I N F A C S I M I LE

E D I TE D , WITH H IER O G LY P H IC

T R A N S C R I PT , T R A N S L AT I O N A N D

I NT R O D U C T I O N, B Y SI R E . A . W A L LI S BU DGE

MA. .
,
L I TT D. K E EP E R O F T H E
E G Y P T I A N A ND
A S S Y R IAN A N T I Q U I T I E S I N T H E B R I T I S H
M U SE U M P U B L I S H ED BY P E RM I S S I O N O F
.

T H E T R U ST E E S O F T H E B R I T I S H M U S E U M

LO N D O N :T H M E D I C I
E S OC I E TY ,
LT D .

NEW Y ORK : G . P . PUTN A M ’

S S ONS
PR I N TED I N G R E AT B R I TAI N
19 1 3
 PR E F AC E
THE Papyr u s of An i whi ch was acq u i red by the T rustees
,

of the B ritish M u seu m i n 1 8 8 8 is t h e largest t h e m o s t , ,

perfect and the best ill u m inated of all the papyri con
,

tain i ng copies of the Theban R ecension of the B ook of the

D ead I ts rare V ignettes H y m ns an d Chapters , and its
.
, ,

descriptive R ubrics ren der it of un ique i m portan ce for the

,

study of the B ook of the D ead an d i t holds a v ery h igh ,

place a m ong the fu nerary papy ri that were written betwee n

B C
. . 1 5 0 0 an d B C 1 35 0
. .Although i t contai ns l ess than
.

on e hal f of the Chapters w h ich for m ed the G reat Corpus of

-

texts wri tten for t h e benefit of t h e dead we m a y co nclude ,

’
that An i s exalted offi cial position as Chancel lor of the ,

ecclesiastical re v en u es and endow m ents of all the Te m ples

of T hebes and Abydos will ha v e ensured the in cl u s ion of
,

all the Chapt ers wh ich an ed u cated E gyptian dee m ed

essen tial for salvation T he Papyr u s of An i is i n short
.
, ,

typical of the B ook of the D ead in vogue a m ong the

Theban nobles of h is ti m e .

The first edition of the Facsi m ile of the Papyr u s was

iss u ed i n 1 8 9 0 an d was exhausted rapidly A second
, .

edition of the Facsi m ile appeared in 1 8 9 4 and a few m onths ,

later the T rustees issued a stout quarto volu m e con tain ing
a detailed description of the Papyrus an E ngl ish t r a n s la ,

tion w it h notes an d a general I ntrod u ction t reating of the

, ,

h istory of the Book of the D ead and giving a brief account ,

of the rel igious bel iefs of the A ncien t E gypt ians .

I n recen t years there has been a growi ng de m and for

a F acsi m ile o f the Papyr u s of An i i n a for m con v en ient for
use by begin ners an d students and at a reasonable price , .

As t h e second edition of t h e Facsi m ile i n fol io and the ,

e dition o f the acco m panying volu m e of E ngl ish text are ,

now practically exhau sted the T rustees of th e B ritish

,

M useu m were asked to san ction t h e iss u e of the present

edition Th is they have done and they ha v e also
.
,

per m itted the use of the black and wh ite v ign ette s which ’
vi P refa c e

appeared i n the text v olu m e and the reprin ting of a n y ,

sections which were n ecessary .

V ol I o f the presen t ed itio n contain s :

.

a The general I ntroduction w ith chapters on t h e

.
,

H i s tory of the B ook of the Dead and on t h e

E gyptian R el igion .

é A fu ll descript ion of the Papyrus of A n i plat e

.
,

by plate .

5 The Colo u red Facsi m ile i n 3 7 folding plates

. .

Vol I I con tains a co m plete transcript of the Papyru s

.

in h ieroglyph ic type with E ngl ish translations notes etc

, , , .
,

and an I ndex .

I n prepari ng the m aterial for these volu m es a new copy

of the text has been m ade and supple m entary Chapters ,

and Section s ha v e been added fro m the funerary papyr i

that have been acq u ired by the T rustees since 1 8 9 2 .

T h e translations ha v e been rew ritten and the notes have ,

been corrected and a m pl ified i n the l ight of recen t d is

c o v e r ies The greater part o f the I ntroduct ion has als o
.

been rewritten and the enti re work thus beco m es trul y a

,

N ew E dition fu lly rev ised to the date of iss u e

, .

E A WA LL I S B UDG E
. . .

B R i Ti S H M U S EU M ,

A ugu s t 1 2 272, 1 91 3 .
 C O NT E NTS OF V O U M L E I

P R FA
E CE

INTR T NOD U C IO

THE R ECE NS NS B IO A OF TH E OO K O F T H E DE D

T H E LE G EN SRS D OF O I I

APPN E DIX YM N S R SI — H TO O I I

SRS II .P R N PAL F R M S N
— O I I A ND HIS I CI O U D ER

TH E XV I I I T H

T H E D OC TR N T RNAL F I E OF E E LI E

EGY P T A N AS A T
I I DE S B OU G OD AND TH E
“GOD

APP N E DIX ST S H S NAM S R T

LI OF TH E G OD W O E E WE E R E CI ED

AS P RF T S P R T S
.

BY TH E DECE ED To E EC H IS I I -
OU L

T H E A B OD E B SS OF TH E LE ED

T H E G OD S B OF A TH E OO K O F T H E DE D

THE P R N PAL RAPH AL

I CI YTH L AL PLA S
G E OG IC A ND M O OGI C CE

IN B TH E A OO K OF TH E DE D

F N RAL R M N S
U E CE E O IE

THE PAPY R S U ATOF ANI, I TS D E A ND

DE S R PT N
C I PLAT S
IO OF TH E E

LIST YM NS HAPT RS
OF H A ND C E

THE PAPYR S U PR T N C L R PLAT S

OF A NI . RE OD U C IO IN 37 O OU ED E a t en d
 I N TRO DU CT I O N
THE RE C E N S I O N S O F T H E B O O K O F T HE
DEAD

The R ecensions of the great body O f rel igious c o m

posi tions which were drawn up for the use of dead k ings
, ,

nobles priests and others and whic h for m the B o o k

o f t h e D ea
,

of the An cien t E gyptians m a y be thus d

, ,

su mm ari z ed
I The H eliop o lit a n R ec en s i o n ,
. that which
was edited by the priests of the College O f A n u ( the O n
of the B ible an d the H el iopol is of the G reeks ) an d , ,

which was based upon a series O f texts now lost I t is .

fo u n d c u t i n h ieroglyphs upon the walls of the cha m bers

1
an d corridors O f the pyra m id to m bs of certai n kings of2

the V t h and V I t h dynasties I t represents the syste m O f .

theology pro m ulgated by the priests O f R a the Sun god -

,

but all t h e essential ele m ents i n it w ith the exception ,

o f the solar doctri nes are deri ved fro m the pri m itive , ,

i ndigen ous and probably predynastic E gyptians I n the , , .

texts of the later k i ngs w e fin d that the priests O f R 5I

were obliged to acknowledge the supre m acy O f Osi ris ,

w h ose cult even under the earl iest dynasties was very , ,

general i n U ppe r an d Lower E gypt .

U nder the K I t h and X I I t h dynasties sections of the

Pyra m id Texts with t itles i n which they are styled ,

Chapters were written i n curs i v e h ieroglyphs u pon ,

”

3
sarcophagi an d c o ffi ns an d to these were added a nu m ber ,

1
k ow th
H en c e
T ta
m id T x t
U n

pi I M hti m f d pi I I T h i
n as e
PyPy ra e s .

P
y y
2
l a a ,
n s, e ,
e ,
e -
e -
s a- ,
an e . er

p m id w l d b M M M i tt d M p o d i g th
1 88
ra

84
l t io i R m] d T
s

d t h h i ogl p h i t x t w
0— , an
er e c ea r e

p bli h d wi t h F h t
e

i 8 8 —9 3 A vi d
er
ou t
y c e
.

s
ar e

er e
e an

PyS
s e
as

,
er
a
ur n

r en c
e ea r s

ra n s

e
n,

di io of t h t xt h b
t
L ip ig 9 8 — 9
n
n t I I I —X I V
ea

l p bli h d b th Py m t l
e e
o

as
n/ a u x,
ra

een r ec en t
t .

y u s
,

e
ar s ,

e
1

e,
2 .

ra
’
’
re

za en ex e,
se

I 3
z

i ib d wi h t io of h
,

h X I h X I I th
n
1

t
0

d XI I I h d
e

a t t
1

ti m mo m t
t
10

fo d i
,
.

,
an

U t y n as es an y nu en s ar e

y Th 11 6 69
B
nscr e t s ec ns t e n s ex . us . 20 — ar e un n

h i ogl p h
er po h o ffi of A m m ( i t i h M m N 6 6 5 4 ;
s u n t e c n a u r s u s eu , O .

VOL . I . B
2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Of Chapters which appear to ha v e been co m posed d u ring

the i nter v al between the V I t h and K I t h dynasties The .

treat m en t of the older texts an d the character of the ,

newer texts ma y be studied i n the excellen t transcripts

s ee

A wa w u
Bi rc h , E gyp t i a n
1 8 8 6, a es P l t XV XX) Tex t:of
I I—
t/ze E P er i od f r om t he Cofi u
a r li es t

11 2 0 6 —1 4 an d 2 6 8 —8 4 o n t h e c fi n
. of of
o f

Apa an h -
k f om ,
r Sakkarah ( s ee Le pi s us, D eu kma /er , I I ,

p o t pp
RI 9 9 o; M a s er , R ee
.

2 6 8 —8 9 o n t h e c o fii n

R ecu eil, t I I I , pp
of
u ei l,

2 0 0 , 2 1 4)
.
III,
pi
2 0 0 an d 2 1 4 ff
); 11 2 0 6 - 1 0

A n t ef ( s ee L e s u s , D eu kmci ler , I I , ] 1 4 5 ; M a s er ,
1 2 0 6 on a c ffi n o of M en t h u h et ep at er n
.
an d

p o
li
.

.
.

B .

-
.

B
( s ee L e pi
s u s , A e/tes te Tex t e, B 1 11 2 6 9 — 9 4 o n t h e s ar c h op g of
a us B ern . .

p o
h et ep ( s ee M as er , M émoi r es , t I , p A s ec t n i sio un fo don th e . .

wa s ll of o b of
t he t m Q u ee n N e fe p o
ru ( s ee M a s er , R eeu ei l, I I It, pp
201 fi . .
’

M émoi r es , t I, p ot h er s ec tio n s a re fo d
un o n t h e s ar c op g of
ha u s

®§ E Q T ka ( L p i D km i / I I B 11 4 7 4 8 M p o
. .

,
a s ee e s u s, eu c er , ,
. 1 ,
1 as er ,

G id u Vi i t e ou p 4 N 5 3 M ém i t I ps eu r , . ll 5 —8 o r
22 ,
O . 10 o r es , .
,
. . cc u

on

N l
th

l
t l of Apa (
'

a zou a e,
e s e e

i 8 7 9 f il 4
1 n (
P
L d i

11 6 6 II
ar s, 1
M m t E g yp
fo d t h t l of hi
t i d O

o
[ B io]

1
s ee e ra n ,

1
”
on u

ar e
en s

un on
eu s

e s e e
e a

N
.

, .
,
. . e

(s ee M i tt N ti d M ar e dB e, l g p o
9 M p o R ce es il t I I I ore ou a 1 0 as er ecu e

S
. .
, , , .
,

o ffi of b k A P J
p .

p i
d 11 5 7 6 8 3 an th

p
.

o t IV p
—
k on e c n e e -
a U

(s ee

th e

Hat h p t
L
XV I I I h d
s
A

De l
l t

e se
l
e s u s, T
t l 69 w
i

h i (
B
t
1 37

D mi h
at
; M
opi d y yB
e R
n as

fi i t [
w ll i
r a
i l
es e

/ if t
h t m pl of
B lla
.

—
I
ex e,

ar
1

s ee
.

as C
as

e
er

on
,

a
ec ue

u se zr
, .

n t
,

e
.

e e
n

5 37 c en , s eu
-
u .
, 2

M p o R i l t I pp d opi
.

y a
as

.
r
er

p p i of M t h p ( iti h M m N
N XXX 0
,

2 .
9 5 ff )
ecu e

o 3 9 S N ill T d/ o / B d I B 1 9 7 A g Z i t f ifl
-

ee
B
et e
, f
) d
37 9 9 9
.

f
av
,

b f( i
r
i

e,
h
s
. 1

o
u s eu

en
; an

u e z,
,
O
C
. 1 00 1 0
es O

.
an

1
N —

e er-u

e
Oc c u r

.
en -

e
P
n

s e zr
t e
ar s ,

II p 3 ;
.
, ,

d N ill E i l i g pp 39
yPy
Bd .

n as e

of t Am apt h h i f k/ [ o t Th b ( D ii m i h D
e a-
,

d t w fi d t xt of h V h d t p t d t h w ll of h t o m b
en -
n
.

,
an

s
I

t
h XX V I t h

e
t
c
av

e
e,

t y y
n e

n as

zer - ze
tun

a
re
,

ea e
.

e es
,

on

s ee
e a
n

s
t e

c
t
en ,
e
er

G o p / t d P t m p i d
ra a as es Tl o i / N k p li
a ua L ip ig
eu o n er ze a u s e zerz e ro o s, e z

y yS
,

1 8 84 d l o po th p p w itt f th l d i
an a s u
kn e a ru s r en or e a a s

bo t ( a D é i u C f /g AD d M S S Eg g2 00 / Vi w s ee ev r a , a a o ue es e

P N S S
. .
,

i 8 74 p 7
ar s , 1 o , ig o h i p lli wo d
. 1 0, . n r c a are
’
s r s are

E o e it o i i ti o di t ipo p l g fi p i l :l m ’
ss scr t n era c , un a eo ra co s ec a e en o r e

bbo d
a di n g i pl ivi l f q
a n za di g i
se n
q i d m o t
es i i et , a re u en za se n O u as e c
0
q i g glifi i l o igli
u as er o di tti l i c ,
a i o o s tt ezza tu ,
e
’
n c er t ezz a c on cu s n

t i ti h iv l
ra c c a ,
m o pi tc e bi t r iv i g o h i
e a u na an i a u a ta a scr ere n rec c e n

gi i
e o o o l t tt i t i d l ipo i i o d l p io do l iv
z an ,
s n a re an t c a ra t er e t era t c e er es c u s a
m t om o
en e i il o t o p pi o pp t i
r an ,
a l d bbio
cu n s r a r a ar en e s en z a a cun u
’

/i p O D ve i wo k i o io wi h h i
.

11 a m d i F ’
9 e uu er a , . 1 . n e r a s r n c n n ec t n t t s
M p o L Ri
MS /d m fi F
XV
é i ( R H i i
’
.
, s ee as er i
,
e d l / /u e u er z ee un ra re n evu e e s o re
d R ligi
es t e p on s , .
, .
 R ecen s io n s Of t h e B oo k of the D d ea 3

m ade by M Lacau fro m the coffi n s O f A l B arshah an d

.
-
,

publ ished by h im i n R ecu eil de Tm vu u x t 2 6 — 2 7 , .

,

2 8— 33
b
.

I I The T h e a n R ec en s i o n , wh ich was co m m onl y

.

written upon papyri an d pain ted upon coffi ns i n h iero

glyphs an d was divided i nto sections or chapters each ,

of which had its d istin ct ti tle but no defi n ite pla c e i n

the series The version was m uch used fro m the X V I I I th
.

to the XX I I nd dynasty Thi s R ecension was also written

.

upon papyri i n the hieratic character an d i n hieroglyphs .

I I I The S O called S a i t e R ec en s i o n i n which at

.
-
, ,

so m e period an terior probably to the X X V I t h dynasty

, ,

the chapters were arrange d i n a defi n ite order I t is .

written upon coffi ns papyri etc i n hieroglyphs a n d

, , .
, ,

i n hieratic an d i n de m otic an d it was m uch used fro m

,

the X X V I t h dynasty to the en d O f the Ptole m ai c

’

Period .

k
The titl e O f B o o o f t h e D ea has been usually give n d
by E gyptologists to the Theban an d S a i te R ecensions but ,

i n this I ntroduction the ter m is intended to include the

general body of rel igious texts which dea l with the wel fare
of the dead an d their n ew l ife i n the worl d beyon d the
grave an d which are known to have ex isted an d to have
,

been i n use a m ong the E gyptians fro m about 4 0 00 B C to

the early centuries of the Christian era .

T he Pyra m id T exts represen t the oldest for m O f the

B ook of the D ead known to us an d although we have only ,

C opies of the m which were written for ki ngs an d none ,

which were written for pri ests O ffi cials an d private gen tle , ,

m en it i s not right to conclude fro m this fact that copies

,

were not m ade for person s other than kings an d to seek to

m ake a distinction between the H elio po lit a n and the later
R ecensions of the B ook of the D ead The m d s zd od d to m bs .

O f the I V t h dynasty prove that the L i turgy of Funerary

Offerings and t h e B ook O f Open i ng the M outh were recited
for the benefit O f eccl esiastical an d ci v il O fficials and t h ere ,

is n o reason for doubting that C opies O f sections O f the

Pyra m id T exts were m ade for thei r benefi t .

The earl iest to m bs fo u n d i n E gypt pro v e that the

pri m iti v e E gyptian s disposed O f their dead partly by
burial and partly by b u rn ing but there are no groun ds
, ,

B 2
4 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

whatever for assu m ing that a ll the dead were buried and
burned for fro m t i m e i m m e m orial it has alw ays been the
,

c u sto m i n Africa and still is in m any parts O f that con

,

t in en t to allow the bodies of all except kings go v ernors

, , ,

nobles an d m en of high rank to be de v oured by w ild

, ,

ani m als or to be consu m ed by the m yriads of flesh destroying

,
-

i nsects which in fest the groun d The bodies which were .

buried were either d is m e m bered or buried whole B odies .

which were buried i n graves were laid on their left sides

with thei r heads to the so u th and they were so m eti m es ,

w rapped i n skins of an i m als or reeds or grass m ats , , .

B odie s were c u t i n pieces for two reasons to sa v e space i n ,

a country where land was pec u l iarly v aluable and to pre v en t ,

the spir i ts of the dead fro m return ing an d r e occ u py ing -

their Old bodies I n cases where fire was used I n d isposing

.

O f the dead the bodies were onl y partially b u rn t and the

, ,

bones were collected an d thrown in to a shallow pit care ,

being taken to keep the head and the hands together At .

this period it is certai n that O fferings were m ade to the dead ,

and it is quite clear that both those to who m the O fferings

were m ade and those who m ade the m held very defi n ite
, ,

v iews about t h e fu ture l ife i n the Other World They were .

qui te certain that m en did not perish finally when they died ,

and that s o m e part of a m a n departed after death to so m e

place where he would renew his l i fe i n s o m e for m according ,

to the d ictates O f so m e d i v in e being .

T he i nhabitan ts of E gypt who d isposed of thei r dead

by burial and burn ing could n o t write and therefore they ,

coul d not have possessed any collection of rel igious texts

which could be regarded as the fou n dations O f the B ook o f
the Dead now known to us and i t is m ost unl ikely that they
,

m ade use of any rel igious for m ulae when they buried or
burned thei r dead There are m any passage s i n t h e B ook of
.

the D ead contain ing re ference s to the burial cu s to m s O f the

pri m itive E gyptians which i nd icate that the aborigines
,

possessed a low for m of rel igio u s bel ief They cannot .

,

however i n any way be regarded as the fo u nders of the

,

Book O f the Dead beca u s e that work pre s upposes the

,

existence O f idea s which the aborigine s d id not po s s ess an d ,

refers to an elaborate s y s te m of sepul ture w h ich t h ey n e v e r

practised Whate v e r views m a y be held as to the o rigi n
.

O f the E gyptian s i t is qu ite certai n that the aborigines O f

,
 I n flu en c e of t h e C u lt of O s ir i s 5
E gypt e m ployed a syste m of sepul ture which was quite
d ifferen t fro m that which was i n use a m ong thei r lates t
predynastic and thei r earl iest dynastic descen dants .

F ro m what has been said above i t is clear that the

earliest i nhabitan ts of E gypt m ade no atte m pt to m u m m ify
their dead i n the S trict sense O f the ter m S till as .
,

D r Fouquet has found traces of bitu m en i n so m e predynasti c

.

skeleton s we m a y assu m e that the pri m iti v e E gyptians

,

woul d ha v e taken far m ore elaborate precautions to preserve

t h ei r dead had they possessed the n ecessary knowledge .

As soon as the E gyptians began to m u m m ify thei r dead ,

i n other words to preserve t h e body I n a co m plete for m

, ,

they also began to perfor m fun erary cere m on ies of a

sy m bol ic nature an d to recite for m u lae and prayers which
,

were bel ieved to cause great benefi t to the dead The .

greatest i m portance was attached to such cere m on ies an d

for m ulae for i t was thought that they would endow the
,

dead body with power to resist corruption would ensure ,

i t a ren ewed an d b ea t ifi ed existence w ith the gods and ,

would preser v e i t for e v er The great change wh ich took.

place i n the religio u s v iews of the E gyptians a l ittle before

the beginn i ng O f dynasti c history was I bel ieve due entirely , ,

to the rise an d spread O f the cult O f Osiris throughout

E gypt Whether it was i ntroduced i nto E gypt by a peopl e
.

co m ing fro m the shores of the M ed iterranean or by a ,

“
L ibyan tribe or by proto S e m i tes fro m the east or -
,

south east or whether it was of purely native growth need

-
, ,

not concern us here ,

What is all i m portan t to note is
.
-

that the teachers of the cult of Osi ris preached that t h e dead
body of a m a n was a sacred thing an d that it was not to ,

be devoured by m en or beasts or b u rn t or m utilated O n , , .

the contrary i t m ust i f the w ish O f Osi ris was to be

, ,

considered be taken the greatest care of an d e m bal m ed an d

, , ,

b u ried i n a carefully con cealed to m b B ut why ? The .

preser v ation of the body was of v ital i m portance because ,

the dog m a O f Osi ris taug h t that fro m i t woul d spring the
translucen t transparen t i m m aterial refulgen t and glorious
, , ,

envelope i n which the Spi ri t soul O f the de ceased would

take up its abode w ith a ll his m ental and spiri tual attributes .

The eviden ce deri v ed fro m t h e enor m ous m ass of n e w

m a t er ia l which we owe to the all i m portant disco v eries of -

m a s i u oa fi to m bs and pyra m ids by M M aspero an d to his .

,
6 T h e P a pyr u s Of Ani

p u bl ication of the early rel igious texts proves beyon d all ,

doubt that all the essential texts co m prised i n the B ook o f

the Dead are i n one for m or another far O lder than the , ,

period o f M en a ( M enes ) the first historical king of E gypt 1

,
.

Certai n sections indeed appear to belong to the Predynastic , ,

Pe d o d .

T he earl iest texts bear withi n the m sel ves proofs not ,

only of ha v ing been co m posed bu t a ls o O f ha v ing been ,

re v ised or ed ited long before the copies known to us we re

, ,

m ade and j udging fro m m any passages i n the copies

, ,

inscribed i n hieroglyp h s upon the pyra m ids of U n as ( the

last king O f the V t h dynasty about 3333 and Tet a , .

Pepi I M eht i em s a f and Pepi I l ( kings of the V I t h

.
,
- - -
,

dynasty about 3 300 — 3 1 6 6 ,

i t would see m that e v en ,

at that re m ote date the scribes were perplexed and hardly ,

2
u nderstood the texts which they had before the m T he .

m ost m oderate esti m ate m akes certai n sections O f the B ook

1
L es text es po t t i loi d l
des
d t q d di q ll ét i t
Py ram id es n o us re r en s n an s e

j i
S
’

pas s e q u e d l
’

y e n a au c u n In o en e es a er ue e re u e es a en

dé j avi ill i q m ill

e v t ot e
es c n i t o di i q e a ns a an n re re . ex ra r na re ue

p i h i ff
ara s s e c e c il f d bi o h bit a l o id é o m m
re, au ra en n us a u er e c ns r er c e

pé t t ev l t io to t l foi q o vo d
a mi i m
y
’
re r s en an u ne a ua n n a u es es s u n u ra

h
r ec h erc l o igi d l ligio Eg p i
er es r L ligio t l
n es e a re n t en n e . a re n e es

t q i o l fo t ét i t dej a o ti é v t l I
y i re
t ex es u n us a n c on n a tr e a en c ns tu s a an a

d t i : t a o d o m t po l o m p d d l et t
y
’ ’
nas e c es n us e n us e t r e, ur es c r en r e, an s a

d p it i ét i t il pl d p t m ill l p pl q i l o ti é
B y
’
es r O l a , a us e Se e an s , e eu e u es a c ns tu s .

i t d j
en en en p l iiq d u, tem th é ologi q : i o
e ne ar e c ue es s s es u es s n us

vo lio m o t j q a l igi d é lé t q il t m i o v
u n s re n er us u
’ ’
Or ne es rn en s u
’
s on s en eu r e,

il o f d i t l v d ag o pl loi t i M p o ”
n us au ra r ec u er er s es es en c re us n a ns . as er ,

L R lg
a i ei Egypt e on
(i R d l ffi t i d R ligi
z nne t XI X p n evu e e
’
s o re es e on s , .
, . 1 2

an d i Et d d M / l gi
n u t d A fi l gi Egyp t i
es e t II p
t zo o e e
’
r e eo o
’
e en n es , .
, .

C omp l o d di i l T t lb t d m l h o i r l
ar e a s as s e e n ze n en ex e s e s a a s sc n e ne a t en
h ilige L itt en g h O t li g t k
era t u r a ni Z w if l i i d i e j d r t en , u n er e e n en e e ,
s es n n e er
H i i ht lns c h ii m li h l di al
a t er t h l D kmal
c Si
er a s e t es t en u n s er a t en en en er . e

i fii vo h i to i h Z i t d m wi d i h g wi
g hO i
U
‘
e r en n e ne r u ns r s r sc e e un an r n en e ss
ki e n ht th
n rec w m i b i i d vi t J h t
an u n, d hi i en n an s e s n as er e a r a u s en ne n

v t t E m D V l dlt i d gypti n
XV
”
er s e z . r an , d mit i /
as er z n ss es ae s e en zu en se s e zen

Sp / i
r a e zen , G Bd n L I p 94 .
, .
,
. .

2
L o m b d p i e t d fo m l di igé o t l
e n re es im
r r es e es r u es r es c n re es an au x

v im x mo t q l fl i l p t t l o pio i pi it
B
’
en eu n re ue e ro e s er en e e sc r n ns ra au x

Egypt i en s o p d t ll o t é it d
. ea u c l g t v
u
’
en r e e es s n cr es ans u n e an ue e a ec

o mbi i o d ig q i p i t pl voi é é o m pl et
d

J e
es c

m t omp i en c d
oi q t a m i q ll pp ti
cr s,
na s

ib q i l opi i t o O
r s es

u an
ns

t
es s c r

pl vi
e s

o
o i l t ,
pi
n es

es

u e
’
u
u

es
ne

es

a
C

ar
ar a s s en

a en

en n en
s us

au
us a

u n as

us
r

et
t

eu x r t u e
s
c

us P e
e

e
.

r m o t t d l a d eg d M i i M p o L R l gi Ey p ti
e n en au e u r ne e n
”
as er ,
a e i on en n e

t XI I p l o R il
.

( R
i d l Hi t i
’ '
n evu e d R l gi
e s o re S es ei on s , . . ee a s eeu e oe

t IV p 6
,

T r a va u x , .
, . 2 .
 T h e P a pyr u s Of An
'

8
1
for M en kau R a the fourth k ing of the I V t h dynasty
- -
, ,

about 36 3 3 B C 2
but i n the R ubric to the second the
.
°

k ing s na m e is given as Hes ep t i Th u s it appears that i n

’
-
.

the period of the X I t h dynasty it was bel ie v ed that the

Chapter m ight al ternatively be as O ld as the ti m e of the
I st dynasty Further it is gi v en to Hes ep ti i n papyri o f
.
,
-

the X X I s t dynasty a period when particular attention was

3
,

paid to the history of the B ook of the D ead ; and i t thus

appears that the E gyptians of the N ew E m pi re bel ie v ed
the Chapter to date fro m the m ore re m ote period To .

quote the words of Chabas the Chapter was regarded as ,

being very an cien t very m ysteriou s and very di fficult to , ,

understan d al ready fourteen centuries before our era 1

.
‘

The R ubric on the co ffi n of Q ueen Kh n em Nefer t -

,

which ascribes the Chapter to Hes ep ti states that this “ -

,

“ Chapter was fo u nd i n the foundations beneath the

D weller in the Hen n u B oat by the fore m an of the builders
in the ti m e O f the k in of the South an d N orth Hes ep ti
whose word is truth g 6
the Neb s en i Papyrus says that ”
, ,

;
this Chapter was foun d i n the c i ty O f K h em en u
( H er m opol is ) on a block of alabaster written i n letters of

p
1
S ee G u ieyes s e, R i t u el F u n ér a i r e
ot
Egyp t ien ,
c ha pit re P ar s , 1i 8 7 6,
. 1 0, n
2
T he
e 2.
lt
a e r ec en s io of thn e B ook of t h e D ea d p bli u s h ed b y Le pi s us

l o giv th ki g
a s es e n
’
s n ame as M en kau R i
- -
l o c a u ( Todten bu e/z,

B1 5 l I th
2 n e s am e rec en s io n the C XXXt h C h a p t er is asc r ib ed t o

B
. , .

th ig of H p t i
e re n

T/ze Cfi ap ter s of Comi ng F or t /z o

es e -

h a er L I
( ll
C pt
( B 1 5 3,
. l .

XV
S ee a s lo u d e, g
y D ay , .

3
Na ville, Todten bu e/z ( E n e u n g) , i l it
3 3, 1 3 9 pp . .

4
C b
h a as , Voy age d u n E gyp t zen ,
’
46 p
Ac c r n o di g o M N ill . . t . av e
i li g p follo pi io t i C h pt i
( E n e tu n , ws C ha ba s s O n n , h s
B
’
wh o . a er s an

b id t ol ook d it v tho g h i t
a r

oti
gm en O f t h e wh e
c n a ne
eq uiv l
d
n o t a ll t h e r e

a en t o t h e wh t e
us
O f t h e D ea

c r ne

ol
; an d

.
h ad,
ligio do t i of
the E g pti
an s , a v l wh i h w y e

a ue
en

c
u

as

w a R rs
a W R I ETH
R R
R
o

fi yfi h fi ifi fi} E w
'M
lfi l fl mR @ m

S ee G ood wi n, A eg . 1 866,p 55 .
,

and c omp
Naville ( Todten ou e/z
are t he r ea d n i g f om
II p , .
r

I
t he Cio a r P py a ru s of M es -em- n e er t giv b en y
 H er u t at af the S on of Ki n g Kh u fu
'

, 9
”
1
lapis la z ul i under the feet of the god ; an d the Turi n
-
,

Papyrus ( X X V I t h dynasty or later ) adds that the na m e of

the fi nder was He ru ta ta f
k fi h ) the son of - - -
,
fi ,

K hufu or Cheops the secon d ki ng of the I V t h dynasty

2
, ,

about 3 7 33 B C who was at the ti m e m aking a tour of . .

,

inspection of the te m ples B i rch and Na v ille consider

3 1
.
‘

the Chapter on e of the oldest i n the B ook of the D ead ;

the for m er basing hi s O pi n ion on the R ubri c and the latter ,

upon the ev idence derived fro m the con ten ts an d character

O f the text but M aspero while ad m itting the great age of ,

the Chapter does not attach any v ery great i m portance to

,

the R ubric as fixi ng any exact date for its co m position 5

.

2
S ee u
Le s u s ,
B dg
pi T
e, Tde C/zap ter s of Corn i ng F or tlz by D ay ,
odten o u cfi , B I 2 , I
C h pt a er L XV I .

5 31 . . .

ot k bl pt
em s r em ar a

y
3 Th
e C ha er is t h e 6 4 t h I t i s on e
of l t
t h e O des l d t h po of
O f all, an d i s a t r u t e , a s a rea d s t at e t ib d ,
to e e ch

K i g G g M kh
S
n
l —— a a- M a kh er u I I I or en er es

C h pt
a t
a

s on e t d
er en

t G l P ff k
r es en e
y
jo d h igh p t io t ill l t p iod f it i fo d
b t
e

h l t
a

E m p o o i h ol en er a
re u ta

er o
n

s
a

y
a e

e
er

a e
,
or

er
s

r N un

c
on

as ,
p y
wh i h m t h v o m f o m t h o m b of P t m ph i i
y y
*
c us a e c e r e t e e en O s, n

m d d i g t h XX V I th d t
S
El
om mo e
d w

p h d i t f th R i t l of T i
an

t o mpil of th H m t i book h vid tl p

r e r ec en c
as a

er
e ur n

e
B
er
e

e c s
n as

as e en y ar a

B
”
E gyp t P l i U i l
’
ra s e or e ua ur n . u n s en . s a ce n n ver s a

f f i t y L o do 867 p T h blo k f t o t o wh i h D i h
s or , 4 n

f i d i b d b G lé i h ff E it g I mpei l I t i d l
r e er s s

o
es c r

pp 6 9 7 Th i
n, 1

e yN ,

l t ot p f
.

o
1

n sc
2 .

e ,
e
r nz
c

a
O

e
s ne

r a ,
c

n ven a r e
r .

y y e
rc

C ll ti
th i
o

to
s s

f th t t
ec Egyp ti
i th
on

i i h M m (N
ne

it ( Ch pt
n e B
en n e,

I h v p b li h d
r t s op
XXV
. 1 1 0 1

u s eu
, . 1

O .
,
1 0 .

XV
er e

a e
s an

u
e ec r

s e a C
e O

th i k i t w
n
e

C mi g F t/ by D y
o n

s m
ex s o n

t t b as
I XXX d L I ) i
ol I I I pp 4 ff L o do 9
or z a

p é d f i m il é of th o igi l l b
ea n
m y Cl p t
a

M M p o
,

o
V fer s

e a
.
,

r
,

t en
. 2 1

u
B, an

ac s
.
,
-
n n, 1
”
n

10

e
.

r
.
za

na
as
er s

s a
er
o

wh i h c o di g th R b i w fo d i r th t m pl of T h o th R d
, ac c r n to e u r c, as un i e e e ,
evu e e

t p 99 d E t d d ll/y t/ l gi t I p 36 8
l H i t i d R ligi
P
’
s or e es e on s , . xv, . 2 ,
an u es e zo o e, .
,
. .

T dt o l ( E i l i
4
o g ) p 39 S i R o f l h ld h i pi io
en uc z n e tu n , . 1 . r . en u a so e t s O n n,

T r a ns S B iol A l
. 8 93 p 6
oc . . rc t .
,
1 , . .

5
O xpli q d di i n ett i di t io om m
ue m q
’
or n a re ce e n ca n c e u ne ar ue

ti q i é x em p t d p i ip q l Zi d M t t d
d
y
’
an u t e tr e on ar e ce r nc e ue e vr e es ar s es e

o m po i tio l tiv m t m od ib é g p ti o mm t
y
’
c s n t q re a e en ern e, e u nn s cr e en , n an

un i d rop m i e d ti m m p h it
es re po v i t t d p la
r es n as es e es , n e u a en en re ar

q p o g d é p q t e l é C t pli tio m p it
XV
’ ’
u nn er s nna e o ue r s r ec u e . et e ex ca n ne e a ra

p et
as x t E p m i li l h pi t L I
r e e ac e . t o v de
n ja re er eu , e c a re se r u e sur

D [fi “c hi f i h
u l
b h b bih
t om
l . o
.

a ve
,

een
pu l s
g
ed
th e

b y D u mic h en , D er
e rea der , m an y of

pa la s t des P a t u a men ap
Gr a o
t h e in s c r i pt on s on

L i p ig
e
w os e

A b
,

1 88 4 , 1 88 5
B h i N h hi B
b Th b
.

l s as i f a l- a h ri ya A s a s f of t h e or t n d D é r a l- a h a ri , on t h e w es t ern
‘ ‘
or e

Ni
a nk o f the le, o p pos i t e
,

e es .
,
IO T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

O f Her u tataf the fi nder O f the block of stone we know , ,

fro m later t e xts that he was considered to be a learned ma n ,

an d that his speech was only w ith d i ffi c u lty to be u nder

1
stood an d we also know the pro m i nen t part which he took
,

as a recogn i z ed m a n O f le tters in bringing to the Court of

his father Khufu the Sage Te ta 2
I t is then not i m probable .

that Her u tataf s character for l earn ing m a y have suggested ’

the con nection of his na m e with the Chapter possibly ,

as its l iterary re v iser ; at all e v ents as early as the period

O f the M iddle E m pire tradition associated h im with i t , .

Passing fro m the region of nati v e E gyptian trad ition ,

we touch fi r m ground w ith the evidence derived fro m the

des m
t i m t p
o
o t m po i d l X t d l X I d ti t é it
ov
nu m en
mo m t i
t s c

é iv i t l opi l pl
n e ra n s e a
e
e e a
e
y n as e, e n
’
ta
c er a n e

vi ill q o
e es o
fo m t ll l eg d M ke i o t m em l i
r e ac u e
en

jo d h i L q
ue n

e,
as

us l é dig
e
n

en

r
o
u

a y
eau

ne
ns
au

e
au

y ur

r n
en
’
u .

s,
O I

e
on

ors
cr

u on
’

e
a

ce u
es C

e r
es

ea s
es

us
us

sa

ne d v i t p o l v d l p i d i dig e l
e a en as s t io d
u e er an s
’
es r t es n n es a s en s a n e
m t d p i m i t if v i t po d id é d p io
y
’
l h
ar c ai s ee u r on a a u r ren r e c es es es ex r es s ns

pl fo t q i vo i t l l t
us r es , u ie l d S m it d H
r en a
a en e ec eu r au s c es es e eu r s
’
or u s ,

l do m i io d R a ag di ég i t
i l
XV
’
a n at n e I E gyp , au x es O i es eu x r n a en sur te .

R evu e d l lfi t i d R ligi

e
’
t p 99
s o re es e on s , .
, . 2 .

C h b V y g p 4 6 ; Wi d m p 9
B P y
1 a as , A gyp ti / G fii l t
o a e, . e e an n , e s c ze es c c z e, . 1 1 .

In ht it M
e p N
r . 6 (H us i .
H tataf i m t io d
a ru s O . 1 00 0 a rr s eru s en ne

t og th wi h I m h p w ll k o w th o d t h w it of
di g r

wh o
e

e
er
“ y y
: I h v h
sa s

dv i dw i i g
t -
e

d th wo d of I m h t p d f H ta af
id d g b t w wh
a
-
et e

e
th
ear
as a

e
e -

r
n

s
n au
-
e -
r,

e e
an

an
e

O
r er

er u t
e

t
th i pl
r an s c r
m
e r
se

?
ipt b M p o i j y Th hi
a c es
an

l A i ti q
an

t i t t i p bli h d wit h
”

Se V I P
as
“ t
er
hi
ar e

gl e
p 4 4 If
n
p hi er a

ou r n a
r t n

c
s ar e s a

ex

s a
s

u e,
an

r
s

.
su n

e
s
,
u

.
a
no

XV ,
er o

.
y
er e ar e

0
c

d Et d Egyp t i t I p 7 3 f E gli h t l t io
an

S oc
p 7
B i ol A /
.
u

V .
es

ol I I I p 38 6 d R d f t/ P t t d ol I V
rc z, .
en n es ,

.
T
,
.
,

.
. 1

, an
or
ecor
n

s o
s
ze
ra n s a

as , I s
n s , s ee

e .
, V rans

.
.

1 1

A o di g t
K h f of t h
2
.

cc

xi t
h W t
of m
r p
n H ta af i fo m d h i f th
o t
old wh liv d i h to w of
e es c ar P yy a ru s, er u t n r e s a er

TtS e
u u
-
f h w
ene er u
d po d i fl
e e s en c e

bl to joi t o it bod g i h d t h t h d b
e
ov th lio d w q i d wi th t h
as a e
a an 1 10

n
ea r s

s y a a n a
o e

ea
n t e
a a
n

een

cu
m t iy y
t ff

h im b bo t
O

s er es
,

of T h o th
d
an

hi
Kh f
a ,
an
s s es s e

o m m d H tataf b o g ht t h g to
,
on
.

iv l t h ki g o d d t h h d t o b t k ff
By n

s a rr
u en c e

u u s c

a ,
’
er

e n
e

an

r
n, an

er e
er u
as ac

e ea
r
ua n t e

e s ru c
e sa e

o
e

f o m p i o th t T ta m ight f t i t
r a r s n er g i H vi g a d e a s en on a a n . a n exc u s e

h i m lf f o m p fo m i g t h i t po goo w b o ght d it
h d w
ea
se

ff
r

d l id
as c u t o
m
er r

id of t h oo m d th bod w pl d
an a
n

on o n e s
s ac u

e
n a an, a

e r an
se as

e
r

y u

as
an

ac e
s

t h o th g p k t i wo d of po w 3U xgi
on

wh
e Th er ,

po t h goo tood p d b g t o w ddl d t h h d l o

er eu n e
(
e sa e s

se s
a e c er a n

u an e an
r s

a
er

e, a n e ea
)

a s

b g to m ov t o w d i t ; wh t h h d h d joi d i t lf g i to h
e an e ar s en e ea a ne se a a n t e

y
bo d h bi d too d p d kl d E k g
t e r s
k g F thu o m pl t
an c ac e ) . or e c e e

hi ti t t t ipt d t l t io
P py
era

a
c
IV t
r us
ex

li 8 9 p
,

es ca r , lt 6
E m
ra n s c r

B Di M
er
fi
n,
,
d an
1 0,
ra n s a

. 1 1, P n,

a e
s ee

.
r a n, e ar c en es
 B oo k of t he D d i h I I d D yn y
ea n t e n as t I I

m onu m en ts of the I I n d dynasty A bas rel ief preserved at .

-

A ix i n P rovence m en tions A asen and An kef two of the

1
,

priests of S en t or Sen ta i% ( flgg l]

1 the fi fth k ing of ,

the I I n d dynasty about 40 0 0 B C an d a stele at Oxford , . .

and another i n the E gyptian M useu m at G iz ah record the

3

Q
1 CE
na m e of a thi rd priest Sher a or Sheri

®
,

:
royal relative
1 Q O n the stele at Oxford are .

d
represente the deceased an d h is wi fe seated one on each ,

s ide O f an al tar which is covered w ith funerary O fferings

of pious relati v es ; above i n perpendicular l i nes of h iero ,

glyphs in rel ief are the na m es of the obj ects offered an d

,
6
,

“
belo w is an i nscription which reads : thousands of loaves
7

O f bread thousan ds of vases of ale thousands of l i nen

, ,

gar m en ts thousands of changes O f w earing apparel an d

, ,

8 ”
thousan ds O f oxen N ow fro m this m onu m ent it is .

ev ident that al ready i n the I I n d dynasty a priesthood

existed i n E gypt wh ich nu m bered a m ong its m e m bers
1
Wi ed eman n A egyp t isc/ze G es clzi clzte, p 7 I m t o / t S kka h 1 0 n a as a a za a ra

S
,
. .

v l of i p i t d t of t h p i t of t h l
“Q Q Q
we h a e a s te e h er a su er n en en e r es s e ea

K S
“P
O , w h er e o n the t o h of
c ar d P
uc ab es en t an er - s en
-

g 0
1 bo t h o
i 88 p 9
m m S ccu r . ee M i tt dM p o L
ar e M t o de an as er , es as a a e

B
’
l i
a n c en E mp i r e, ar s , 1 2, . 2

L p i l 9
.

2
S ee A w file s u s, us a , . .

M p o G i d d Vi i t M é d B l g 8 8 3 pp 3
N
3
S ee as er u e u s eu r au us e e ou a 1 1,

3 ( o
, , , .

32 , an d
Th4
i
2 1

s a s
.

l o l b f o m S h a t o m b i th it i h M m S
er e

p N
a s a r er
’
s n e B r s u s eu . ee
G id t ti E gyp ti
u

A di
mo m t b
5

nu
e

io
o G ll i
le

th
scu ss n
an

m t h od of d pi t i g t h i
yB on

o h dt m y b fo d i A g Z i t l if t B d
en s rc ar
lt
a

e
er es ,

Eg p t i
I a
e

e
. I ,

un
O .

e
1 .

n
c n

e e
s a

s c zr
ar on yXXX an

p ( D i D t ll g i
. .
, ,

i t S / l f g D kmal )

m
'

. 1 e ars e un n n en ver z er er c za en a u ae . en er n .

A m o g o th
l

l
; lig s q
n
; ( 3)
0
(fi n
( fi ers ,

S
)

l
t h wo d
[ 1
5
e r tt t w
I n c en s e I S e
87
o m of t h pp
en i c e, e es e a ear In

t h li t
s eeR
e f ff i g m d f
s s O

il d T
ecu e
O er n

8 84
e
a (I
lt
47)
s

r a va u x
,
df T ta ( 11
a
5 3e
1
or
33 UP
,
n

a e
s . 1
0

an or e . 1 2 , 1 1 ,
1

The scu lpto r h ad no r oo m f or th e

i b lo gi g to e n n B .
12 T h e P a pyr u s Of Ani

relati v es of the royal fa m ily and that a rel igious syste m ,

which prescribed as a duty the pro v iding of m eat and dri nk

O fferi ngs for the dead was also i n acti v e O peration The .

o ffering of s pecifi c O bj ects goes far to pro v e t h e existence

of a rit u al o r ser v ice where i n thei r sign ification would be
indicated ; the coincidence of these words an d the prayer
“
for tho u s ands of loa v es of bread thousands O f v a s es of ,

ale etc with the pro m ise Anpu kh en t —A m enta shall gi v e

.

-
, .
, ,

thee thy thousands of loaves O f bread thy tho u s and s of ,

vases of a le thy tho u sands of vessels of u ng u ents thy , ,

thousands of C hanges of apparel thy thousand s of oxen , ,

an d thy tho u s ands of bullocks enables us to recogn ise ,

that ritual in t h e text inscribed u pon the pyra m i d of Tet a

i n t h e V I t h dynasty fro m which the above pro m ise is taken 1
, .

Thus the ev idence O f the text on the coffi n of the wi fe of

M en t h u h et ep an d t h e scene on the m onu m en t of Sher a
-

support on e another an d togethe r they prove beyond a ,

doubt that a for m of the B ook of the Dead was i n use at

least i n the period O f the earl iest dynasties an d that s ep u l ,

SB
chral cere m on ies con nected therew ith were duly per fo r m ed .

O
AE E RR III Q U
R III S
U
R
t s II I U
R z I ii i
w v
R i ll
e v
R
fi lfli ii x fl fi fl t (
'

u » T e a, II 38 8 , 3 8 9
. . R ecu ezl
,

ed . p o M as p er ,
t . V ,

g m b o ght fo w d h i p oof f h g t i q i of
.

yy
y y
2
Th e ar u en t s r u r ar er e n r O t e r ea an t u t

a re ligio t m i Eg pt
us s ppl m t d i
s e m k bl m
n b are s u e en e n a re ar a e an n er

th i iptio fo d i h m t o l f k kh a b i
e nscr ns un a
fi n t e as a a z O Se er - -
a u G

at

an
S kka h a

d p i t b t wh
a
H w h v
ra

r es
m
li k h im
. wh lik h a w er e o l l t iv
i d o m of h h i gh t f tio
u
e

o, u n
a e a

e
an

exer c s e
o, e

s
S er

e
,

t
as a

e
r

es
y a re a

u nc
e

ns

y
, ,

of h E g p i p i h ood i vi t of h i t i l
t e t an x p l
r es t
( O h n r ue s t e er i e/n . n t e

c
5:
> Q i
M M ii ll
-
X
R l d T
s ee t I X p 66 ;
ax g h er , ecu gz
'

e r a va u x , .
, . 1 B ru sc ,

A gyp t l gi p d M p o U M l d H Egyp ti
'

e 8 o o e, . 21 / an as er ,
n a nue e zer a r c ue en n e,

p . Amo g h o ff i g m d i t h t o mb
n t h e b er n s na e n e a re t e su s t a n c es

d [
J
w w vs

S S P
h a of h I I d d
er tt e
1
,

di h
wh i h l o m t io d

t of h V I h d
n
A
0
th

y y
0

t B h
0
t l of
n as
an

an n t e t ex s
c ar e a s

t e
en

t
ne

y y nas
on

.
es e e

ut t e
,

t o mb f k kh a b i i di ff t f o m y o h k o w to
O e er- -
bo h
a u s er en r an t er n n u s, t as

P h p hi i
t a h -s M i e dM p
s es b L M ore p t 3 s t t le s ee ar et t e a n as ero , es a s /( zoo, . 1 1 .
 B oo k of the D di ea n the I V th D yn as t y I 3

With the I V t h dynasty we have an i ncreased nu m ber

o f m onu m ents chie fly sepulchral which gi v e details as to , ,

the E gyptian sacerdotal syste m and the funeral cere m on ies

1
which the priests perfor m ed The i nscriptions upon the .

earl ier m onu m ents pro v e that m any of t h e priestly O ffi cials .

were still relati v es O f the royal fa m ily and the to m bs of ,

feudal lords scribes an d O thers record a n u m ber of thei r , , ,

o ffi cial titles together with the na m es of se v eral of their ,

rel igious festi v als The s u bseq u en t i n crease i n the nu m ber .

O f the m onu m ents during th is period m a y be due to the

natural de v elop m en t of the rel igion of the ti m e but i t is ,

very probable that the greater sec u ri ty of l i fe an d property

which had been assured by the v igorous wars of S en efer u 2
,

the first k ing of this dynasty abo u t 3 7 6 6 B C en couraged , . .

,

m en to in c u r greater expense an d to b u ild larger and better ,

abodes for the dead an d to celebrate the fu ll ritual at the ,

prescribed festi v als I n this dynasty the royal dead were .

honoured with sep u lchral m onu m en ts of a greater si z e an d

r ega r d s the fo m
g of h h i ogl p h wh i h i li f d
wh i h t h
r

di po d d g o p d Th t l of th wh ol
an d c u

y tt i n t e er y s, c

y
a re n re e ,
an

th w y i
mo
d t ly y
e
m t i
nu d
a

dv en
n

p i m itiv d its
c

ru
e

o t b tt ib t d t o y
e an
v t t h I I d it lf ; i t m t th
ar e

er y
s

r
se an

e, a n
r u e

ca n n
. e s

e a
e

r u e
e

an
e

M i tt
r e,
n as h

d M p o
h II d
fo h v b b ilt d“ i g th I t d a
a t er

e een
t

gé é l q I
i
an t
h wo d of M M
u
e
ur n
n , or e en

e s y y
o

nas t
e

,
or
n

n
se
t e r
us

s
, ere

L im p i p mi
’ ’
ar e e an as
g ier ,
r es s o n n ra e ue On re o t au re er
p t d t o m b N 5 t ll d
as ec u em ti q ité R i
ea u O .
,
es ce e
’
u n e ext r e an u . en en
tf t d
e q
‘

e o o m m e ce h bi t é a voi d l
ue n o mb x m
us s es a u s r an s es au tr es t eau e
to v ii L mo m t i m t l pl i
d
s e re r

e c eu x
q
i o po q il
u e

o o i o d l pl i d q q h t il y p
ue n
t
c

oi t p d l I D t i L M t o d
us c
e

n n a ss

y S nu

ns
en

an s a
es

a ne
c er t a n e

e a ara
en

,
e

e
us

n
’
a n c en

a as

P
’ ”
d e ra s n ur u ne s as e a
Ir e
n as e . es as a a e

: i p 73 B t b i o t ov tibl
E mp i 88 h i
y y
’
l ia n c en re ar s , 1 2, . . u eca u s e t er e s n o n c n r er e
p oof t h t h i to m b b lo g to t h I t d t t h t t l of
S
e
h a
r

vi d
mo
er m t of
en c es
,
alt d
a

of h t iq it of fi x d ligio
t
nu h v b
t
s

e
dd d
en

t m d lit t
an
h
h old t
i u
e

y y y
n

a er

y
s

a
n as t
e

e
,
s

re
a e
nas

us
een

s
,

s e
e ex s o n t

uce

an
as t
e ste e

er a u r e
es

E ypt

mo
d
0

M of h m o m
1
.

an y y
o m m o l t ib t d t o th i d t h o ld
o l b d ib d b i g t h w o k of h I I d d t ;
re c rr ec t
t e

e
nu

es c r e
y
en t s c

as e n
n at r

e r
u e

t e
s

n
yy yy
n as

nas
s u

s ee

M p o G l i /t d M g ld di l Volk im A l / m (
’

as er ,
es c z c z e er or en n s c i en er ter t zu t ra n s
ip ig p i d
.

Pi hm
et s c ) L 8 7 7 an n5 6 ; W ,
m A gyp i l
e zG /i /t ,
1 , . e e an n , e t sc ie es c z c z e,

p 7
a
.

t t f l
H
1

ex
2
0

o q d t h p opl i t h i i i
.

e c

d h b ilt w ll t k p
O a
n

a t er
u er e i l d o di g t o
h A m f o m Eg p
a te I
e

e
e

u
es

a a
n

o
e S ee
na t c
ou r t
P en n s u a , a n

e a u r
ac c

y
r

t
n

y
.

th to of S h
e s
“ pool of S f
r an e a am t io d en e er u
G E]
IS en ne

y
,
l
wh i h h ow c h t hi m w
s w ll k o w
s t a h f o i of Eg p S
s na e as e n n on t e r n t er s t ee

ft p ; M p o M él g
.

G lé i h ff A g Z i t / g
t III
.
o n sc

P e

i 8 7 6 p 7 l ; L p i D kmdl I I
,
ar s , 1
,
e .

,
e

.
s c zr

1 ,
. 2
, .

e
1 10

s u s,
as

en
er ,

er ,
an

,
2a
es

.
14 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

m agn ificence than had e v er before been conte m plated an d ,

the chapels attached to the pyra m ids were served by cour s es

of priests whose sol e dutie s consisted i n celebrating the
s er v ices T h e fash ion of build ing a pyra m id i nstead of the
.

rectangular fia t roofed m a s t a oa n for a royal to m b was

re v ived by S en eferu who called h is pyra m id K h a ; and
1

h is exa m ple was followed by his i m m ed iate successors ,

K hufu ( Cheops ) K h af R a ( Chephren ) M en kau R é ( M y ,

-
,
- -

c e r in u s
) and others,
.

I n the reign of M ycerinus so m e i m portan t work see m s

to have been u ndertaken i n connection with certai n sections
of the text of the B ook of the Dead for the R ubrics of ,

Chapters X X X B an d C X L V I I I state that these co m pos i

2

“
tions were fo u n d inscribed u pon a block of alabaster of
the south i n letters O f real lapis la z ul i under the feet of -

t h e m aj e s ty of the god in the ti m e of t h e K ing of the

“ South an d N orth M en kau R é by the royal son
Heru - -
,

t é t af whose word is truth

, That a new i m pulse sho u l d .

be given to rel igious O bservances and that the re v ision ,

of existing rel igio u s texts should take place I n the reign O f

M ycerin u s was only to be expected i f Greek trad ition m a y
,

be bel ieved for both H erodot u s and D io do r u s S ic u lu s

,

represent h im as a j ust king an d on e who was anxious t o ,

efface fro m the m in ds of the peopl e the m e m ory of th e

alleged cruel ty of his predecessor by r e open ing the te m ples -

an d by letting e v ery m a n celebrate h is own sacrifices and

3
d ischarge his own rel igious d u ties H is pyra m id is t h e .

“ ”
one now known as the third pyra m id of G iz ah unde r ,

whi c h he was buried in a c h a m ber vertically below the

apex and s ixty feet below the le v el of the ground Whethe r .

1
the pyra m id was fi nished or n O t when the king died hi s ‘

body was certainly laid i n i t and notw ithstand in g all the ,

atte m pts m ade by the M u h a m m adan rulers O f E gypt to 5

1 b ildi g of h p m i d of M é dOm h
T he u n

x v io m d h i 8 8 did o hi g l p
ll b tt ib t d t
t e y ra as u su a y een a r u e o

f
S en e b t h
t h e u n c er
Me d m L o do
u
er u ,

t i wh i h xi t
,
89 4
a nt
u

n
y
t
h i poi t f
n
e e ca

,
t x v io
1
c e

2,
at

t i
ns

s s on t

to .
a

s
e t er e

n
n 1

o r r ec en
2

e ca
n t
at
n t o c ea r u
n s s ee P e r e,

2
F h x
or t m y C/ mpte f C mi g F t/ oy D y
te t s ee d d er s o o n or i a . 2n e
H odo t
.

3 II
er 9 ; Di d I 64 9
u s, , 1 2 ,
I o o ru s , , , .

A o di g
1
Di d h di d b fo i t w o mpl t d ( I 6 4
to
‘
cc r n o o ru s , e e e re as c e e ,

A o di g t o Abd l L if t h K h lif
,

Sy M mfi b M d
5
m w ‘ ’
cc r n a at e a s na e as a n, ut . e

do b d h t h w h fi t to t m pt t h i wo k h t h o i t i
ac u te t
bj t ll giv i h i R l ti d l Egyp/ i
t he s u ec ar e a
a e

pp 5 —
en
as t

n
e

s
rs

e a on
at e

e
’
s

e, P r

ar s ,
,
t e au

. 2 1
r es o n

22 1 .
16 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

enveloped i n a coarse woollen cloth of a yellow colour to ,

wh ic h a s m all quanti ty of resinous substance and gu m

adhered l
I t would therefore see m that as the sarcophagus
.
,

co u ld n ot be re m oved the wooden case alone con tain ing ,

the body had been brought in to the large apart m ent for
exa m ination N ow whether the hu m an re m ains there
.
2
,

foun d are those O f M ycerinus or of so m e one else as so m e ,

ha v e suggested i n no way affects the q u estion of the ,

ownership O f the coffi n for we know by the h ieroglyph ic ,

i nscription upon i t that i t was m ade to hold the m u m m ified

body of t h e king Th is i nscription which is arranged in .
,

two perpendicular l i ne s down the fron t of the coffi n reads ,

H
[ a il ] ii {
Os r s,
k mg f
an gléiiti
u th

} M en kau R a, - -
livi g n for v
e er, bo rn of

g n R l yfi
M
fie
[ l I a -

h ea v en , c o nce iv d of e Nu t , he r i his b lov d e e .

Sp r ea d th h
e er s e lf t hy m o th er Nu t ov th er ee in h er na me of
o i d bl m i pp h io bo t t h fi di g of th m i
y
1
As c ns era e sa re en s n a u e n n es e r e a ns
xi t d t h o t of t h “i m t wh i h th
has

sc
e

di ov d will b f i
ere
s e ,

t
e ac c

Si be O
p t i l of t h fi di g f t h bo m mm lo th d p of t h
o
un

q
d
t I d y h
n t er es
w
.
e C rc u

r, yy ys an c es

ur re
un

u es
er

,
c

s en
e

ou
ere
t e

c
t
ar

e n r an c e—
n

r
c u ars

offi i h T h i d n t e
oo m ft t h m h d b
mid I
, a
e
r

m plo d t h
er
Py
n

l i g t h bbi h t of h l g
ra
n

v ld
e
O

d
.

en
e

a
n es ,

c ea r n

een e yS
u

e ru

e
-
c

s
,

er e s e era
an

ou
ar t s

t e
a y s an
ar e
e

h d dv
a a d om an c e di t t o w d t h o th t
s e o om
s an c e ar s e u -
ea s ern c r n er, s e
“bo fi t di ov d t h botto m of h bbi h ; d t h
re
“t o h
w
n es

m i i g bo
a n n

o o
er e
d p t
p N
t of
f th
n es a n
rs

o fi bo
sc

offi w i m m di t l di ov d ll
ar s O
er e

o l d b fo d i th
a

e c
t e
n er e
t
e
e ru

a e y s

sc
an

er e a
e

r
g et

of h m oo m f ll
er h. h
oo m I h fo h d h bbi h wh i h h d b p vio l
t er e
f t er
re a

x mi d wh v l pi of h o ffi
ar s

t e ru

yd
t e c
s
n

c
or

a
n es

een
c u

re
e

us y un

t u rn e
n

ou t
e

an
t e sa

d of h m m m t e
e r
lo h w fo d b t i
u y
c a re u
-
o th p t of h p m id
c t ere
r e-e a

un
ne ,

u
en s e era

n no er
y
ec es

ar t e
t
y
e c

ra
n

y p t of i t b di ov l th o gh v pl mo t
w

w
er e a n
“m i t l
as
nu e y
bo t h f t of bbi h
a u
ar s

x m i d to m k th offi
e a

t r ee
ne
d
o m pl t
ee
,

h t op of h
to

m
w
po ibl T h
a
e

d f om t h
ru
e
sc

s
e c
er e

on t
,

n as c
a

e
u

e e as

t
e er

e sa e
ss

; an
ac e

e .
as

r
ere
s

e
i
c rc u m t of h bo
s an c e d p t of h t e o ffi b i g ll fo d og t h
n es a n ar t e c n e n a un t e er,
“i t pp d if h o ffi h d b b o gh t h t po t d th
un
2
Th
a
p k d— H R v
ac
ea r e

e
e

y
as

a re e
Py m id
.

x h ibi t d i h Fi t Eg pt i R oo m C
a
t
en
e c
ol I I p 8 6
e
.
”
Vy
wi t h h
n
n

t e
a

s e, ra

rs
een

y V s,
r u

an
.
to t a

, .

,
.

as e
s

B
an er e

t e
,

f gm t of th o ffi
ra en s e c n .
 T h e C o ffi n of M yc er in u 17

M
O
D o
fi v e NW

:
A

y y D
y
F o

m s t er Of h ea v en , s he gran t et h t ha t th o u ma es t exi t s as a god to

t hy fo es ,
0 K i n g o f th e
a nd or t N h
S h
,
ou t
M en —kau R é , -
livi g n for e erv !

“
N ow it i s to be noted that the passage Thy m other
N ut spreadeth he rsel f o e r thee i n her na m e O f M ystery v ‘

O f H eaven she gra n t e t h that thou m ayest be without ,

e ne m ies occ u rs i n the texts wh ich are i nscribed upo n

,

1
the pyra m ids built by the ki ngs of the V I t h dynasty and ,

v
thus we ha e ev idence of t h e use of the sa m e vers ion of
on e rel igious text both i n the I V t h and i n t h e V I t h
2
dynasties .

E ven if we were to ad m it that the co ffi n is a forgery

O f the X X V I t h dynasty and that the i nscription upon i t ,

was taken fro m an edition of the text O f the Book of t h e

D ead still the value of the m onu m en t as an e v idence of
,

th e antiqu ity of the B ook of the D ead is scarcely i m pai red ,

VS
pp
1
xt of T ta d pi I i M p o R il d T
S ee t he te s e an P e ,
n as er ,
ecu e e r a va u x ,

t .
, 3 8 ( II 75. 2 0, d pp 65 7 3 ( II 6 .t 1 , an . 1 ,
1 . 0, e c .

o f b k 8 8 3 M M p o i l m i g ( G id d Vi i t d
B y
2
ar ac as 1 ,
. as er ,
n a en t n u e u s eu r c

B l g p 3 ) h f t th t t h
ou a , . ul aq M
10 m po t d o l po t io
e ac a e u s eu s s es s e n r ns

of woo d o ffi f h A i t E mpi d o m pl x m pl oti d

h t th
t a
d l db y ffi e co
en c

of M i p v d i t“h iti h M m h d b
t i E g p ologi t b
n
'
ns O

o io of t h XXV I th
t
yy e

c er n u s ,
n c en

r es er e
re an

n B no c

e r s
et e e a

u s eu ,
e, n

a
ce

een

y y y y
”
ec ar e c er a n t sts o e a r es t rat n e
th t h w o k f t h I V t h d od wi h t h
d t
n as h ,
r at er

i ipt io po it ; b t li k D i h h w of opi io th t t h o ffi
nsc r

y n u

t i l b lo g d t t h I V t h d t d dd
n
i an

d i ppo t of h i
u
e r

e
O

r. By y e

rc e
n as t

as
,
n ac c

n n
r an c e

a e c
t e

c er a n

vi w t h f t of th xi t
e s e
e n e

of po io of i m il o ffi of k m
ki g f h V I t h d t L t h o w v
ac

o th t m p t w
o

e e
e

s en c e

y XXXy
nas

rt
,

ns
an a

a s
uce

ar c
n su

n S r

e er —e
s

sa- f
a
,

e
a

m d (A g Z it fi f t B d
of t h v i t i h t xt
n

e .
O

e
t

o ffi of M i wi h th o of
sc
e

pp 9 4 ff ) t o p ov b t h g m t rz ,

of
.
nas .

,
a er ,

. .

y
e er ,

r
an

e y er at e

e a r ee en
as

th XXV I h d
v t
e
e

th
ar a n sh
th M
t
li t h h t i m of P mm i h
y y n

i t t i of th i l t p iod
n as t
t

B t it i
e

d m itt d
e

t ll at
on

ey t e c

c er n u s
n

ex
c er n u s

s s a e
t
er
se

,
or a
t ext s
a

e en s

a ll h
rs t
an

fi d t i f h E l E mpi
n ot

d th t i h XX V I h d t t h Eg p i
y s

n as
ea r

es
n

d th t t h O
er

t it t d x of h
opi d h
e

t
an

e d
t

ar
e

t
y y y n as
e

r e,
sa

an
y
et c

t an s
a
us

e
.

y
r es u s c

c
u

a e

e
s a

t
t e ts
e arts
e

t e
an
on

li t of h t p io d f
t er a u re po ibl d h i b i g t h t x
t a er as ar as ss e, a n , t s e n s o, e e t s on

th m o m t wh i h h v b d d of o m p i o f t h
on th
e

t
nu m d th
en s

o ffi f M i m y b t h m lv t f l t th i v
e c n O
t

ov o ld b p ov d to di ff m h f o m
y c

c er n u s

di p t d
If
a e
a
een

e
a

e
e

se
e s an

es a
ar

au In
c

e r
ar s n

ar i a n t s
or

.
at

th
IV h d
e t ex

t
h
t t xt y y on

nas
t e c
i t do f o m th o v of h V I h d t h
p h ilologi l g m t m i gh t h v o m w igh t ; b v h i wo l d t
ca ar
e

u
er c

en
as
u

es
e

a
r

e s
e

e
s e e en
e
er a s uc

t
ut
e
r

e en t
t
an u n

s
y y n as

u
s

,
u e

t
no
e

id of t h f t h t h ov it lf i g i li f h I V h
g
d t y y
et

n as
r e ac t a t e c er se s a en u n e r e c O t e t
18 Th e P a pyr u s of Ani

for those who added t h e i nscription would certainly have

chosen i t fro m a text of t h e ti m e o f M ycerinus .

I n the V t h dynasty we ha v e i n an increased nu m ber ,

o f m a st a oa us and other m onu m ents e v idence of the exten ,

s ion O f rel igio u s cere m on ials i ncluding the celebration o f ,

funeral rites ; but a text for m ing the B ook of the Dead as
a whole does not occ u r un til the reign of U n as ( 3 3 3 3 B C . .

the last k ing of the dynasty who according to the Turi n ,

Papyrus reigned thirty years This m onarch buil t on the .

plai n of S a kkara h a stone pyra m id about sixty two feet -

high each side m easuring about two hundred feet at the

,

base I n the ti m e of Perring an d V yse it was surrounded

.

by heaps of broken ston e an d rubbish the result of repeated ,

atte m pts to open i t an d w ith the casi ng ston es which

, ,

consisted of co m pact l i m eston e fro m the q u arries of Tura ’

.

I n February 1 8 8 1 M M a s pero began to clear the pyra m id

, , .
,

an d soon after he succeeded i n m aki ng an entrance i n to

the i nner m ost cha m bers the walls of which were covered ,

with h ieroglyph ic i nscriptions arranged i n perpen dicu lar ,

2
l ines and painted I n green The cond itio n of the i nter i or .

showed that at so m e ti m e o r other thieves had al ready

succeeded in m aki ng an entrance for the co v er of the black ,

basalt sarcophagus of U n as had been wrenched O ff and

m o v ed n ear the door of the sarcophagus cha m ber ; the
pa v ing stones had been p u lled u p i n the vain atte m pt to
fi nd buried treasure ; the m u m m y had been broken to
piece s and nothi ng re m ained o f i t except the right a r m a
, ,

t ibia an d so m e frag m ents of the skull and body The

, .

i nscriptions which covered certai n walls and corridors in

3
the to m b were afterwards publ ished by M M aspero The . .

appearance O f the text of U n as m arks an era i n the h istory

1 ‘

of the Book of the Dead and its translation m u st be , .

regarded as one of the greatest triu m phs of E gyptological

decipher m ent for the wan t of deter m i natives i n m any
,

places i n the text and the archai c s pell ing of m any of the
,

2
Vy p Py r a mi ds of G i zeb ,
s e,

o p
M as er , R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x ,
51
I I I, 1 78
p .

t
.

. . .

t pp t pp
B — 8
y yU ty
3
S ee R ecu eil de Tr a va u x , I I I, 1 7 7—2 24 ;. I V, 4 1 7 . . . .

g ib d p i of d
r u s c h des c r ra m ds t he V I th
y
4
I n 1 8 8 1 Dr . e t wo n as

i ib d i t ligio t xt i il t o t o fo
n sc r e w h re us e p i of
s s m ar h se u n d in t h e ra m d n as ,

d t ltd i p pp
an

lo i
a s B
ra n s a e c er t a n

pp
as s a ges ( A eg Zei ts c/zr i/t , B d X I X ,

rc h in Tr a n s S oc B i o . l A r c/i 1 8 8 1 ,
. . 1 1 1 ff .
1
.

.
.

.
. s ee
 T h e P yra m i d T ext s 19

words and passages presented d iffi culties which were not

easily overco m e 1
H ere for the fi rst ti m e it was shown .
, ,

that the Book of the D ead was no co m pilation of a c o m

p a r a t iv el
y late period i n the history of E gyptian civ il i z ation ,

but a work belonging to a very re m ote antiquity ; an d i t

followed naturally that texts which were then known an d ,

which were thought to be the m sel v es origi nal ancien t texts ,

proved to be only v ersions wh ich had passed through two

o r m ore successive revisions .

Conti nuing h is exca v ations at S a kkara h M M aspero , .

O pened the pyra m id of Tet a

2
king of E gypt about 3 30 0 B C ,
. .
,

whic h Vyse thought had n ever been en tered and of which

3
, ,

i n his day the m asonry on one s ide only could be seen

, .

H ere again i t was foun d that thieves had al ready been at

work an d that t h ey had s m ashed i n pieces walls floors
, , ,

a n d m any other parts of the cha m bers i n thei r franti c

search for treasure As i n the case of the pyra m i d of .

U n as certain cha m bers etc ,

of this to m b were foun d , .
,

c o v ered with inscription s i n h ieroglyphs but of a s m aller ,

s ize
1
A brief exa m i nation of the text S how ed it to be
.
‘

for m ed of a series of extracts fro m the Book of the D ead ,

so m e of which were iden tical w ith those i n the pyra m id of

U n as Thus was brought to l ight a B ook of the D ead
.

o f the ti m e of the fi rst king

5
of the V I t h dynasty .

The pyra m id of Pep i I k ing of E gypt abo u t 3 2 3 3 B C , . .

,

6
was n ext O pened I t is situated i n the central group at .

S a kkar a h and is co mm only known as the pyra m id O f

,

a — ar
lF u
1

h
Th e
oh
‘
h w
n , or
yP
p “m id wh i h bo m o g t h A b t h m M t b t
ra

v t d b M i tt i 8 5 8 d
ar a
’
s
c

B U en c
re

,
”
a
as exca
n

a e
e ra

y s

ar e
e na

e n
e

1
as a

,
an
a

b h fo d th m f a p i t d t i blo k of o h
c

D
ec a u s e

L p i
r .
e

o l d d it w h to m b of a M M p o x v t io h v
nc u e

b v ( A g Z i t n ifl B d X I X p
e s us O
un

as

s er
t
t th m t
es
e na

e
e
U
e O

. e
n

sc
n
s

r
s .
a n e

,
.

.
o n c er a n

as er

,
’
s

.
e ca a
c

se
s

ns
st

e
a
n e,

e, a s

a t er
e

ig ht
r

t h o gh
2
Th m m m
.

of t h ki g h d b t k
e

h ol wh i h t h t h i v
u

h d m d i it
t f th y oph g
i t w b ok b th m
e n a een a en ou O
'

e s a rc

y a us

i pi
ar
n

m
r u

d h o l
d h o ld
ec es , a n

an
m i
a

t of t h wood
s u
e

of i t fo d b M M p o o i t d f
o ffi
t e

p v d i th Gi h
er .
c

n yP ar s
re
e
a ns
e es

e
a

un

en
a

c
e

yn
n

ar e
as

r es er
as

er

e
r

c
en
ns s e

n e
O
za
e

an

M m
u s eu

Tl Py
Th
3

4
w
mid f G i l
.

ieol I I I p 3 9
y V ra

opi d i 8 8 d p bli h d b M M p o i R i l
e er e c
s o

e n
ze z,

1
V 2 , an
.
,

u
.

s
.

e y . as er n ecu e

pp 5 9
d T e

b d g
Th
t r a va u x ,

e
fo d l i g t h floo
y r
.

b ok m m m of th i ki g t og th wi th f g m t of i
5

y
,

en
.

u
1— .

s n , e er ra en s ts
an

S
w
6
a es ,

Py m i d f G i l
ee Vy as

ol I I I p 5
s e,
un

ra
n

s o
on

z e z,
e

V r .

.
,
. 1 .
20 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Sh ekh A b Mans u r Certai n cha m bers an d other parts-

.
1

of the to m b were found to be co v ered with h ieroglyph ic

texts which not only repeated in part those which had
,

been foun d i n the pyra m ids of U n as and Tet a but also ,

contained a considerable nu m ber of add itional sections O f

2
the B ook of the D ead I n the sa m e neighbo u rhood .

M Maspero cleared out the pyra m id of M er en R a the

.
- ~
,

fourth king o f the V I t h dynasty about 3 2 0 0 B C ; and the

3
, . .

pyra m id of Pepi I I the fifth king of the V I t h dynasty , ,

about 3 1 6 6 B 0 1
.

T h u s we ha v e be fore the close of the V l t h dynasty fi v e

C opies of a series of texts which for m ed the B ook o f the

D ead of that period and an extract fro m a well known ,

-

passage of that work on the wooden coffi n of M yceri nus ;

we have also seen fro m a nu m ber of m a s t a oa ns and stelae
that the funeral cere m on ies con nected w it h the Book of th e
D ead were perfor m ed certainly i n the I I n d an d w ith ,

al m ost equal certain ty i n the I st dynasty I t is easy to .

show that certain sections of the B ook of the D ead O f th is

period were C opied and used i n the following dynasties
down to a period about A D 2 00 . .

The fact that not only i n th e pyra m ids of U n as an d

l
1

of d w
b p ti ll p d b M i tt i M y 8 8 b t t h
I t h ad
t ff t d t il l i 8 8
een ar a y O en e y y ar e e n a , 1 0, u e

c eara n c e

Th f ll t xt i giv
pp 5 7 —5 8
2 b M p o i R il d T
e u
s an

PP
i 8 8 4 ; V I I pp 4 5 —7 6 i 8 8 6 ; d t I I I
e
as n o

t s
e

en
ec e
y un

as
ear

er n
n 1

P ecu e
1 .

e r a va u x ,

V V .
,

pp 8 7 —
.

.
1

i 8 8 6 ; d i t h Py mid t t vol
p d l i J
1 2 0,
,
ar s ,

ar s , 1

b M i tt wh
1

i g th t y an
t .

n Sy
,

e
.

e,
1

ra
,

y
ar s ,

en ex e, 2
1

s
an

.
.
,

y yy
3
It w as88 O en e ea r n a n u ar ,
1 0, ar e e, o s ee n a

op h g h mb w i ib d b do d h i h o t h t p mid
th e s ar c

v o t i d i ipt io
n e er c

T h h i ogl p h i t x w
h t if h
n a ne
a

y
us c

did th w
p bli h d b M p o i R il d T
a

nsc ro l to m b
er

n s , or
as ns cr

t a
e ,

t
y y a

e
an

y ne

e
s t

er e n o t r
e r a
a
ra

s
s

t I X pp
.

pp 3
e

77 9 ,
er

i 887 ; t
i 8 8 9 T h l b t v i th
. 1 —
c
pp 9 i 8 8 8 ; d t X I
P 1
e ts

iti h M m
P ar s ,
er e

1
u s e

. X ,
.
as

P B
1 —2
er

,
n

ar s , 1
ecu e e

an
r a va u x ,

.
,

N . 1—

o 4 4 9 3 m f o m t h i p mid
T hi p
.

mi d i
1 ,

littl l g th t h o h
ca

y
ar s ,

e r

f h p iod
1 .

s y ra
e a a

.
as er as e n e r s u s eu ,

d i
y yy
4
s ra s a e ar er an e t ers O t e er ,
an s

b ilt i t p of m ll to
u n s e i t i o mm o l ll d b t h A b H m
s s a s n es s c n ca e e ra s ar a

M t b t b it i b il di g ll ll d Al o t
a l—
a — ar
lF u S
as a

Py mid
p bli h d b M p o i R i l d T
‘
n
th
.
a ,

eeVyec a u s e

ol I I I p 5 T h h i ogl p h i t
yP
t X I I pp 5 3 9 5
s e, ra
s n ea r

s, V .
e u

, .
n

2 .
u su a

e er
ca
y e

c
a s ta

ext s a re
a

pp 36 —9 5
. 1
s

i 89
e

d t X I V pp ,
—
5 5
littl do b t th t t h i p m i d w b ok i to mo th o i C h i t i
e u a yyi
ar s ,
as

8 9 T
s
h
er
1
d
i 2,

ra
n

an
ecu e

as
.

r
e

en
r a va u x ,

n
1 2 2,

re
.

P ar s ,

an
,

nce
.

2 .

n
—

r s
,

ere
an

an
s

ti m d th t h l oll to of Eg p i t i q i ti bt i d h
es ,

b tif l l b t v i ib d wi h h
ea u

f o m ho wh h d
an

to h
a a
a t
o h d itl of pi I I
a s er

o ph g h m b A m o g h
e ear

a s es nsc r
c ec

e
rs

t t e c ar t
y t an

uc
an

es a n
u es

t es
O a ne

P e
t e

22 8 7 fi 1
t

mpl a re
se

obj i h iti h M m oll io N 4 4 9 5 5 9 7 5 8 d

ec t s n t e

n e exa
B o

r
a

s
a c c es s

es .
u s eu
t
c
e s a rc

ec t n,
a

os
us

.
c a

2, 22
er .

,
22
n

,
suc

an
 B oo k of the D di ea n t h e V I th D yn as t y 2 1

Tet a but also i n those of Pepi I an d his i mm ediate suc

,

c es s o rs we fi n d selected passages suggests that the B ook

, ,

of the D ead was even i n those early t i m es so extensi v e , ,

t h at even a king was fai n to m ake fro m i t a selection only

O f the passages which suited h is i nd iv idual taste or were

cons idered s u ffi cien t to secure his wel fare i n the next worl d .

I n the pyra m ids of T et a Pepi I M er en R é an d Pepi I I , ,

- -
,

are foun d m any texts wh ich are i dentical w ith those

e m ployed by thei r predecessors and an exa m i nation of the ,

i nscription of Pepi I I w ill show that abo u t three fourths of -

the whole m a y be found in the m onu m ents of his ancestors .

What principle guided each k i ng i n the select ion of h is

texts o r whether the additions i n each represen t rel igious
,

de v elop m ents i t is i m possible to say ; but a s the E gyptian

, ,

rel igion can not have re m ained stationary i n every particular ,

it is probab le that so m e texts reflec t the ch a nges i n the

1
O pi n ions of the priests upon m atters of doctri n e The .

Pyra m id Texts prove that each section of the rel igious

books of the E gyptians was origi nally a separate and in depen
dent co m position that it was written w ith a defi n ite O bj ect , ,

and that i t m ight be arranged i n any order i n a series of

si m ilar texts What preceded or what followed it was n ever
.

taken into consideration by the scribe although i t see m s at , ,

ti m es as if trad itions had assign ed a sequence to certain texts

, .

That e v ents of conte m porary history were so m eti m es

reflected i n the B ook of the D ead of the early dynasti es is
proved by the following We learn fro m the i nscription
®
.

22
fi §
2
upon the to m b o f H eru kh u f h at Asw an -
,

d v lop m t h b b rv d i t h pl f o m t i g t h
y y U
1
A e e en as een O se e n e an O rn a en n e
i t io of t h p m id of t h V h d V I t h d t i I th t f a
n er rs e ra s e t an nas es . n a O n s

bo t q t of t h oph g h m b i ov d wi h h i t t l
a

d o t io
ec

b o d li
r
u

a
o n e— u ar er

ra d t h h i ogl p h
B t w
n es
n s, an

dv .
l g w ll p d d lo d i
i th V I th d
u t
as
e

h p
e s ar c

er
t p t
e a
y an ce
s
a us c

ar e

n
ar

e
a

e,
er

e
s c

y yy
s

n as
er e

ac e

,
,

t
an

e s
t ar c

en c

ac e s e
ec u ra

se

a ar
n

f
or d o t iv ec p po b o m l th h i ogl p h
ra e ur m ll
s es th ec es es s , e er s a re s a er, e

li o wd d d t h i ip t io ov flo w i to t h h m b
c
R
n es

evu e
ar e

d R l gi
cr

o ido wh i h i h V th d t w l ft bl k S M p o i
rr rs ,

t XI p 4
es e i
c
e

on s ,
,

n
an

t
.
e
d

,
e

. 1 2
y y
n s cr

n as

.
ns

er e
er

e
n

an .
e c

ee
a

as
er s

er
an

T h f ll xt f o m th i t o m b d di io o t t
yS
2
e u te i
r s an a sc u s s n on ts c n en s a re
giv b h i p lli U t mo gi i i di t d ll VI di ti
en c a ar e ,
“ na o a e z a na ne a e a n as a con

i
an n
i i i t i /
n s cr z on

o CCL I S XXX X
g g fi /
4 Cl
i A tt i d ll R A
s or c ze e

di i
pp 5 3 Th i xt h b t t d b E m ( Z D M G B d L I
M o li t t
,
d mi d i Li
R om
er .8 93
i
eo r a
3
,
c ze,

as s e
n

S yc en z e
e a

ra
.

,
e c
cca

.
,
e

. X a

,
e

X V
e, 1
n ce ,

Py
1 89
.

ra
2 2—

pp 5 7 4 wh fi t poi t d t t h f
2,

m id T t
.
.

d b M p o i R
ex s , a n
s te

C i ti q
t h pi gm i t h
o
y
i 8 9 p 36 6
as

rs

as
een

er
n e
r ea e

n
ou

evu e
r

e r e er en c e

r
an

u e, P
.

ar s , 1
o
.

t e
.

2,
.

.
y
.

.
e
,
22 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

that this governor of E lephantine was ordered to bring for

1
K ing Pepi I I a pig m y
9 W fro m the i nterior of ,
63
A frica to dance before the king an d a m use h im ; and he
,

was pro m ised that i f he succeeded i n bringing the pig m y ,

al i v e and i n good health his M aj esty would con fer upon ,

h im a higher ra n k and dign i ty than t h at w h ich K i ng A s s a

conferred upon h is m in ister B a u r Tettet who perfor m ed - -
,

th is m uch appreciated s er v ice for his m aster 3

N ow A ss a .

was the eighth king of the V t h dyn asty and Pepi I I was the ,

fi fth king of the V I t h dynasty and between the reigns of ,

these k ings there was accordi ng to M Maspero an i nter v al , .

,

of at least sixty four but m ore probabl y eighty years -

, , .

B ut i n the text i n the pyra m id of Pepi I w h ich m ust ha v e ,

been drafted at so m e period between the reigns of these

kings we have the passage : H ail thou who [at thy w ill ]
,

m akest to pass over to the F iel d of A aru the soul that is

right and tr u e or dost m ake shipwreck of it R é m eri ,
.
-

( i e Pepi I
.

) .is right an d true i n respect of heaven an d

i n respect of earth Pepi is right an d true i n respect of the ,

island of the earth whither he swi m m eth an d where he

a r r iv et h H e who is between the thighs of N ut
.

Pepi ) is the pig m y w h o da n c et h [l ike ] t h e god and ,

who pleaseth the heart of the god [Osi ris] before his great
throne Th e two beings who are o v er the throne of
the great god proclai m Pepi to be soun d and healthy ,

[ therefore ] Pepi shall sail i n the boat to the beautiful field

of t h e great god and he shall do therei n that which is ,
”
don e by those to who m veneration is du e 1
H ere clearl y ‘

XXX ppVol
.

S ee E r man in A eg Zei ts c/zmfi , B d

y St l y V
1 I, 6 5 ff . . . .

pig 1 98 : p ol
m s ee
S
2
On t h e a n e , D a r kes t Af r i ca , 1, . . II,
.

pp f i f pp
g y pti
40
. c h we n u rt h , [m f f er z en von Af r i ka B d I I , K a p 1 6 ,
.
, . . . 1 3 1 ff .

t pig i p i
T ha t he ib t to
m es a d t r u e th e E a n s is c er a n r m t h e ti fo p as s a g e
“
M
'
m
A »

l gIll
U
C3 c o o
..
The
ll
,
:
Q

f
“

or
R
pig m i m t h im f o m h l d
hi p l
es c a
D ii m i h
s G a ac e
e o
”
‘
l l l

s ee
r t
c
e

en ,
an s Of
L4 ]
t heS o vi
es clzi c/zt e
u th

des
o e

ha n g t h n s
a lten A egyp ten s ,
r
i g of vi
li B
s er

er
ce
n,
;
1 88 7 p 7 , . .

i l l J lEl
1
3 J
l
E
”

o o U
C b

O 4 b “
1
% c i :

pp .
4
Fo r t h e h er g
1 6 2 , 1 6 3 ; an d
h
XI ,
i olp i yt
.
c

p .
te
1 1
xt
.
s ee M as p o er ,
R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x , t . VII,
 24 T h e P a pyr u s of An i

The Pyra m id Text s are v ersions of an cien t rel igious c o m

positions wh ich the priests of the College or S c h ool of A nu 1

s u cceeded i n establ ishing as the authori z ed v ersion of the

Book of the Dead in the fi rst s ix dynasties R a the local .
,

for m of the Sun god usurps the place occ u pied by the -
,

m ore ancien t for m Te m u but before the close of the V I t h ,

dynasty Osiris had taken his place i n the Pyra m id Texts

as t h e greatest of the gods The great in fluence o f the .

A nu sc h ool O f priests e v e n i n the t i m e of U n as is proved

by the following passage fro m the text i n his pyra m id :
O God thy An n is U n as ; O God t hy An u is U n as
, , .

O R a A n n is U n as thy A nu is U n as O R EI The
‘

.
, , ,

m other of U n as is A nu t h e father of U n as is A nu ; U n as ,

h i m sel f is A nu an d was born in A nu 2

E lsewhere we ,
.
”

are told that U n as co m eth to the great bull which co m eth

3
forth fro m Anu an d that he uttereth words of m agical ,

i m port i n An n 1
I n Anu the god Te m u produced the .
‘

gods Shu an d T efn u t a n d i n A nu dwelt t h e great and

5
,

lllg
l
opoli
An n of th XI I I th
th e o
m et r
m f Low Eg p t ; s e N e O er y
B
,

s ee g h D irut G scg p, 4 d R g
c é . G é g
‘
ep
o l i .A ,i . d l 1 e ou ,
o ra ze n c en n e e a

B Egyp t p 8 ;
a ss e -
n de, A m é li . L G 1e g p / i
a d l E gy p t a n ea u , a o ra ze e
’
e

l Ep o
’
C pt p 87 A i
[ N G i li 4 5
[fix G i xli en es s x

S
nu s en es s
o ue o e, . 2 .
5 ; , ,
0

ki l d B é h h m h 1 5 15 “ J m i h liii
TBS E ze 7 ; e t
xxx, I 1 13 1 n ;an 3 , e es er e a x 1

S XV
, ,

d th H liopoli of t h G k w it ( c é xm t bo II i
‘

an e e s e r ee r er s o r o ra , , ,

72 8 ; H o d2o I I 3 er
; D i d I 57 tu s, o oru s ,

-
, , , ,
—

li ffl ll lRlZ
RCi J TM ER M
z ‘
f U ‘

O
IS U
R IE W O O

RTEM J
0

M as p o U n as , 11 5 9 1 , 5 9 2 an d c P pi I , II 6 9 0 , 6 9 1
63

—
er ,
.
p . e . .

3
S ee I 5 96 . .

b
Rl lllR l il e - B <1 45 5 »

é Rfe R l A Q R I Z R
s O
r o o A n 1 4 »

“ l -QR
T
l R“i s H IR R
-

f e ! a fi

mss f ?l i lwi ;
‘

i m M m e F
 T he An n of H ea v e n 25

O l dest Co m pany of the Gods T e m u S hu T efn u t K eb N ut , , , , , ,

Osiris I sis S et and N eph t h ys

, ,
1
T h e abode of the blessed
,

i n heaven was called A nu an d I t was asserted t h at the souls

2

of the j u st were there u hit ed to thei r spiritual or glorified

,

bod ies and that they l ived the r e face to face with the deity
,

3
for all etern ity J u dging fro m the fact that the texts i n
.

the to m bs of H eru het ep and Nefer u and those inscri bed

-
,

upon the sarcophagus of Ta ka all of the X I t h and X I I t h ,

dynasties d iffer i n extent only an d not i n character or

,

contents fro m those of the royal pyra m ids O f S a kkar ah of

the V t h and V I t h dynasties i t has been declared that the ,

rel igion as well as t h e art of the fi rst T heban E m pi re is

nothing but a slavish copy of that of N orthern E gypt 4
.

l
y y
1
l e Py r a mid of P epi 1 1 , 665 . .

di g g p i ligio t xt it of v l
y
2
I n r ea n E t an r e us e s , t h e ex s en c e t h e h ea en
i
An n , wh c h was to the Eg pti t J
a n s wh a l
eru s a em wa sto J the ew s , a n d

t ill to t b d
v l
h ea en y
wh a M ec c a s t is
An u was t h e c apit al
p
t h e M u h a mm a dan s , m u s
of
to
t ologi l o ld
th e m h ca

pi it of
b e r em em er e
w r
t
( s ee Naville, y
Th e .

t l
ea r h y
Todt en lru clz ( E i n leit u n g) , p
A n u wa s
o of i i i
a n d s u rc e
t o i bodi
the r
io
a ll d v n e n s t r u c t
an d wa s ,

nik
.

bod of god
es , i e , t h e a

L e m an
the s r s
e

ot
. the .

. ologi l i i
her m t h
m en , wh a t h e
s an d t h e c en t r e

ca c t es , y yy
s u c h as A bt T u, et u , P e, T ep, K h em en u , et c , t h e h ea en v l An u h ad n o
g o g p i l po t o
n
e
3
ra h c a

po t
si i n

y
Th e i m r an c e
i di t d b p
ca e a ra er
of
foyX
.

An n a n d it s
r m th e
go
p id of pi r am y
ds i n t h e V I t h d n as t i s we
e t t
ll
I I ( for t h e ex s s ee P y y
p o p t p d
M as er , R ecu ei l, t
il
H a , ye G rea
flo i
,

t i
.

N 8 , an d
o
. XI I,
n e G ds w h o

g t t tt i p i
d ll
wh ic h r ea s
.

g t t t pi
w e in A n u , ra n ye h a
pi t i b ildi g b ilt
.

y e

P P
m ay
i
for et er n t , m ay
of g
y
u r s h , a n d ran

flo i v
o p of y
ye h a h s r am d O f

N god
u r s h , e en a s t h e n a m e O f t h e

i od do t flo i
e , h s u

if
n

T em u , t h e c h e
of
u

t h e r ea t C m a n
S hu , t h e
ll flo i
lo of
rd

t i
l i
t he
i
p id ll flo i
ne G s,

y
h u r sh I f t h e n am e
t h e c e es t a l s h r n e i n A n n flou r i s h et h , t h en
t i ok
pi e
.

P
s ha

ll d t o
s ha

r ti l i
u r s h , an d

en u re
h s h is
t i
a ll e ern t

d
ra m sha

of
I f t h e n am e y
.

of pi ll
u r s h , a n d h s h is w r

l d of
T efn u t , t h e a t he
P y
i p i
th s y
t e r es r a s h r n e I n An u en u r et h , t h e na m e
r am d s h a ll d en u r e t o a ll et ern t

of pi ll flo i
i
e s ha
of
I f t he nam e
t i p P
en du r e, a n d

id
K eb y .

y
flou ri s h et h
ll flo i
s ha

of
t h e n am e
i
u r s h , a n d t h s h is w ro k ll
pl of
e

s ha
s ha

to
en du r e
u r s h , an d h s

t i a ll e ern t

of
r am

I f the y.

P
n am e

pi ll flo i
e s ha
Nu t flou ri s h et h I n t h e t em e

ll d t o t i
t i p
u r s h , an d h s i
y y
ll flo i
ra m d s h a

of i i
S h en t h I n An u , t h e n a m e
i ok
u r s h , a n d t h s h is w r

i
s ha en u r e

th e nam e
t i o k ll
e P
a ll e ern t

of pi ll flo i s ha
I f t h e n am e
u r s h, an d t h s

it
.

i p id ll flo i ra m

of i i
sha

y y
O s r s flou ris h et h in Th s ,
u r s h , an d

h s h i s w r s h a en du r e t o a ll et ern
i
A m en t flou r is h et h , t h e n a m e
ll flo i t i o
of pi ll flo i
ll d to
e s ha
I f t h e n am e
i p id
u r s h, an d t h s

i
P
O s r s K h en t
ra m
.

y y
of
s ha

p i y
u r s h , a n d h s h is w r k s h a

S et flo u ri s h et h in
ram d s ha ll flo i i
N en ur e

of pi ll flo i
u b t t h e n a me

o k ll
u r s h , an d t h s h is w r s ha
e
a ll et ern t

s ha i P
I f the name
u r s h , an d t h s

t it
en du r e t o a ll e er n
”
.

y .

4
M p o L R ligi
as er , a Egyp t i
e on d p e l Py mid d l V t d
en n e
’
a r s es ra es e a
‘
e e
l VI dy
a
‘
ti n as
(cI .R d n R l gi
evu e t X I I
es pp 3 8
ei on s , .
,
. 1
26 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

The T h e b a n R ec en s io n which was used throug h out ,

E gypt by e v eryone w h o co u ld afford to be b u ried fro m ,

”

the X V I I I t h to the X X I s t dynasty was co m m only written ,

on papyri i n the hieroglyphic character the scribe in v a r i ,

ably begin n ing h is copying a t the l eft hand end of the -

papyrus roll and working towards the right T h e text is

, .

written i n black i nk i n perpendicular row s of hieroglyp h s ,

w h ic h are separated fro m each other by black l ines ; the

titles of t h e Chapters or sections an d certain parts of the ,

Chapters and the R ubrics belonging ther eto are written i n ,

red in k A steady de v elop m en t i n the illu m ination of the

.

V ignettes i s obser v able i n the papyri of this period At .

the beginn ing of the X V I I I t h dynasty the V ignettes are i n

black o u tl i ne as we see i n t h e Papyr u s of N eb s en i ; but
,

we see i n the Papyr u s of l u au a father in law of A m en ,

- -

het ep I I I that the V ignettes are painted in reds greens

, , ,

yellows white and other colo u rs and that the w h ole of the
, , ,

te x t an d V ignettes are enclosed i n a red and yellow border .

O riginally the text was the m ost i m portan t part of the

work and both i t an d its Vign ettes were the work of the
,

scribe ; grad u ally howe v er t h e brill ian tly ill u m inated V ig

, ,

n ettes were m ore an d m ore cared for a n d when the skill ,

of the scribe failed the artist was called i n I n m an y fin e

,
.

papyri of the Theban Period it is clear that the whol e plan

of the Vignettes of a pap yrus was set out by artists who ,

O ften failed to leave su fficien t space for t h e text s to which

they belonged in consequence m any l ine s of Chapters are

often o m itted an d the last few l ines of so m e text s are so
,

m u ch crowded as to be al m ost illegible The frequen t .

clerical errors also show that wh ile an artist of t h e greatest

,

skill m ight be e m ployed on th e V ignettes the exec u tion of ,

the text w a s left to a careless or even ignorant scribe , , .

Again the artist at ti m es arranged his V ignettes i n wrong

,

order and it is occasionally evident that neither artist nor

,

scribe understood the m atte r upon w h ich he was engaged .

Accord ing to M M aspero the scribes of the V I t h dynasty

1
.

d id not under s tan d t h e texts w h i ch they were drafti ng an d ,

i n the X I X t h dynasty the s cribe of a papyr u s now preser v ed

at B erl i n knew or cared so l ittl e about t h e text which he
was copying that he transcri bed the L X X V I I t h Chapter
1
R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x, t . I V, p . 62 .
 T h e T he b a n R ec en s io n 2
7
fro m t h e wrong end and apparen tly ne v er d iscovered h is
,

erro r although he con cluded the Chapter w ith i ts title

,
1
.

Originally each copy of the B ook of the D ead was written

to order but soon the c u sto m O btained of preparing copies
,

with blank spaces i n which t he na m e of the purchaser

m ight be i nserted ; and m any of the errors in spell ing an d
m ost of the o m issions of words are n o doubt due to the
“
haste wi th which s u ch stock copies were written by t h e
m e m bers of the priestly caste whose profession i t was to
,

copy the m .

The papyri upon whi ch C opies of the Theban R ecension

were written vary i n length fro m about 2 0 to 9 0 feet an d ,

i n width fro m 1 4 to 1 8 i nches ; i n the X V I I I t h dynas t y

the layers of the papyrus are o f a thi cker texture an d of a
darker colo u r than i n the succeeding dynasties The art .

of m aking great lengths of papyrus of l ight colour an d fi n e

texture attain ed its highest perfection i n the X I X t h dynasty .

A n exa m ination of Theban papyri shows that the work of

writing an d illu m inating a fin e copy of the B ook of the
D ead was frequently d istributed between two or m ore
groups of artists an d scribes an d that the section s were
,

afterwards j oi n ed up i nto a whole O ccasionally by e rror .

two groups of m en woul d transcribe the sa m e Chapter ;

hence I n the Pap y r u s of A n i Chapter XV I I I occurs twi ce
, .

The sect i ons or Chapters of th e T heban R ecension

are a series o f separate an d distinct co m positions which l ike , ,

the sections of the Pyra m id T exts had no fi xed order either,

on co ffi ns or i n papyri U nl ike these texts howe v er w ith

.
, ,

very few exceptions each co m position has a special ti tle

an d V ignette which i nd icate its purpose T he general .

selection of the Chapters for a papyrus see m s to ha v e been

left to the in divid u al fan cy of the purchaser or scribe but ,

certai n of the m were n o doubt absolutely necessary for the

preservation of the body of the deceased i n the to m b an d ,

for the wel fare o f his soul i n i ts new state of existen ce .

T raditional selections would probably be respected an d ,

recen t selections appro v ed by any do m inant school of rel i

io u s thought i n E gypt were without doubt accepted
g .

Whil e i n the period of the Pyra m i d Texts the various

sections were said or sung by priests probably assisted by ,

1
Naville, Todten ou c/z ( E i l i t g)
n e un , pp 4
. 1 —4 3 .
28 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

so m e m e m bers of the fa m ily of the deceased the welfare ,

O f h is so u l and body being proclai m ed for h im as an

establ ished fact i n the Theban R ecension the hy m ns and
,

prayers to the gods were put i nto the m outh O f the

deceased As none but the great and wealthy coul d afford
.

the cere m on ies which were perfor m ed i n the early dynasties ,

econo m y was probably the chief cause of this change which ,

had co m e abo u t at Thebes as early as the X I I t h dynasty .

L i ttle by l ittle the ritual portions of the Book of the Dead

d isappeared u ntil fi nally i n the Theban R ecension the only
, , ,

Chapters of this class which re m ain are the X X I I n d ,

X X I I I r d C V t h C X X X V I I t h and C L I s t
, ,
1
E very Chap , .

ter and prayer of this recension was to be said i n the next

world where the words properly uttered enabled the
, , ,

deceased to overco m e every foe an d to attain to the l i fe of

the perfected so u l which dwel t i n a spiritual body i n the
abode of the blessed .

The co mm on na m e for the Book O f the D ead i n the

Theban Period and probably also before this date i s
, ,

fi x [D p er t

“
one fi r m which

vario u sly translated : m an ifested i n the l ight

wo rds have
“
been
co m ing
,

”
,

forth fro m the day “ ”

co m i ng forth by day la m an i festa ”
, ,

tion a u j our “ ”
la m an ifestation a la l u m i ere “
Kapitel "
,
[ ,

von ] der E rscheinung im Lichte E rscheinen a m Tage ,

”
,
”

[Caput ] ge r edien di i n lu c em etc This na m e howe v er ,

”
.
, ,

had probably a m ean ing for the E gyptians which has not
yet been rendered i n a m odern language an d one i m por ,

tan t idea i n con nection with the whole work is expressed

2 “
by another title which calls i t the chapter of m aki ng
strong ( or perfect ) the K nu .

I n t h e Theban R ecension the m ai n pri nciples of the

E gyptian rel igion wh ich were held i n the t i m es when the
Pyra m id Texts were written are m aintained and the views ,

concern ing the eternal existence O f the so u l re m ain unaltered .

M any passages i n the work howe v er show that m o dific a , ,

tions and develop m ents i n details have taken place and ,

the
1
S ee Navi lle, Todten ou c/z ( E n e t u n ) ,
D ea d an d R ue it l F
u n é r a ir e
20

wh c h h a e een
O n t he i li g p
en i
es
v b
h es e t e s ,
. .

giv
t i tl
to t
“ B ookxtof
s ee pi
L e s u s , Todten ou c/z, 3 p
D e R ou gé , R evu e A r c/zeol ogi ou e, N S ,
. I, . . t .

1 8 6 0 , p p 6 9 —1 0 0
. .

2
S ee Naville, E i l it
n e g p
un , . 24 .
 C h a pt er s of the The b a n R ecen s io n

m uch that is not m et with i n the early dynasties appears ,

so far as we kno w for the first ti m e The Vignettes too ,

.
, ,

are additions to the work ; but altho u gh they depict scenes

i n the l ife beyon d the rave they do not see m to for m g ,

a con nected ser i es an d i t i s doubtful i f they are arranged ,

on any defin ite plan A general idea of the con ten ts o f .

th is v ersion m a y be gathered fro m the followi ng l ist of

1
Chapters
“
C h a pt er I H ere begi n the Chapters of Co m ing
.

Forth by Day and of the songs of praise and glorify i ng

,
2
,

3
and of co m ing forth fro m and going i nto the U nderworld , , .

W ith R u b r ic .

Vi gn et t e :The fu neral procession fro m the house of

the dead to the to m b .

C h a p t er l b The Chapter of m aki ng the S ahu o r

a ,

g
i
Spi ri t body to go i nto th e Tuat R on the ,

day of the burial 4

With R u ri c
a
. b .

Vi gn et t e ; A nubis standing by the bier upo n whi ch

the m u m m y O f the deceased is laid .

C h a p t e r I I [The Chapter of] co m i ng forth by day .

and of l i v ing after death .

V i gn et t e A m a n stand ing holding a staff

C h a pt er I I I Another Chapter like unto it
T . l ike
,

Chapter I I ) 5
.

This Chapter has no Vignette .

1 Th

L ep i
v io C h pt of t h e ook of th e D d we e m b d b
e

di t io
ar

of th e T i
us

p Th i s p p
a BP y
er s ea r nu er e

y y
h ow v
p
i
s us

i
e er ,
hi n

s a

i
s

p o d t f t h e t ol em r
e i 84
iod d o t i
uc

C ha t er s wh c h ar e wan t n in t h e T h e an R ec en s n
mb
n

i g
P
of
b
P io
F o r c n en en c e,
ur n

ai c
a

er
ru s

,
n

an
1

.
2 .

n a ns a nu

ov i
a ru s ,

er

pi b i d pt i b lo g t o
S i i d by
L e s u s n u m er s ar e r et a n e , a n d t h e C h a er s wh c h
’
e n th e
ai t e R ec en s
''

n ar e n d c a t e io
“
an as t er s ik .

'

o
2 A n t h er t
e r ea s — i tl
T h e C h a t er n in dt he p of goi g
ne c h e s to divi if
ii
O f O s r s o n t h e da
y th e oi g
u r a , an d o f g n of
in a er c m n r h
”
b il ft o i g fo t .

i pt
T h s C h a er h ad to i of b i l
b e r ec t ed o n t h e day the u r a

N
.

3
Kh t t t h o mm o t m f t h o m b
er -
e er, e c n es na e or e t .

y ? m t
“ h io wi h th —
w
e oth A op of
s a a, t e un n t e ear . c y
t h i C h pt w i t h h pi t of t h i w o m m tio d i t h t x i
giv
s

ienh n
a

t
er ,

p of I a ( d e P y
d di io
ill )
a I poi
ru s
t e
d t i
V l I p lxx ix L o do
m y C/ p t
c u r es

u u e . N e n ne

av e ,
as
r s

n te
en

ou
ne

n
n e

za
e t,

er s
s

of C mi g P t/ oy D y
ti l ;
t e
I 5
o

n s
n or

o m p p i C h pt I I d I I I
N ill T dt o l B d I B 1 6
s ee av
e
z

e,
y
it d d h v o l
r

o
9 9
a

en
,

a
2n

er s

u c z,
e t

.
n,

an

, .
o .

.
,

a re u n
. x
e
,

an
n n,

a
1

e
0

n y.

on e
3 0 T h e P a pyr u s Of Ani

C h a p t er
I V Another Chapter
. Of passi ng along the
way over the earth .

This Chapter has no Vignette .

C h a p t er V The Chapter O f not allowi ng the deceased

.

to do work i n t h e U nderworld .

Vi gn et t e T h e deceased kneel ing on one knee .

C h a p t er V I The Chapter of m aking

. / ot i u
us ia figures
do work for a m a n i n the U nder w orld .

Vi gn ett e :An u s na ot i figure

lj '

C h a p t er V I I The Chapter of passing ove r the

_
.

accursed back of A a pep the ev il one , .

Vi gn et t e :The deceased spearing a serpent .

C h a p t er VI I I The Chapter of passing through

.

A m en t et and of co m ing forth by day

, .

V i gn ett e The deceased standing by

C h a p t er I X The Chapter of Co m ing Forth by Day
.

after pa s sing th ro u gh the to m b .

V i gn ett e The deceased adori ng a ra m T a t .

C h a p t er X ( See
. Chapter X L V I I I ) .

C h a p t er X I The Chapter of a m a n co m ing forth

.

aga inst his ene m ies i n the U n derworld .

This Chapter has no Vignette eit h er i n the T heban or ,

Sa i te R ecension .

C h a p t e r X I I Another Chapter of going i nto and of

.
,

co m ing forth fro m the T u at , .

Th is Chapter has no Vignette either i n the Theban or ,

Sa i te R ecension .

C h a p t er X I I I The Chapter of go ing i nto and of

. ,

co m ing forth fro m Am en t et Wi th R u b ri c i n the Sa i te

, .
,

R ecension .

Th is Chapter has n o Vignette either i n the Theban or ,

Sa i te R ecension .

C h a p t er X I V The Chapter of driving away sha m e

.

fro m the h eart of the god i n respect of the deceased .

This Chapte r has no Vignette either i n the Theban or ,

S a i te R ecension .
3 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er X X I The Chapter of gi v ing a m outh to

.

a m a n i n t h e U nderworld .

A priest perfor m ing the cere m ony of open ing the m outh
on the deceased .

C h a pt er X X I I T h e Chapter of gi v ing a m o u th to
.

the decea s ed i n the U n derworld .

“
V i gn et t e :T he guardian of the scales O pen ing the
m outh of the deceased .

C h a pt er X X I I I The Chapter of
.
“open ing the
m outh of the deceased i n the U nderworld .

Vi gn ett e :The S am priest open ing the m o u th of

“
the deceased w ith the U r lzeé a u i nstru m ent -
.

C h a pt er X X I V The Chapter of bringing words of

.

m agical power to the deceased i n the U nderworld .

This Chapter h a s no Vignette i n the Theban R ecension .

C h a p t er X X V The Chapter of causing a m a n to

.

re m e m ber his na m e in the U n derworld .

f}
V ign et t e A priest holdi ng up l before the deceased .

C h a p t er X X V I The Chapter of gi v i ng a heart to

.

the deceased in the U n derworld .

V i gn et t e :A nubis giv ing the deceased a n ecklace to

which is attached a pectoral with a heart in it .

C h a p t er X X V I I The Chapte r of not allowing the

.

heart of a m a n to be taken fro m h im in the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e T he deceased adoring h is heart g; i n the

presence of the Four S ons of H orus
g .
e

C h a p t er X X V I I I [The Chapter
. of ] n ot allowing
the heart of a m a n to be taken fro m h im i n the U nderworld .

V i gn ett e :The deceased with h is le ft han d touching

the heart upon his breast kneel ing before a de m on holding
,

a kn ife
.

C h a p t er X X I X a The Chapter of not letti ng the

.

heart of a m a n be taken away fro m h im .

V i gn ett e The deceased holding a staff .

C h a pt er X X I X b The Chapter of not letting the

.

heart of a m a n be taken away d ead .

V i gn ett e Wanting .
 C h a pt er s of t he T h e b a n R ecen s io n 33

C h a p t er X X I X c . A nother Chapter of a heart of

carnel ian .

Vi gn et t e :T he deceased sitting on a chai r before his

heart which rests on a stand 0 o r a heart only
”
.
, , ,

C h a p t er X X X The Chapter of not letti ng the

.

heart of a m a n be carried off fro m h im With R u ri c . b .

[Sa i te R ecens io n ]

V i gn ett e The deceased adoring a beetle .

C h a p t er X X X a T he Chapter of not allowing the

.

heart of a m a n to be carried away fro m h im in the

U n derworld .

Vi gn et t e :A heart
8 , .

C h a p t er X x X b The Chapter of not allowing the

.

heart of a m a n to be carried away fro m h im i n the

U n derworld With R u ri c . b .

Vi gn et t e :The deceased being weighed against his

heart i n the bala n ce i n the presen ce of Osi ris “ the great ,

god t h e pri n ce of etern ity

, .

C h a pt er X X X I T he Chapter of re pulsi ng the

.

crocodil e whi c h co m eth to carry the m agical words

i
2L] k é “ fro m a m a n i n the U n derworl d .

V i gn et t e The deceased slayi ng three or four

crocodiles .

C h a p t er X X X I I *
The Chapter of repulsing the
.

crocodile that co m eth to carry the m agical words fro m

a m a n i n the U n derworld .

V i gn ett e T h e deceased speari ng fou r crocodiles .

C h a p t er X X X I I I The Chapter of repuls ing serpents

.

of all ki nds .

Vi gn et t e The deceased spearing a snake .

C h a p t er X X X I V T he Chapter of a m a n n ot being
.

1
b itten by a serpen t i n the hall of t h e to m b .

T his Chapte r has no v ignette either i n the T heban or

Sa l te R ecension .

C h a p t er X X X V The Chapter of not being eaten

.

by wor m s i n the U nderworld .

V i gn ett e Three serpents .

flK k
0
dmzka t
'

1
.

V OL . I .
34 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er X X X V I . T he Chapter of repulsi ng i p s / mi z

(T m N GQ )
V i gn ett e :T h e deceased spearing a beetle or a pig , ,

or abo u t to slay Aps é a i .

C h a p t er X X X V I I The Chapter of repuls ing the

.

Bl ah
G D "

two M erti goddesses-

a
V i gn ett e :Two urae i w h 1c h represent the two eyes ,

of R a .

C h a p t er X X X V I I I a The Chapter of livi ng upon .

the air which is i n t h e U n derworld .

Vi gn et t e The deceased holding a sail

of ai r .
$ 1 e m ble m atic ,

C h a p t er X X X V I I I b The Chapter of l iv ing upon .

ai r and of repulsi ng the two M er t z

'

V i gn et t e The deceased attacking three serpen ts ,

a kn ife i n h is right hand and a sail i n his left .

C h a p t er X X X I X The Chapter of repulsing the

.

serpent i n the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e :T he deceased speari ng a serpen t .

C h a p t er X L T he Chapter of repulsing the E ater o f

.

the Ass .

V i gn et t e :T he deceased spearing a serpent which is

biting the neck of an ass .

C h a p t er X L I The Chapter of avoidi ng the

.

slaughterings which are perfor m ed i n the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e :T he deceased spearing a serpent .

C h a p t er X L I I [ The Chapter] of avoiding slaughte r

.

i n Hen s u ( H era kleo polis ) .

V i gn et t e :A m a n adj uring a serpent .

C h a pt er X L I I I The Chapter of not allowing the

.

head of a m a n to be cut off fro m h im i n the U n derworld .

V i gn et t e The deceased addressing three gods .

C h a p t er X L I V The Chapter of not dying a second

.

ti m e
.

V i gn et t e The deceased seated on a chair of state .

C h a p t er X LV The Chapter of not seeing corruption

b
. .

Wi th R u ri c .

Vi gn ett e Anubis holding the m u m m y of the deceased .

 C h a pt er s of the The b a n R ec en s io n 35

C h a p t er X L V I The Chapter of not decayi ng and

. ,

of l iving i n the U nderworld .

Vi gn et t e The H eart soul and Spirit soul at the door - -

of the to m b .

C h a p t er X L V I I The C hapter of not l etti ng be.

.

carried away the throne fro m a m a n i n the U nder w orld .

This Chapter has no Vignette i n the Theban R ecensio n .

C h a p t er X L V I I I [The Chapter of a m a n co m ing

.

forth against] h is en e m i es .

V i gn et t e The deceased speari ng a serpen t .

C h a p t er X L I X *
The Chapter of a m a n co m ing
.

forth agai nst h is ene m ies i n the U nderworld .

Vi gn et t e :Wanti ng .

C h a p t er L The Chapter of not going i n to the

.

cham ber of the divi ne block T wo versions of th is Chapter .

are known but only one has a Vignette

, .

V i gn et t e :A m a n stand ing with h is back to the block .

C h a p t er L I The Chapter of n ot bei ng tripped up i n

.

the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e :A m a n standing upright .

C h a p t er L I I The Chapter of not eating filth i n the

.

U nderworld .

Vi gn ett e A m a n seated before a table o f food [Sa i te

R ecension] .

C h a p t e r L I I I T he Chapter of not eating filth and

.

of not dri n king polluted water i n the U n derworl d .

V i gn ett e :Wanting .

C h a p t er L I V T he Chapter of givi ng ai r t o the

.

deceased i n the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e The deceased holding a sail .

C h a p t er L V Another Chapter of givi ng air

. .

V i gn et t e The deceased holding a sail i n each hand .

C h a p t er LV I The Chapter of s n u ffi n g the ai r in the

.

earth.

V i gn et t e The deceased holding a sail .

C h a p t er L V I I The Chapter of s n u ffi n g the air and

'

o f gai n ing the m astery over the waters i n the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e :The deceased holdi ng a sail and standi ng ,

in a run n ing strea m .

D 2
36 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er L V I I I The C hapter of s n u ffi n g the air an d

.

of ga i n ing power over the water which is i n the U nder

world .

Vi gn et t e :The deceased drinking water i n a runn i ng

stream .

C h a p t er L I X The Chapter of s n u ffi n g the air an d

.

of ga i n i ng power over the water which is i n the U nder

wor ld .

Vi gn et t e :The deceased receiving m eat and dri nk

fro m N ut or H athor .

3“
C h a p t er L X Another Chapter .

Vi gn et t e The deceased holding a lotu s .

C h a p t er L X I . The Chapter of not letti ng the H eart

soul of a m a n be taken fro m h im .

V i gn et t e The deceased clasping his H eart soul -

.

C h a p t er L X I I The Chapter of drin king water

. .

Vi gn ett e :The deceased scooping up water wi th h is

han ds .

C h a p t er L X I I I a The Chapter of drin king water

.
,

and of not being burnt with fi re .

Vi gn et t e The deceased catchi ng water i n a bowl .

C h a p t er L X I I I b The Chapter of not bei ng bo iled

.

( or scal ded ) i n the water .

V i gn et t e The deceased seated before a table of food

. .

C h a pt er L X I V The Chapter of co m ing forth by

.

day 1 n the U n derworld Two vers i ons each w it h a R u b r i c

. .

Vi gn et t e The deceased ador i ng the disk which

. ,

stands on the top of a tree .

C h a p t er L X V .
[The Chapter of co m ing forth by
day and of gain ing the m astery over foes I n two versions
d
. .
,

V i gn et t e The eceased adori ng R a .

C h a pt er L X V I [The Chapter of co m ing forth by

.

V i gn et t e :Wanting .

C h a p t er L X V I I The Chapter of open i ng the doors

.

of the Tu a t and of Co m ing Forth by Day .

V i gn et t e :Wanting .
 C h a pt ers of t he T he b a n R ecen s io n 37

C h a p t er
L X V I I I The Chapter of Co m ing Forth
b
.

by day Wi th R u ri c
. .

V i gn et t e The deceased kneel i ng by the s ide of a tree

before H athor
C h a p t er L X I X Anothe r . Chapter .

V i gn et t e :Wanti ng .

C h a p t er L X X . Another Chapte r .

V i gn ett e Wanting .

C h a p t er L X X I T he Chapter of Co m ing Forth by

d ay With R u ri c
. b .
.

V i gn ett e :Thedeceased with both han ds raised i n

adoration kneel ing before the go dess M eh urt d -
.

C h a p t er L X X I I Chapter o f Co m ing Forth by T he

b
.

D ay an d of passing through the A m eé et W ith R u ri c

d d
. .

Vi gn et t e The decease stan ing before h is to m b .

C h a p t er L X X I I I . S ee Chapter I X .

C h a p t er L X X I VT he Chapter of li fti ng up the legs

.

a n d co m ing forth upon earth .

V i gn ett e :The deceased k neel i ng before the H en u

B oat of S eker .

C h a p t er L X X V Chapter of travelli ng to A nu
. Th e
( O n ) and
, of receivi ng a throne there .

V i gn ett e :The deceased standi ng before the obj ect

Ana
lil '

C h a p t er L X X V I T he Chapter of [a m a n } cha nging

.

into whatsoever for m he pleaseth .

Th is Chapter has n o Vig n ette .

C h a p t er L X X V I I . The Chapter of changing i nto

a golden hawk .

V i gn et t e :A golden hawk ,

C h a p t er L X X V I I I . The Chapter of changing i nto

a div i ne hawk .

V i gn et t e :A hawk ,
fi
3 8 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er L X X I X The Chapter of being a m ong the

.

Co m pany of the Gods and of beco m ing a pr i nce a m ong the

,

d ivine powers .

V i gn et t e The deceased adoring three gods who

.
,

represent the Fo u r Sons of H orus .

C h a p t er L X X X
The Chapter of changing into a
.

god an d of sen ding forth l ight i nto darkness

, .

Vi gn et t e A god with the solar disk on his head

.
, .

C h a p t er L X X X I a . The Chapter of cha n m

g g 1 nto
a l ily .

V i gn et t e :A l ily .

C h a p t er L X X X I b . T he Chapter of changing in to
a l ily .

V i gn ett e :The head of the deceased rising out of a

l ily
C h a pt er L X X X I I The Chapter of changing in to
, g ,
.

Ptah of eatin cakes of dri n king ale of unloosing the body , ,

and of l i v ing i n An n ( O n ) .

Vi gn et t e The god Ptah in a shrine

. .

C h a p t er L X X X I I I The Chapter of changing in to .

a B enu bird
b
.

V i gn et t e :A B enu bird With R u r i c .

C h a p t er L X X X I V . The Chapter of changing i nto

a heron .

Vi gn et t e A heron . .

C h a p t er L X X X V
The Chapter of changi ng i n to
.

the Soul of not going i nto the place of pun ish m ent who
,
.

soever knoweth i t w ill never perish .

V i gn et t e The Soul god i n the for m of a R a m -

.

C h a p t er L X X X V I The Chapter of changing into a

swallow W ith R u ri c
. b .
.

Vi gn ett e A swallo w .

C h a p t er L X X X V I I . The Chapter of changi ng in to

the serpen t S a ta -
.

V i gn et t e A serpen t .
40 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t e r X C I X The Chapte r of bri nging a boat i n .

the U nderworld .

V i gn ett e :A boat with the sail ho isted .

C h a pt er C The Chapter of m aking perfect the S pi rit

.

soul an d of m aking it to en ter i nto the boat of R a together

,

with his d ivin e followers W ith R u ri c . b .

,

Vign ett e :A boat contai n ing a Co m pany of Gods .

C h a p t er C I [The Chapter of protect ing the boat of

b
.

Ra ] W ith R u ri c .

V i gn et t e :The deceased in the boat with R a ( Sa 1 te .

R ecension ) .

C h a p t er C I I The Chapter of going i nto the boat

.

of R a .

Vi gn ett e :The deceased i n the boat with Ra .

C h a pt er C I I I The Chapter of being i n the following

.

of H athor .

V i gn ett e :The deceased standing beh in d H athor .

C h a p t er C I V The Chapter of s itt ing a m ong the

.

great gods .

V i gn ett e :The deceased seated between two gods .

C h a pt er CV The Chapter of providing offerings for

.

the few
V i gn et t e The deceased burn ing i ncense before h is é a .

C h a p t er CV I T he Chapter of giv ing sepulchral .

m eals each day to a m a n in H et ka Pta h ( M e m phis ) - -

.

V i gn et t e :An altar w ith m eat and dri n k offeri ngs .

C h a p t er C V I I *
The Chapte r of going in to and of .
,

co m ing forth fro m the gate of the gods of the west a m ong
,

the followers o f the god and of knowing the souls of ,

Am en t et .

V i gn ett e :Three deities :R a Sebek and H athor , , .

C h a p t er C V I I I T he Chapter of knowi ng the souls .

of the West .

V ign ett e :Three deities :Te m u S ebek and H athor , , .

C h a pt er C I X The Chapter of knowing the souls of

.

the E ast .

Vi gn ett e :The deceased m aking adoration before

R a H eru khuti
- -
.
 C h a pt er s of the T he b a n R ec en s io n 4 1

C h a p t er C X The begin n i ng of the Chapters of the

.

F ield of Offeri ngs an d of the Chapters o f Co m ing Forth

,

by Day an d of go ing into an d of co m ing forth fro m the

, , ,

U nderworld an d of attai n i ng u nto the F i el d of R eeds an d

, ,

o f being i n the F iel d of Offerings .

V i gn et t e :The F iel d of O fferings .

C h a p t er C X I S ee Chapter CVI I I . .

C h a pt er C X I I Another Chapter of knowi ng the

.

souls of F e .

V i gn et t e :H orus K est a an d Hapi , , .

C h a p t er C X I I I T he Chapter of know ing the souls

.

of Nekh en .

V i gn et t e :H orus T u a m u t ef an d e h s enu f , , .

C h a p t er C X I V T he Chapter of knowing the souls

.

of K h em en u ( H er m opol is ) .

V i gn et t e Three ibis headed gods

. .

C h a p t er C X V The Chapter of co m i ng forth to

d
.

heaven of passing through the hall of the to m b an of

, ,

knowi ng the souls of A nu .

V ign et t e : The deceased adoring R a Shu an d , ,

S ekh m et .

C h a pt er C X V I [The Chapter of] knowi n g the souls

b .

of Ar m Wi th R u r i c
. .

V i gn ett e T he deceased adori ng T hoth Sau an d T em , ,

.

C h a p t er C X V I I The Chapter of taki ng a way i n

.

R a stau
-
.

Vi gn et t e :T he deceased holding a staff i n h is hand , ,

a scen ding the western hills .

C h a p t er C X V I I I The Chapter of co m ing forth .

fro m Ra stau
d
-
.

V ign et t e T he deceased holding a staff i n h is left han

. .

C h a p t er C X I X The Chapter of k now i ng the na m e

.

of Osi ris and of goi ng i nto an d of co m i ng forth fro m

, , ,

R a stau .

V i gn et t e :T he deceased adori ng Os i ris who stands ,

i n a shrine .

C h a p t er C X X S ee Chapter X I I . .

C h a p t er C X X I See Chapter X I I I . .
4 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er C X X I I T h e Chapter of the deceased going

.

i n after co m ing forth fro m the U nderworld .

V i gn et t e The deceased bowi ng before his to m b ,

which is on a hill ( Sa i te R ecension )

'

. .

C h a p t er C X X I I I The Chapter of going i nto the

.

great house to m b ) .

V i gn et t e The deceased standing before a to m b .

C h a p t er C X X I V The Chapter of goi ng i n to the

.

princes of Osiris .

V i gn et t e : The deceased adoring K est a H api , ,

Tu a m u t ef an d e h s en u f
, .

C h a p t er C X X V The words whic h are to be u ttered

.

by the deceased when he co m eth to t h e hall of M a ati ,

which separateth h im fro m his sins and which m aket h h im
to see God the Lord of m ank ind With R u r ic
, .
,

b .

A The I ntrod u ction

. .

B T he N egative Con fession

. .

C Address of the deceased after the J udg m ent

. .

Vi gn et t e :The hall of M a ati i n which the heart o f ,

the deceased is being weighed in a balance in the presence

of the great gods .

C h a p t er C X X V I [
Without titl
. e ]
Vi gn et t e A lake of fi re at each corn er of which s its ,

an ape .

C h a p t e r C X X V I I a The book of the praise of the

.

é k fi
t
gods of the Ci rcles .

V i gn et t e Wanti ng .

C h a p t er C X X V I I b The Chapter of the words to

.

be spoken on going to th e Chiefs of Osiris and of t h e praise ,

of the gods who are l eaders i n the f u a z ‘

.

V i gn e t t e E ight pairs of gods with a table of offerings ,

before each pai r .

C h a p t er The Chapter of prai sing Osi ris .

V i gn et t e The deceased adoring three deities .

C h a p t er C X X I X See Chapter C . .

C h a p t er C X X X The Chapter of m aking perfect

.

the Spi rit s o u l With R u b r i c

-
. .

V i g n et t e :The deceased standing between the two

boats of the Sun god the M a atet and the S ekt et
-
,
.
 C h a pt er s of the The b a n R ec en s io n 43

C h a p t er The Chapter of having existence

n igh un to R a .

V i gn et t e :Wan ti ng .

C h a p t er C X X X I I The Chapter of m aki ng a m a n .

to go about to see his house upon the earth .

V i gn et t e A m a n stan ding before a house or to m b .

C h a p t er C X X X I I I The Chapte r of m ak ing perfect .

the Spirit soul i n the U nder w orl d i n the presence of the

G b
-

G reat Co m pany of the ods With R u ri c . .

V i gn et t e T he deceased adori ng R a who is seated i n

a boat .

C h a p t er C X X X I V T he Chapter of enteri ng i nto .

the boat of R a and of bei n g a m ong those who are i n his

train With R u ri c
.
,

b .

Vi gn et t e :The deceased adoring Shu T efn u t K eb , , ,

N ut Osi ris I sis H orus H athor

, , , , .

“
C h a p t er C X X X V fi A nother Chapter wh ich is to ,

be recited at the waxi ng of the m oon [each] m onth .

This Chapter has no Vign ette .

C h a pt er C X X X V I a The Chapter of sail ing i n the

b
.

boat of R a I n two versions the secon d w ith R u r i c

d
. .

V i gn et t e :T he deceased standi ng w ith han ds r a ise

i n adoration .

C h a p t er C X X X V I b The Chapter of sail ing i n the .

great boat of R a to pass over the fiery path of the sun

, .

V i gn et t e The head of R a i n a boat .

C h a p t er C X X X V I I a T he Chapter of the fou r .

bla z ing torches whi ch are to be l ighted for the K ku With

br
.

Ru ic s .

V i gn et t e :F o u r m en each hol di ng a l ighted torch ,

.

C h a p t er C X X X V I I b T he Chapte r of the deceased .

kin dl i ng th e fi re .

V i gn et t e The goddess Taurt ki ndl i ng a fla m e .

C h a p t er C X X X V I I I The Chapter of m aking the .

deceased to enter i nto A bydos .

V i gn et t e :The deceased adori ng the standard i .

C h a p t er CX X X I X . S ee Chapter CXX I I I .
44 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er C X L *
The Book whi ch is to be recited i n
.

the secon d m onth of the season Pert when the a te/ mt is

full i n the secon d m onth of Pert With R u ri c .
,

b .

V i gn et t e :The deceased adoring A npu the u t cfia t , ,

and R a ( Sa 1 te R ecension )
. .

C h a p t er s C X L I — C X L I I The Book which is to be .

recited by a m a n for his father a n d fo r h is son at the

festivals of Am en t et I t will m ake h im perfect before R a
.

and before the gods an d he shall dwell w ith the m I t shall

, .

be recited on the n inth day of the festival .

C h a pt er C X L I I I This is the Vignette of Chapter

.

CX L I I .

Vi gn et t e T he deceased m aking offerings before a go d .

C h a p t er C X LI V T he Chapter of entering i n With

br
. .

Ru ic .

V i gn et t e :S even pylons each guarded by a door ,

keeper a watch m an an d a h eral d

, , .

C h a p t er C X LV a [Without title ] . .

This Chapter has no V ignette .

C h a p t er C X LV b [The Chapter] of co m ing forth to

.

t h e hidden pylons .

This Chapter has n o Vign ette The Sa 1 te R ecension .

contains m any Vignettes ,

C h a p t er C X L V I [T he Chapter of] know ing the

.

pylons in the H ouse of Osi ris i n the F ield of R eeds

d
.

Vi gn ett e A series of pylons guarded each by a go .

C h a p t er C X LV I I
[A Chapter ] to be recited by the
.

deceased when he co m eth to the fi rst hall of Am en t et

b
.

With R u ri c .

Vi gn et t e A series of doors each g u arded by a god ,

.

C h a p t er C X LV I I I [The Chapter] of nourishing .

the [6 625 i n the U n derworld and of re m ov ing h im fro m

every evil th ing W ith R u r i c
. b
,

Vi gn ett e :The S even Cows and thei r B u ll and the ,

Four R udders of H eaven .

C h a p t er C X L I X [The Chapter o f the Aa t s ]

. .

V i gn et t e The Aa t s of the H ouse of Osi ris .

 C h a pt ers of the The b a n R ecen s io n 45

C h a p t er C L [Wi thout titl.e ]

Vi gn et t e :The Aa t s of the H ouse of Osiris in tabular

for m .

C h a p t er C L I [Without t itl e ]
. .

V i gn et t e S cen e of t h e mu mm y cha m ber .

C h a p t er C L I a [Chapter] of the hands of A npu th e

.
,

dweller i n the sep u lchral cha m ber being upon the lord of ,

l i fe the m u m m y ) .

V ign et t e An u bis standing by the bier of the deceased .

C h a p t er C L I b T he Chapter of the ch ief of hidde n

.

t h ings .

V i gn et t e A hu m an head .

C h a p t er C L I I The Chapter of buildi n g a house in

.

the earth .

V i gn ett e T he deceased layi ng the foun dations of hi s

ho u se .

C h a p t er C L I I I a T he Chapter of co m ing forth fro m

.

the net .

V i gn et t e :A n et by the side of wh ich stands t h e

deceased .

C h a p t er C L I I I b The Chapter of co m ing forth fro m

.

the fishing n et .

Vi gn et t e Three apes drawing a fish ing n et .

C h a p t er C L I V The Chapter of not allowing t h e

.

body of a m a n to decay i n the to m b .

Vi gn et t e The sun shin i ng on the body of the deceased .

( S
’

a i te R ecension ) .

C h a p t er C LV The Chapter of a Tet of gol d to b e

b
.

placed on the neck of the K é u With R u ri c . .

V i gn et t e :A Tet fi
i e the sacru m bon e of Osiris
, . .
, .

C h a p t er C L V I The Chapter of a T et of a m ethys t

b
.

to be placed on t h e neck of the K / m W ith R u r i c . .

V i gn et t e :A Tet { } i e the uterus an d v agi na of I s is

fl , . .
, .

C h a p t er C LV I I The Chapter of a vulture of gol d *

b
.

to be placed on the n eck of the K é u With R u r i c . .

V i gn et t e A vulture .
46 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er C L V I I I fi“ The Chapter of a collar of gol d

to be placed on the neck of the K fi With R u r i c u . b .

Vi gn et t e A collar .

C h a p t er C L I X *
The Chapter of a sceptre of m other
.

o f- e m eral d to be placed o n the neck of the K /zu With

br
.

Ru ic .

V i gn ett e :A sceptre U
.

C h a p t er C L X [The Chapter] of placing a plaq u e of

.

m other o f e m erald
- -
.

V i gn et t e Tho th gi v i ng a plaque to the deceased .

C h a p t er C L X I The Chapter of the open ing of the

doors of hea v en by Thoth etc With R u ric
.

, . b .

V i gn et t e Thoth openi ng the four doors of heaven .

C h a p t er C L X I I *
The Chapter of causing h eat to
.

exist under the head of the K fi u With R u b ri c . .

V i gn et t e :A cow with a pai r o f pl u m es an d a disk

,

between her horns .

C h a p t er C L X I I I *
The Chapter of not allowing the
body of a m a n to decay i n the U nderworld With R u ri c
.

. b .

V i gn et t e :Two u t cfi a ls and a serpent each on a pai r ,

of hu m an legs .

C h a p t er C L X I V *
Another Chapter Wi th R u ri c
. . b .

V i gn et t e :A three headed goddess winged standing -

, ,

between two pig m ies .

C h a p t er C L X V *
The Chapter of arrivi ng i n port
. ,

of not beco m ing unseen and of m ak ing t h e body to ger ,

m inate an d of satisfying it with the water of heaven

, .

W ith R u b r i c .

Vi gn et t e :The god M en u wi th a beetle s body and a ’

,
’
m a n w ith a ra m s head on each shoulder .

C h a p t er C L X VI The Chapter of the pillow

. .

V i gn ett e A pillow or head rest -

.

C h a p t er C L XV I I The Chapter of bringing the.

wi cked .

V i gn ett e A n u t cka z resting on ‘

C h a p t er C L X V I I I a [Without titl e ] .

V i gn et t e :The boats of the sun etc , .

48 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C h a p t er C L X X X The Chapter of Co m ing Forth

.

by Day of praising Ra i n A m en t et and of ascribing praise

, ,

unto those who are i n the Tu a t .

V ign ett e :The deceased adori ng R a and two other

god s
C h a pt e r C L X X X I T he Chapter of going i n to the
.

d ivi n e Chiefs of Osiri s who are the leaders i n t h e Tu a t

b
.

W ith R u ri c .

V i gn ett e :The deceased adoring Osiris etc , .

C h a pt er C L X X X I I T he Book of stabl ish ing the

.

backbone of Osi ris of giv ing breath to h im whose heart is

,

still and of repulsing t h e ene m ies of Osi ris by Thoth

, .

V ign ett e :The deceased lying on a bier i n a funeral

chest surr ou nded by v arious gods
, .

C h a p t er C L X X X I I I A hy m n of praise to Osi ris ;

.

ascribing to h im glory an d to U n n efer adoration

,
-
.

V i gn et t es :Th e deceased with hands raised i n adora ,

tion an d t h e god Thoth

, .

C h a p t er C L X X X I V The Chapter of being with .

Osiris .

V i gn et t e T h e deceased standi ng by the side of Osiris .

C h a p t er C L X X X V The ascript ion of praise to

.

Osiris an d of adoration to the everlasting lord

, .

V i gn et t e :The deceased m aking adoration to Osiris .

C h a p t er C L X X X V I A hy m n of praise to H athor
.
,

m istress of A m en t et and to M eh urt ,

-
.

V i gn ett e :The deceased approach ing the m o u ntain of

the dead fro m wh ich appears the goddess H athor
,

C h a p t er C L X X X V I I T h e Chapter of entering i nto .

the Co m pany of the Gods .

V i gn et te :Wanti ng .

C h a p t er C L X X X V I I I The Chapter of bu ilding a .

house and of appearing i n a hu m an for m

, .

V i gn ett e :Wanting .

C h a p t er CLXX X I X . The Chapte r of not letting a

m a n s u ffer hunger .

V i gn et t e Wanting .
 T he Gr ee n fi el dP a
pyr us 49

C h a p t er C X C T he B ook of m aking perfect the K fi u

b
. .

With R u ri c .

V i gn et t e Wanti ng .

I n the papyri contai n ing the Theban R ecension which

are written i n t h e hieratic character t h e R ubrics catchwords , , ,

and certain accursed na m es l ike t h at of Aa pep are i n red , , .

The v ignettes are roughl y traced i n black outl i ne and are ,

w itho u t orna m en t but at the right hand ends of the best

papyri pain ted scen es i n wh ich the decease is depicted
,

, d
m aking adoration to R a or H orus are frequen tly foun d , .

The na m es and titles of t h e deceased are written i n per pen

dic u la r rows of h ieroglyphs The fi nest exa m ple of this .

class of papyri is t h e Papyrus of Nes it a n eb t as h r u ( the

Greenfiel d Papyr u s ) i n the B ritish M useu m ( N o .

B efore open ing this papyr u s for m ed a co m pact roll abo u t

,

I foot 8 % i n ches i n length which was flatter at one e nd ,

than the other Wi th the exception of a few h ieroglyphs

.

at the begi nn ing of the papyrus an d portions of the fig u res ,

of Osiris and the deceased the docu m en t is co m plete and , ,

text an d V ignettes are i n a re m arkable state of preservation .

T he papy r u s is nearly 1 2 3 feet long and I foot 6 —5 i nches

wide ; i t contai n s l in es of text hierat ic chiefly , ,

arranged i n 1 7 2 colu m ns The papyrus is the longest of .

the Theban codices of the B ook of the D ead an d with the ,

exception of the great H arris Papyrus wh ich m easures ,

I 3 3 feet by 1 foot 4
5 i nches is the longest papyrus known
-
, .

All the texts are written i n black i n k the ti tles of the ,

Chapters the R u brics catc h words etc being i n red ; the

, , ,
.
,

fin e long series of V ignettes are drawn i n black outl ine

throughout The artisti c work is of a v ery high character
.
,

and is probably the best exa m ple extan t of l ine drawing

under the N ew E m pi re The papyr u s is written chiefl y l n .

hieratic a script whi ch is both wr i tten and read fro m right

,

to left and therefore begins at the right —hand end of the

,

“
papyrus The s o called N egat ive Confession appears in
.
-

i t i n two copies on e in h ieratic an d the other i n h ieroglyphs

, , .

The papyrus was wri tten i n t h e second q u arter of the tenth

cen tury before Christ and is for all practical p u rposes a ,

dated doc u m en t I t s authority for decidi ng q u estions con

.

cern ing h ierati c palaeography under the N ew E m p ire is

very great I t contai ns eighty seven Chapters of the
.
-

V OL . I . E
5 0 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

Theban R ecension of the Book of the D ead A facsi m ile .

of t h e papyrus with a description of its co n ten ts l ist o f, ,

Chapters etc has been recen tly p u blished by the T rustees

, .
,

1
of the B ritish M use u m O ther fin e exa m ples of the .

h ieratic a n d hieroglyphic papyri of this period are the

copies of the B ook of the Dead wh ich were written for
M aat ka R a and N esi Kh en s u and wh ich have been
- - -
,

recently publ ished with a l u m inous i ntroduction by Professor

Na v ille 2
The character of the handwriting changes in
.

differen t periods but withi n a hundred years apparen tly , , ,

the fine flowi ng style disappears and the writing beco m es ,

m uch s m aller an d i s so m ewhat cra m ped ; the process of

reduction i n si z e continues until the X X V I t h dynasty ,

about 6 0 0 B C when the s m all and coarsely written charac

. .
,

ters are frequently diffi cult to decipher The papyri upon .

which such texts are written vary i n length fro m 3 to

about 1 2 0 feet and i n width fro m 9 to 1 8 inches ; as we,

approach the period of the X X V I t h dynasty the texture

beco m es coarser and the m aterial is darker i n colour The .

Theban papyri of this period are l ighter i n colou r than

those found i n the N orth of E gypt and are less brittle ;
they certai nly suffer l ess in un roll ing .

The S a i t e R ec en s i o n was i n v ogue fro m the period

of the X X V I t h dynasty about 6 0 0 B C to probably the end ,
. .
,

of the rule of the Ptole m ies ove r E gypt about 30 B C , .

y B
Tlze G r eenfi eld P apy r u s i n t /ze B r i tt s /z M u s eu m , w i t/z I n tr odu c ti on a n d
1
'

E A Wa s b lli dg o do
D es er zf zzon
P
’

e, L n
‘
u . n, 1 9 1 2 .

i l g to
.

P of
”
P apy r u s F u u ér a zr es de la X XI
’
‘
D y n a s t ze, a r s , 1 9 1 2 , ar e 4 .

r oes s r Naville i s a u to u bo t p bli

sh the te x t of ot tb
t h e c n ra c et w een
of i ip t l io
giv b of
t i
en

k bl
r yP
A m en-R a an d Ne5 1 Kh en s u
es s r M a s er
wh c h a t ra n s c r t an d ran s a t n w ere
o
do
p o
1n h is M omzes R oy a

t divi
l /es ,

i to p g p
pp
6 0 0 ff T h e ex
i o i it
t t of . .

p
pi
an d t h e
y
h s rem ar a e

r n c es s
c u m en 1 5
ra er s n o r h m n s b u t a

es K h en s u
yN
er t a
ded n ar a ra h s , wh c h c n t a n n e h er

v i bl o
e c n t ra c t

i
A er t h e s ft
bt
e ween t h e

li t of
god
t h e n a m es a n d t
.
Am en R a
it l of
es

it
Amen R a w h wh c h e ns i i t b gi follo l v io
w e e en s ec t n s , wh er e n t h e i god
d l lg
ec a r es 1 n e a r as e y
l p h olog h t h h th d ifi d t h p i
t a
QeQ a
] e e e r n c es s
C

Ot
Q

fi lfi Q ) i n Am en t a an d in Kh ert Nt
e er ;

t ha
d to d t y
h e ha h tbod o d
e fi ed h er s u

ivi lik v
di a n d h er 1n o l
r er t h at n e h er m ay b e

d
y y it
godd
th t
s
es

h ll
t d
o
a

a
r e
t t tv
t h a h e h a t h m a e h er d ne e e er go d an d es s

h e h a h ec r eed h a wh a e er i s n ec es s a r fo r h er in h er n ew e s en c e
v i t do v ot
b e d n e for h er, e en as is n e fo r e er h er and
and

es s
y y god
xi t
godd .

gli l tio
S
F or

ec
a n En

o d itio ol
n Ed o do
s h t ra n s a

n, I I I, L n V
n s ee m y C /zap ter s o

n , 1 90
9 .
f Comi ng F or t/z by D ay ,
.
 T h e S a i t e R ec en s io n
'

5 1

The Chapters have a fi xed and defin ite order an d i t see m s ,

that a careful rev ision of the whole work was carried out ,

and that several alterations of an i m portan t nature were

m ade i n it A nu m ber of Chapters which are not foun d
.

i n older papyri appear duri ng this period but these are n ot

n ecessarily n ew i n v entions for as the kings of the X X V I t h ,

dynasty are renown ed for hav ing rev ived the arts an d
scien ces an d l iterature of the earl iest dynasties it is qu ite ,

possible that m any or m ost of t h e additional Chapters are

nothi ng m ore than n ew editions of extracts fro m ol der
works M an y copies of this R ecension we re wri tten by
.

scri bes who d id not understand what they were copyi ng ,

an d o m issions of signs words an d eve n whole passages are , ,

very co m m on I n papyri of the Ptole m a i c Period i t is

’

i m possible to read m any passages w ithout the help of texts

of earl ier periods The papyri of this period vary in colour
.

fro m a l ight to a dark bro w n an d cons ist usually of layers ,

co m posed of strip s of the plant m eas u ri ng about 2 i nches

i n w idth an d 1 4 5 to 1 6 i n ches i n length F i ne exa m ples .

of B ooks of the D ead of this R ecension vary i n length fro m

about 2 4%feet ( B rit M us N 0 1 0 4 7 9 w ritten for the u ze/zeé ‘

m
. . .
,

0
H eru the son of the u t cueé T c h eh r a (
,
[
(
if g?) v
to 6 0 feet H ierogl yphic . texts are wri tten i n black i n ,

perpen d icular rows between r u les and h ierati c texts i n ,

hori z ontal l i nes ; both the hieroglyphs an d the h ieratic

characters lack the boldness of the wri ting of the T heban
Period an d exh ibit the characteristi cs of an un trai ned
,

hand The titles of the Chapters catc h words the words

.
, ,

3 wh ich in trod u ce a varian t reading etc are so m eti m es ,

.
,

written i n red The V ignettes are usually traced i n black

.

outl ine and for m a kin d of conti nuous border above the
,

text I n good papyri howe v er the scen e for m ing the

.
, ,

X V I t h Chapter the scen e o f the F iel ds of Peace ( Chapter

,

C X ) the J udg m en t scene ( Chapter C XXV ) the V ignette

, ,

of Chapte r C X L V I I I the scen e for m i ng Chapter C L I ( the

.

sepulchral cha m ber ) an d the V ignette of Chapter C L X I fi ll

, ,

the whole width of the inscribed portion of the papyrus an d ,

are pai nted i n so m ewhat crude colours I n so m e papyri the .

disk on the head of the hawk of H orus is covered with gol d

leaf instead of being painted re d as is usual i n older papyri
, .

I n the G ra ec o R o m an period both texts an d Vign ettes are

-

E 2
5 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

very carelessly executed an d i t is e v iden t that they were ,

written an d drawn by ignoran t work m en i n the q u ickest

and m ost careless way possible I n this period also certai n .

passages of the text were copied i n h ieratic an d de m otic

upon s m all pieces of papyri which were b u ried with portion s
of the bod ies of the dead an d upon narrow bandages of ,

1
coarse l i nen i n which they were swathed .

THE LE G ND E OF OS I RI S

The essential bel iefs of the E gyptian rel igion re m ained

unchanged fro m the earl iest dynasties down to the period
when t he E gypt ians e m braced Christian i ty after the ,

preachi ng of S t Mark the E vangel ist i n Alexandria A D 6 9

.
, . .
,

so fir m ly had the early bel iefs taken possession of the

E gyptian m i nd And the Christians i n E gypt or Copts as
.
,

they are co m m only called the racial descendants of the

ancien t E gyptians see m never to have succeeded i n i v esting
,
,

d
the m selves of the superstitious and wei rd m ythological con
c e t io n s which they i nherited fro m their heat h en ancestors
p .

I t is not necessary here to repeat the proofs of this fact or ,

to adduce e v iden ce extant in the l ives of the saints m artyrs , ,

an d ascetics I t i s sufficien t to note i n passing that the

.
, ,

translators of the N ew T esta m en t into Coptic rendered the

G reek by m ett f fi A m en t i the na m e wh ich the ,

ancient E gyptian s ga v e to the abode of m a n after death 3

,

and that the Copts peopled i t with beings whose prototypes

are foun d on the ancien t m onu m ents .

The chief gods m ent ioned i n the Pyra m id Texts are

i dentical wi th those whose na m es are gi v en on to m b coffi n , ,

and papyrus i n the latest dynasties and i f the na m es of the

great cos m ic gods s u ch as Pta h an d Kh n em u are of rare , ,

occurrence this is due to the fact that the gods of t h e dead

,

m u st naturally occupy the chief place i n this l iterature

which concern s the dead Further m ore we fi nd that the .
,

xt d t l t io of h p i ip l o m po i tio wh i h took t h
B P P
1
Te s an ra n s a ns t e r nc a c s ns c e
pl of h ook of t h D d i t h tol m i d R o m iod will
V
’

ac e t e e ea n e e a c an an er s

b fo d i my C/ p t f C m g F tfi éy D y ( ol I I I of t t d
V S
'

e un n za er s o o zu or a . ex an

ol I I I of t l t io ) o d Editio Lo do 9 9
. ra n s a n , ec n n, n n, 1 0 .

2 a

w
St
.

]
3
S ee . M att h ew xi, 23 Ac ts 1 1, 2 7, et c .
 T h e B ir t h of O s i r is 53
doctrine of eternal l i fe and of the resurrect ion of a Spi ri t
body based upon the an cien t story of the res u rrection of
Osi ris after a cruel death and horrible m utilation i nfl icted ,

by the Power of E v il was the sa m e i n all periods an d that , ,

the descriptions of the i ncidents of the death m utilation , ,

resurrection and j udg m en t of Osiris wh ich were writte n

,

i n early dyn a sti c ti m es were accepted without m aterial ,

alteration or addition by the priests an d people of all

periods .

The story of Osi ris i s nowhere foun d i n a con nected

for m i n E gyptian l iterature but everywhere an d i n texts ,

of all periods the l i fe suffer i ngs death an d resurrection of

, , , ,

Osiris are accepted as facts un iversally ad m itted G reek .

writers have preserved i n thei r works trad itions con cern ing
1
this god and to Plutarch i n parti cular we o we an i m portan t
,

vers ion of the legen d which was c u rren t i n his day I t is .

clear that in so m e poin ts he errs but th is was excusable i n ,

deal ing w ith a series of tradition s al ready so m e fou r

thousan d years ol d A ccording to this writer the goddess .

R hea [N ut] the w ife of H el ios [R a] was beloved by

, ,

K ronos [K eb] When H el ios d isco v ered the in trigue he

.
,

cursed h is wife an d declared that she shoul d not be del ivered

of her ch ild i n any m onth or in an y year Then the god .

H er m es who also loved R hea played at tables w ith S elen e

, ,

and won fro m her the seventieth part of each day of the
year wh ich added together m ade fiv e whol e days T hese
, , ,
.

he j oi ned to the three hun dred an d sixty days of whi ch th e

year then cons isted 2
U pon the fi rst of these fi v e days was
.

3
Osiris brought forth ; an d at the m o m en t of his birth a
voice was heard to proclai m that the lord of creation was
born I n course of ti m e he beca m e k ing of E gypt an d
.
,

devoted hi m sel f to c iv il i z ing his subj ects an d to teach ing

t idot (S ip t M o li
1
F or t h e t ex s ee D e [s i de et ed . D cr a ra a,

t I I I, pp 429 X I I ff
:
. . .

[
C) F
2 T h e ( Iays ar e c a ll d e m h i er o g yph s l Q
a

fi ve a ddi io l d
t na a s Of t h e ea r , yé rr a /o y eva t i ép a t y ”
s ee ru s c h ,
c
'
III II Q III
B
I
g
s es a u r u s [u s er zpt zou u m A egyp ti a ea r u m, A b t I I
B l u s cfi r zf teu ) ,
' ' ’

g p b
.

ip ig pp
P 3 6 1 ; C h a as , L e
’

L e z , 1 8 8 3, 4 7 9, 4 8 0 ru s c h , A egyp t ologze,
. .

’
i '

t pp ff
C a leu a r zer , ar s ( n o da e) , 99 . .

ii bo fi t o o d
N yyy
day, H r u s on t h e s ec n , S et on t h e
3
O s r s wa s r n on t h e rs

i i fo t pt fift fi t t id
t h r d, I s s on t h e
fift of
h d o id
u r h, an d

t h es e a s were c n s l k b y e h h s on t h e

er ed u n u c th e E
h ; t h e r s , h r , an d
an s y
g p ti .
54 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the m the craft of the h u sband m an ; he establ ished a code

of laws and bade m en worsh ip the gods H a v ing m ade .

E gypt peaceful and flourishing he set out to i n struct the ,

other nations of the worl d During his absen ce h is wi fe .

I sis so well r u led the state that Typhon [S et] the evil one , ,

co u l d do no har m to the real m of Osiris When Osiri s .

ca m e again Typhon plotted w ith se v enty two co m rades and

,
-
,

w ith Aso the queen of E thiopia to slay him and secretly

, ,

got the m easure of the body of O si ris and m ade ready a ,

fai r chest wh ich was brought i n to h is banqueting hall when

,

Osiris was present together with other guests B y a ruse .

Osi ris was i nduced to l ie down i n the chest which was ,

i m m ediately closed by Typhon and h is fellow conspirators ,

1
who conveyed it to the T a n a it ic m outh of the N ile These .

things happened on the seventeenth day of the m on th

2
H athor when O si ris was i n t h e twen ty eighth year either
,
-

of h is reign or of h is age T he fi rst to kno w of what had .

happened were the Pans an d Satyrs who dwelt hard by ,

Pa n Opo lis :and finally the n ews was brought to I sis at

3
Coptos whereupon she cut off a lock of hair an d put on
,

m ourn ing apparel S he then set out i n deep grie f to fi nd .

her husban d s body and i n the course of her wanderings

’

she discovered that Osi ris had been un ited with her sister
N eph t h ys an d that A nub is the offspring of the un ion had
, , ,

been exposed by his m other as soon as born I sis tracked .

h im by the help of dogs an d bred h im up to be her guard ,

an d atten dant S oon after she learned that the chest had .

been carried by the sea to B yblos w here it had been gently ,

XV
1
T he m
i
o th of th il
ido p
di
u

b
d d d ib d b t bo
s

I 3 3 7 ( d D ido t
e N e ar e sc u s s e
y an esc r e yS ra ,

II, , 1 8 ( d D d
e D i d t, an o or u s , e
p
. .
, , .
,

2
I h C l d
n t i t h Fo th
e lli
a en p ( o 8 4 ) th i d y i
ar n e ur S a er P y Na ru s 101 s a s

y y y
.

m k d t ipl
ar e rl k d it i id th t g t l m t t io b
u n uc an s sa a r ea a en a n

I i
s s d an N y
p hth t ook pl f U f ( O i i ) t h o S C h b
e

p 5 H w hv lt h
s
t m t ppo t d b
ac e or
P
h - n e er s r s er e n . ee a as ,

y
L C l d i
y S y
’
e a en r er
,
. 0 . er e e a e u ar c s s ta e en su r e

do m t vid o m v i t ti g d t il o i g h
es
cu
a s
en a r

f tiv l of O i i i t h m o th C h oi k
t I I I p p 4 3 ff ; t I V pp
e

s r s
en c e

giv b Lo t i R il d
dt
n

pp 8 5 H Th v io
.

e n
e er
a
n er es

a re
n

V y en
e a s
re
c n c er n n

n ecu e
t e
e

T
m t iy
r a va u x ,

w h i h t ook pl
s er es
.

t i g of h h i
th t c mi
,

t l d ib d
ig of m o i g
. .

W R ob t o
ac e
.
,

er ea
.

a re
2 1

nu e
an

y .
,

es c r
.

e .
. e ar us

S
3
O th n e cu t n t e a r as a s n u rn n s ee er s n
m i t h Tl R ligi
.
,

p 39 5 d f o th b li f bo t t h
y
f t l S mi
V
‘
,
ze e on o ze e zes , . an or er e e s a u e
h i a r T lo
s ee P i m i ti C lt ol I I p 36 4 d F
r, r G ld ve u u r e, an raz er, o en

pp
. .
, ,

B on / — 8
g z,
93 . 1 20 .
5 6 Th e P a pyr u s of Ani

built a to m b B ut now H orus had grown up and being .

,

encouraged to the use of ar m s by Osiris who returned ,

fro m the Other World he wen t out to do battle with Typhon , ,

the m u rderer of his father The fight lasted m any days .

,

and Typhon was m ade capti v e B ut I sis to who m the .

,

care of the prisoner was given so far fro m aiding her son ,

H oru s set Typhon at l iberty H orus in his rage tore fro m

, .

her head the royal diade m ; but Thoth ga v e her a hel m et

i n the shape of a cow s head I n two other battles fought ’
.

between H orus and Typhon H orus was the v ictor 1

, .

This is the story of the sufferings and death of Osiris as

told by Plutarch Osiris was the God m a n through whose .
-

sufferings and death the E gyptian hoped that he m ight

rise agai n i n a glorified Spi rit body and to h im who had -
,

conquered death and had beco m e the king of the Other

World the E gyptian appealed in prayer for eternal l i fe
through his victory and power I n every funeral inscription .

known to us fro m the Pyra m id Texts down to the roughly,

written prayers upon coffi ns of the R o m an period what is ,

done for Osi ris is done also for the deceased the state ,

and condition of Osiris are the state an d con dition of the

deceased ; i n a word the deceased is i dentified with Os iris .

I f Osiris l i v eth for ever the deceased will l ive for ever ; i f ,

Osiris dieth then will the deceased perish , .

The oldest of the sources of our in for m ation about

¢ é ypov
in h o o of O i i w
n
mi
ur
. 7 611 of fipvyxov
t s r s, e a re
. r an By
p ob bl y
k
r
.

a
t h e es
o un
f tiv l l b t d b th E g pti
a

d t d t h p bli p fo m
er s an
c e e ra e

e u
y
c
e

er
y
r
an s

an ce

of t h mo “
of tti g p t h T t i T t
e c er e n y é fi]
l l/ X se : n u e e n e u . .
C
c

wh i h w k o w t ook pl l t d y of th m o th
a
6 ,
th c e n ac e on e as a e n
Q o

C h oi k Lo t L dO i i m i d K/ i k ( R il d
P XV S
’
a Fét s ee re ,
es es s r s ou o s e zo a ecu e e

T t IV p 3 l t h D l id
r a va u x ,

A 1

i w
n
8 7)
ac c
.

o t of h b ttl i l o giv i h I V t h lli

tol d th t i t t ook pl
un
,
III . 2,

t p
6 t h d y of t h m o h Th o t h
e a e
u ar c

s a s
,
e

en
s e,

n t e
.

a er P y a ru s ,

wh
Ho
er e n

r u s an

th m lv i o t w b
e ar e

d S t fo g h t i t h fo m of t w m
d th
e
h

p d th d
b t th u f w d h gd
d th
a

ig h i
e r
a c e on

y o
t e 2
en , u
a

yy e a t er
e
ar
nt

s c an e
.

h
e
t h i fo m
ear
s
se
i to i li d w
r
es

t of I i ff d bi tt l Wh H o s s su
V y
nt

id d w t o h oth
c
er e
r
o

w th t h loo d t h f tt
ea r s , a n
nc d th ne

er y .
no
e
t o on e s
en
as s e

ru s s a
e, a n
r ee

no
a

a
s

s
an

e
t e

se
r ee n

er, a n

e e
ts n

er s
e

wh i h h h d l i d po S h b m lik gi g p h of h o th
wi t h f
c
ur

h d wh i h Th o t h t
y
e

d h fl d b fo ,
a a

h im ; b t h p
an s dh
fo m d b h i wo d of m gi l po w
e
u
d
n

t off h
e
et ,

e re
e ec a

y
e
u
e a

e
ra

u rs u e
n an t

er , a n
er

cu
t e s u

er

ea , c

po h bod g i i t h fo m of th t of w I h l d t h y d
ran s r e s r s a ca er a n s et

y y
u n er a a n n e r a a co . n t e c a en a rs e

2 6 t h d y of Th o th wa m k d t ipl d dl DQ DQ DQ S as C h b ar e r ea ' ee a as ,

L C l d i
e a enpp 8 ff r er , . 2 .
 T h e L a m en t a t io n s of I s is 57
Osiris is the Pyra m id Texts an d a careful exa m ination o f ,

these pro v es that nearly all the state m ents m ade by classical
writers about the m urder an d m utilation of Osi ris are
substantially correct All the i m portant passages i n the .

Pyra m id Texts wh ich illustrate the Legen d of Osi ris are

given with E ngl ish renderings i n m y Os i r is a n d tne
E gyp t i an R es u r r ec t i on London 1 9 1 1 an d it is therefore , , ,

u nnecessary to repeat the m here .

I n the X V I I I t h or earl y i n the X I X t h dynasty , ,

“
we fi nd Osi ris called the king o f etern ity the lord o f ,

everlastingness who t r a v er s et h m ill ions of years i n the ,

duration of h is l i fe the fi rstborn son of the wo m b of N ut , ,

begotten of K eb the prin ce of gods an d m en the god of , ,

gods the king of kings the lord of lords the pri nce of
, , ,

pri nces the governor of the world fro m the wo m b of

, ,

1
N ut whose existence is for everlasting U n n efer of m any
, ,

for m s an d of m any attributes Te m u i n An n the lord of , ,

2
Akert the only one the lord o f the lan d on each side
'

, ,
”
3
of the celestial N ile
d
.

I n the X X V I t h dynasty an late r the re grew up a class

“
of l iterature represented by such works as The B ook of
” ”
B reath ings The La m entations of I sis an d N eph t h ys
,
5
,

The Festival Songs of I sis an d N ephthys 6 “ The ”

,

2
F or th e
the
t xt s ee t h
Ud e

n er w r o ld
e P apy r u s
.
f
o A n i, Pl ta e I I, an d Pl t XXXV a e I, l . 2 .

3
U
a
B
11

K
n eo a eou z, t s ee A nt, Pl t a e X I X, l .
9 .

m
t
4

Qt ] h
I
0A t x t of t h i wo k t
? NM e s r r an

y y
,

ib d i o i ogl ph w p bli h d w ith L ti t l t io b

B
s cr

rg h
u
e

sc ,
n

un

B P
er

li 8 5 ; d E gli h t l t io of h m wo k
er

d th t i tl S i S i i i li o M t mp y n i t m e
s,

e, a
as

an
u s

ns n
e ,

s r/e
a

er
a

ee
n

s
r an s a

t os s
n,

ve er u
A gyp t i
e

b t m d f om
u

fl P t
u
m

t as
a
or u

i M S w giv b J d H
i ol I V pp
,
e

I s
r
,

V
er

a
n,

ki R
ff S l o i h f i mil s f Tw
s er es ,
ar s
1

d f
.
1

,
an

.
,
an

as

1 21
n

en

.
yP B s

ee a s
ran s a

. . e

rc
n

or ra c

,
a cs
t e sa
n

e
ecor
e

o
s o
r

o
,

P py i L o do 863 p 3
.

D ve i
P a

ar s ,

A o th
r ,

i 8 7 4 pp 3 ff wh
1
n

,
C t lg

v io of th t xt f o m p p i th i i h M m ( p
n,

.
d M S S E gyp ti
v l opi of th i wo k d ib d
1
1

0
,

.
,
.

er e s e era
e r a,

y B y
c
a a o ue

es
es

s r ar e
.

P y
es c r
en s ,

e .

of K a h er s
er er s

Ny n

o 9 9 9 5 ) w p bli h d w i th h i ogl p h i t
er,

l io b m i F i mil f tb P py i f H ef t
.
e

ip t d
e

as
r

u
a

s
a

e ,
ru s n

a
e

er
r t s

c
u s eu

r an s c r
a

an
ru s

P
tr an s a t

ll g i i [l li o
e e r n

Th h i
n,

d d ll
, p i i R o m
e

r o s et on

t i t t of t h i wo k w p bli h d w i th F
9 4
nd

l t io
o
a cs

e a r es
es o e

r a z on e,
a r o

e, 1 0
un

.
er , e c .
, an s ee

yP P
5
e era c h t
ex s r as u s e a r en c ran s a n
b J d H k L L m t ti d l i t d N p/ t/y i 886
y
’
. . e or ra c , es a en a on s s s e e e z z s, ar s , 1 .

A h i ogl p h i t ip t of t h wo k with E gli h t l tio

y V
6
er c r an s c r es e r s, an n s ra n s a n,

giv b m i A w l gi ol L I I Lo do 8 9 F th h i ti
w
t t
as

ex s s ee
en

B u
e

dg f l i ti P py i i tb B i t / M m Lo do 9
e,
n

er a
rt

e
o o

a
a,

r n
.

e
,

r ts z
'
n n, 1

u s eu
1

,
. or

n n, 1
e er a

10 .
c
5 8 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Litan ies of Seker B ook of T raversing E tern ity

” 1 “The ”
2
, ,

and the l ike the hy m ns and prayers of which are addressed

,

to Osiris rather as the god of the dead and type of the

res u rrection than as the s u ccessor of the great cos m ic god
.
“
Te m u R a H e I S called the soul that l i v eth again 3
the "
,
"
bei ng who beco m eth a ch ild again 1
the fi rstborn son of ,
‘

the pri m e v al god the lord of m ultitudes of aspects and,

for m s the lord of ti m e and bestower of years the lord of

, ,

l ife for all etern ity 5 “

H e is the gi v er of l i fe fro m the .
”

6 “ ”
begi nn ing l i fe spri ngs up to us fro m his destruction 7 ”
, ,

and the ger m which proceeds fro m h im engenders l i fe i n

both the dead and the l i v ing 8
.

to
1 What
ol l
t h e wh
D e er
e c as s
v i a sa s

T
yo ti foi
w th
u e
f
r e er en c e

s , o n r em ar
t o t he
q ue
Bd ook of é
a n s c et
R es
cr
pi tio ppli
it t d
u ne
ra

a en
ns a

an c e
es

l do
a i d l c tr n e es u rr ec t io n du c r s
e a r u s m ar q u ee ue an s es c o o p pl q d l m
po itio éi p
B V
”
s n s an t r eu res
( C a ta logu e, .

2
S ee gm er an n , D a s B u t /z vom D u r elzw a n deln der e , en n a, s gk it i
E gli h i g of i ill
t w b e u n in m y Clzapter s of Comi ng fo d
1877 an n s r en der n

F or t/z by D ay , 2 n d ed , I II , . 6 78 V ol p . . .

K k § fi¥
vvx
X

§ i§fi
v
3
S U F es ti va l S ongs , I V , 23 .

1M ,
VI I I, 2 1 ; I X, 8 .

5
L i ta n i es o f S eker , C ol . XV III .

? § n
6
3 Pies t ioa l S ongs , V I ,
'
1 .

mk g §‘
AAAM A E
s
b k l aid , 1 1 1, I 8 .

i éfi M
I

fi sfl
L
[
” m
i . t t Q
 H ymn t o O s i is r 59

APP E N D IX
I .
-
HYM N TO OS I RI S 1

H o m age to thee Osiris Lord of etern ity K i ng of the

G
ods whose na m es are m an i fold whose for m s are holy
,
, ,

,
,

thou being of hidden for m i n the te m ples whose [f a is ,

holy Thou art the governor of Ta ttu ( B usiris ) and also

.
,

the m ighty one i n S ekh em ( Letopol is ) Thou art the .

Lord to who m praises are ascribed i n the no m e of Ati ,

thou art the P ri nce of d ivine food i n A nu Thou art the .

Lord who is co m m e m orated i n M aati the H idden S oul , ,

the Lord of Q er r t ( E lephantine ) the R u ler supre m e i n ,

White Wall ( M e m ph is ) T hou art the S oul of R a h is

d
.
,

own bo y an d hast thy place of rest i n H en en s u ( H era kle

,

opol is ) Tho u art the b en efi c en t one an d art praised i n

.
,

N ar t T hou m akest thy soul to be raised up Thou art

. .

the Lord of the G reat H ouse i n Kh em en u ( H er m opol is ) .

Thou art the m ighty one of victories i n Shas het ep the -

,

Lord of etern ity the Governor of Abydos T he path , .

of h is throne is i n Ta t c h es er a part of Abydos ) -

.

Thy na m e is establ ished i n the m ouths of m en Thou .

art the s ubstan ce of the T wo Lands ( E gypt ) Thou art

G
.

T em the feeder of the [f a n ( Doubles ) the

,
overnor of ,

the Co m pan ies of the gods T hou art the b en efi c en t .

Spiri t a m ong the spi ri ts The god of the Celestial Ocean .

( )
N u draweth fro m thee h is waters T hou sen dest forth .

the north wi n d at even tide and breath fro m thy nostrils ,

to the satisfaction of thy heart Thy heart r en ew et h its .

youth thou p r o du c es t the

, The stars i n the celestial
heights are obedien t unto thee an d the great doors of the ,

sky open the m sel v es before thee Thou art he to who m .

praises are ascribed i n the southern heaven an d than ks ,

are given for thee i n the northern heaven T he i m perish .

able stars are under thy superv ision an d the stars which ,

1
i ogl p i t t L d i L M m t Egypti d l
F o r t h e h er h
i 8 7 9 l t XX I A F
y P c ex s ee e ra n ,

P P es on u

XXV en s en s e a

r en
ou e N a ti on a le,
B i oli otli e
d i g w giv b C h b i R A l
er n

E gli h
as
II
en
d i g i R d f M P t t i ol I V pp 9 9 f
y
i 8 5 7 t X I V pp 6 5 if
h
a
ar s ,

as n
1

evu e
, a es

rei .
,
ar s , 1
—

V , .
.

, .
r en c

an

See
d

E gyp ti R
an
a s

an ti
n

B u

ol I I p 7 5
s

es u r r ec
r en

l o dg F i t S t p pp 7 9 8 8 d dg O i i d t/
e,

on ,
er n

rs

V
n

e s,

.
ecor

,
.
.
s o

.
e
—1
as

,
,

an
I s

B
s er es ,

u e,
.

s r s
,

an
. .

ze
60 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

ne v er set are thy thrones Offerings appear before thee .

at the decree of K eb The Co m pan ies of the Gods praise

.

thee and the gods of the Tuat ( Ot h er World ) s m ell the

,

earth i n paying ho m age to thee The utter m ost parts of .

the earth bow before thee and the l i m its of the skies ,

ent r eat thee with suppl ications when they see thee The .

hol y ones are overco m e before thee and all E gypt offereth ,

thanksgiv ing unto thee w hen i t m eeteth T h y M aj esty .

Thou art a sh in ing Spi rit body the G o v ernor of Spirit ,

bodies ; perm anen t is thy rank establ ished is thy rule , .

Thou art the well doing S ekh em ( Power ) of the Co m pany

of the Gods gracious is thy face and beloved by h im that
, ,

seeth it Thy fear is set i n all the lands by reason of thy

.

perfect love a n d they cry out to thy na m e m aking i t the

,

fi rst of na m es and all people m ake offerings to thee

, .

Thou art the lord who art co m m e m orated i n heaven and

upon earth Many are the cries wh ich are m ade to t h ee
.

at the U ak festival and with one heart and voice E gypt

1
,

raiseth cries of j oy to thee .

Thou art the Great Chief the fi rst a m ong thy brethren , ,

the P rince of the Co m pany of the Gods the s ta b lis h er of ,

R ight and T ruth throughout the World the Son who ,

was set on the great throne of his father K eb Thou art .

the beloved of thy m other N ut the m ighty one of v alour , ,

who overth re w the S eb au —fi en d Thou d idst stand up .

an d s m ite thi ne ene m y an d set thy fear i n thine adversary

,
.

Thou dost bring the bo u ndaries of the m ountains

Thy heart is fixed ( or deter m ined ) thy legs are s et fi r m
, ,
.

T hou art the hei r of K eb an d of the sovereign ty of the

Two Lands ( E gypt ) H e ( K eb ) hath seen his splendo u rs
.
,

he hath decreed for h im t h e g u idance of the worl d by thy

hand as long as ti m es endure Thou hast m ade this .

earth with thy hand an d the waters and the w inds an d

, , ,

the vegetation an d all the cattle and al l the feathered

, ,

fowl and all the fi sh and al l the creeping things an d all

, , ,

the w ild an i m als thereo f The desert is the lawful posses

.

s ion of the son of N ut The T wo Lan ds ( E gypt ) are .

conten t to crown thee upon the throne of thy fathe r ,

l ike R a .

o
1
i f tiv l t ook pl
T h s es
T h t h s ee ru B a

g h Kl d
ac e o n t h e 1 7 th a n d
p
1 8 th d a y s of th e m o th
n

sc ,
a en a r i sc/ze I n s c/zr i
f ten , . 23
5 .
 H ym n t o O s i is r 6 1

Thou r o lles t up in to the hori z on thou hast set l igh t ,

over the darkness thou sen dest forth ai r ( or l ight ) fro m , ,

thy pl u m es and thou floo des t the T wo Lands l ike the

,

D isk at daybreak T hy crown pen et r a t et h the height of .

heaven thou art the co mpan ion of the stars and the
, ,

guide of every god T hou art b en efi c en t i n decree an d .

speech the favoured on e o f the G reat Co m pany of the

G ,

ods and the beloved of the Little Co m pany of the G ods

,
.

H is sister [I sis] hath protected h im and hath repulsed ,

the fi ends an d turn ed aside cala m ities ( or ti m es [of

, ,

S he uttered the spell with the m agical power of he r

m outh H er tongue was perfect ( or well trai ned ) and i t
.
,
-
,

n ever halted at a word B en efi c en t i n co m m an d an d .

word was I sis the wo m an of m agical spells the advocate

, ,

of her brother She sought h im un ti ringly she wan dered

.
,

round an d roun d abou t th is earth i n sorrow an d she ,

al ighted not without fi nding h im S he m ade l ight ( or

1
.
,

ai r ) wit h her feathers she created ai r with her wi ngs an d , ,

she uttered the death wail for her brother She raised .

up the inactive m e m bers o f h im whose heart was still ,

she drew fro m h im h is essence she m ade an hei r she 2

, ,

reared the ch ild in lonel i ness an d the place where he was ,

was not known and he grew i n strength an d stature , ,

and his hand was m ighty i n the H ouse of K eb T he .

Co m pany of the Gods rej oiced rej oiced at the co m ing , ,

of H orus the son of Osi ris whose heart was fi r m the

, , ,

triu m phan t the son of I s is the he ir of Os iris

,
3
, .

1
i t ll
L er a y
lig ht d t 4 ¥
“s h e a A e no L. t h e wh ol p g e as s a e

P
, ,

h ere j t ifi l t h t t m t ( D [ id t O i id
us es u arc
’
s s a e en c s ee s r e, 1 6) c o i gI i
n c er n n s s
ip SEy
P
’

p n x k fid f} i d i dpn
’ ’
At rr / evo
pm
ev v e t va f K alt we er eo a z Ka . vei v .

C o mp l t h p it :
’ ’
2
h 8 I bV fiv ef
’
ar e 9 T u ar c ,
o . c .
,
1 u <n v ‘
T
‘
l
f e t ev r
‘

O m p t SO s
’

fit i r énq vo v
’
i da flevij
’
f wflev 0V
'‘

ov
yy evo
p evov , f ek et y t
‘ ’
Ka t
To s Ka r
‘

y vco rs 7

3
The r em a n i d of th
er e h mn y f
r e er s to H o ru s .
62 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

11 ,
— O S I R I S A N D H I S P R I N C I PA L F O R M S
U N D E R T H E XV I I ITH D Y N A S T Y

I . Unn -
Nefer fi
li ifid
m
fl
sfii ii
2 . O s i ris An kh t i

fl l
l s tfl
tfl
Osiris Lord of L i fe
, v '

Osiri s N eb er t c her
A di i d
Osiris Kh en t i

Osiris O rion ( S a h)
eta n us ii
t .

Osi ris Saa H es s s s u i

Osiris Governor
Te m ples
, of
H ami T ilt l-

Osi ris i n R es n et
Mi st i w o

Osiris i n M eh n et
Mln e th at
i
Osi ris E verlasting Gol d M mt hi
a
.

m
Osiris Bati -
er
p it
h i ss ll . \\ D

Os iris Ptah neb - -

A n kh fl i iifi v
i is a
Osiris , Governor of l]
Q fl
r h o \\ I I § I

R asta w
ith
1 5 . Os m s ,
D weller 1n
( g@ Q 0
I
”
0
64 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

33 . Os iris in his S hrines i n

E Q Rd
0 I l l
q”
I

R asta

9
Q
O

34 Osiris N et c h es t i i
‘

q
.

4 >

ll
35 . Osi ris Tes u r
Q
$
36 . Osiris S ekri l 6
fifi
37 . Osiris , G
overnor of
E tern ity
38 . Osi ris the B egetter fl fi
i
a
k a

“
ll l]
A ter R Q
C

39 . Osiris i n

40 . Osiris w ith the ll

k [3 l m
m
4 1 . Osi ris Lord of
,
E tern ity

Osiris K ing ( A t i ) 1
di aq u
’
1
Q ER QQ i ii
‘
’
Osi ris Taiti

ll
fi§ §
o
f lll
Osi ris i n R asta
[11]
9
Osiris on his San d H
m @ T;
C ] 111

m pi m T
Osi ris Governor of the
1
fi “ U
,

Cha m ber of the Co ws o

1
Osi ris i n T a n en t
dR 03 11
W
Osiris i n N etb it 1
Q R J QQ E
 F orm s an d T ow n s of O s i r is

49 . Osi ris i n S ati

5 0 . Os iris in B ets h u

5 1 . O siris i n Tepu

5 2 . Osiri s in U pper S au

53 . O siris i n Neper t

54 . Os iris i n S h en n u

55 . Osi ris i n H en ket

56 . Osiris i n T a S ekri -

57 . Osiris i n Shau

58 .
Osiris i n Fat H eru -

59 . Osi ris in M a ati

60 . Osiris i n H en a

V OL . I .
66 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

THE D OC TRI NE OF ETE RN A L LI FE

The ideas an d bel iefs w h ich the E gyptians hel d i n

reference to a fu ture existence are not easily to be
described i n detail ow ing to the m any di ffi culties i n trans ,

lati ng rel igious texts and i n har m on i z ing the state m ents
m ade ih differen t works of differen t periods S o m e con in
'

sion of details also see m s to have existed in the m in ds of

th e E gyptians the m selves which cannot be cleared up ,

until t h e l iterat u re of the subj ect has been furt h er st u d ied

and until m ore texts ha v e been publ ished That t h e .

E gyptians bel ie v ed i n a fu t u re l i fe is certai n ; and the

doctrine of eternal existence is the leading feature of t h ei r
rel igion and is enun ciated w ith the ut m ost clearness i n all
,

periods An d it i s qu ite certain that the bel ief i n im m o r

.

tality a m ong the E gyptians is one of the oldest of t h eir

rel igious bel iefs T h e attain m ent of a re newal of l i fe i n.

the Other World was the a im and obj ect of every E gyptian
belie v er To this en d all the rel igious l iterat u re of E gypt
.

was co m posed Let us t ake the following extracts fro m .

texts of the V i th dynasty as illustrations

h fl l w 11 Kl
‘

-fl e

U n as , n ot ha s t th o
e

u go
.

n e, b h old
e , []
as on e d d
ea ,

th o u h as g t o ne
[]
as one livi g ton s it u po n the th o r ne of ii
Os r s .
1

O R a T u m, -
c o m th t o th
e ee t h y s on , c om et h to th ee U n as

s m a
s
th i s
m

of
nbod y
thy
o w

for
a
v 2
t h y s on 13 e er .

p “T h
1
(l
R ecu eil dc Tr a va u x, Th ot t t I I I, 20 1 e c n ex ru n s y
S
. . .

pt i i hy h d d th o giv t o mm d to th livi g o
ce re s n t an , an u es c an s un e n n es .

Th M l e d N nl t pt
e ees i thy h d d t h o giv t
an e ze sc e r es ar e n an , an u es c om

m d to t h o wh o bod t ”
an s un se se a es a r e s ec r e .

l ai d t I I I p
2
8 ( 11 3, .
,
. 20 . 2 2,
 T he D oc t rin e o f E t ern a l L i fe 67

s s a ui A fin
'

a e

0 T u m, t h y s on is th i s Os ii
r s th o u ha s t give n his t
s u s en an c e

i h !
s e e

an d he liv th e he liv th e , an d liv t h

e U n as th i s ; n ot di th h e e, n ot

di th
e U n as i
th s 1 .

S tt t U
.

D D

e e h n as in lif e in Am en ta 2 .

[n i
i ih s

He 3 h at h ea en t t he k o wl dg
n e e of god v e er y , [
h is ] it
ex s en c e

B
i k ii i t fi
1 23 R fli h

t
e ern it y ,
h is li it v l t i g
m e er a s n n es s in h is s ci /Z4
th i s ; wh a t

a
i nu e e c e

he w ill t
e h he do et h ,
[
wh at ] h e ha t e h t n ot doth h do e .
5

k
c

L iv e lif e, n ot s ha lt tho u die 6 .

I n the Papyrus of An i ( Chapter C LXX V ) the deceased

is represented as having co m e to a place re m ote an d far
away where there is n either ai r to breathe nor water to
,

drin k b u t where he holds converse w ith Te m u I n answer

,
.

to his question “ H ow long ha v e I to l ive ? 7 the great ”

,

god of A nu answers
1
R ecu eil de Tr a va u x, t . I II, p . 2 09 (l .

2
I bi d , t I V , .
50 ( . p . l . Th e a ll io
us n h er e is t o t h e s et ti n g of t h e

4
Le, U Spi it bod y
L e , h is
.
n as

r
.

-
.

t p
V p ( P pi ( 11
5
l ai d , I V, . . 61 .
5 2 0,
6
l ai d , t 1 70 e , I

P l t XX X l
. .
, .

? R?
7

gid C pt C E
D a e I 1 6 ( B o ok o f
‘
g

XXV
. .
,
Q I
t he D ea ,
ha er L .
)
68 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Th
W
o lt
u s ha
U

ex s it for m
ti l
illio ns
.
of m illio of ns y ea r s , a
i s

period
.
of

m illio of
ns y ear s .

I n the L X X X I V t h Chapter as given i n the sa m e ,

papyrus t h e i nfin ite duration of the past and future ex is

,

ten ce of the soul as well as its divine nature is proclai m ed

, ,

by An i l n the words :
-
$ 111 K h h e
GB dl en nui U
S?
I am S hu of divi ne c omp an y . My s o l u

s in it h i it ” o

my s o l
u is et er n i t y .
1

When the deceased identifies hi m sel f w ith Shu he ,

m akes the period of his ex istence coeval with that of

Te m u Ra i e he ex isted before Osiris and the other gods
-
, . .
,

of his co m pany These two passages prove the identity of

.

the bel ief i n eternal l ife in the X V I I I t h dynasty w ith that

in the V t h and V I t h dynasties .

B ut while we have t h is ev idence of the E gyptian belief

in eternal l i fe we are nowhere told that m an s corr u ptible
,
’

body will rise agai n ; indeed the following extracts show ,

that t h e idea prevailed that t h e body lay 1n the earth whil e

the soul or sp i rit l ived i n heaven :

a s m
s 1 =
So l u to h ea v en y bod f ea r th .
2
( V rh d y ty )
nas .

D
= o

:
Thy es s en c e is in
r

h ea v
1

en , t hy bod y to ea r th .
3
( V I t h d y y)
n as t .

:
F

H ea v en
O

ha h t t hy s ol u ,
ear th h at h
0

t hy bod y Ptol
.
4
( em a i c P er iod ) .

P l t XXV
a e I I I, 1
5 l .

p (l
.

t V p
R ecu ei l dc Tr a va u x , t I V , .
71 .

J M 4 5 ( 1 30 4 )
H orrac k, L a men t a ti on s d l s is
’
.

et de N p lztlty s P ar s , 1 i 8 6 6, p . 6 .
 The D oc t r in e o f E t ern a l Life 69

T here is however no doubt that fro m fi rst to last the

, ,

E gyptians fi r m l y bel ieved that besides the soul there was

so m e other ele m en t of the m a n that woul d rise agai n .

The preservation of the corruptible body too was i n so m e , ,

way connected w ith the l ife i n the world to co m e an d i ts ,

existen ce was n ecessary to ens u re eternal l ife ; ot h erw ise

the prayers recited to th is end would have been futile an d ,

the ti m e honoured custo m of m u m m i fying the dead would

-

have had no m ean ing The never ending ex istence of the .

-

soul is asserted i n a passage quoted above without reference

to Osi ris ; but the frequen t m en tion of the un iting of h is
bones and of t h e gatheri ng together of his m e m bers and
,
1
,

the doi ng away wit h all corruption fro m h is body see m s to ,

show that the pious E gyptian connected these things with

th e resurrection of h is own body i n so m e for m and he ,

argued that what had been don e for h im who w as pro

clai m ed to be giver an d source of l i fe m ust be necessary for
m ortal m a n .

The physical body of ma n considered as a whole was

called é /za t fl
1

8
C

§ W
a word which see m s to be con ,

n ec t ed with the idea of so m ething which is l iabl e to decay .

T he Word is also appl ied to the m u mm ified body i n the

“
to m b as we know fro m the words M y body ( t ea t ) is
,

2 ” 3
buri ed S uch a body was attributed to the god Osiris ;
.

i n the C L X I I n d Chapter of the B ook of the D ead h is “

great d ivin e body rested i n I n this respect the
god an d the deceased were on an equal ity As we have .

seen above the body neither leaves the to m b n or reappears

,

on earth ; yet i ts preservation was n ecessary Thus the .

1
A l d r ea y in t h e Py ra m id T ex ts we h a v 3
] e
(a
m
w

ha u fl fi g fl fl iii
e v e v
fl
h
U
“R i e p 0 t h o T eta ! T h o h t e iv d t h y h d s u u u as r ce e ea
, ,

tho h t k i tt d t og t h t h y bo th o ha t oll t d t hy m m b
u as

R ecu ei l de T
n

r a va u x ,
e

t .
e
Vp ,
er

.
40 l( .
n es , u s c ec e e ers .

fl k gfi fi fi
z 41 fi
3 a B ook of t h e D ead,

C h pt L XXXV I l
q h .

a
3
er

P apy r u s f
o
,

A n i,
.

Pl t
1 1 .

a e VII l 28 an d Pl at e X I X, l 8

Bl
. .

. . JJ
a DQ
° Le pi s u s, Todten ou clz, .
7 .

Q Z o 8
7 0 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani
“
deceased addresses Te m u : H ail to thee O m y father 1
,

Osiris I ha v e co m e and I have e m bal m ed this m y flesh

,

“ so that m body m a not decay I am whole even as

y y .
,

m y father K heper a was whole w h o i s to m e the type of ,

that wh ich passeth not away Co m e then O For m an d , , ,

give breath u nto m e O lord of breath O tho u who art , ,

greater than thy co m peers S tabl ish thou m e and for m .

,

thou m e O thou who art lord of t h e gra v e G rant thou

, .

t o m e to endure for ever even as thou d idst gran t unto ,

thy father Te m u to endure ; and his body neither p assed

away nor decayed I have not done that wh ich is hateful .

unto thee nay I have spoken that which thy K A loveth

, ,

repulse thou m e not an d cast thou m e not behind thee ; ,

O Te m u to decay even as thou doest unto every god and

, ,

unto every goddess an d unto e v ery beast and creeping

th ing which perisheth when h is soul hath gone forth fro m
h im after his death an d wh ich falleth i n pieces after h is
decay H o m age to thee O m y fat h er Osiris thy
,

, ,

flesh suffered no decay there were n o wor m s i n thee , ,

thou didst not cru m ble away thou didst not wither away , ,

thou didst not beco m e corruption and wor m s ; an d I

m yself a m K heper a I shall possess m y flesh for ever an d ,

ever I shal l not decay I shall not cru m bl e away I shall

, , ,
”
not wither away I shall not beco m e corruption , .

B ut the body does not l ie i n the to m b i noperative for ,

by the prayers and cere m on ies on the day of burial i t is

endowed with the power of changing in to a s ani t or spiritual ,

“
body Thus we h ave such phrases as I flou rish ( l iterally
.
, ,

2 “ 3 “ ” ”
‘
sprout l ike the plan ts M y flesh flou r is h et h I , ,

exist I exist I l ive I l ive I flourish I “ thy

, , , , ,

i pt
ib d po of i
li ppi g of
y y y
1
T h s C h a er is n s c r e u n on e the n en wr a n s t he
m u mm of op of
T h ot h m es I I I , a n d a c t t giv b
t h e ex i s en Naville
l t v io pi
( Todten bu cli , B d I , B I
B 1 7 5 , w h er e m an
.
.

n er es n y
fo r a a er ers n s ee L e s u s , Todten ou clz,
i t ti g v i oar an t s
.

ccu r .

2 O

29 fl33? R z
i t C h pt L III 3 c; . a er XXX , .

E
G Q] 0
it? fl C h pt
a er L XV
I ,
1 49.

M ?
”
a
s as o
h a
u s
C ha pt C L I l
er V ,
. 1 2 .
7 2 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

m
é
(fl h h m d
i d

Ha il t o th ee , T eta on th s thyi day [

wh en ] o
t h u ar t

M 55 RQ RJ W AR
‘

£ 6 K O

t di g b fo
s an n e re Ra [] as he c om et h f omr t h e eas t [wh ]
, en t o h u ar t

l
ll R 11 1; 11 s ee
end d w i th
ue th i s t h y s alz am o g n t he s ol u s .
1

H
S-
ih
d t io of lif
s
Wht iityt
is h is
a
li m it of lif
re a ll
is
3
v l ti g
[ ]
i s u ra n e e er n , e e er a s n n es s

g ag e s

2
in h is s alz .

R w
g .
L Q Q e;

a s dlz w h h is it s o l
u .
3

I n the late R ecens ion of the B ook of the Dead publ ished
“
by Lepsius the deceased is said to look u pon h is body and to
“1 “
rest upon his s anu an d souls are said to enter into thei r ,
”
s alt u ;
5
an d a passage extant both i n this and the older
Theban R ecension m akes the deceased to receive the s afi u of
the god Osiris 6
B u t that E gyptian writers at ti m es con
.

fused the é na t with the s anu is clear fro m a passage i n the

,

“
B ook of R espirations where it is said : H ail Osiris thy , , ,
”
na m e endureth thy body is stabl ished thy s anu flou r is h et h ;
,
7
,

1
R ecu ei l de r a va u x,
t
T
p l
t . Vp , .
59 (l .

B ook of XXV
2
I bid , I V,
. 61 (
. . .

3
t h e D ea , C ha d pt er L III . l . 1 4 .

4 o o

j fi 3 12 ; Q g Q j] I
C ha
5
pt er L XXX X I ,
1 6
. .

[l i d , 1 5 .

XXX l
. .

g 3 g“
9“la . Ch pt C a er ,
.
38 ( ed Naville)
. .

W h flqal fi i l i o v
9 a
S ee B ru g s c h, L i ver M etenzp sy clzos is ,
p . 1 5 .
 T he D oc t rin e o f E t ern a l Life 73
i n other texts the word is appl ied only to the “flourish ”

natural body .

I n close con n ection with the natural and spiritual bodies

stood the heart or rather that part of i t wh ich was the seat ,

of the power of l i fe and the foun tai n of good an d ev il

thoughts And 1n addition to the N a t u r a l body and Spi rit
.

body m a n also had an abstract i ndiv idual ity or personal ity

,

en dowed with all h is characteristic attributes This abstract .

personal ity had an absolutely i n dependen t ex isten ce I t .

could m o v e freely fro m place to place separati ng itsel f fro m , ,

or un iting itsel f to the body at w ill an d also enj oying l ife , ,

w ith the gods i n heave n This was the K A 1— a word .

l
wh ich at ti m es conveys the m eani ngs of its Coptic equ ivalen t

L H fit
’
1
T he
d hi di ov
g
l m i g of t h wo d K w fi t di ov d b
w
en er a

p bli h d i h i L tt i 8 4 T h fi t
ea n n

y to e r A as rs sc er e yN es r

yB y
e, a n s sc er as u s e n s e r es n 1 0 . e rs

E g p t ologi t w h io l s mi d th m o i g of t h wo d ""w
s er us exa ne e ean n e r
1
as

i h wh oll t d m pl of t h w o d d di d th m
D r

M m i
.

e
rc

P t
o r e s u r u ne
,

Egypti
loc

XXB V
d M d L
ec e

a er e i 8 5 8 pp 5 9 ff
hi
s ev era exa

en n e u
es

u s ee
’
e

a
r

ou vr e,
an

P sc u sse

ar s , 1 ,
e

.
in s

( E t it d t I d M m i d l S i te mp i l d A t q i d
y
’ ’ ’

x ra u . es e o r es e a oc e i er a e es n i u a r es e

i l d o d b t p o bl em divi
F

M mb
)
r a n ce D . h
r nc
t r t h
.

g é i p i ip p i t I p t mb 8 7 8 M M p o xpl i d t h
n e,
w
e, es

of t h C o g of L o t h vi w wh i h h h ld o
e rc

r .
mran s a t e

i g
S y e e
e

er , 1
r

,
r e,

.
er s

as
n n e, e

er e a ne
e,

to
n,

C oll eg d F
er s

t h i wo d d wh i h h h d f t h p t fi
s

e
r ,

d e
an
“
id l e t
r a n c e, a n
e

c b
n

o t d do bl d l p o
r es s

hi g i
e

sa
th a or

e a es
ns

e as
e

u ne s
e

ve

r e
s

y ear s

e
c

een

u
e

e
e
t ea c
e
c

a
n
n c er n n

er s
n

nne
e

h m i m ti m oi g o i e q l m i e do t t fo m é l
’ ’

u d a ne une a er e ns r ss re ue a at re n es r e
o p m i q il f ll it o i t t t i o mm l o p l i m em ;
c r s, a s u
’
a a n u rr r e en r e en r c e e c r s u -
e ce

do bl viv i t d l t o m b d off d q o f i it
u e a an s fet
e eau es r an es u
’
n a sa au x es
o iq jo d h i o m g d o m b d g é i d l
y
’
c an t
n u es , e au ur u en c re u ra n n re es n es e a
t di t io
ra pop l i é g p t i
n m o u a re
q d d bl d v d é mo en n e es nt ue es ou es , e en u s n s au

mom t d l o v io d f ll h h i ti i m p i a l i l mi m
y S y
’ ”
en e a c n er s n es e a s au c r s an s e, u s s a s e.

vi w w p t d b him t t h o bo i F b
Th
C mpt
o
es e

R d
pp 3 5 6 3 ; R
es d
e

C g ep
s

en
er e r e

i i ld
us O i t li t
u

t d l Et
ea e

L o on
879 S
8 78 t I
éi
r s r ov n c a
a e

es
r

r en a
nn e n

s es ,
e r u ar
y n s,
, 1

1
.

,
.
ee

N
’
—2 S i t i/i o d l F ‘ e
2 evu e c en ue e a r a n ce e e er , s r e,
.
g ran 2

é o 3 5 M h 8 7 9 pp 8 6 8 ; B ll ti d l A i ti
8
N XX
e ’
an n e, ar c 1 1 — 20 u e n e s s oc a on
,
. .
, ,

S e t ifi o
ci n d F ue o 5 94 8 7 9 t
e I I I p 3 7 3 38 4 ; M p o
r a n ce
,
.
,
1 ,
.
,
.
— as er ,

E t d d Aly tl l gi I pp I M
’
t d A n l gi
’
u es e zo o 35 6
e e h 879 rc eo o e, t 1 1 2 n ar c 1
“
,
. .
, , .
, ,

M R o f pp tit l d O th t of i m po t
E g pti
r

pp 4 9 4
y
.

wo d
end
an
(T
wh i h h
u

S
r ea

B i ol A h
r
a a

ol V I L o do 8 7 9
iv d t o l io i m il t o t h o of
r a ns
er

.
en
oc .
e

.
n

rc
e

,
ru e

V s en s e

.
,
an

n n, 1
r ta n

M M p o ;
.

td h
as
i
d i
bj t i R il d T
er p t m b of t h m an
n

t I pp 5 f T h v o
n
c

M M p o g i S e
e

e
a rr

er
e a

e
c nc us

sa e y ns

ear
s

.
ar

as er
se

a a n

s
t
r ea e

h d of m
a

W t l l ( ppl
es
t e su

g i h wo d h v b di
ean i n

S
ec

pp 9 9 7 3 D um i h D G op l t d
d n b q l b
t
n

e g h
ecu e

r a
e

e
r a va u x ,

een scu sse

.
,

su
.

se
1 2

u en t
.

y yB e

ru
a ri

sc
us

P ta ua m
or er ru c z

p Ab I p en a ; ,
u

g m D S é pn g d P n mi i ( i
t .
.

, . 1 0
.

B er
,
1 2

an n ,
0 ,

er ar
c en ,

o a
er

es
ra

ane e
a as

s s
es

V
j l o l d K tl i t i l S mm l g K i /m
'

a zr uc t er u nsd ll / o n tz s or s c zen a un en es a er z c s en a s er u s es ,

i 8 8 3 p 5 ) Wi d m
en n a, 1 D i R ligi
, . d lt A gyp t p 6 e e an n , e e on er a en e er , . 1 2 .
74 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Kw , and of eik ov i mage gen ius double character d is

’

, , , , ,

position an d m ental attributes What the K A really was

, .

has not yet been decided and E gyptologists ha v e not yet ,

co m e to an agree m ent in thei r v iew s on the s u bj ect .

.
“
M r G riffith th inks ( H ier oglypns p 1 5 ) that i t was fro m .
,

“
one poin t of v iew regarded as the source of m uscular
m o v e m en t an d power as opposed to oa the will or soul ‘ ’

, ,

which set it i n m otion Th is v iew is substantially that of .

E r m an ( R eligion p D r S teindorff , 1 9 10
. .
,

pp 1 5 2 ff ) thin ks that the KA was a gen ius an d not a

. .
,

do u bl e H is v iews are traversed by Maspero in his

paper L e K A des Egyp t ien s es t il n u gen ie on a n dou ole ,
-

( Z f f
ei t s cnr z t u r K u nst d es A ll en O r i en t s B d V I , .
,

pp 1 2 5 ff ) who thinks that his own v iews on the subj ect are
. .

rather strengthen ed than weakened by D r S t ein do r ff s arg u .

’

m en ts . M r B reasted ( D evelop m en t p 5 2 ) thin k s that the

.
, .

“
K A was a superior gen ius i n ten ded to guide the fortunes
of the indi v idual i n t ne li er eaf t er Th e relation of the K A .

to the funerary offerings has been ably discus s ed by B aron

Fr W v B is s in g ( Ver s u cn ein er n eu en E r é lar u ng a es
. . .
’

K a i der a lt en A egypt er i n the S it z u ngs oer icnt e der Kgl

’
.

B ay er A na d M un ich
. and it see m s as if the true
.
, ,

solution of the m ystery m a y be found by working on the

l i nes of h is idea w h ich was publ ished i n the R ec u eil 1 9 0 3
, , ,

p 1 8 2 and by co m paring the v iews about the double

.
“ ”
,

held by A frican peoples thro u ghout the S u d an The .

fu neral offerings of m eat cakes ale w i ne unguents etc , . , , , .

,

were in tended for the KA ; the scen t of the b u rnt incense

was gratefu l to i t T h e KA dwel t i n the m an s statue j ust
.
’

as the KA of a god i nhabited the statue of the god I n the .

re m otest ti m es the to m bs had s pecial cha m bers wherei n

the KA was worshipped an d received offerings The priest .

hood nu m bered a m ong its body an order of m en who bore

“ 1
the na m e of priests of the A K 1 and who perfor m ed
Q i7 ,

11
C; 7
C
services i n honou r of the KA i n the KA chapel .

“
I n the text of U n as the deceased is said to be happy
w ith his K A 1
in the next world and his KA is j oined unto ,

“
M Jr
‘

t r
‘ r w
u
e
 The D oc t r in e o f E t ern a l L ife 75
“
his body i n the great dwell ing h is body havi ng been
bu ried i n the lowest cha m ber “his K A co m eth forth to
,
”
2
h im .O f Pepi I i t is said

a li i s
u u u wfl w u w c
at
c
u
s
Was h ed is t h y K A , s itt t h
e t hy KA [ ]
an d it t ea et h b d
r ea

it
w h t h ee u n c eas n i gl y for e erv .
3

“
1 12 13 “ 1
;q Mis fi t

Th o u a rt p u r e, t hy K A is p u r e, t hy s u o li ps u r e,

1 f i li R ‘ s U

thy fo m i p
r s u re .
4

The KA as we have seen coul d eat food an d it was

, , ,

necessary to provide food for it I n the X I I t h dynasty .

an d i n later periods the gods are entreated to grant m eat

an d drink to the K A of the deceased ; an d i t see m s as
i f the E gyptians thought that the existen ce of the K A
depended upon a constan t supply of sepul chral offerings .

When circu m stan ces ren dered i t i m poss ible to conti nue t h e
m aterial supply of food the K A fed upon the offerings ,

painted on the walls of the to m b wh ich were tran sform ed ,

i nto su itable nourish m en t by m eans of the prayers of the

l iv ing When there were n either m aterial offerings nor
.

pai nted si m il itudes to feed upon i t see m s as i f the KA ,

m ust have perished but the texts are not defi n ite on this
po m t .

T he followi ng is a speci m en of a petition for food for

the KA w ritten i n the X V I I I t h dynasty
“M ay the gods gran t that I go i n to and co m e forth

D
1 8

Vp
.

3
R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x, t .
, . 1 6 6, l . 67 .

4 [bid , 1 1 1 2 . . .
7 6 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

fro m m y to m b m a y the M aj esty refresh i ts shade m a y I

, ,

drink water fro m m y cistern every day m a y all m y l i m bs ,

grow m ay Hapi give unto m e bread and flowers of a ll

,

kinds i n their season m a y I pass o v er m y estate e v ery

,

day w itho u t ceasing m a y m y so u l al ight upon t h e branches

,

of the groves which I have planted m a y I m ake m ysel f ,

cool beneath m y syca m ores m a y I eat the bread w h ich ,

they pro v ide M ay I have m y m outh that I m a y speak

.

therewith l ike the followers of H orus m a y I co m e forth ,

to heaven m a y I descend to eart h m a y I never be shut

, ,

out u pon the road m a y there n ever be done unto m e that

,

which m y soul abhorreth let not m y soul be i m prisoned , ,

but m a y I be a m ong the v en erable an d fa y ou r ed ones ,

m a y I plough m y lands i n the F iel d of Aaru m a y I ,

arrive a t the F iel d of Peace m a y one co m e out to m e ,

with v essel s of ale an d cakes and bread of the lords of

etern ity m a y I receive m eat f ro m the altars of the great
, ,
”
I the KA of the prophet M enu 1
.

To that part of m a n which beyond all doubt was

bel ieved to enj oy an eternal ex istence a fter the death of the
body the E gyptians gave the na m e B A
,
a wor which d
has been thought to m ean so m ething l ike subl i me “
,

noble an d which has always h itherto been translated

,
“ “
by soul or heart soul I t was closely associated w ith
-
.
”
,

the KA an d the AB or heart an d it was one of the , ,

principles of l ife i n m a n I n for m it is depicted as a .

K
l
hu m an headed hawk
-
and m nature an d substan ce 1t ,

is stated to be exceedingly refi ned or ethereal I t re v isited .

the body in the to m b and r e an i m ated it an d conversed -

,

w ith it it co u l d take upon itsel f any shape that i t pleased

and it had the power of passing into heaven and of dwell ing
w ith the perfected so u ls there I t was eternal As the . .

B A was closely associated w ith the K A i t partook of the ,

funeral offeri ngs an d i n one aspect of its existen ce at least

,

it was l iable to decay i f not properly an d suffi cientl y

nourished I n the Pyra m id Texts the per m anen t dwell ing
.

place of the B A or soul is heaven with the gods whose l i fe ,

i t shares
1
S ee Tr a n s S oc B i ol A r c/z ,
. . . . Vol . VI , pp .
3 07, 308 .
 The D rin e of E t ern a l L i fe

“
oc t

( D
B old U
eh
—
w
A
n as c
7

O
o m th fo th
e
"

r
h i w
h
on day th i s
h 1
®
in t he
h
fo m
r

i
S i
a s o l livi g
u n .
1

The r i o l s u 2 i s in U n as
3
.

3 i
T
s h a
R h Tl]
S t an d th
e thy s o l u am o g
n the god s 4 .

4 .
E
Ha
M
il P pi e
D

th s
§ 51
i ! c om et h to t h ee t h e eye
Q I
of H
R ATP
o ru s , i t p k th
s ea e
,

“
h 1 h a
11 111
wi th t h ee . C me h o t t o th ee thy s o l u wh i ch is am o g n the god s 5
.

h a
11 TI]
P u re is t hy s u o l am o g n t he god s .
6

a
1 ti
e r
1 7
h 11 1 i
As
S
liv th e Os ii
r s, an d a s
S
liv th e t he s u o l in
c a

Ntt
n

e a ,

P pie th i s .
7

1 11 $ 0
(1 18 11 111
It s
pla c et h thy s o l u P pi e t h s am i o g
n
t h e great er a nd
les s er
o f t h e go ds
cyc les

}
h hi 11 11 2
—
s
“

in t he fo m of
r th e u ra e i [
w h ch
] i ar e o n thy b ow r .
9

1
R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x, I V, 52 ( t . p . l .

2
L e , the s u the so l of god .

p
VV P pi t llV p
3
l ai d , t I V , 6 1 (1
. . .

4
M id , t , 55 (. p l
an d s ee. e I, . . 1 9, 20 .

p l (l
V
5 6
l ai d , t ,
1 60
.
( . l ord , . .
, . 1 75 .

p
t V p
7
l ai d , t ,
1 83 (1
. . .

3
L e , t h e E ye
. H ru s of o
9
[bi d , , . . . . 1 84 (l .
7 8 Th e P a pyr u s of A ni

a ffl fi
h fii ] h m
11
12
B eh old P pie th s,i thy s o l
u is t h e So l u s of A nu b h ol d t hy o l
e s u

2 Qflh v
ha
is t h e So l u s of N kh e en ; b hold
e t hy s o l u i s t h e S o u ls of F
a
e ; b h old
e

h i GP lll h
t
m rfl
h e
é h

thy s ol u is t
a s ar livi g b h old
n , e , am og n it s b thre r en .
1

con nect ion with the KA and B A m ust be m ent ioned

In
the K H A I B I T or shado w of the m a n which the E gyptians ,

regarded as a part of the hu m an econo m y I t m a y be .

co m pared with the 0 t and a m é m of the G reeks and '

R o m ans I t was supposed to have an enti rely i ndependent

.

existen ce an d to be able to separate itsel f fro m t h e body

i t was free to m ove wherever i t pleased and l ike the K A , ,

and B A i t partook of the fu neral offeri ngs i n the to m b

, ,

which it visited at will The m ention of the s hade whether .

,

of a god or m a n i n the Pyra m id Texts is u n frequent and it

,

i s not easy to ascertain what v iews were held con cern in it ;

,

g
but fro m t h e passage i n the text of U n as where i t is
2
,

m entioned together w i t h the souls and spirits and bon es of

g
the ods i t is eviden t that already at t h at early date i ts
,

posi t i on i n relation to m a n was well defin e d F ro m the

collection of illustrations wh ich D r B i rch appended to his .

paper On M e S fi a a e 07 S h adow of M e D ea d i t is quite

3 ’
,

clear that i n later t i m es at least the shadow was always

associated with the soul an d was bel ieved to be al w ays near
it and this v iew is supported by a passage i n the X C I I n d
Chapter of the Book of the Dead where i t is said ,

h M h hi fi h h
y
li ff
‘
‘
c

L et n ot be shu ti n my s ol u ,
let n ot be f tt d
e er e my s h a do w ,

1
R ecu ei l
’
de Tr a va u x , t . Vp , . 1 84 l( .

w h gqgfi fl h m

(M
p . 62
3
( 1 .

S ee Tr a n s S oc s . . 1 A r c/L ,
. Vol V . III, pp .
3 8 6 -
97 .
80 Th e P a pyr u s of Ani

And again when the god Kh en t m en n u t f has trans

,
- -

ported the king to heaven the god K eb who rej oices to , ,

m eet h im is said to gi v e h im both hands and welco m e h im

,

as a brother and to nurse h im and to place h im a m ong the

i m perishable K HU S 1
I n the X C I I nd Chapter the deceased
’
.

is m ade to pray for the l iberation of his soul shadow and , ,

K H U fro m the bondage of the to m b and for del i v erance ,

“
fro m those whose dwell i ngs are h idden who fetter the ,

“ souls w h o fette r so u ls and K H U S and who sh u t in the ’

shadows of the dead an d i n the X C I s t Chapter is

a for m ula specially prepared to enable the K H U to pass fro m
the to m b to the do m ai ns where R 5 an d H athor dw ell .

Yet another part of a m a n was supposed to exist i n

heaven to wh ich the E gyptians gave t h e na m e S E K H E M
“
T he word has been rendered by v ital powe r ,

an d the l ike but i t is v ery di ffi cult to fi nd any expression

,

wh ich will represen t the E gyptian con ception of the

S E KH E M I t is m en tioned i n connect ion with the soul and
.

K H U as w ill be seen fro m the followi n g passages fro m the

,

Pyra m id Texts

h Ph h Ht
[ hh h
’

s m

Co m th t o
e t h ee thy S E KH E M a mo g n th e KHU
’
s .
2

Z-
X
P U
u re
Ph h
is t h y
s

S EKH E M
U

a
H
[ t
mo g n
hh h
the KHU
’
s .
3

Th o u art p u r e, p u re is t hy KA,

h
i
thy s u
0

o l
if f 1 ”h t hy
s

S E KH E M
U

4
, .

A M
h u ll
ah a - :
h ll o a

h h
V p
fl
r h o

hl h h fl h s —
L
hfl
t V p
de Tr a va u x , t .
,
.
41 ( .

(l
M id ,
VV pp
2 1 60 .
.

(l
.
,
3
t ,
. 1 75 .

(l
.

4
t .
,
. 1 75 .
 T he D oc t rin e of E t ern a l L i fe 8 1

A na m e of R a was S E KH E M UR , the
G reat S ekh em and U n as is iden t ified with ,
h im an d
called

G rea
in
t S EK HE M ,
W
i h s

S E KH E M
h
am o g n t he
H?
S EKHEM U .
2

F i nally the na m e R E N of a m a n was bel ieved

, , ,

to exist i n heaven and i n the Pyra m id T exts we are told ,

that

Ha pp y is P pie th s i w h it his n a m e, liv th

e P pi e th i s
U
T
it
w h h is K A .
3

Th u s as we have seen the whol e m a n consisted of

, ,

a n at u ral body a S pirit body a heart a double a H eart soul ,

-
, , ,
-
,

a shadow a S piri t soul and a na m e A ll these were

,
-
,
.
,

howe v er boun d together i nseparably and the wel fare o f

, ,

any single one of t h e m con cerned the wel fare of a ll For .

the wel l be ing of the sp iri tual parts i t was necessary t o

-

preserve fro m decay the natural body and certai n passage s

i n the Pyra m id Texts see m to show that a bel ief i n the
resurrect ion of the natura l body existed i n the earl iest
‘
dyn asties .

The texts are s ilen t as to the ti m e when the i m m ortal

part began i ts b ea t ifi ed existen ce but it is probable that ,

the Os iri s o f a m a n only attained to the full enj oy m en t of

5

T p
R ea m? a e ( 1
Vp
1 ’
r a va u x , t . I V, .
44 .

2
1 611 , 60 p .
3
f wd , t .
, . 1 85 (I .

4 E g,
(Q j il AEQ
M

q “
x.
“T h i s P pi go t
e e h fo t h
r

V
. .

wi th h i fl h p 85 (l ”
s Jé t es . za
’
, .
, . 1 .

O i i o i t d of ll h pi i t l p t of m g th d
y
5
Th e s r s c ns s e a t e s r ua ar s a an a ere

t og th fo m wh i h m bl d h im x l Wh v h o o w
a
e

it w
i er
p id t th m mm i fi d bod w
o
n a

e
r

iv d b i O i i t h o ff i g m d
u

pt d b it O i i d t h m l t l id po i t w m d y
e
c r es e

y as r ec e
e

e
e ac t

y ts
.

s r s,
a t e er

e er n
n ur

s a
as

to
u se y
er e ac c e
of b it O i i f i w p o t io Th l h A t h b h
s
e

s r s

i p i m v l ti m p t
or
s

ts o
s r s , an

n r ec t
e a

n .
u e s

e s a zu ,
a u

t e
n

d,
er e

e a,
a

t
e

l/
e zu ,

an
h t e th
d i d p d t p t of m
n e
kfi m

V OL
d h m w
i m mo t l t 5 b t i t h
en en

. I .
e se

mid T t
ar s
e ,

an s
an
’
t e r

r a
er e

n a u re
n r

u
e a

n e Py es
ra

G
se ara e

ex s
82 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

spiritual happiness after the funeral cere m on ies had been

duly perfor m ed and the ritual recited Co m parati v ely few .

particulars are known of the m an ner of l ife of the soul i n

hea v en and though a nu m ber of i nteresting facts m a y be
,

gleaned fro m the texts of all periods i t is very di ffi cult to ,

har m on i z e the m This resul t is due partly to the different

.

v iews held by different schools of tho u g h t in ancient E gypt ,

and partly to the fact that on so m e points the E gyptians

the m selves see m to have had no decided opin ion s We .

depend upon the Pyra m id Texts for our knowledge of thei r

earl iest conceptions of a fu ture l ife .

The l i fe of the Osi ris of a m a n i n heaven is at once

m aterial and spi ritual ; and i t see m s as i f the E gyptians
never succeeded i n breaking away fro m their very ancien t
habi t of con fusing the t h ings of the body with the things of
the soul They bel ieved i n an i ncorporeal and i m m ortal
.

part of m a n the constituent ele m ents of wh ich flew to

,

heaven after death yet the theologians of the V I t h dynasty

had decided that there was so m e part of the deceased which
could only m ount to hea v en by m eans of a ladder I n the .

“
pyra m i d of Tet a i t is sai d : Whe n T et a hath purified
hi m sel f on the borders o f t h is earth where R a hat h
purified h i m self he prayeth and setteth up the ladder and
, ,

those who dwell i n the great place press Tet a forward

”
1
with thei r hands I n the pyra m id of Pepi I the ki ng is
.

“
identified wi th this ladder : I s is saith H appy are they ‘
,

who see the father an d Neph t h ys saith They who see ,

’

,
‘

the father ha v e rest speaki ng unto the father of th is ,

’

Osiris Pep i when he co m eth forth i n to heaven a m ong the

stars and a m ong the lu m inaries which never set With .

the u raeus on h is brow and h is book upon both h is si des , ,

y
P pi
t he ar e we ld d t og th
e d t h d d ki g
e
to m of lli g t h d
pi i dd d
er, a n
d Oii o i d
e ea n P e s a r es s e as
“O s
til
ii r s

P
”
e . Th e cus ca n e ec ea s e s r s c n t nu e un the
o
R man iod O t h O i i of m
er . n Wi d m
e Dis r s a a n , s ee e e an n , e

( i D i R ligi d lf A gj y t
n p
e e on er a en e b er , .

g
‘
h i —
fgfli f h
m
h l fl m m

o a a .

Uw j h i hwh fi a u

t V
( 1
2 l] M p o p
’
NM . as er ,
R ea/ ail cc Tr a va u x , .
, .
7
 The D oc t rin e of E t ern a l L i fe 83

an d m agic words at his feet Pepi goeth forward unto his ,

”
m other N ut an d he en tereth therein i n his na m e Ladder
,
1
.

The gods who preside o v er this ladder are at one ti m e R a

an d H orus an d at another H orus an d S et I n the pyra m id
, .

of U n as i t is said R a setteth upright the ladder for Os i ris ,

and H orus raiseth up t h e la dder for his father Osiris ,

when Osiris goeth to [fi n d] his s Ou l on e standeth on the

one side an d the other stan deth on the other an d U n as
, ,

is betwi xt the m U n as standeth up an d is H orus he

.
,
”
2
sitteth down and is S et An d i n the pyra m id of Pepi I .

“
we read : H ail to thee O Ladder of God hail to thee , , ,
“ O Ladder of S et S tan d up O Ladder of God stan d
.
, ,

up O Ladder of S et stan d up O Ladder of H orus

, , , ,

whereon Osiris wen t forth i n to heaven T h is

Pepi is thy son this Pepi is H o rus thou hast given birth
, ,

unto this Pepi even as thou hast gi v en bi rth unto the god
who is the lord of the ladder Thou hast gi v en h im the .

Ladder of G od an d thou hast gi v en h im the Ladder of

,

Set whereon this Pepi hath gon e forth i nto heaven

, .

E very K H U an d e v ery god stretcheth out h is han d un to

this Pepi when he co m eth forth i nto heaven by the
Ladder of God that wh ich he seeth and that which
he heareth m ake h im wise and ser v e as food for h im ,

when he co m eth forth in to hea v en by the Ladder of God .

Pepi riseth u p l ike the urae u s which is on the brow of

Set an d e v ery K H U an d every god stretcheth out his
,

han d unto Pepi on the Ladder Pepi hath gathered .

toget h er h is bones he hath collected his flesh and Pep i, ,

hath gon e straightway i nto hea v en by m eans o f the two

”
fi ngers of the god wh o i s the Lord of the Ladder 3
.

E lsewhere we are tol d that K h ens a an d S et carry the“

Ladder of Pepi and t h ey s et i t up , .

When the Osi ris of a m a n has entered i nto hea v en as

a l i v ing soul he i s regarded as one of those who ha v e
4 “
,
”
eaten the eye of H orus 5
he walks a m ong the l iving ones ,

2
R ecu eil de Tr a va zex ,
( bi d , t I V ,
,

p
t . Vp . 1
90 ( II . 1 81,
.
7 0 ( II 5 7 9 . .

3
E t u des de M t /zologze et t I, p 34 4 , n o te 1

V
. . .

Ra E : j
c
aM
§$ fl R ecu ei l de T r ewa zex , t .
,

p 52 ( ) l 45 6

R ? P p li
5 W MM M . 1 65 ( ne
84 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

1 ”
he beco m es God the son of God
, and all the , ,
2

gods of hea v en beco m e his brethren 3

H is bon es are the .

gods an d goddesses of hea v en h is right side belongs to

5
H orus and his left s ide to Set ; the goddess N ut m akes
,

h im to rise up as a god witho u t an ene m y i n his na m e

”
God ; and God calls
6
h im by h is na m e 7 H is face is th e .

face of U p uat his eyes are the great ones a m ong the souls
-
,

of A nu h is nose is Thoth his m outh is the great lake his

, , ,

tongue belongs to the boat of right and truth his teeth are ,

the spi rits of U nu his chin is Khert kh en t S ekh em h is ,

- -
,

backbone is Se m a his sho u lders are S et h is breast is , ,

B eba etc ; e v ery one of his m e m bers is iden tified w ith

8
, .

a god M oreo v er his body as a whole is identified w ith

.
,

the God of H eaven For exa m ple i t is sai d concern ing .

U n as
1
“
“
3 0
a
T hy bod y is th e bod of y U n as th i s . T he fl es h is t h e fl es h of
% lfl 333
—
0
111 sa w
th si . T hy bo n es a re th e bo n es of U n as

T hy p as s age is t h e p as s a g e of U n as th s i . The p as sa g e of U n as

t hi s is t h y p as s a g e .
9

1
R ecu ei l
’
de Tr a va u x, t Vp 1 83 (l
V
. . .
,

jg h
C
2 . f eta , t . I I I , p 89 .
(1
.

8
i ii . S ee Py ra m id of T ta ( R e ecu ei l, t . V) ,
11 4 5 ,
. 1 37, 1 9 7 , 30 2 .

“
Wp W
Il
5
t I I I,
M id , t . Vp
. 20 2

, .
(
23
.

(I .

“O
hl lf
h lh llll h
r o
a ‘
-J L e o m
“
1 h p
. M id ,

l
t . v, p .
38 (1 .

M id t V p
7 Mid , 26
( . .
8
, . II I, . 88 ( II
.
5 6 5
9 Mid , t I I I , . p . 21 4 (I .
 The D oc t rin e o f E t ern a l L ife 85

Further th is iden tification of the deceased with the od

, G
of H ea v en places h im i n the position of supre m e rule r .

“
For exa mpl e we have the prayer that U n as m a y rule the
,
"
1
n ine gods an d co mplete the co m pany of the n in e gods ,

and Pepi I i n h is progress through heaven co m es upon

, ,

the double co m pany of the gods who stretch out the i r .

,

2
hands en treating h im to co m e and si t down a m ong the m
, .

Again the deceased is changed i nto H orus the son of

, ,

Osiris an d I s is I t is said of P epi I “ B ehol d i t is not

.
,

Pepi who entreateth to see thee i n the for m i n which thou

art (
1 §0 Q U
D oO Os iris who en treateth to see®q s
,

thee i n the for m i n wh ich thou art 0 Osi ris but i t is thy ,

son who en treateth to see t h ee i n the for m i n wh ich thou

art O Osiris i t is H orus who entreateth to see thee i n
, ,

the for m i n which thou art ; an d H orus does not place

3

1
Pepi at the head o f the dead but a m ong the d ivi ne gods ,
.
‘

E lsewhere we are tol d that H orus has taken h is E ye an d ’

given i t to Pepi an d that the odour of Pepi s body is the
d
o our of the E ye of H orus 5
Throughout the Pyra m i d
,

Texts the O siri s of the deceased i s the son of Te m u or ,

T e m u R a S hu T efn u t K eb an d N ut the brother of I sis

-
, , , , , ,

6
N ephthys S et an d Thoth and the father of H orus
, ,
his ,

hand s ar m s belly back hips an d thighs an d legs are the

. , , , ,

god Te m u an d h is face is Anubis 7

,H e is the brother of the .

8
m oon he is the ch ild of the star S othis
,
9
he revolves in ,

A lh lf@ v e
w
li}i h s

R ecu ei l p de
'
Tr a va u x , t I I I , 7 l(
“a h
. . 2 1 .

" NM

1 “
ff F A
Ti f f
ar -
Pm W lh fl d lh ll‘ m

t . v i 1, 50 (1p . I .

3
w e, V I I , p t . . 1
55 ( 11 3 5
1 .

m
A fl h h ii lh h h
‘
o u e
H id , t . Vp , . 1 94 (l .

5
I bid , t V I I , . p 1 69 l( .
6
I bi d , t I I I ,
. pp . 2 0 9- 2 1 1 .

p (l
.

7 I bid , 201 . .

9
l m
<8QQ l
t I V p 44 l
D
§
ll
§$ é °

I bi d , .
, .
, .
39 0 .
86 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

heaven l1ke O r 10 n
i 2 and Soth i s
c a
a n d he rises
h
“ C] a

,
1

i n his place l ike a star The gods m ale and fe m ale pay .
, ,

ho m age to him every being i n hea v en adores h im an d i n

3
,

one interesting passage i t is said of Pepi I that when he

hath co m e forth into heaven he w ill fi nd R a standing face
to face before h im and ha v ing seated h i m sel f upon the , ,

shoulders of R a R a will not let h im pu t h i m sel f down ,

agai n upon the ground for he knoweth that Pepi is m ore

shin i ng than the sh in ing ones m ore perfect than the ,

perfect an d m ore stable than t h e stable ones

,

When Pepi standeth upon the north of heaven w ith R a ,

he beco m eth lord of the un i v erse l ike unto the king of the
To the deceased H orus gi v es his own K A an d6
,

also drives away the K A S of the en e m ies of the deceased ’

fro m h im an d ha m strings h is foes

,
6
B y the d iv i ne power .

thus given to the deceased he brings i nto subj ection the

KA S of t h e gods and other K A S an d he lays h is yoke
7
’
6 ’

upon the KA s of the triple co m pany of the gods ’

9
H e also .

10
beco m es Thoth the intelligence of the gods an d he j udges , ,

11
hearts ; an d the hearts of those who woul d take a w ay h is
food and the breath fro m his nostrils beco m e the prey of
12
his hands .

1
R eeu ezl de Tr a va u x, I I I, t . p . 20
5 ( II
. 22 1
2
l é zd , I V, t 44 ( .
39 1 ) p . l .

b fl w
fi l
I bZd , t Vp 23 l(
V=
.
, . .

= ( ll p
4
l bi d , t .
, . 1 71 .
91
6
U 9
Q 3 6 . I bid , t . Vp , .
33 ( I .

6
I bi d , t V p
.
( , .
40 1 .

m
7 m
fig J Ti a“
U
“
U
T T
I
U
T .
1m d .
,
p .
45 l( .

xl j fl l % ¢q U U
nl p (1
'

s w [bzd t .
,
I V, 5 1
U
. , ,

t p
. II I,
9
M id ,
. 2 08

t V p
p
.
( .

, .
46 (l .

t (l
1°
[bzd , VI I, 1 68
D
. . .

11 17e ,
t . 1 1 1, p .
l] 00
0
.

12 I é td , t I v, . p 49 ( 1. .
q 6
h oo
p m w
n h
88 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

orna m en ted wi th l ions faces and ha v ing the hoofs of b u lls ’

.
1

H e is clot h ed in the fi nest rai m ent l ike u nto the rai m en t of ,

those who sit on the throne of l iv ing right an d truth 2

He .

3
receives the U r r t Crown fro m the gods an d fro m the ,

G reat Co m pany of the Gods of A nu 4

H e thirsts not .
,

5
nor hungers nor is sad ; he eats the bread of R a and,

6
drinks what he dri nks daily an d his bread also is that ,

which is the word of K eb and that which co m es forth ,

fro m the m ouths of the gods 7 H e eats what the gods eat .
,

he d rinks w h at they d ri nk he l ives as they l i v e and he , ,

6
dw ells where they dwell ; all the gods give h im their food
9
that he m a y not die N ot only does he eat an d dri n k of .

thei r food but he wears the apparel w h i ch they wear the

,
10
,

11
whi te l inen and sandals ; he is clothed i n white and 12
,
“he goeth to the great lake i n the m idst of the F iel d of
Offerings whereon the great gods sit and these great an d
never failing god s give unto h im [to eat] of the tree of
-

CD
l i fe of wh ich they the m selves do eat I
l
l hP
u
"
that he l ikewise m a
y
"M Ml ive l] a“ ,
”
13

T he bread wh ich he eats n ever decays an d h is beer ,

l l i fj l ? fi ‘
1 1 h 6
“
l
v e s -

m e s a —
h j
ih s e
h '
H h u

k 2HE LP R ecu eil de Tr a va u x, t VI I, p 1

5 4 ( IL 30 9:$1 0 )
t V p
. .

l t p (l
VV pp
2 3
l ai d , .
, . 1 48 ( 1 1 nd , . I V, .
56 .

(l
.

4
l ai d , t .
, . 1 76 .
5
a re, t . I I I, p . 1
95 (l .

6
[bi d , t .
, .
52 (I .

A i l h l h illll fill
’ ‘
u m w
d

J k: l ai d , t . I I I, p . 2 08
( I .

p
Vp
6
I bi d , t I I I , . . 1
98 ( 11 1
91
l(
.

9
[bi d , t .
,
. . 1 64 .

ElJ P P @ J 2 § §J P T
T D

=i h
O
M M

p 1 90 (
mm
, .

“
w h ah h h u i m o

i nn
I O 0
fifi l
l l aid , t . Vp ,
. 1 63 l( .

12
l aid , t IV p .
,
.
45 (l .
13
M id ,
t . VI I, p . 1 65 ( l .
 The D oc t r in e o f E t ern a l L i fe 89

never grows stale H e eats of the of etern ity .

l “bread
and drin ks of the beer of everlastingness wh ich the gods
2
eat and drin k ; an d he nourishes hi m sel f upon that bread
wh ich the E ye of H orus has shed upon the branches of the
ol i v e tree 6
H e suffers neither hunger nor thi rst l ike the
.

gods S hu an d T efn u t for h e is filled with the bread of , .

wheat of wh ich H o rus hi m sel f has eaten ; and the fou r

children of H orus Hapi Tu a m u t ef e h s en u f and Am s et , , , , ,

ha v e appeased the hunger of his belly and the thirst of his

6
l ips . H e abhors the hunger which he can not satisfy and ,

5
he loathes the thirst which he can not slake ; but he is
del i v ered fro m the power of those who would steal away h is
food 6
.H e is washed clean and h is KA is washed clean , ,

and they eat bread toget er for e v e r

h 7 H e is one of the .

8
four children of H o rus who l ive on right an d truth and ,

they give h im h is portion of the food with which they have

been so abundantly suppl ied by the god K e b that they have
n e v e r yet known what i t is to hunger H e goes round .

about heaven even as they do an d he partakes of thei r food ,

.

o f figs an d wi ne 9
.

Those who woul d be hostile to the deceased beco m e

thereby foes of the god Te m u an d all inj uries in fl icted on ,

h im are i n fl icted on that god 16

he dwells w ithout fear un der ,

the protection of the gods fro m whose loi ns he has co m e

11
,

forth 12 “
To h im the earth 15 an abo m ination an d he w ill
.
,

not enter i n to K eb ; for his so u l hath burst for e v er the

bonds of his sleep i n his house which is upon earth H is .

c ala m i ties are brought to an end for U n as hath been ,

purified with the E ye of H orus ; the cala m ities of U n as

M ils ht m s
flfi i i fi v
qp s
ah
T
R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x , . Vp ,
.
41
—
l ( . an d t VI I,
. . 1 67 (

A v
ifié w
fa fi he t . i
fig a re, t VI I, p 1 60 ( 1

V pp ( lll
. . . .

6
I bi d , t . I I I, p . 1
99 ( l .
4
[bi d , . t .
, . 10 .
54
t p t
Vp V p Ol
5
l ai d , . I II, .
9 9 ( II
1 . 1 95
6
[bid , . I V, ( .
48 .

7
M id , t .
,
. 1 67
(I .
6
I bi d , t . I I I, . 1 06
( .

l ai d ,
it lIlI Ihp h
ll
. V ,
. 1 10
( 1
fi

.
h h —e
1°
H id ,
51 1t
.
1
t IV p 74 ( I , . .
WA
11
l aid t I V p, .
, .
46 ( l .
12
l ai d , t I II p
.
( I ,
. 202 .
9 0 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

have been done away by I sis and N ephthys U n as is i n .

hea v en U n as is i n hea v en i n the for m of ai r i n the for m

, , ,

of ai r ; he perisheth not n either doth anything which is ,

i n h im peri s h 1
H e is fi rm ly stabl ished in heaven an d
.
,

h e taketh his pure seat i n the bows of the bark of R a .

T h ose w h o row R a u p into the heavens row h im also and ,

2 ”
those who row R a be neath the hori z on row h im also .

The l i fe wh ich the deceased leads is said to be generally

“
that of h im who entereth in to the west of the sky an d ,
”
6
who co m eth forth fro m the east thereof I n brief the .
,

cond ition of the blessed is su mm ed up i n the following

1
extract fro m the Pyra m id of Pepi I ‘

1 H ail thou Pepi 2 thou hast co m e thou art a

. , , . ,

Spiri t soul an d thou hast gotten m ight l ike the god

-
, ,

3 . behol d thou art enthroned Osiris Thy H eart soul is , .

-

with thee i n thee 4 thy v ital strength is beh in d thee , . .

T hy U r r i C rown is upon thy head 5 thy headdress is , .

upon thy shoulders thy face is before t h ee and t h ose who , ,

sing songs of j oy are u pon 6 both sides of thee ; those

who follow i n the trai n of od are behi nd thee and the G .

Spi rit bodies are upon each s ide of thee 7 They cry out
-
. .
,

The god co m eth the god co m eth Pepi hath co m e upon , ,

the t h rone of Os iris The Spi rit soul who 8 dwelleth .

-
.

i n N et at the Power that dwelleth i n T en i hath co m e

, ,
.

I sis speaketh u nto thee Neph t hys holdeth converse w ith ,

thee and the 9 Spirit souls co m e unt o thee bowing thei r

, .
-

backs they s m ell the earth at thy feet by reason of t h y

, ,

slaughter O Pepi 1 0 i n the towns of S aa Tho u co m est

, , . .

forth to thy m other Nut an d she gra s pet h thy a r m an d , ,

she m aketh a way for thee I I through the sky to the .

place w h ere R a abideth Thou hast opened the gates of .

the sky thou hast opened the doors of the celestial deep
,

thou hast found 1 2 Ra an d he pr o t ec t et h thee he hath . ,

taken thee by thy hand he hath led thee i nto the two ,

halves of 1 3 hea v en and he hath placed thee on the th ron e

.
,

t p
Vp ( 44 7
1
R ecu eil de Tr a va u x , . I V, .
5 1 II .

2
H id , t
—
, 5 3 ( . . l .

“S fi
h h
c’

t y li Ml h e

RT
b D O
. .

a 1M t 8, p 1 04

Vp
.
, .

H 4
id , t .
, . 1
5 9 ( 11 . 1
9 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

may ha v e rested upon the v iew that the l ife i n the next
worl d was but a continuation of the l ife upon earth which ,

i t rese m bled closely or i t m a y ha v e been du e to the survival ,

o f se m i sa v age gross i deas i ncorporated i nto the rel igious

-

texts of the E gyptians H owe v er th is m a y be it is qu ite .

,

certain that i n t h e V t h dynasty t h e deceased king U n as

eats w ith h is m outh and exercises other natural functions o f ,

1
the body and gra t ifies h is passions
, But the m ost re m ark .

able passage i n this con nection is on e i n the pyra m id of

U n as H ere all creation is represented as being i n terror
.

w h en they see the deceased ki ng r i se up as a soul i n the

“
for m of a god who de v ours his fathers an d m others he
feeds upon m en an d also upon gods H e hunts the gods .

i n the fiel ds and snares the m ; an d when they are tied up

1
C m o p ar e th e follo wi g p n g
a s sa es

>f i fé I Dh h 11
f£ l
o
< a
w ’ sa —

( i ll h i l hf ffi l Q h q f gi ’
h fl fl e
ar

:
R eeu eil de Tr a va u x , t W .
, p 76.
( 11 6 28,

9 M u
l h c
. .
a a n n a

1
1 h h llh l‘fl h
3A
a m fl o v
ll a

c s . a re , t . v, p 3 7 ( 1 . .

) @ I h fih l m

l
O
U M
h e

“ ‘m l
e

l l l qw h l h m
fim j a o
w

o
APe C §M ® PQ If h £ h M O

H id , t . I I I, p . 1
97 ( 11 . 1 82

a s
0
1
Q fla —
k mu
A h fl

k
Vp -

H id , t .
, .
40 l( . a n d s ee M M as . p o o te t h
er
’
s n on e s a me pg
a e
.
 T he D oc t rin e o f E t ern a l L ife 93

for slaughter he c u ts thei r th roats an d d ise m bowels the m .

H e roasts and eats the best of the m but the ol d gods an d ,

goddesses are used for fuel B y eating the m he i m bibes .

both thei r m agical powers an d thei r Spiri t soul s

ii“ ,
-

H e beco m es the G reat Power the Powe r ,

of Powers and the god of all the great gods who exist i n
,
”
1
v isibl e for m s and he is at the head of all the s aku o r
, ,

Spi ri t bodies i n hea v en H e carries off the hearts

- 0
6 0
.

of the gods an d devours the w isdo m of every god therefore

,

the duration of his l i fe is everlasting an d he l ives to all

etern ity for the H eart souls of the gods an d their Spirit
,
-

souls are in h im The who le passage reads .

2

“
49 6 The skies
. lower the stars tre m ble 497 t h e ,
.
, .

A rchers quake the 498 bones of A keru gods tre m ble , .

-
,

an d t h ose who are w ith the m are struck du m b when they

see 499 U n as rising up as a soul i n the for m of the god
.
,

who l i v eth upon h is fathers an d who m aketh to be h is

food his 5 00 m others U n as is the lord of wisdo m
. .
,

an d 5 0 1 his m other knoweth n ot h is na m e Th e

. .

adoration of U n as is i n heaven he hath beco m e m ight y ,

i n the hori z on 5 02 l ike un to Te m u the father that ga ve .

,

h im b irth an d after T e m u ga v e h im birth 5 03 U n as

, .

beca m e stronger than h is father The Doubles of U n as .

“ are behind h im the sole of his foot is beneath his feet

, ,

his gods are over h im h is urae i are [seated] 5 04 upo n , .

h is bro w the serpen t gui des of U n as are in front of h im

, ,

an d the spirit of the fla m e looketh upon [his ] soul T h e .

5 05 powers of U n as protect h im ; U n as is a bull in

.

heaven he directeth his steps where he w ill he l ivet h

, ,

upon the for m which 5 06 each god taketh upon hi m s el f .

,
“ and he eateth the flesh of those who co m e to fill thei
r

bell ies with the m agical char m s in the Lake of F i re .

U n as is 5 07 equipped w ith power against t h e Spirit soul s

.
-

l
ps k h fli h h flh h h h h h
s h s

k k fifih Py m i of ta ra d Te , 1 32 7 ;

Vp
.

R ecu ei l de Tr a u a u x , t
2
S ee M a s er , H i d ,
Py r a mi den t ex te, B d I ,
, 50
p o
.

p
.

t .
.

I V, p .
5 9, t . V , p .
50 an d S et h e,
20
5 . . .
94 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani
thereof an d he ri s eth up i n the for m of the m ighty one
, ,

the lord of those who dwell i n power ( ) U n as h ath

2

taken his seat with his side turned towards K eb .

5 0.8 U n as hath weighed h is words w ith the hidden god

who hath no na m e on the day of hack ing i n pieces the
,

firstborn U n as is the lord of offerings the untier of t h e

.
,

knot and he hi m sel f m aketh abundan t the offerings of

,

m eat and dri n k 5 09 U n as devoureth m en and l i v eth

. .

upon the gods he is the lord of envoys who m he sendeth

, ,

forth on his m issions H e who cutteth off hai ry scalps

.
,
’

who dwelleth i n the fields t iet h the gods wit h ropes ; ,

5 1.0 T c h es e r tep keepeth

-
guard over the m for U n as and
driveth the m unto h im and the Cord m aster hath bound -

the m for slaughter K h o n s u the slayer of the wicked.

cutteth the ir t h roats 5 1 1 and draweth out thei r i ntesti nes . ,

for i t is he who m U n as sendeth to slaughter ; and S h es m u

cutteth the m i n pieces an d b o ilet h their m e m bers i n his
bla z ing cal drons of the n ight 5 1 2 U n as eateth their . .

m agical powers an d he swalloweth thei r Spirit souls the

,
-

great ones a m ong the m ser v e for h is m eal at daybreak the ,

l esser serve for h is m eal at e v entide an d the least a m ong ,

the m serve for h is m eal in the n ight 5 1 3 The ol d gods . .

an d the ol d goddesses beco m e fuel for h is furnace The .

m ighty ones in heaven l ig h t the fi re unde r the caldrons

where are heaped u p the thighs of the firstborn and he
that m aketh those who l ive 5 1 4 i n hea v en to go about for .

U n as l ighteth the fi re un der the caldrons w it h the thighs

of thei r wo m en he goeth round about the T wo H eavens
i n thei r entirety and he goeth roun d about the two bank s
,

of the Celestial N ile U n as is the G reat Power the .

,

Power of Powers 5 1 5 an d U n as is the Chief of the gods

, .

i n v isible for m s Whatever he fi n det h upon his path he

.

eateth forthwith and the m agi cal m ight of U n as is before

,

that of all the 5 1 6 Spirit bodies who dwell i n the h ori z on

.
-
.

U n as is the fi rstborn of the fi rstborn gods U n as is .

surrounded by thousands and oblations are m ade unto

h im by hundreds he is m ade m an ifest as the reat
,

G
Power by S a h ( O rion ) 5 1 7 the father of the gods . .

U n as repeateth h is ri s ing i n hea v en and he is crowned

lord of the hori z on H e hath reckoned u p the bandlets
.

and the a r m rings he hath taken posse s s ion o f the hearts

-
,

of the gods 5 1 8 U n as hath eaten the R ed C rown and

. .
,
9 6 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

s a g anq m m ih i h fi m

l ‘fl
h h mgh fi
‘ l gB -A
1h
v
fi 6

ca mz s h n h
f w m
‘

e
i w w ga

§ j m m fi fi $ $
z
cx m q
g§ a
h
g v

$ $5
a} 1§
53 5

fim
fi

h j fi
o ’ '
O

s S OL
0

@ h g f fl h lz h h 2 Li 5 05

fill h ih m
1 2 i h i l l h f 1h
l 1 U U U o
:
m i h t h l
‘ 1
111 3 51 t ‘a -
a }

fii i fi lh l
u
é h L m h u m i s m ‘

h a tfl
h fl h
a m
f i
s s h i h
A h lll fi fl i t fi
fl l q i w - fl
f t

+ h h ll x h h m T P h i U h h M

h h
/

11 l
[10
1 1 m 1
l 7
lli 61
l—
l l h 50 J h

t ZD
[ h a
t i h flf h w l
‘
L
8
D
” h

6 — 1l h l
1 1
@ J Q % Ai l
0 1
5 08 D

i i Pm ph t lfl

k ® fl Cg ooo fi
m
fl
=
© h 5 OQ

13 11 1 3 0 0
©
h i h lll v
l3llli q ~ e
hi
 Th e D oc t rin e of E t ern a l L i fe 97

w
-
m
Al h s —J v m v
i h h fli l fl s ‘m

5 10 1
Wfl u a h h h fi fl i
e e

“
M “
w s

Q 5 i;
f
[
1 Si .

A :
A W§ M§ E
M

8 A $ 5 13

ah hfl ; h 2 fi1< > w
m : f h x h o o

s g
g h hfi fi l hih h g
c
rz
a o o

t w w w fi
fl
h fll fl
‘
h 4
if h w
0
51

(E T HQ A Q Q ZA h
o
m
fl w
M A

+
[&
1 t E Qf Pi h D I
‘
Ss s

h f lf u “l h :
g
h ié h h i
'
‘ i
fl

es l
§ j ti l h h h h t
f fi
se am ~ w

V OL . I .
H
 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

h mh c p iht h e am —J

s w m Alflh fl flh l h qh
‘

a ” o

ii i lh h a zt i is l
fi
'

h i
’

s
: o

1 s w q in as ih
a
(E
-
z hh o w

-
ih fifififlh r fi is r ? e m w e

a flh —
h fi i h l h
’
m m J c

i t s nh h s a h i h
e e w
i s
w u s -

P flfl flh @ l j l fl
w
a l h il h
m s~

“a i l
“
? fl a —
t U i
l t s s

wt t h tfi l h i fl J
h h
— A

M h l i h fifl @ l h 11
‘
me w a v w

l m
B h P l
s —
- J

m
-
Ha h h a h ii fl h fl o v w

-
h f @ lh h h fl
s
-
h w

ai fi fil é h
o m
‘

h }
‘
o m
m
-
s
i n
w
s @ TTT h fl o w

‘
hfl hl o m Ah h ll i w -
e

1 A fi flt h
s ®a
hflf E m h ll
s ‘

13@ D h i h h —ha hm a o w
1 00 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

beings who although held to be were yet fi n ite “d ivi ne

and m ortal and were endowed by the E gy ptians w ith love
, ,

hatred and passions of e v ery sort an d kind were called

w
, ,

ne e
a n 111 1111
e on e or ,

fil fi fi fi
' or or A 1 and the word is translated
, ,

gods by E gyptologists The followi ng extracts illustrate .

the use of the word fl et er T o K ing U n as i t is said i n his .

Pyra m id Text ( 1 2 0 9 ) .

1 Thou art by the side of god

.
fi g
[
i .
”

p ]
C
Q : .

To K i ng Tet a i t is said i n his Pyra m id Text ( 11 2 3 1 .

,

H e weig h eth words behold god he heareth the

mn m m
2 . , ,

E f
u i an
“(
e a
a
— :
“God
) I
”
hath called T et a gQ l (
Q
m
3 .
, .

I n the Pyra m id T ext of Pepi I we have

“ Thou hast rece ived the for m of god thou art
4 .
,

great therew ith befo re the go ds at the head of the

W
Lake of H orus fi D m U
l a »
E1 E U s
,

m
l .

R
Tli ” k
z z

Q R“ h ( 1
( 1 °

H ail Osiris Pepi These thy l ibations are

,
.

p
resented un to thee l ibation s to thee before H orus ,

i n thy na m e of Co m er forth fro m the cool water ‘ ’

&
( or fro m ,
the Cataract ) I ncense is presented unto
thee for thou art god Thy m other N ut hath set
,
.

”
thee to be god to thi ne e ne m y i n thy na m e of god ,

mk d v fl
M at “ A

O EK § J M§ >W W W A

kj
o
] A fi é
i
a s
fi
o
“ W v m
m

]
T

( 11 3 3 ) U M 1 2

5 Th is
. Pepi
q
d h god m ) k l 8 M1
y? a o r et , *

M i ](m
1 .
 E gy pt ia n I d ea s a b ou t God an d the
“
Gd o s 10 1

6 . This Pepi is then god the son of god , ,

“
} J; l
a
a l l
l ( 1 5 7 4)
7 The. officer N e t c h em ab says I n ever defrauded ,
1

anyon e i n respect of h is property m aking h im to ,

”
co m plai n of m e becau se of it to the go d of m y town
m “ [Wig w
,

4 “ mieJ E
QQ i ] P
T E e 1 a

“
EI ilet any
p mj fbewafrai d of on e who was stronger than
{

an d agai n he says w N ever d i d

w‘
,

an

hi m sel f [thereby] causing ,

h im to co m plai n [of m e]
”
because of i t to god ,

‘ J L'
EJ D G
S Tfl o
éi Ph i}
h
i l ‘w
m
I n the fi rst si x of these exa m ples i t is possible to say
that the god referred to i n the m is 1 od 2 The local . G . .

town god or tribal god 3 Osi ris 4 R 5 but whi che v er

-
,
-
. . . .

explanation be accepted i t is quite clear that the wri ters of

these texts had i n thei r m i n s a B eing who stood to the m
,

d
for God I n the seventh exa m ple the writer e m phasi z es
.

the d ifference which he fel t existed between the town god -

an d god M atters that related to h is m aterial possessions

.

coul d be deal t with by the town god but the i ntangible -

,

terror which the feudal lord of the day coul d m ake to si nk

into the m in d of the serf was a m atter wh ich only the
Supre m e B ei ng by whatever na m e H e was called at that ,

ti m e could put right

, .

We m a y now quote a series of exa m ples fro m the

Prisse Papyrus which con tai n m oral precepts attributed to
,

K a q em n a who flourished i n the reign of S en efer u a ki ng of

, ,

the I V t h dynasty an d to Pta h het ep who flourished i n the ,

-
,

2
reign of Ass a a king of the V t h dynasty .

S
,

th e U é w a I 8
PP i
1 ’
e , r z erz, , 2 .

2
h ie tic t xt s i m lé d m p py s
'
’
F th i e d Ave es F
’
or e ra e ee r ss nn ,
a cs z z a ru

Egyptien
P en ca r ac tér es

XXX M J eq u ier , L e P apy r u s

B
'

84 7
ar s , 1 .

i p o pp g
P r i ss e, ar s , 1 9 1 1 M a s er
N od V C bt u d e, H zer a t zc
’ '

,
R ecu ei l, I, 1 4 6 ff . .

o do o do
P apyr z, L n
B ; H ea h , P r over bs of Ap /zobzs , L n
XV
' '

n, 1 9 1 0, . n,

o g o i
L n man r wn

M a xzmes a e P t a Z
'
’
'
Co no
Lau t h , S ztz u ngs ber zc/zte der
z-fiote
’
.
[
Pi
] ate

Kg] B ay er
iffit
h a as , R ev A r ch , I s t s er es , t om
.

1 887 ; Gr h,
1 8 6 9, 1 8 7 0
.
.
;
r e , L es

III,
VVoli yX .

p, ar s , .

6 — 6
pp .
7 7 .
 1 02 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

M
”

? l
z

H E l
N ot kn own
o

ar e the th i n g of t h
s e w o k of god
r P( l t a e II, 1 .

TE SEE M ‘n
O
! D
i ? s
li u
Do n ot cau s e te ro r r men ; [
1t i s
] oppo it ios n

“
1 1
t
[]o god . P( l a te I V, 1 .

Qfi
The
“
ilé '

ti g
’ a
k
of b d
i n

is d the
® = d l
di p io of god
:
'

Pl t
ea n r ea un er s en s at n .

( a e VI I, I .

4
k MA E l ‘ e

th o u plo u gh es t cr op s
( )
P a fi ld
e , ha h t giv en it
“
1
1
god .
( Pl t a e VI I, 1 .

5
2 > fi Q r
E E Q 1] E g? n

th o u w o ld t
u s be a w i se m an b g t th o
e e u a son

PJ EEM T
pl i g t o
eas n god .
( Pl t a e VI I, l .

l l
l fif él
'

E
t hy dp d t
e en an s

“
l l
of th e f vo d o
a u re n es of god . P( l t a e XI, 1 .

7 I f having been of no account thou hast beco m e great ; ,

and i f having been poor thou hast beco m e rich when

, , ,

thou art governor of the c ity be not hard hearted because ,

of thy advance m ent because thou art the governor ,

g § AE El H
c

fi
o
of the provisions of god J I l ,

( Plate X I I I l , .
1 04 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

[ ]
I n offering to thy god guard against the things
which are abo m inations to h im Consider with thine eye .

his dispensations D evote t h ysel f to the adoration of h i s

.

na m e H e giveth souls ( or will or strength ) to m ill ions

.
,

of for m s H e m a gn ifi et h h im that m a gn ifiet h h im The

. .

god of th is earth is Shu t h e chief of the hori z on H is , .

si m il itudes are upon the earth an d to these in cense an d ,

”
offerings are given daily ,

Ei Ell li M EE E E EE o U
Q
O

N
M
E I EE E E E M
‘

QE E Q D

?“ m
K E ll fli E 111
Q
1E 1 1§2
°

u 1 °

E é l E j E nfli M l
t k
i h
’

Z E M Q E KE Z EM QE
T M

Wyfi m i li E fiEE dii fi lEm

w
w o
l

E M Q ZQ Q H W H HQ I I l E
M

1q
11 1
E 1.
c o

6 I gave thee to thy m other who carried thee as she

W
.

carried thee an d i thout any help fro m m e she carried

,

thee— a heavy burden When after thy m onths [i n the .

wo m b ] thou wast born she put hersel f under the yoke , ,

for three years her breasts were i n thy m outh .

When thou wast sent to school to be taught day by day ,

unfail ingly she ca m e to thy teacher bri nging bread an d ,

beer for thee fro m her house N ow that thou hast .

beco m e a young ma n and art m arried and hast a house

, , ,

watch wel l thy ch ild an d bring h im up as thy m other

,

brought thee up M ake i t not necessary for her ( 2 e thy

. . .
,

m other ) to suffer lest i f she l ift up her han ds to God H e

,

will hearken unto her [co m plaints and pun ish thee]

KE M E
Q
E Q EEt P
"
h e w
1

wE E Pl lEé fl e
 E gy pt ia n I d eas a b ou t God and the Gd
“
o s 1 05

7 .G ive thysel f to the god guard thou thysel f well for ,

the god daily an d let to m orrow be as to day

, do -

not be strict one day an d lax the next ) ,

Q E E l E K E M E E EE E W

l EE éfi E hfllE E EE Q l
Q
‘

T m
w o

li K E E ElI
Q O
m
The follow ing ex tract fro m Chapter C L I V of the
Theban R ecens ion of the B ook of the D ead throws m uch
l ight upon one of the views wh ich the E gyptians held as to
the m ortal nature of the gods P reser v e m e O T e m u , ,

as thou dost thyself fro m such decay as that which thou

w o r kes t on every god every goddess all an i m als and all
, , ,

creeping th ings [E ach ] passeth away when his soul hath

'

gone forth after his death ; he perisheth after he hath

”
passed away ,

EEE Q M
E E E QQ
‘
M
M T T
D

E l yfl l }
0 o v c o
lEifiZ D
Q Q Efi e ee E
O

T T - $ 5)
11 E

WE ; E E illi
Q

T e“

As a result of thei r studies o f E gyptian texts m any of

the earl ier E gyptologists eg Cha m poll ion F igeac de , ,
-
,

R ouge P ierret an d B rugsch cam e to the con clusion that

, ,

the dwellers i n the N ile Valley fro m the earl iest ti m es

bel ie v ed i n the existen ce of on e od na m eless in c o m
,

G , ,
,

prehensibl e an d eternal T hey bel ieved that n el er m ight

, .

i n m an y places refer to God an d that the pl u ral n el er ze , ,

gods only in dicated a class or classes of celestial beings

, , ,

who possessed so m e attribute wh ich is usually associated

w i th the D eity I n 1 8 6 0 de R oug e wrote
. T he un ity o f .

“
a supre m e an d sel f existen t being his etern ity his -
, ,

al m ighti n ess and external reproduction thereby as

,

G od ; the attributing of the creation of the worl d an d

1 06 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

of all l i v ing beings to this Supre m e God ; the i m m ortal i ty

of the soul co m pleted by the dog m a of p u n ish m en t and
,

rewards ; such is the subl i m e an d persi s ten t base which ,

notwithstan ding all dev iation s and all m ythological

e m bell ish m ents m ust secure for the bel iefs of the ancien t
,

E gyptians a m ost honourable place a m ong the nations o f

antiquity 1
N in e years later he de v eloped th is v iew and
.
”
,
“
d iscussed the d iffi c u l ties of reconciling the bel ief i n the
G
un ity of od w i th the polytheis m which existed i n E gypt
fro m the earl iest ti m es and he repeated his conv iction ,

that the E gyptians bel ieved in a sel f existent G od who was -

O n e B eing who had created m a n and who had endowed

, ,

h im wi th an i m m ortal soul ( La C royance ’

a l U n it é du .

D ieu supr em e a ses attributs de Cr é ate u r et de L é gislateur

,

de l ho m m e qu il a dou é d une am e i m m ortelle ) I n fact

’ ’
2 ’
.
,

de R ou gé a m pl i fied what Cha m poll ion F igeac ( relying -

upon his brother s i nfor m ation ) wrote i n 1 8 39 : The ’ “

“ E gyptian rel igion is a pure m onotheis m wh ich m an i
,

fes t ed i tsel f externally by a sy m bol ic polytheis m

E
( gp g i e Paris
/ 1 8 39 p
, M P ierret
, adopted the v,
iew. .

that the texts show u s that the E gyptian s bel ieved i n O ne

i nfin ite an d eternal God who was w ithout a second and ,

3
he repeats C ha mpollio n s d ictu m B ut the greatest ’
.

supporter of the m onotheistic theory was D r B rugsch .

,

who i n his R eligi on a n d M i no/ogi e ( Le ip z ig 1 8 8 5 ,

1 888
) collected a series of striki ng passages fro m the texts .

F ro m thes e the following are selected

God is O ne and only and none other e xis t et h with ,

H im — God i s the O n e the O n e who hath m ade all th ings ,

.

— God is a spirit a hidden spirit the spi rit o f spi rits t h e

,

great spi rit of the E gyptians the d ivi ne spirit — od is ,

,

. G ,

fro m the begin n ing and H e hath bee n fro m the begin n ing ,
.

H e hath existed fro m of ol d an d was when nothing else had ,

being H e existed when nothing else existed an d what

, ,

ex is t et h H e created after H e had co m e i nto bei ng H e is

G
.

the Father of begi nn in gs — od is the eternal O n e H e i s

eternal and infin ite and endureth for ever and a ye — od is ,
,

G
Et u des Egyptien s ( in
P ri
1
R ev A r e/z ,
'

1e R i t u el F u n ér a i r e des A n a en s
’
sur . .

a s , 1 8 6 0, p .

E
SP ii t XXp P
2
f
Con er en ce R
su re l i gi on dela
s A n ei ens g yp t zens
( i n A n n a les de

P /zi los op izi e C /zr eti en n e, 5

'iam e
é r e, ,
ar s ,
1 8 6 9, 3 5 3
2 -
. i pp .

3 L e P a n t he on [égyp ti en , ar s , 1 8 8 1 , 4 . .
1 08 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

A H y m n to A m en R a the B ull i n H el iopol is -

, ,

presiden t of all the gods beautiful god belo v ed one t h e , , ,

giver of l ife an d h eat to the young cattle H ail to .

thee A m en R é Lord of the thrones of the T wo Lands

,
-
, ,

Governor i n t h e A pts ( Karnak ) K a m u t ef t h e prince of , ,

his fields he of the long strides Governor of the Lan d

, ,

of the S o u th Lord o f t h e M a t c h a iu ( N ubians ) Prin ce of

, ,

Punt lord of the heavens eldest son of th e earth lord of

, , ,

thi ngs wh ic h ex ist s t a b lis h er of th ings s t a b lis h er of all

, ,

things O ne i n his t i m es a m ong t h e god s B eautifu l

, .

B ull of t h e N i ne gods President of al l the gods Lord o f , ,

T ruth ( or Law ) father of the gods m aker of m en ; , ,

creator of beasts lord of things wh ich ex ist creator of

, ,

the staff of l ife m aker of the green herb

which nourisheth th e cattle The For m m ade by .

Ptah the beauti ful C h ild the beloved one T he gods

, ,
.

adore h im the m aker of things which are below an d of

, ,

things which are above H e shineth on E gypt as .

he s a ilet h over the sky i n peace K i ng of the South an d .

N orth Ra whose word is truth the Governor of the

, , ,

world the m ig h ty on e o f valour the lord o f terror the

, , ,

ch ief who m ade the world as he m ade h i m self H is .

for m s are m ore nu m erous than those o f any god The .

gods rej oice i n his bounties and they praise h im as the ,

god of the hori z on as the god who riseth i n the hori z on of

,

fi r e The gods lo v e the s m ell of h im when he the eldest

.
,

born of the dew co m eth fro m Punt when he t ra v ers et h

, ,

the lan d of the M a t c h a iu the B eautiful Face co m ing fro m ,

the Land of the god ( i e the South E astern S ud an ) .

,
.

T he gods cast the m selves down at h is feet when they

recogn i z e H is M aj esty thei r Lord the lord of fear , , ,

the m ighty one o f v ictory the m ighty of Will the lord of , ,

crowns who m aketh offerings to flourish an d createth

, ,

the d i v ine food .

A dorations be to thee O M aker of the gods who , ,

hast stretched out the hea v ens an d founded the earth !

The unti ri ng Watche r M enu A m en lord of etern ity , ,

m aker of the everlastingness lord o f adorations , ,

G overnor o f the A pts lord of rays creator of . . ,

l ight The gods acclai m h im and he stretcheth out his

.
,

han d to h im that lo v eth h im H is fla m e casteth dow n .

h is ene m ies h is E ye overth roweth the rebels i t driveth

, ,
 E gy pt ia n I d ea s a b ou t G od and the
“ Gd o s 1 09

its spear i nto the sky and m aketh the serpen t N ak to

vo m i t what i t hath swallowed .

“ H ail to thee R a Lord of T ruth whose shri ne is

, , ,

h idden thou M aster o f the gods thou god Kheper a i n

, ,

thy boat ; at the goi ng forth o f thy word the gods sprang
i nto being H ail Ate m m aker of m ortals H oweve r
.
, , .

m any be thei r for m s he nourisheth the m he m aketh ,

the colour of on e to be differen t fro m the other H e .

heareth the praye r of t h e oppressed on e he is ki n d ,

of heart to h im that calleth upon h im he del ivereth ,

the t i m i d m a n fro m the oppressor he j udgeth between ,

the m ighty an d the weak H e is the Lord of .

K nowledge an d Wisdo m is the utteran ce of h is m outh

,
.

A t his w ill the N il e appeareth when the greatl y

d
belo v ed Lor of the pal m tree co m eth he m aketh -
,

m ortals to l ive H e fu r t h er et h e v ery work he worketh

.
,

in heaven he pr o du c et h the b en efi c en t l ight ; the gods

,

rej oice i n his beautiful deeds and thei r hearts l ive when ,

they see h im H is na m e is h idden fro m his ‘

chil dren i n hi s na m e A m en B elo v ed art ‘ ’

thou as thou passest through E gy pt When thou .

risest thou sen dest forth l ight fro m thy beauti ful E yes
Sun and M oon ) The dead of olden ti m es ( fli t ).

rej oice when thou s h in es t When thou s h in es t i n thy .

full strength the cattle lan guish B eloved art tho u when .

thou art i n the northern sky pleasan t art thou when thou ,

art i n the southern sky T hy bea u ties sei z e an d carry .

away all hearts the love of thee m aketh the arm s to

,

drop thy beauti ful deeds m ake the hands to tre m ble all
, ,

hearts m el t at the sight o f thee O For m O N E creator , , ,

of all th ings O O N E O NLY m aker of thi ngs wh ich

, , ,

are M en ca m e forth fro m his eyes the gods sprang i n to

.
,

bei ng at the utteran ce o f his m outh H e m aketh the .

reen herb whereon the cattl e l ive an d the staff of l i fe ,

wheat or barley ) whereon m en l ive H e m aketh the

, .

fi s h to l ive i n the rivers an d the feathered fowl i n

'

the sky H e giveth l ife to that wh ich is i n the egg

.
,

he m aketh birds of all k inds to l ive and the reptiles ,

which crawl an d spri ng H e m aketh the rats ( or m i ce ) .

i n the i r holes to l ive an d the birds wh ich are on every

,

green twig H ail to thee O thou m aker of all these

.
,

thi ngs thou O NL Y O N E I n his m ighti ness h e taketh

, .
1 10 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

m any for m s H e watcheth over all peopl e as they

.

sleep H e careth for t h e wel fare of h is an i m al creation

. .

O A m en thou s t a blis h er of all th ings O At m u O

, , ,

Heru Khuti all people adore thee saying Praise be to

-
, , ,

thee because thou dwellest a m ong us [we pay] ho m age ,

to t h ee because t h ou hast created us All creatures .

’

cry ou t to thee H ail an d all lan ds praise thee F ro m ,

’
.

the h ighes t heights o f hea v en to the utter m ost parts

of the earth and to the lowest depths of the sea thou
art praised The gods bow down before Thy M aj esty
.

an d exalt the so u ls of their Creato r They rejoice .

when they m eet thei r begetter and they say unto thee , ,

Co m e i n peace ! Welco m e ! ) O father of the fathers

of all the gods who hast spread out the sky who h ast , ,

founded the earth who hast m ade the th ings which ,

are who hast created the things which shall be thou

, ,

Prince t h ou L ife thou H ealth thou Strength the

, , , ,

F i rst a m ong the gods We adore thy Souls for tho u .

,

didst m ake us Thou d idst m ake us Thou hast given . .

birth to us and we ascribe praise un to t h ee because

,
’
thou dwellest a m ong us .

“H ail to thee m aker of all thi ngs Lord of T ruth

, , ,

father of the gods m aker of m a n creator of an i m als , , ,

lord of grain who m akest t h e beasts on the h ills to ,

l ive .H ail B ull A m en B eautifu l Face ! Tho u art

, ,

beloved in the A pts thou art the m ighty one who ,

art crowned i n thy shri ne thou art doubly crowned ,

i n H el iopol is [where] thou d idst j udge between H orus

,

a n d Set i n the G reat H all Thou art the H ead of the .

G reat Co m pany of the gods the O NLY O N E who hast , ,

no second the H ead of the Apts Thou art the god

, .

A n i H ead of the Co m pany of thy gods l iving on T ruth

, ,

( or ,by Law ) H eru K huti of the E ast ! Thou hast at -

thy Will created the m ountains and the silver and the , ,

gold and the real lapis la z ul i [therein ]

,
I ncense and -
.

fresh m yrrh are set before thy nose O B eautiful Face , ,

as thou co m est fro m the land of the M a t c h a iu ( N ubians ) .

O A m en R a Lo r d of the thrones of the Two Lands

-
,
_
,

H ead of the Apts thou A n i H ead o f thy shri ne K i ng , , ,

O N E a m ong the gods

,
Thy na m es are m yriad they .
,

can not be told T hou risest i n the east an d thou settest .

i n the west and dost overthrow thy ene m ies when thou
,
1 12 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

except who m at the beginn ing none other existed who at

the dawn of pri m eval ti m e was At m u the prin ce of l ight ,

and splendo u r ; who having m ade hi m sel f [m ade] all m en

to l ive ; who s a ilet h over the celestial regions an d faileth
not whose ordinances are per m anen t at dawn to m orrow -

who though an aged being s h o w et h in the for m of one that

i s young who leadeth the utter m ost parts of etern ity going ,

round about the celestial regions and j o u rneying through ,

the Tuat to illu m ine the T wo Lands which he hath

c reated the god who a c t et h as God who fash ioned hi m sel f , ,

who m ade the heavens an d the earth by h is w ill ( or ,

tho u ght ) ; the greatest of the great the m ightiest of the ,

m ighty the P ri nce who is m ightier than the gods the

, ,

young B ull with horns ready to gore the Protector of the

Two Lands i n his m ighty na m e of E verlasting O ne who ‘

co m eth an d possesseth his m ight ; who bringeth the ’

re m otest l i m it of etern ity ; the god pri nce who hath been -

pri n ce fro m the t i m e that he ca m e i nto being the conqueror

o f the Two Lands through his m ight ; the terri ble one of

the double D ivin e Face ; the d ivi n e aged on e the divine ,

form who dwelleth i n the for m s of all the gods the L ion
god with the aweso m e eye the sovereign who sendeth forth
d ,

the two E yes ( the sun an m oon ) the lord of fla m e opposing

,

h is ene m ies the god N u the pri nce who a dva n c et h at his
,

hour to v ivi fy that which co m eth forth fro m his potter s ’

wheel the disk of the M oon god who openeth a way both
-

i n hea v en an d upon earth for the beautiful for m the

b en efi c en t god the untiring one vigorous of heart i n rising
, ,

a n d i n setting ; fro m whose divine eyes m en and wo m en

ca m e forth at the utterance of whose m outh the gods cam e

,

i nto being and food is created and celestial food is m ade

, , ,

an d all th ings [are m ade] which co m e into being tra v erser

o f etern ity the aged one who r en ew et h his youth ; who
,

possesseth m yriads of pairs of eyes and in nu m erable pairs of

ears whose l ight is the guide of the god of m ill ions of years ;
,

the lord of l ife who giveth un to who m he pleaseth the ci rcui t

,

of the earth along wi th the seat of h is divi ne face ; who

setteth out upon h is j ourney and suffereth no m ishap by the
way whose work none can destroy the lord beloved whose
, ,

na m e is sweet an d beloved un to who m m an kin d m ake

,

suppl ication at dawn the m ighty on e of v ictory the m ighty ,

one of two fold strength ; the lord who in s p iret h fear the
-
,
 E gy pt ia n I d ea s a b ou t God an d the Gd
“ o s 1 13

young Bull who m aketh an en d of the hostile on es the ,

m ighty one who doeth battle with h is foes thro u gh whose ,

d ivine plans the earth ca m e i nto being ; the Soul who

[ Q JX w
e

gi v eth l ight fro m his two E yes ; the god B ait i . ,

who createth the d ivin e transfor m ations the holy one who
cannot be co m prehen ded the kin who m aketh kings to ,
‘

g
rule who gi rdeth up the earth i n i t s courses ; the god to
,

whose souls the gods an d goddesses pay ho m age by reason

of the greatn ess of the terror w hich he in s pir et h ; sin ce he
hath gone before that wh ich followeth shall en dure ; the
creator of the worl d by his secret counsels ; god Kheper a ,

i nco m prehen sibl e who is the m ost h idden of the gods

, ,

whose deputy is the solar d isk ; the one i nco m prehensible ,

who hi deth h i m sel f fro m that wh ich co m eth forth fro m h im

the fla m e which sendeth forth rays of l ight with m ighty
splendo u r who is seen i n for m an d obser v ed at h is app ear
ance yet cannot be understood ; to who m at dawn m en
,

m ake suppl ications ; whose risings are l ike crystal a m ong

the co m pany of the gods who art beloved of every god ; ,

who is hidden i n the N orth wi n d whi ch N u t bringeth

forward ; who m aketh decrees for m ill ion s of m ill ions o f
years whose ord inances stan d fast an d are not destroyed
, ,

whose utteran ces are gracious whose statutes fail not i n ,

his appointed season ; who gi v eth duration of l ife an d

do u blet h the years of those unto who m he hath a favou r ,

who graciously p r o t ec t et h h im who m he hath set i n his

heart ; who hath for m ed etern ity an d e v erlastingness ; the
king of the S o u th an d of the N orth A m en R a the king of , , b

the gods the lord of hea v en an d of the earth an d of t h e

, , ,

Tuat an d of the two m ountains i n whose for m the earth

,

began to exi s t the m ighty on e who is pre e m i nen t a m ong

, ,
-

all the gods of the Great F irst Co m pany of the gods .

After reading the above extracts i t is i m possible not to

con clude that the ideas of the ancien t E gyptian s about God
were of a v ery exalted character an d it i s clear that they ,

m ade i n their m i n ds a sharp distin ction between God an d

the gods S e v eral passages in the T heban R ecension of
.
”

the Book of the D ead pro v e that un der the XV I I I th dynasty ,

about 1 6 0 0 B C they bel ie v ed that there was a t i m e when

. .
,

the god Te rn existed by hi m self an d that i t was he who , ,

by a series of efforts of h is m i nd created the heaven s an d ,

V OL . 1 . 1
1 14 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the earth and gods and m en an d every creature which has

, ,

l ife I t was bel ieved t h at he was s el f created an d sel f

.
-

5 Q {
existent and that he was O ne O nly
, and the ,
1

texts as W l ll be s een later on state clearly that there was

0

, ,

n one with h im and that he was quite alone when he arri v ed

,

a t t h e decision to create the heaven s an d the earth an d ,

g ods an d m en The gods proceeded . fro m his body an d ,

m en fro m the words of h is m outh H ere then we have O ne .

, ,

G o d who was sel f created sel f existen t and al m ig h ty who

-
,
-
, ,

c reated the un i v erse Accordi ng to the L X X V I I I t h.

Chapter of the B ook of the Dead and the other Chapters ,

o f T ran s for m ations he possessed a dual soul i e a KH U

,
-
, . .
,

a n d a B A and the ele m en t i n w h i ch these l i v ed was thought

,

to be the great m ass of Celestial Waters whi c h the E gyptians

C OO
called N u
@ , The fi rst act of creation was the
w .

send i ng forth fro m N u of the ball of the sun i e the creation . .

, ,

of light Te m u evol v ed the thought i n N u an d when the

.
,

thought was expressed in a word or words the sun appeared , ,

as the resul t Ev ery succeed ing act of creation represented

.

a thought of Te m u and its expression in words which ,

probably took the for m of co mm ands The God of the Sun .

was u nder the secon d half of the period of the Ancien t

,

E m pire called Ra but i t is v ery probable that R a was

, ,

identified w ith Te m u at an early date and that to the ,

creature was pai d the worshi p due to the Creator The .

m aterial s u n or the body o f the sun was worshipped as the

source of all heat an d l ight and l i fe by m any E gyptians
, ,

, , ,

especially under the pol itical in fluence of the pr i ests of

R a at H el iopol is which began fi rst to assu m e great,

i m portance towards the close of the I Vt h dynasty ; but at all

ti m es there m ust have existed those whose m inds were able
to separate the body of the sun fro m i ts S pirit and soul ,

which were the d i rect e m anations of Te m u .

The greater nu m ber of the E gyptians l ike the peoples ,

of Africa i n later ti m es were well content to ad m it the ,

existence of a great al m ighty God who created the un iverse

,

and all i n it but they see m to ha v e thought also l ike

, ,

m odern African peoples that he was too great and too ,

r e m ote to con cern hi m sel f with the affairs of m a n an d that ,

he had co m m itted the m anage m ent of this world and of all ,

“
i n it to a series of gods and spi rits good and e v il who m "
, , , ,
 1 16 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

co m pany were for m s of h im These of R a were .

“for m s
Shu T efn u t K eb N ut Os iris I sis Set an d N ephthys
, , , , , , , .

N ow Shu an d T efn u t were S u d an i deities the original seat ,

g
o
of whose worship was B uke m Afi
f a country , ,

i n the E astern S u d an an d they were introduced into ,

E gypt i n very early ti m es w ith the worship of the S u d an i

Cow go ddess H athor - ‘
K eb is a very old E arth god on .
-
,

whose back all the trees an d v egetation i n the world grew ,

yet the pri ests of A nu m ake h im a form of R a A t the .

ti m e when they were stating i n their writings that Osiris

was subordinate to R a the worsh ip of Osi ris was ,

predo m i nant t h roughout E gypt fro m M e m phis to N orthern ,

Nubia .

I n l ike m anner the priests of Ptah of M e m phis clai m ed

that it was thei r god Pta h who was the creator of the
heavens an d the earth an d that the other great gods were ,

m erely for m s of h im They were well aware that T em .

,

Te m u or A te m had been regarded as the creator of the

, ,

gods and the worl d and m en fro m ti m e out of m in d i n

E gypt Yet they attributed to Ptah powers greater than
.

h is Thei r m ethod of procedure was artifi cial an d is readily

.

explain ed They fi rst iden tified Ptah w ith ol d gods l ike

.

T a t en n an d T em an d m ade h im a m e m ber of thei r ,

co m pan ies of gods when this had been done they invented
stories to prove that h is power was greater than that of his
colleagues and that he was the greatest of all the gods of
,

the old co m pan ies F i nally they placed h im at the head of .

,

a co m pany of gods which cons isted of for m s of h i m sel f .

The best proof of these state m en ts i s found i n P ro f E r m a n s .

’

paper entitled E i n D en km a l m empni t is ener

which contai ns a discussion on the con ten ts of a text foun d
on a basal t slab presented to the B ritish M useu m by the
E arl Spencer i n This text is m uch m utilated but ,

k i po t t p p
S ee D r H j u n er s m r an a er D er A u s z u g a er H a t /zor - Te
f
B li
’ ’
1 nut
. .

a n s N u bi en
(
P bli za n a oer K on igl P r eu s s A na l ,

B
'
in Ao /
'
'
. er n , . .

2
u sh e d
i n t h e S i l zu ngs lzer i e/zte a er K on zgl P r eu s s A t a ri , er n ,
’
'

. . li
1 91

p bli d b
1
3
.

yS p
S ee G u ide t o Me E gyp t i a n G a ller i es , 2 20 ( I t wa s fi r s p
P lt
N o. .

xt b y t
By u

rt
p bli d b
u
she

an

she
h ar e, E gyp t i a n I n s cr ip t i on s , I ,
a n d R ea d, i n

y B
M r reas e in A Z , B d
1 90 1 ,

tI ,
a es 3 6 —3 8
1 6 0 ff ; a n d a

d ff w
ne

h a s
M es s r s
a c s m e was

et c h
pp
XXX X pp . f i il
it k of
.

.
39 , . . . . .

i
ts cot t n en s .
 E gy pt ia n I d ea s a b ou t God and the Gd
“ o s 1 17

enough of it re m ai ns to sho w that i t con tains a state m en t of

M e m ph ite theology as i t was understood by so m e priest ,

who flourished probably under the Anc ient E m pi re The .

actual copy wh ich we possess was m ade i n the reign of

S h a b a ka fro m an ol der copy on papyrus which was wor m
, ,

eaten T h is docu m en t st a tes that Ptah m ade T em an d h is

.

gods an d that he was the arbiter of l ife an d death E very

, .

thing o n the earth ca m e i nto existence through h im an d ,

everythi ng whi ch is existed before i t ca m e into being i n the

m in d of P ta h w h o was the heart an d tongue of the co m pany
,

of the gods Thus at the very sa m e ti m e we have w ithi n

.
, ,

twen ty m iles of each other on e body of priests at A nu

asserting that thei r god R a was the creator of the heavens
an d the earth an d another body of priests at M e m ph is
d ,

eclaring the sa m e thing of t h ei r god Ptah A n d i f we had .

all the rel igious l iterature of E gypt at this period w e shoul d

n o doubt fin d that the priests of Hen s u ( H era kle0 po lis ) ,

and of Kh em en u ( H er m opol is ) an d of Ab tu ( Abydos ) and , ,

of U a s t ( Thebes ) an d of B ehu tet ( E dfu ) an d o f S u an

, ,

( S yene ) were, clai m ing the absolute sovereign ty of the gods

for H er u s h efi t T hoth Osiris A m en H orus an d K h emen u
, , , , ,

respecti v ely
d
.

The rel igious texts of all period s contain ev i en ce that

the E gyptians were always occupied i n tryi ng to pu z z le out
the riddle of creation an d we are fortunate i n possessing ,

a papyrus wh ich contains a m ore or less con nected theory

about the origin of God an d the gods and of the heavens ,

a n d the earth T his papyrus was w ritten for a priest call ed

.

N esi M enu and i s dated on the fi rst day of the fourth

-
,

m onth of the twelfth year of Pharaoh Alexander the son o f ,

Al exander i e 3 1 1 ,
The story of the Creation is
. .
,

entitled The B ook of kn owi ng how R a ca m e i nto being ,

““ W

? fl
fi llsfil f fi
f an d is tol d by the
o ,

god N eb er t c h er 5 11 od of the U

Q the E verlasting
, G
U n iverse Where an d how this god existed is not said
.
,

but i t is clear that he was supposed to have created hi m sel f

and to be sel f existent The desire to create the heavens
-
.

1
Th e h er a c
an d E n gli
i ti t t i p bli h d i f i m il
s h t ra n s l t io i my E gyp ti H i
ex

a n,
s

n
u s e n ac s

an
e, w h
er a t i e
it h er a y
i ogl p i t t
h c ex
P apy r i i n t /ze B r i t is /z
M u s eu m, L n n , o do 9 1 10 .
1 18 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

an d t h eearth arose i n h is heart or m in d an d he assu m ed ,

the for m of the god K heper a who fro m fi rst

to last was regarded as a for m of N u or the Creator pa r . ,

ex cellen ce A t th is ti m e nothing ex isted except the vast

.

m ass of Celestial Waters which the E gyptians called N u ,

000 $ an d in this existed the ger m s of all l iv ing th ings

1

that subsequently took for m in hea v en an d on earth but ,

they ex isted in a state of i nertn ess an d helplessness When .

Kheper a rose out of this watery m ass he found h i m sel f i n ,

an e m pty space an d he had noth i ng to stan d upon

, .

K heper a ca m e into being by pronoun cing h 1s own na m e ,

an d when he wanted a place whereon to stan d he fi rst ,

concei v ed the si m il itude of that stan ding place i n his m ind ,

an d when he had given it a na m e an d uttered that na m e , ,

the standing place at once ca m e into being This process .

of thi nk ing out the existence of th ings is expressed i n

E gyptian by words which m ean l iterally laying the “
foun dation i n the heart i e i n the m i n d K heper a also
, . .

possessed a B A or H eart soul which assisted h im i n ,

depicting in his m in d the i m age of the worl d which was to

be And he was also assisted in th is work by m o at z e
. . .

law order truth etc who acted the part of W isdo m as

, , , .
,

described i n the B ook of Proverbs chapter v i i i verses 2 2 ff , , .

K heper a next created the first triad of gods H e had .

un ion wi th h is shadow an d so begot offspring who , ,

proceeded fro m his body un der the for m s of Shu z e air , . .

,

an d dryness an d T efn u t water an d m oisture

, Shu and
“

, .

T efn u t were next un ited and thei r offspring were K eb the

,

E arth god an d N ut the S ky goddess K eb and Nu t were

-
, ,
-
.

un ited and the offspri ng of their e m braces were Osi ris

, ,

H orus S et I sis an d N ephthys

, , O f these Osiris .
, ,

“
Q P
Q is the essen ce of the pri m eval m atter of
wh ich K heper a hi m sel f was for m ed Thus O s iris was of .

the sa m e s ubstance as the G reat God who created the

world an d was a r e i ncarnation of his great gran dfather
,
- -
,

a truly A frican bel ief This portion of the text helps to

.

explain the views hel d about O s i ris as the great Ancestor

god who when on earth was the great benefactor of the
,

E gyptians an d who after h is m urder an d resurrection

, , ,

beca m e the saviour of their souls .

1 20 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

for m ed according to the d i v i ne i ntelligence M o at U nder .

the i nfluence of Thoth o r that for m of the di v i ne intell igence

,

which created the world by a word eight ele m ent s four , ,

m a le and four fe m ale arose out of the pri m eval Nu w hich

, ,

possessed the properties of the m ale and fe m ale T hese .

eight ele m en ts were called N u an d N ut H eh an d Hehet , ,

K ek and K eket and N en an d N enet ; collectively they

,
“
were called K h em en u or the E ig h t an d they were ”
, ,

considered as pri m e v al fathers an d m ot h ers They appear .

i n two for m s :1 As apes four m a l e an d four fe m ale who

.
, ,

stand i n adoration of the sun when he rises and greet h im ,

with songs and hy m ns of praise 2 As hu m an beings . . ,

four having the heads of frogs and fou r the heads of ,

serpen ts T he birth of l ight fro m the waters and of fi re

.
,

fro m the m oist m ass of pri m eval m atter and of R a fro m ,

N u for m ed the starti ng poi nt of all m ythological speculations

, ,

conj ectures and theories of the E gyptian priests T he

, .

l ight of t h e sun gave bi rth to i tsel f out of chaos and the ,

conception of the future world was depicted i n Thoth the

d ivi ne intelligence ; when Thoth gave the word what he ,

co m m anded at once took place by m eans of Pta h an d

Kh n em u the v is ibl e representatives who turned T hoth s
’

co m m an d into deed K h n em u m ade the egg of the sun

.
,

an d Pta h gav e to the god of l ight a fi n ished body The .

fi rst co m pany of the gods consisted of Shu T efn u t K eb , , ,

N ut Os ir is I sis S et N eph t h ys H o r n s an d their governor

, , , , , ,

T em or A t m u
, .

The reader has now before h im the m ain poin ts of t h e

ev iden ce concern ing the E gyptians notions about God ’

an d the cos m ic powers and thei r phases an d the ,

anthropo m orph ic creations with which they peopled the

O ther World all of which have been derived fro m the
,

nativ e l iterature of ancien t E gypt The d ifferent .

in terpretations which differen t E gyptologists have placed

upon the facts de m onstrate the d i fficulty of the s u bj ect .

Speaking generall y the i n terpreters m a y be d i v i ded i n to

.

two classes :( 1 ) Those who regard the E gyptian rel igion

as the product of hal f savage m en and thin k that it is -
,

noth ing b u t a m ixt u re of crude and often d isgusting , ,

n ature cul ts an d superstition s of the m ost stupid an d

ch ildish character ( )
2 Those w h
. o ad m i t the sa v age
origins of m any of the bel iefs which the natural con s ervatis m
 E gy pt ia n I d eas a b ou t G od and the
“
Gd
o s 12 1

Of the E gyptians preserved carefully but who thin k they ,

a r e able to trace a steady develop m en t i n the rel igion until

i t reached a point at w h i ch it possessed true ideas about God

a n d m any of the spi ritual con ceptions which are o n a par

wi th those of the H ebrews and A rabs and m any O rien tal .

Christian peoples The m i n d of the E gyptian was

.

i n capable of abstract thought i n the m odern sense of the

word an d i n every subj ect he sou gh t for con crete facts
, ,

wh ich coul d be expressed i n defi n ite state m en ts F ro m .

fi rst to last the text s proclai m the u nalterable bel ief of the
E gyptian i n the resurrection and i n the i m m ortal i ty of the
s oul that was to be enj oyed i n a transfor m ed Spirit body -
,

i n the K i ngdo m o f Osi ris the god who had co m e upon the ,
”
earth to set right i n the place of wrong N on e but the .

s ouls of the j ust could en ter that k ingdo m an d no liar an d ,

worker of decei t co u l d hope to pass the searching trial i n

the j udg m en t H all an d be declare d i n nocen t on the day
“
o f t he weigh ing of words B ei ng fi n ite the E gyptian .
,

failed to co m prehen d the i nfi n ite and eternal God b u t the ,

G od m a n Osi ris was e v er presen t i n h is m i nd as the

-
,

to mbs of all periods testify an d the E gyptian who sang ,

t h e hy m ns and prayed th e prayers gi v en in the B ook of

the D ead was unl ikely to allow his spi ritual needs to be
“
satisfied by a bel ief i n gods who ate an d drank love d ,

a n d hated waged war an d gre w old an d died

, And here
, .

we m a y give a renderi ng of the an cien t Legend of R a an d

I sis which will illus t rate the stories whic h the E gyptians
,

t old o f t h e i r gods The papyrus con tai n ing the story is

.
_

p reser v ed i n Tu ri n and vers ions of the story have been

1
,

p ubl ished i n E ngl ish F ren ch an d Ger m an 2

T he
'

, , .

Legend r u ns
THE C H A PT ER
TH E D I I N E G OD W H O C RE A T E D V
F V
OF ,

H I M S E L WH O M D E TH E H E A E NS A N D TH E E A R TH A ND
F F
, A ,

TH E B REA TH O L I E A N D I RE A N TH E G O DS A N D
A A
F , ,
D ,

MEN A ND B E STS A ND C TTL E A N D RE PT I L E S A N

F FW F K
, , , ,
D

E A TH ERE D O L A N D TH E I SH ; W H O I S TH E I NG O F
,

M E N A N D G O DS TH E O N E F O R M
, o WH O M P ER O DS O O NE ,
T I F

fb
o i
S ee P leyt e a n d R s s , P apy r u s ele Tu r i n , a es
3 1 , 7 7 , 1 3 1 , 1 38

pp ff i
W edem a n n , D i e R eligion ,
Pl t p
.

Bd
2
S ee L e e u r e, A Z , 1 8 8 3, . 27 . . . . 2
9
u ge, F i r s t S t e s i n E
p gyp t i an, 2 4 1 a n d fo r pp
s u ff
m mar es i of i t s ee
p
. .

E r ma n , A egyp ten , 3 5 9, a n.d M as er ,

L es Or i i
g ,n es p o 1 6 2 —1 6
4 pp . .
122 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

W
HU ND RE D N T E NT Y Y EA R S A E A S S NGL E Y EA R S W HO S E
A A K WA V
A D R I ,

M ULT TUD I N O US N M E S RE UN N O BL E F O R [E E N ] T H E
K
I ,

G O DS N O W TH E M N O T .

Behol d the goddess I sis l ived i n the for m of a

,

wo m an who had the knowledge of words of power H er

, .

heart turned away i n d isgust fro m the m ill ion s of m en

an d S h e chose for hersel f the m ill ion s of the ods but S he g ,
,

estee m ed m ore highly the m ill ions of the S p i r i ts Was i t .

not possible to beco m e even as was R a in heaven an d

upon earth an d to m ake hersel f m istress of the earth
,

and a m ighty goddess by m eans of the knowledge of the

N a e of the holy god
m ? Thus d id S h e m editate i n he r
heart .

B ehold R a en tered [hea v en ] each day at t he head o f

,

his m ariners stabl ishing h i m sel f u pon the double thron e

,

of the two hori z ons N ow the d ivin e one had

.

beco m e old he dribbled at the m outh an d he let hi s

, ,

e m issions go forth fro m h im u pon the earth an d hi s ,

spittle fell upon the groun d This I sis kneaded with .

dust i n her hand and S h e fashioned it i n the for m of a

,

sacred serpent with dart like fangs so that none m igh t -

,

be abl e to escape al i v e fro m i t and she placed i t on t h e ,

path whereon the great god was abo u t to tra v el ,

according to h is desi re rou n d about th e T wo Lands

,

E gypt ) Then the holy 0 d rose up i n the tabernacle o f

.
0
b

the gods 1 n the G reat H o u se ( i e the S ky) Li fe S trength . .

, , , ,

H ealth [be to h im ] ! am ong those who were i n h is train ,

an d [as ] he j ourn eyed on his way according to h is c u sto m

daily t h e holy serpent dro v e h is fangs i nto h im T he
S
.
,

l i v i ng fi re [began ] to depart fro m the god body and th e ’

reptile destroyed t h e dweller a m ong the cedars Then .

the m ighty god opened h is m outh and the cry of H is ,

M aj esty L ife S trength H ealth [be to h im] ! ran g

, , ,

through the h eavens The Co m pany of the gods said

.
,

‘
What is i t ? and the gods of R a said W h at is the
’

,
‘

m atte r No w the god foun d [ no words ] wherewith t o

’
?

answer concern ing h i m sel f for h is j aws shut his l ips , ,

t re m bled and the poison conquered al l h is m e m bers j u s t

, ,

as Hap i the N ile ) c o n q u er et h all the land th rough

wh ich h e fioweth .

Then the great god m ade fi r m h is heart and he cried ,

out to the gods who were i n h is follow i ng sayi ng : Co m e ‘

1 24 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

be fi re ? Can it be water ? I a m col der than water .

I a m h otter than fi re All m y m e m bers sweat m y body

.
,

q u a ket h m i ne ,eye faileth m e I cannot look at the ,

heavens Water exu det h fro m m y face as in the t i m e

.
,

of t h e I n u ndat ion .
’

Then I sis said unto R a O m y d ivine father t ell m e ,

‘
,

thy na m e for he who is able to pronoun ce his na m e shall

,

l ive [ And said ] I a m the m aker of the heavens

’
. R a ,
‘

and the earth I h ave kn i t together the m ountai ns and

.
,

I have created e v erything which exis t e t h upon the m .

I a m t h e m aker of the waters I have m ade M eht u r t to .

co m e i nto being I m ade Ka en m u t f and I have

.
- - -
,

created the j oys of love I a m the m aker of heaven . .

I have m ade to be hidden the two gods of the hori z on .

I have placed the soul of the gods i n the m I a m the .

B eing who openeth his eyes and the l ight co m eth I a m

the B eing who shutteth h is eyes and darkness co m eth .

I a m he wh o co m m andeth and the waters of the N ile

.
,

flow forth I a m he whose n a m e the gods know not

d
. .

I a m the m aker of the hours and the creator of the ays .

I i naugurate festivals I m ake the w a t er flo o d I a m . .

the creator of the fi re of l i fe through which the products

of the workshops co m e i nto being I a m K heper a in .

’
the m orn ing R a at m id day and Te m u in the even ing
,
-
, .

N e v ertheless the poison was not turned aside fro m i ts

course and the pain of the great god was not rel ieved
, .

Then I sis said un to R a : A m ong the words which thou

hast said unto m e there is no m ention of thy na m e D ec la r e .

thou to m e thy na m e and the poison shall leave thee for

, ,

he who declareth his na m e shall l ive M eanwhile the .

’

poison burned l ike blaz ing fi re and the heat thereof was ,

stronger than that of a fi re that burneth brightly Then .

the M aj esty of R a said I w ill per m i t I sis to search m e ,

and m y na m e S hall co m e forth fro m m y body and go

i nto hers Then th e divi n e one h id hi m sel f fro m t h e
.
’

gods and the throne i n the B oat of M ill ions of Years was
,

e m pty And when the ti m e ca m e for the h eart [of the

.

god ] to co m e forth I sis said unto her son H orus : The

,
‘

great god bindeth h i m self by an oath to give h is two

E yes ’
the sun and m oon ) Thus was the great .

god m ade to y ield up his na m e T he n I sis the great lady .

,

of words of powe r said Flow poison co m e out of R a

, ,
.
 E gy pt ia n I d ea s a b ou t G od an d the Gd
“ o s 1 25

Let the E ye o f H orus co m e forth fro m the god an d

S hin e outside his m outh I work I m ake the poison .
,

to fal l on the ground for the v eno m i s conquered V erily

, .

the na m e of the great god hath been taken away fro m

h im R a S hall l ive and the poison shall d ie ; if the
.
,

po ison l iveth then R a shall die S i m ilarly s o and s o .

- -

[i f he hath been poisoned an d t h ese words be said over

h im ] shall l ive an d the poison shall d ie These were ’

.
,

the words which I s is spake the great lady the Q u een of , ,

’
the gods and she had knowledge of R a s own na m e
, .

RUB R I C The above words shall be said over an i m age

of Te m u and an i m age of H er u H eken u an d an i m age
,
-
,

of I sis an d an i m age of H orus

,
.

A PPE N DX I

LIS T OF T HE GO D S WH E OS NA M ES W ERE
REC E IT D BY THE D ECE E AS D TO P ER E C F T HIS
S PI R L
I T-S O U

T he followi ng na m es for m an i m portant section of the

T heban R ecension of th e B ook of the D ead an d the recital ,

of the m either by the father or son of the deceased was

, ,

obl igatory duri ng every festival of A m en t The recital o f .

the m m ade the deceased a co m pan ion o f the gods an d ,

m ade h im dear to the heart o f R a an d con ferred upon h im ,

t h e power to leave the T uat an d to r e enter i t at will Th e -

.

l ist presu m ably gi v es the na m es of all the gods who were

offi cially recogn ised by the priests of Osi ris The last .

section o f it which gi v es the na m es of all the great towns i n

,

which the Cul t of Os iris fl o u rished is i nteresti ng as pro v i ng ,

that under the X V I I I t h dynasty the recogn ition of Osi ri s

as the great An cestor god of the whole of E gypt was -

co m pl ete The l ist is taken fro m the Papyrus of N u ( B ri t

. .

M us N o 1 0 4 7 7 S heet
. .
,

l ‘
a M M

1 . Osiris K h en t i A m enti
2 . Ra -
H eru Khuti
 126 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

4 . Ma at

5 . B oat of Ra

6 . T em

7 . G reat Co m pany of the

Gods .

8 . Little Co m pany of the

Gods
9 H orus lord o f the U rrt “
kw
é]
.
,

Crown
10 . S hu

1 1 T efn u t

12 . K eb

1 3 . N ut

1 5 . N ephthys

H et ka u Neb t er t c h er
-

1 7 . Shen at pet - -
u t h es t - neter

1 8 . Au ker t kh en t t - -
asts

1 9 . Kh eb it -
s ah t neter
-

1
P er h a p s we dp
ar e to r ea es tc/zet n eter u ,
“t h e i
n ne god s,
”
and n ot

pa n t
2
n eter u

Th e S .

e env Co w of C h pt C s a er XVL III .

128 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

The A tet Boat >

o < a
35 .

3 6 . Thoth

Gods of the S outh

=
Gods of the North

— M!
¢
Gods of the West D e

Gods of the E ast i l R fi él e

Gods of the T high

( Great B ear )
=
=
i
g
Gods of offerings
1| a
o

k m tfi
The G reat H ouse
E lfi
‘
P ’

TM
“
The H ouse of F i re
7
! Q R Q Q RM Q
E
The Gods o f the Aa t s D

H
m
l %R sfl
°

T he Gods of the H ori z on

The Gods of the F iel ds

TM R W C‘ '

The Gods of G rain

TL S RT Q
The G ods of F i re TL S R E A
R oads of the South Q R T
E Q
C’
The '

The R oads of the N orth Q R M T

il
l
The R oads of the E ast Q K MT Q
T

R oads of the West flfi fi

i l fll
fi
The
The Gates of the Tuat
gods 1 :
 E gy pt ia n I d ea s a b ou t G od an d the
“ Gd
o s 1 29

The Pylons of the Tuat

gods Pl i afi k m li i

The H idden Doors

R N IE
E
The H idden Gates
ORR R EY?
T he K eepers of the
l h tfili E d
.

o
D oors
The Gates of the Tuat
gods
—
L s
fi
y
:
The H idden Faces

G uards of the R oads +§ ll§lifi l

T he K eepers
lo
ElfiliE h fl lli}
Mi fi ts?s

The K eepers of the

Ce m eteries lo
E
T he F ire gods -

WIMP
R s Q Q E E hfii
‘
The Al tar gods -

The Opener gods

extingu ish fi re
-
, who
an d MIL ! s k li fi
E
i l
w x
fla m e i n A m ent fl f fl R i Zyfil

V OL . I .
1 30 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

THE ABO DE OF THE B LE S S E D

I n pri m iti v e t i m es the E gyptians bel ieved that after
death the so u ls of those who had spoken the truth u pon
earth and who had co m m itted n o act of fraud deceit or
, , ,

double deal ing m ade thei r way by so m e m eans or other to

,

a hea v en and took up thei r abode with the gods Where

,

S
this hea v en was ituated they had no idea an d of what it ,
.

was l ike they had n o con ception but they for m ulated v ague ,

v iews about t h e unseen and unknown ho m e of t h ei r beloved ,

an d so m e of these ha v e bee n preser v ed i n the rel igious

texts of the later E gyptians which ha v e co m e down to us .

About one thing they had no doubt at all na m ely that the , ,

spi rits of the dead left th is earth Pri m itive m a n assu m ed .

naturally that t h ey wen t up i n to the sky and fro m then ce ,

to so m e place beyond it What the sky was exactly he .

di d not know but i n the earl iest ti m es he see m s to h ave

,

t h ought that i t was for m ed of a very large flat slab of

a kind of stone or m etal called oa a wh ich for m ed a ceil ing
'

for the earth an d m ore or less corresponded with i t i n

,

general S hape N ow such a slab m ust ha v e so m ething to

.

rest on so i t was bel ie v ed that i t rested on two m ountai ns

, ,

one i n the east and the other i n the west The eastern
~
.

m oun tai n was called B akha and the western m ountai n ,

M anu H ow this S lab was represented pictorially i n early

.

t i m es cannot be said but i n the oldest hieroglyphic texts

,

k nown the S ky is i ndicated by the hieroglyph m

,
wh ich ,

s ee m s to be intended for a picture of the S lab very sl ightly ,

vaulted with a proj ection at each end of it by which i t

,

rested on the m ountai ns o f B akha and M a n n A nothe r .

early v iew was that the S lab of the sky rested on fou r
pillars which i n later texts are represented by
,
and
when the i nventors of the hieroglyphic syste m of w riting
wanted a deter m inative to i nd icate a rainstor m or a hail
stor m wi th thun der and l ightn ing they used the ign fi
, , S ,

i e the sky fall ing down and the fo u r pillars proj ect i ng
.
, ,

through i t The four pillars of t h e sky i n still later ti m es

.

represen ted the Four Cardinal Poin ts and the pillars were ,
“
thought to be kept in position by the fou r gods who stood
1 32 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the back of the other are a large winged d isk an d so m e ,

i ndeter m i nate obj ect w inged R oun d about the m are

'

.
,

stars .
B y the sho u l ders of the s m aller wo m an is the
goddess N ep h thys holding i n her hands on e of the two
,

boats i n which the s un sailed across the sky and by the ,

thighs S tands the goddess I sis hol ding the other boat .

3. A god lying on the ground with his ar m s stretched out

along i t an d holding a d isk in each han d H is body is
,
.

ben t round to for m a kin d of ci rcle and his feet rest on the ,

ground T he s pace en closed is thought to represen t the

.

region where the dead l ive .

I n an interesting scen e o n a coffi n i n the B ritish M useu m

( N O .6 6 7 0 F i rst
,
E gyptian R oo m ) we fi nd the n ight sky -

depicted in the for m of a wo m an with her ar m s stretched

out at full length above her head O n her body rest t w o .

yellow d isks which sy m bol i z e the m oon an d a red d isk

, , ,

which is inten ded for the sun The v iew that the s ky was .

a wo m an was very popular a m ong the E gyptians down to

a co m paratively late period an d the rel igio u s texts are full
,

of allusions to the birth of the deceased o n the thighs o f

a S ky wo m an
-
.

A nother v iew represen ted the sky in the for m of a gigantic

cow her body for m ing the sky an d her fou r leg s the pillars
, ,

of the sa m e H er legs were held i n position by eight gods

.
,

two to each leg an d her body was kept i n its place by a

,
 The A bd o e of t h e B les s e d 1 33

d
go who held i t up wi th his upraised ar m s
i T his cow ,
}
.

gave bi rth to the sun which was then l ikened to a cal f an d

, ,

the deceased when r e born i n the sky was co m pared to a

-

sucking cal f Accord ing to another very ol d bel ie f the sky

.

was the face of a m a n and the sun and the m oon were h is ,

two eyes the sun was his right eye an d the m oon h is
left a] ? When a stor m ca m e an d thunder clouds con
e ,
-

c ea led the sun i t was tho u ght that the ki ng of darkness had
,

done So m e inj ury to the right eye and caused i t to shed ,

tears rai n ) D uring an ecl ipse the right eye was

.

supposed to be te m porarily d isabled T he m oo n was .

supposed to suffer i n a si m ilar m an ner Yet another

'

V iew hel d in pri m itive ti m es was that the S ky was a vast

.

m eadow over wh ich a huge beetle crawled pushing the ,

disk of the sun before h im T his beetl e was the S ky god .

-
,

and arguing fro m the exa m pl e of the beetle ( S ca r a oa eu s s a cer )

,

wh ich was obser v e d to roll along w ith i ts hi nd legs a ball

that was bel ieved to con tai n its eggs the E arly E gyptian s ,

thought that the ball of the S ky god contai ned his egg and -
,

that the sun was his offspri ng Thanks however to the .

, ,

i n v estigations of the e m i nen t ento m ologist M onsie u r J H ,

. .

Fabre we now know that the ball whi ch the S ca r a oa eu s s a c er

,

rolls along contain s not its eggs but dung that i s to ser v e as ,

food for its egg wh ich i t lays i n a carefully prepared place

,
.

Later still the E gyptians ca m e to the con clusion that

,

the sky was nothing but a v ast layer of water an d then ,

thei r di ffi cul tie s i n explain ing how the sun m oon an d stars , ,

travelled across i t disappeared for they were quite certai n ,

i n their m i n d s that the celestial bodies traversed the S ky i n

boats T h e sun possessed two boats called M a n t c h et
.

”
an d S em kt et an d the m oon planets an d prin cipal stars
, ,

each possessed a boat What these boats were m ade of they

.

n ever stopped to i nqui re and they see m to have been con ten t
,

to th ink that the B oats of R a were m ade of so m e substance

which coul d not be consu m ed F ro m the an nexed i nterest .

ing ill u stration ( p whi ch is reproduced fro m the m arbl e

.

sarcophagus of S et i I we see that about 1 3 5 0 B C the ,

. .

E gyptian s still bel ieved that the sun rose out of the Celestial
Waters each m orn i ng i n a boat This boat is being l ifted .

out of the water by the god N u

2 an d is supported by
the han ds of his upstretched arm s whi ch as the t ext says
, ,

, , ,
1 34 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Co m e forth fro m the waters an d bear up this god

, In .

the boat we see the m onster beetle al ready m en tioned

pus h ing the solar di s k upwards and i nto the hands of the
goddess N ut “
the S ky oddess who receives R a
- G
"
, ,
g

m ? O n the right of the beetle are the goddess

U
l
fi [
o
g
C

N eph t h ys
E ,
d
an th ree gods and on the le ft are I sis
, ,
fl
ea
,

A st or Set K eb the E arth god

, , , , A , i e Thoth
H eka the,
god who u tters words of power Hu , ,

“
T he legend above reads : Th is god rests i n the
Sa ,

An t ( : M an t c h et) Boat with the gods who are w ith him

"
.
1 36 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

but q u ite close to the m was situated the Tuat and i t ran , ,

parallel w ith the m O n the outer side of t h e Tuat was

.

another chain of m ountains an d a river ran between the m , .

We m a y say then that the Tuat closely rese m bled that part
, ,

of the V alley of the N ile which constitutes E gypt and that ,

i t was to all i ntents an d purposes ci rcular i n for m N ow as .

the Tu at lay on the other side of the chain of m ountai ns

wh ich surrounded E gypt and was therefore depri v ed o f the ,

l ight of the sun and m oon wh ich illu m ined its skies i t was ,

shrouded i n the gloo m an d darkness of n ight and was ,

therefore a place of gloo m and terror At each en d of the .

Tuat was a space which was ne ither wholly darkness nor ,

wholly l ight the eastern en d being partial ly l ighted by the

,

r i sing sun and the western en d by the sett i ng sun Where

S
.
,

“
these partially l i hted paces ended thick darkness or
“ sol id darkness g
,

“ ”
the outer dark ness began .
, ,

The part o f the Tuat that was close to E gypt was

a terribl e place which m uch rese m bled the African bush
d
.
,

Parts of i t were desert and parts of it were forest an ,

“
parts of i t were scrub land and there were no roads .

through any part o f it Tracks there were j ust as there .

,

are i n the forests of the S u d an but it was hopel ess for the ,

dise m bod ied soul to atte m pt to fi nd its way by m eans of

the m unless guided by so m e friendly being who kn ew the
,
“ways of that awful region
”
E verywhere there was thick .

darkness All the region o f the Tuat was i nhabited b u t

.
,

the beings who dwel t there were hostile to all n ew co m ers -

,

an d they could only be placated by gifts or m ade sub ,

serv ien t to the soul s of the dead on thei r way to the

kingdo m of Os iris by the use of spells or words of power
, , .

The way was barred too by frightful m onsters wh ich l i v ed

, ,

on the souls of the dead and at one place or anot h er the ,

decea s ed was obl iged to cross strea m s wh ich were fed by

the ri v er in the Tuat and e v en the ri v er i tsel f I n one
, .

part of this terrible region was s ituated a d istrict called

“
Sekhet Het ep et i e the F ield of O fferings or the ”
, . .
, ,

E lysian Fields and with in this was a s u b di s trict called

,

S ekhet A ar u “
the F ield of R eeds i n the latter
,

l ived the god Osi ris an d his court I n pri m itive ti m es his .

kingdo m was very s m all but gradually i t grew an d at , ,

length absorbed the whole of the Tuat H e ruled the .

inhabitan ts thereof m uch as an earthly king ruled m en and ,

 The A bd o e of t h e B l es s e d 13 7
fro m first to last there see m to have been i n h is ki ngdo m
nobles chiefs and serfs j ust as there were i n E gypt
, , ,
.

The desi re of every good m a n i n E gypt was to go to the

“
K ingdo m of Osiris the Lord of S ouls and as w e learn , , ,

fro m the B ook of the T wo Ways or the Two Ways ,

”
1
of the B lessed D ead he m ight go there by wate r or by ,

la n d The d iffi cul ties wh i ch beset h im i f he wen t by land

.

have al ready been i ndicated an d i f he atte m pted to go there ,

by water the d i ffi culties which h e wo u l d have to encounte r

were n o less serious The E gyptian s though t that the .

N ile wh ich flowed through E gypt was connected w ith the

ri v er in the Tuat but to reach the latter the deceased woul d,

have to pass through the two hol es i n the F i rst Cataract

fro m wh ich the N ile rose an d then he woul d have to sail ,

over strea m s of fi re and of boiling water before he arrived

i n port The ban ks of these strea m s were filled w ith hostil e
.

beings which sought to bar his progress an d lucky i n deed ,

was that soul which tri u m phed ove r all obstacles an d ,

reached the C ity of God .

The T heban R ecension of the B ook Of the D ead

contai ns se v eral Chapters dealing w ith the K i ngdo m of
Osi ris an d fro m these the following facts are derived T he
, .

C X L I V t h Chapter states that there were seven halls or

m ansions i n S ekhet Aaru al l of which had to be passed ,

through by the deceased before h e could see the god .

E ach door of each A rit or b a ll was un der the care of three , ,

gods the fi rst was the doorkeeper the second kept a look ,

out and acted as watch m an and the thi rd questioned the ,

traveller who arrived and reported his arrival an d na m e to ,

Osiris or h is officers U nl ess the tra v eller coul d tell e ach .

_

god his na m e he was not per m itted to enter the A ri t ,

guarded by the three god s The na m es of the gods of the .

Se v en A r it s ( Papyrus of N u ) were
E
T
{ R II
A I
I
RI T D R . R K A W R S
OO

S
K E E PER , H ST TT
EKH E

U NHA
-
H
;
E R -
S HT RU ; A T C HE ,
M ET U ;

EQ E T H E R
H
;
E A LD ,

S U K H E RU

A B ES
.

AT
. .

“
4 III
121 1 U H R U N E M H U A T E N T PE ES H E R KA U
R I
. UI P ; ; .

V K K R N

AT
I .
H
HE S E F H ER s HT K H E R u ; ESA B ; E T EQ A ER

R
K HES EFA T U .

V A A T

T
I .
H N K H E M P E NT U S HEB U ; EE ER
K E HAAI

R VI
’ ‘
.

A M T H
R
A AN

AT
I K E N T A U K HA KH E RU ;
.
H ER ; E ES ER

R VI I
A I S B E.

I M . A K HE T ES S E N; A K HERU ; H ES E F ER
K HE M I U .

1
S ee t h e er s n u s h ed
Zw ei Wegen des S eligen Toten ( L e
v io p bli b yipS ig c h ac

z ,
kS
-
c h ac ken

fo r
b u rg, D a s B
m a c f n at ofi B
u cii von

er li n .
den
1 38 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

F ro m another Chapter 1n the sa m e Papyrus ( C X LVI )

we l earn that the S ecret Gates of the H o u se of Osiris I n
S ekhet A aru were ten i n nu m ber an d the na m es of the ,

Gates and of t h ei r keepers were

GAT E I N E P T S E TA U Q AT S E BT H ER T N E E T xH E B xH EB T
.
- - - - - -

S ER T M E TU K H E S F ET NE S H N I U NE H M ET AU A I
- - - - -

E N- I - U A U .

G a t ekeep er . N ERI .

GATE I I NE B T P E T H E NT TA U I N E SB I T N E B T T E M E M U
.
- - - - - -

T E NT B U N E BU
- -
.

G a t eé eq fier M E S P E H or M E S P T A H - -

G TE K
. .

A I I I N E B T H A UT AA T AA B E T S E NET C H M E T N E T ER
.
- - - -

N E B - AM s - H R U - K H E NT - E R -A BTU .

G a t ekeep er E RTAT S E B A N Q
G TE KH
. A .

A IV SE
. E T T E SU H E NT TA U I H ET C H ET K H E F T I
M - - - -

N U U R T AB AR I T S A R U SHUT E M AU
- - - - - - -
.

G a t ekeep er N B EAU
K
. .

G AT E V K H E T N E B T RE HU RE SHT T E B B E T T ATU N E S
.
-

AN -AQ -
E R E s - U N - TE P - F .

G a t ekeep er .
HE N T I R E Q U .

GAT E VI N E P T
.
-
S E N K ET - AAT - H E M H E M ET - A N - RE K H T U Q As

ER U S E KH s AN Q E M T U - Q E T s - E M - SH AA AU
KH
- -

H E FA U H ER - s - AN - RE E M ES T NNU E NT H U

K H ER
-

-
H AT- U R TU - AB .

G a t ekee
p S MAMTI
G TE KT
er . .

A V I I AR H EB S ET B AK AA K H E B I T M ER T -
S EH A P
KH T
. I

A .

Ga t ekeep er A xE N TI
G T E VI I I K
. .

A . R E K H ET -
B E SU -
AxH M ET - TC H A P U - S E PT PAU H A T - -

T E T S MA M A N NETC H NET C H
- - - -
AT E T S E SH H ER - -

S E N S E NT NAH S
- - -
.

G a t ekeep er K H U TC H ET F
G
. .

TE I X AM T H ATN E E T US ER H ER T AB M ES TET N E B s
K
-
A .
- - - - - - -

H E T SH AA -
E M SH E N s S A TU E M - - - - -

U A T C H E T SH E M A T H E S T B E s H EB S ET B A K
- -
E - - -

F E Q A T - N E B - s - R A- N E B .

G a t ekeep er T C H ES E F
G TE K H ER U .
.

X Q NE H ES ET TE NAT U S E B HET - E R - Q A
E N K H ER U
A . AT

s N ER T N E E T -
S H E F S H E FT -
AN
T ER N -
s N ET ET E M K H E NN U s
- - - -
.

Ga t ekeep er . S E K H E NU R .
1 40 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

soul wished to m eet i t o r to co m e in i ts way and only the , ,

words of power which a soul possessed enabled i t to escape

death thro u gh its v eno m The E I GHTH AAT This A at . .

”
was called H a het ep and it was under t h e rule of a god ,

,
called Q a h a h et ep
i k
-
m and i t appears to have
,

contai ned an undergro u nd canal which was connected wi t h

this earth ; at one part of it was a sort of well and the ,

noise m ade by the waters as they entered it and their ,

roar as they ru s hed out was greatly terri fying One .

c reature w a s able to pass over th is region na m el y the ,

E n nu r bird w ith which the deceased identified hi m sel f

, .

“
I n this Aat h e was obl iged to m ake offerings to the lords
o f offerings otherwise the fiends would carry h im off to
,

the block where the sacrifices to the gods were slaughtered .

The N I NTH A A T was called Aksi an d n ot even the gods ,

”

k new exactly wher e it was I t was ruled over by the .

”
holy god who dwelt i n h is egg an d who ter r ified both ,

gods and Spirit so u ls ; no one coul d enter or leave the

-

region without th is god s consent At the entran ce to the ’

Aat was a m ighty fi re the heat fu m es and vapours of , , ,

which destroyed the n ostrils an d m ouths of any who tried

to pass through i t ; only the god of the A at could breathe
its ai r with i m pun ity or those who form ed h is bodyguard
, .

The soul s who wished to pass through this A at wi thout

be ing consu m ed were obl iged to m ake obeisance to the
god and then to obtai n pe rm ission to beco m e on e of h is
,

bodyguard The T E NTH AA T was l ikewise a region of

.

terror and it was ruled over by a god who carried

,

a b u tcher s kn ife i n each hand and bore a serpent on h is

’

head A m ong the S erpent gods who l ived here w ere the
.
-

awfu l beings Nau and Neh ebka u an d they fed upon the ,

a
Spiri t souls and the shadows
-

T of the dead The deceased .

was obl iged to m ake offeri ngs to these gods to burn m yrrh
S
an d to laughter a n im a ls and even so he co u l d not pass ,
, ,

th rough the A at unhar m ed unless I sis and N e ph t h ys were

h is co m pan ions The E L E E NTH AAT was i n K h ert N eter
.

“
V -
,

and i ts chief to w n was called A tu I ts ruler had the .

”

for m of a j ackal headed m a n an d he was ar m ed w ith two

-

slaughtering k n i v es The A at was ituated a m ong h ills

-
.
,

S ,

o r o n a h ill with terraces The deceased who w ished to .

 T he A bd o e of t h e B les s e d 141

pass through th is A at ar m ed h i m sel f w ith the kn i fe where

with H or u s m utilated S et and against this weapon no other ,

weapon could prevail E ve n so the deceased was obl iged

.
,

to declare t h at he was R a and that his S trength was due to ,

the E ye of H orus I t will be re m e m bered that when Osi ri s

.

had been m u m m ified and when his body was S till w i thout
,

l i fe H orus brought h is E ye which he had taken out o f

, ,

the possession of S et and gave i t to h is father to eat , .

Osiris swallowed the E ye and i m m ediately he beca m e ,

a l iving being The deceased also took the for m o f the

.

S m en goose the cackl ing of which pleased the god s and

, ,

he rose like a god being filled with the d iv i ne food of the

,

F ield of Offeri ngs Then was he able to set up a ladder

.
,

an d to cl i m b up by i ts m eans to the place where the gods

and the i m perishable stars were an d his speech beca m e ,

l ike that of the bei ngs who dwell i n the star S ep t ( the
Dog star or S othis )
-
, T he T W E L TH AA T was close to
. F
R asta and its chief town was called U n t
,
I t also was .

a place fu l l of fi re an d the souls of the dead were unabl e to

,

approach i t by reason of the uraei wh ich attacked all co m ers .

The T H I R T EE NTH AA T T his A at was also a region o f .

fi re an d t h e strea m s which fl owed thro u gh i t were of

,

boil ing water I t was a place which caused the Spi rit souls
.
-

great trouble for tho u gh they w ished to drin k an d quench

,

thei r th i rst they were unable to do so because of the fear ,

with which the fi re i nspi red the m T he god who presided .

over the region was a hippopota m us which we see r epr e ,

sented with one forefoot resting on a beetle H is na m e .

appears to be Heb t—r e f and he was the sy m bol of the -

,

celestial river of which the N il e was the contin u ation on

earth .T he deceased could only gain power over th e
waters of this region by the help of th is god whose ch ief ,

place of abode i n it was called U art en t m u gE - -

o M /w vx

T he F O U R T EE NTH AA T is called K h er aha and it appears ,

to have been a region th rough wh ich a great canal flowed ,

an d to ha v e contained m any lakes T he na m e suggests .

that the Aat was the celestial equivalen t of the region

wh ich lay between the N ile and the an cient city of H el io
pol is There appears to be i n the text that describes
.

thi s Aat an allusion to a great canal wh ich was fed directly

fro m the N ile an d flowed through the whole district until
,
1 42 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

at length i t reached the great canal wh ich flowed i nto the

B itte r Lakes T he m odern equ ivalen t of the canal of
.

K her aha was the great Khal ig Canal at the m o u th of

-
,

“
which the fa m ou s cere m ony of cutting the da m was
perfor m ed an n u ally So m ewhere near t h e m o u th a bride
.

was offered to the N ile god an nually The allusion to the -

.

S erpen t god who guarded the two caverns at E lephantine

-
,

thro u gh which the N ile god poured his waters i nto E gypt -
,

and to the town of Te tu ( B usi ris ) pro v es that we are here

deal i ng with one of the pri ncipal do m ai ns of Osiris .

I n the great papyri of the B ook of the D ead according ,

to the Theban R ecension we fi nd detailed pictures of the ,

F ield of Offerings and the F iel d of R eeds wherei n the ,

followers of Os iris hoped to enj oy a l ife of e v erlasting bl iss .

A s these regions have been described i n con nection with

the V ignette of Chapter C X ( see V ol I pp 1 0 7 and , .

a translation of the text of the Chapter has also been given

i n the S econ d V olu m e there is no need to d iscuss the m ,

further here .

I n addition to the Chapters al ready m en tioned there ,

are other sources of i n for m ation about the Tuat or Other

Worl d of the E gyptians and of these the principal works
are the K
B OO O F H I M TH A T I S I N TH E TU A T and the
“ Book of Gates 1 T he B ook Am T u at or
,

,
”

Am i Tuat
”
.
, ,

describes the j ourn ey which the Sun god m akes through -

the Tu at after he has set u pon th is world

, As the .

Sun god approaches the ante cha m ber or v estibule of the

- -

T u at i n the west the gods who are i n charge of h is boat

,

steer d irectly for the entrance to the Tuat The S u n god .

-

takes the for m of a m a n headed ra m and stands w ithi n a -

,

S hrine i n other words he takes the for m of Osiris so that

, , ,

he m a y pass safely th rough the K ingdo m of the dead ,

wh ich is ruled by Osiris I n this for m the Sun god is called .

-

AF R A ( “
133 9 flesh of R a z e the dead body of
, , .

Osi ris As he approaches the Ape gods an d the other

.
,
-

gods and goddesses S ing praises to h im and serpen ts ,

bel ch forth fi re which provides the l ight that enables his

,

Pilot gods to stee r h is boat The doors which bar the way
-
.

are t h rown open by the gods an d Af R a proceeds on h is way ,

1
S ee m y e dit io ns of t he B ook Am Zu a t
’

, th e B ook o
f G a tes , an d the
E gypti a n H ea ven a nd H ie/l, L o don n, 1 905 .
1 44 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

waters of the river N et A s ar II by a nu m ber

- M

of boats which are s pecially created by Osiris an d ,

arrives at the head of the strea m on w h ich the throne

of O s i ris is placed H ere the god s its s u rroun ded by h is
.

followers w h o are described as B aiu S h et a iu or h idden“ ”

,
”
so u ls. The ban ks of the strea m are l ined w ith gods who
ha v e been told off by Osi ris to m in ister to the wants of
A f R a and to m ake h is boat to tra v el i n safety through
the region T he duties of the servan ts of O s i ris i n
.

th is section m a y be thus described : I They protect .

N u the god of t h e great cel estial ocean fro m which rose

,

the river which on earth was known as Ha p or the “ ”

,

N ile fro m the attacks of the legion o f devils called

,

Seb a These dev ils were the act ive ser v ants of S et
.
”
,

the god of chaos darkness and destruction and they

, , ,

endeavoured to prevent the N ile fro m rising at its

appointed ti m e and tried by e v ery m eans i n t h ei r power
,

to fetter its waters duri ng its an nual inundation At ti m es .

S eb a succeeded i n arresting the i nundation and then ,

E gypt was attacked by fa m ine 2 They hack so u ls i n

S
. .

p ieces they i m prison the hadows of the dead They

, .

carry out the death sen tence on those who are doo m ed to
be destroyed i n a place of fi re and they m ake and m aintai n ,

the fi res by wh ich such beings are to be consu m ed The

S
“souls an d “ hadows here referred to m ust belong to
”
.

the dead who have reached this place but who through ,

s i n co m m itted upon earth an d through the lack of ,

offerings m ade to the m upon earth have failed to fi n d ,

nourish m ent and ha v e perished i n consequen ce With .

the m too are j oined the soul s which have been conde m ned
, ,

i n the J u dg m en t by Osi ris an d the souls of tho s e who

,

have rebelled against R a The execution an d the bu rn ing

.

of the da m ned take place soon after m idn ight each day ,

an d th u s the K ingdo m of Osi ris is cleared of the wicked ,

an d the B oat of Af R a can pursue its course u nhindered

by the m I n ret u rn for these s ervices the gods recei v e
.

dail y ration s fro m thei r god an d t h ey rej oice so greatly ,

i n h is l ight that as soon as he lea v es thei r region i n

,

darkness they begi n to weep and la m en t an d to igh

, ,
S
for h is return on the following day .

F ro m the K ingdo m of O siris the Boat of Af R a passes

northward s to the F O U R TH S E C T I O N of the Tuat or the real m ,
 T he A bd o e of t h e B les s e d 1 45

of Seker z
é] an a n c I en t D eath god who 1s probably
,

far older than Osiris an d whose territory lay a l ittle

-
,

to the south of M e m phis H ere serious d i ffi culties .

awaited Af R a for there was no river i n Ra stau the

,
-
,

kingdo m of S eker and his boat was therefore usel ess , .

H ere the hal f l ight of the K i ngdo m of O s iris was

-

exchanged for the blackest darkness an d the fertile fiel ds ,

and the strea m s o f the F iel d of Offeri ngs were exchanged

for rocks an d m ountains an d deserts filled wi th wi nged
, , ,

serpents an d serpents with t w o o r three heads and

, ,

A f R a is howe v er
.

m onsters of m ost terri fyi ng aspect .

, ,

boun d to traverse these on his way n orthward an d ,

co m pelled by his words of power the gods of R a stau take -

h im out of h is ow n boat an d lead h im by way of ,

subterranean corridors an d galleries in the rock through ,

or rather abo v e the awfu l K ingdo m of D e a th The

, .

veh i cle i n whic h he travels is n o longer a boat but is the ,

body of a serpent wh ich gl ides easily thro u gh the ,

passages o f the rock Very few gods atten d h im on his .

j ourn ey but a m ong the m are Thoth H orus an d the

, , ,

servants of A npu E ach passage has se v eral doors i n

.

it an d everywhere are servan ts of S eker i n the for m of

,

m onster serpents wh ich apparently unw ill ingly assist , ,

Af R a on his way A t no part of the j ourn ey does .

Af R a m eet S eker and the dead Sun god takes care to ,

-

avoid that portion of R a stau where Death s its i n m aj esty -

,

w ith deadly serpen ts an d m onsters about h im The .

san ctuary of S eker as we see fro m the pictures of the

F
F I TH S E C T I O N o f the Tuat is en closed by a wall of
,

san d Th is god is i n the form of a m a n but has a hawk s

.
’

head an d a pair of wings which e m erge fro m the back ,

of a two headed serpen t -

T he shri n e of S eker is .

pyra m idal i n for m an d is filled w ith the blackest darkn ess

,
.

As Af R a passes i t the B eetl e of K heper a en ters h is ,

boat an d the r ev iv ific a t io n of the dead S un god begi ns

,
-
.

This part of R a stau is called A m het -

an d
here 18 S i tuated the stream of fi re or boil ing water i n , ,

wh ich were burn ed or boiled those who had i n curred the

, ,

displeasure of S eker A co m pan y of the gods an d a .

goddess presided ove r th is place an d it was thei r duty ,

to carry out the executions decreed by the gods E ach .

VOL . I . L
1 46 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

god was provided with a block of slau ghter on which he ,

hacked the dead to pieces and this done he cast the pieces ,

in to the fire which he produced fro m h is own body ;

the goddess l ived partly on the blood of the dead and ,

partly on rations decreed to her by the gods We ma y .

n ote i n passi ng that no provision for the b ea t ified

,

existed i n the k ingdo m of S eker an d it see m s as if the ,

priests of this ancient god assu m ed that with his death a

m a n ca m e to an end eternally .

M eanwhil e the B oat of Af R a m oves on assisted by ,

the gods of the dead of S eker an d at length it reache s the ,

waters which existed on the northern boundary of his

kingdo m H ere the god leaves his serpent boat an d
.
-
,

r e en ters h is river boat

-
wh ich by so m e m eans has been
-
,

transported to the entrance of the S I X TH S E C T I O N of the

Tuat The S ixth Section of the Tuat l ies to the north of
.

the real m of S eker an d A fu R a traverses i t i n a boat I t

, .

is called M et c h et m u n eb t Tuat an d contains the abodes

- - -
,

of the dead kings of E gypt and of the Khu or Spi rit ,

souls As A fu R a passed through i t he salut ed all the

.
_

dwellers there and besought the m to slay A a pep for

h im i n return for thei r services he decreed the m offerings
i n abundance I n the p ictures of this section we see
.
,

A fu R a lyi ng on the back of the fi v e headed serpent -

Ash heru which has its body bent over h im to protect

-
,

h im . O n the head of the god is the B eetle of K heper a ,

sy m bol of resurrection At this poin t i n h is j ourney .

,

A fu R a begins to travel towards the east and to di rect ,

his course to the M oun tain of the Sunrise i e B akhan , . .

,

J §k § w H itherto he has been travelli ng ,

fro m south to north All the gods of th is section assist .

A fu Ra on his way and the m onster serpent U ne m Khu ,

-

devou rs the shadows of the dead an d the spi ri ts of the

e ne m ies of the Sun god A m ong the m are the Four -
.

Sons of H orus who spring in to bei ng fro m the back of

,

U ne m Khu as soon as they hear the voice of Af R a an d

-
.

the Four For m s of Osi ris and the N ine S erpen ts which , ,

represen t the gods T a t h en n Te m u Kheper a Shu K eb , , , , ,

A s ar ( O siris ) H orus A fu and Het epu i

V
.
, , ,

T h e S E E NTH S E C T I O N of the Tuat is called T h ephet

“
shetat or the H idden R egion and it is a conti nuation ”
, ,
1 48 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

The god is i n the for m of the serpen t M e hen and he ,

is acco m pan ied by twel v e Sailor gods who s ing to h im -

, ,

an d scatter water w ith thei r paddles on the beings who

l ine the banks The path of the god is l ighted by
.

twel v e uraei who pour out fire fro m thei r m out h s and
, ,

at the end of the section A fu R a passe s the fi eld

labourers who c u l tivate the fields of Osi ris under the
,

d irection of H or u s Governor of the Lake of the Tu at

, ,

an d the Twel v e Task m asters of Osiris ( the T c h a t c h a u ) ,

and the twel v e goddesses who weave the l inen gar m en ts ,

wh ich are req u ired i n the section

The T E NTH and E L E E NTH S E C T I O NS of the Tuat V .

are called M et c h et q a t u t c h ebu an d R een q er r t apt kh a t u ,

”

and form part of the kingdo m of the Sun god of An n -

,

or H el iopol is an d a part of the E astern Delta The

, .

beings who dwell i n the Tenth Section have two

d u ties to perfor m :1 to slay the ene m ies of A fu R a an d
.

to destroy thei r bodies and 2 to help in the recon , .

struction of the disk of the sun which was to appear ,

i n the sky of this worl d that day The boat of A fu .

R a now passes over a series of lakes wh ich see m to ,

represen t the lagoons of the E astern D elta i n wh ich ,

we see a nu m ber of for m s of m en i n the v ario u s attitudes ,

whic h hu m an bodies assu m e as they are d rown ing As .

A fu R a passes o v er these lagoons H or u s addresses the ,

“
m en drowned i n the m and assures the m that thei r
m e m bers shall not perish nor thei r flesh decay ,
but he ,

m akes n o pro m ise to bring the m u p an d to gi v e the m ,

a renewed existence on dry land This secti o n contains .

m any m agical serpents as well as gods and goddesses , ,

and the m ystic sceptre and they all help Afu R a ,

onward i n his course .

T he boat of A fu R a m akes its way through the

E le v en th S ection l ighted by a disk of l ight en ci rcled
, ,

by a serpen t which rests on the prow ; this d i s k is

,

“Pes u ”
called t The tow rope of the boat is for m ed
.
-

of the body of the serpen t M e h en A fu R a fi rst passes .

the R ed and White Crowns and then arri v es i n the ,

territory of the town of Sai s where the god m eets the ,

Four Form s of the goddess N e ith A fu R a next passes .

the two headed god A p er her n eb t c h et who wears two

-
,

crowns and the m ystical for m s o f the body an d soul of

,
 T he A bd o e of t h e B les s e d 1 49

Te m u an d the body an d soul of the S tar god S h etu

,
-
.

T he region to the le ft of the god i s on e of fi re an d i n ,

it but qu ite close to the boat stands H orus who is

, , ,

working m agic with the snak e headed boo m erang which -

he holds i n h is han d Before h im is the serpen t called .

S et heh the “ ”
eternal Set H orus is s u per in ”

ten ding the destruction of th e bodies Souls shadows and

.
,

, , ,

heads of the ene m ies of R a wh ich 15 being effected I n the ,

pits of fire before h im The fi re i n the pits is suppl ied .

fro m the bodies of the goddesse s who are i n charge of

the m I n the fi rst pit the v i cti m s are i m m ersed i n the
.
,

fiery depth s head downwards When A fu R a arri v es at .

the last of the pits his j ourney through the T uat ,

proper is en ded an d i t only re m ains for h im to pass

,

through the an te cha m ber to the east of i t i n order to ,

arrive at the sky of th is world I n h is j ourney he has .

traversed the Tuat of Thebes the Tuat of Os iris of ,

Abydos the Tu at o f S eker of M e m ph is the Tuat of

, ,

N eith of Sais the Tuat of B ast of B u b a s t is an d the

, ,

Tuat of T em of A nu or H el iopol is an d he has followed , ,

a course which fi rst wen t fro m south to north then to the ,

east and fi nally towards the M ountai n of the Sun rise

, .

“
A fu R a has now reached the utter m ost l i m it of thick
darkness and arrives at the T W E L TH SE C T I O N of the
, F
Other World which is called K h eper kekiu kh au m es t u
,
.

This section contai ns the great m ass of Celestial Waters

called N u and the goddess Nu t who is here the
, ,

person ification of the god of the m o rn ing We see .

Afu R a i n his boat as before an d i n fron t of it is the ,

B eetle of K h eper a under w hose for m the n ew sun is to

,

be born B efore the boat is the great serpen t A n kh

.

n e t eru an d twel v e a w kuzu gods taking hol d o f the

, ,

tow l ine en ter th is serpen t at the tail and draw ing the
-
, , ,

god i n his boat through the body of the serpen t bring ,

h im out at his m outh D u ring hi s passage through the .

serpen t A fu R a is transfor m ed into K heper a an d the ,

a m é /zzu gods are also tran sfor m ed and e m erge with h im ,

fro m the serpent an d m in ister to h im all the day Afu

, .

R a in the for m of Kheper a is now towed i nto the

, ,

sky by twelve goddesses who lead h im to S hu the , ,

god of the at m osphere and S ky of this world S hu .

recei v es K heper a and places h im i n the open ing i n the

,
 T h e P a pyr u s of An
'

I 5 0

se m icircular wall which for m s the end of th is section ,

and people o n t h is earth see h im i n the for m of a

.

disk of l ight Afu R a in the for m of a d isk of l ight

.
, ,

has n o further use for his m u mm ified for m i n whic h he

traversed the Tuat an d we see it cast as ide and lying , ,

against the rounded end of the Tuat As the d isk .

appears i n the sky the newly born god of day is ,

-

acclai m ed by gods and goddesses who destroy any and ,

e v ery ene m y who appears i n the presen ce o f the god ,

and si ng hy m ns to h im I t was assu m ed that the souls .

who travelled with A fu R a through the Tuat underwent

the sa m e transfor m ations as he did and were r e born on ,
-

earth wi th h im .

We m a y n o w consider the other Guide to the Tuat

wh ich was m uch used by the followers of Osi ris under the
X V I I I t h and X I X t h dynasties This Guide m a y be called .

”
the B ook of Gates because the m ost i m portant features ,

of the Tuat according to this work were the Gates and thei r
uardians I n the F I R ST S E C T I O N i e the Western V esti
g .
, . .
,

bule the Sun god of n ight is seen i n the for m of a beetle

,
-

w ithi n a disk which is surrounded by a serpen t with volu m i

,

nous folds he rests in h is boat and is acco m pan ied by the

gods S a and Heka i e the pers o n ifi c a t io n s of knowledge and
, . .
,

the word of power The section is called S et A m en t et

.
“

q
fi —’
uH o
w and its guardian gods are S et and T et
,
.

O n each SI- S13 81 the boat are twelve gods one group being ,

gods of the m ountain and the other “ gods of the ”

, ,

m ountai n of the H idden Land “

The gods O f the m ountai n .
”

are the offspring of R a hi m sel f an d they ca m e i nto being ,

fro m his eye .

The S E CO ND S E C T I O N of the Tuat is guarded by the

serpent S A S ET an d when the Sun god of
i
-
’

n ight enters it he takes the for m of a ra m headed ma n the -

Serpent goddess M e hen envelops his shrine and his boat is

-
,

towed by four gods who are the gods of the four quarters
,

of the earth The work which A fu Ra does i n this Section

.

“
of A m en ti is to weigh words and deeds to j udge between ”
,

“
the great an d l ittl e gods to assign thrones to the spi rits , ,

and to ban ish the da m ned to the place which is set apart
”
for the m an d to destroy thei r bod ies
, F ro m this text i t .

is clear that a j udg m en t of the dead took place i n A m enti ,

15 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

The T H I R D S E C T I O N O f the Tuat is approached through

“
pé d LQ Q Ai [
C
a gate called S eptt U a u au -
’

ie
. .provided with fla m es whic h is guarded by the
, ,

serpen t A Q B I
k j n
l [ a A fu R a passes
gate unhar m ed for at the word of S a t h e fla m es turned
through
‘ M this .

aside an d the warders withdrew thei r opposi tion A fu R a

, .

n ext passes through the

“ Boat of the E arth wh ich is i n ,

the for m of a long tun nel w ith a bull s head at each end of ’

it I t is supported by eight gods and guarded by seven

.
,

gods who sit upon it and it was the abode of the E arth god ,
-

3 fl
A fu R a next passes the twel v e S hrines of the holy
.

gods and at h is word thei r doors fly open and they salute h im ;

, ,

i n return for this A fu R a gi v es the m food and air an d when ,

he has passed the doors close again and the gods i nside ,

la m ent an d bewail h is departure A l ittle further on are .

twelve gods who are partially i mm ersed i n the Lake of

B oil ing Water the sten ch of which is so strong that bi rds
,

betake the m selves to fl ight as soon as they see this Lake .

The description of this Lake given in the text recalls the

words of D io do ru s S ic u lu s ( I I 4 8 ; X I X 4 8 ) about the , ,

(t
w at 12
-
m K inn y and suggests that the wri ter
,
had in m ind
the hot sulphur springs wh ich ex ist i n so m e parts of the
S u d an or the hot springs of the Oasis of Kh arga h T h e
, .

quain t costu m e of the gods suggest that they were foreigners .

B efore each god is a é em t et plan t which was used i n m aking

, ,

beer and A fu R a decrees to h im a regular s u pply of bread

,

an d vegetables Three serpents now atte m pt to block the

.

way of A fu R a The fi rst of these A apep collapses as the

.
, ,

resul t of the utterance of a word of power by Te m u an d ,

l ies spell bound The T c ha t c h a u gods s m ash his head

-
.
,

and m ake gashes i n his body The serpen ts Seb a and Af .

are attacked by the gods N ebu khert an d they l i kewise -

,

are spell boun d and reduced to helplessness All these

-
, .

gods live upon the sa m e food as R a but they also partake ,

of the spirits of the offerings which are m ade to K h en t i

A m enti a very ancient god of the dead who was worshipped
,

at Abydos As A fu R a leaves this Section the T c ha t c hau

.

an d the other gods la m en t and return to its en tran ce to ,

await the arrival of the god on the following n ight I n th is .

 Th e A bd o e of t h e B l es s e d 153

Section we fin d no place for the dead or for the souls of

hu m an beings .

The F O U R TH S E C T I O N of the Tuat is protected by a

G ate which i s called Neb t s t c h efa u
U

an d is guarded by the serpent T C H E T B I ( A S A fu

DJ M .

R a enters it he sees the sep u lchres of the gods who for m

the bodyguard of Osi ris an d co m es to the twel ve H ou r ,

goddesses who are d iv ided i nto two groups S ix i n each

, ,

group by the m onster serpen t Her r t which spawns twel v e

, ,

serpents A fu R a orders the gods who tow his boat to take

.

h im to the habitations of the god A res or S ar ,

“
an d on h is arrival there he raises up to l i fe the broken
”
souls an d apportions the m m eat an d dri n k O n the right
, .

of Afu R a are the twelve gods who carry thei r KA U or

’

Do ubles which they offer to the go

, A fu R a next passes d .
,

the Lake of L ife an d the Lake of the L iv ing U raei ,

.

R ound the for m er stand twel v e j ackal headed gods who -

i nvite the god to bathe i n it and say that i ts waters are too ,

holy for any soul of the dead to approach F ro m the latter .

the u raei drive a w ay e v ery soul wh ic h atte m pts to approach

i t an d the words which they utter are so terrible that they
,

destroy the shado w s of the dead which have succeeded i n

getting near it Further on Afu R a passes the shri ne of
.

K h en t i A m enti who appears i n m u mm y for m wears the

, ,

White Crown an d stands on a serpent Two co m pan ies

, .

of gods S tan d by the S hri ne an d Heru u r one of the oldest ,

-
,

“
gods of E gypt addresses K h en t i A m ent i as Osi ri s an d ”
, ,

declares that all spi rits both the good and the bad hold h im , ,

i n awe Afu R a does not address Os iris and apparently he

,
.
,

takes n o n o t ic e of the gods who praise h im but he calls ,

upon H orus to avenge h im on those who conspi re against

h im and to cast the m to the “ M aster of the Lords of the
,

furnaces that he m a y have the m destroyed The furnace s .

,

or fi r e pits are fou r i n nu m ber an d i n to these the en e m ies

-
, ,

of A fu R a are hurled an d destroyed Who these ene m ies .

are is not clear but that they have i ncurred the displ easure
,

of A fu R21 is certain
F
.

The F I TH S E C T I O N of the Tuat is called A rit

®
q q an d A fu
q;
R a is ad m itted through its gate
,
15 4 T h e P a pyr u s of A
“Teka “F ier l
CI T
”
by a S erpent god called-
her or -
y
face. The god is towed as before and he first m eets ,

the n ine gods Kheru E n n u t c h i an d a group of gods

-
,
“
who repre s en t the souls of m en who dwell i n the
”
Tu at ,
and who are un der the control of the god
H er iq en b et ef A fu Ra next m eets a co mpany of gods who
.

“
represen t the souls of those who were speakers of the
”
truth upon earth and who m agn ified R a
,
As a .

reward they are given habitations of peace w ith R a ,

praises are sung to thei r souls they shall eat m eat i n ,

the F ield of R eeds ( Sekhet A aru ) an d offerings S hall be ,

m ade to the m always upon earth even as to Het ep , ,

the Lord of the F ield of O fferings ( Sekhet Het epe t ) .

F ro m these state m ents i t is C l ear that the souls of those

who had led a l ife of truth and i ntegrity upon earth
enj oyed existence w ith the gods i n the F ield of Offerings ,

i n a place specially set apart for the spi rits and souls of
t h e righteous .The i mportan ce of offerings is once again
i nsiste d on an d i t is certa i n that the rel igion of the
,

E gyptians was i n the m ain one of s a c r ifi c eS a n d offerings

, ,
o .

To the right of A fu Ra are the twelve gods who “

sing praises i n t h e Tuat an the twelve , d
gods who
hold the m easuring cord an d the four H en b iu gods
,

who are the o v erseers o f the celest ial do ma I n s T he .

fi rst of these groups of gods enjoy the ir posi tion i n the

Tuat because they praised R a m orn ing and even ing ,
“
an d because they satisfied h im ; an d they partake of
the food of the god The gods w ith the m easuring
.

tape m easure out the allot m en ts for the blessed an d n o ,

soul takes possession of h is allot m ent unless he has proved

h i m sel f to have been a speaker of the truth upon earth .

T he groun d whi ch is cul ti v ated by the blessed is kept

i n a fertile state by the Hen b iu gods who fro m ti m e to ,

ti m e dress it w ith sand“ ”

To the l eft of the god are
.

seen represen tat ives o f the four great nations of m en

in to wh ich the E gyptians d ivided m an ki nd na m ely M en ,

E gyptians ) N egroes L ibyans and Asiatics ; the

, , ,

E gyptians and the L ibyan s are said to have sprung fro m

the eye of R a I t is to be noted that the m e m bers o f
.

each nation or people l ive together i n the Tuat N ear .

these are the gods who ad m in ister the K ingdo m of Osiris

15 6 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani
and who were declared speakers of the trut h at th e
J udg m en t Twel v e other gods are engaged i n the culti
.

v ation of wheat whi ch is here called the body and

“

:é é
,

m e m bers of S ar
i an d the beings who ate
fi
‘

, ,

this wheat ate the body of thei r god Wheat was the .
1 “plan t
of truth an d Osiris was T ruth an d the eaters of t h e d i v in e
, ,

wheat beca m e truth eve n as h e was

V ,

The S E E NTH S E C T I O N of the Tuat is g u arded by

.

a gate whi ch is called Pes t it an d i ts warder is the ,

serpen t god A K H A N AR I T
- — H ere are found a o

nu m ber of gods whose ar m s an d hands are hidden and w h o ,

“
represen t i nv isible beings who m the dead are able to see .

These m ust be followers of R a for Afu R a pro m ises the m ,

that they shall be with h im i n Het Benben i e the H ouse -

, . .
,

of the B enben S tone i n A nu ( H el iopol is ) wherei n the spi ri t ,

of the Sun god was supposed to dwell on certai n occasions

-
.

N ext co m e gods ar m ed wi th cl u bs havi ng forked ends ;

t h ese are the Kheru M et a u h whose duty i t was to m ai m
-
,

an d destroy the serpen t S eb a This m onster is seen near .

the m an d fro m out of his body twel v e hu m an heads e m erg e

,

when A fu R a appears B eyond is a gro u p of S tar gods .

- -
,

who hol d the rope which fetters Q an o r Aqen o r Naq , , ,

a god whose function s are not known exactly Close by .

,

on the back of the serpen t Neh ep l ie twel v e m u m m ies who , ,

“
represen t those who are asleep i n the body of O si ris
these are i n the hands of Tu a t i the god of the T u at A s ,
.

A fu Ra passes these Tu a t i addresses the m u m m ies an d ,

bids the m cast aside t h eir ba n dages and throw off thei r
'

w igs an d collect thei r bones and flesh and open thei r

, ,

eyes an d rise up fro m thei r state of i nertness and take

, ,

possession of thei r estates i n S ekhet Neb t Het epet .

Further on is a pool of boil ing water or a lake of fi re an d , ,

the heat w h ich arises fro m the serpen t i n it is so fierce that

the gods and souls of the earth dare not approach the pool .

The duty of the gods who s it round about it is to pro v ide

war m th fo r the Governor of A n kert i e for the Governor , . .
,

of the T uat of H el iopol is A fter a ti m e the s e gods receiv e .

su
1 P
bj t
of Wi d
ec vl
r .

i n h is
e
a ua
em an n

bl p p
e
h as
a er
c oll t d
O
ec e

S R S V TAN T
I I
a nu m

EG E
b of i mpo t t f
er

.
r an ac t s on th i s
 The A bd
o e of t h e B les s e d 15
7
their bod ies and souls fro m the serpen t Neh ep an d then ,

they proceed to the F ield of R eeds .

When A fu R a en ters the E I GHTH S E C T I O N of the Tuat ,

w h ich is guarded by a gate called B ekh kh i [ [r ,

J gMA _

the warder of which is the S erpen t god S E TH ER

[ f l Q ’
- o
, ,

“
o r F iery Face he passes i nto the western part of the
,

Tuat of An n or H el iopol is ,
H is boat is towed i nto a very .

long lake or a series of lakes or lagoons which m ust

, , ,

represen t the lakes i n the D elta or a part of the M edit er ,

r a n ea n S ea ; the god who is i n charge of these waters

i s N u I n the water i tself we see four groups of m en
.

perfor m ing e v olutions i n the waters T hese are addressed .

by the gods who are towi ng A fu R a and are ordered by ,

the m to praise the soul of R a wh ich i s i n heaven an d his ,

body which is on the earth N ext the god o f the waters .

,

N u calls upon the m en i n the waters to w orship R a and

, ,

pro m ises the m that they shall breathe air throug h thei r
n ostrils an d enj oy peace i n their waters Offerings shall
, .

be m ade on earth to thei r souls wh ich shall never d ie and , ,

they shall be fed l ike R a whose body is on earth and whose

, ,
-

soul is i n hea v en The m en i n the water m ust assuredly

.

represen t those who ha v e been d rowned i n the N ile or i n ,

the Lakes of the D el ta or i n the sea Apparently the , .

E gyptian theologians d id not know how to arrange for the

bodies of those who were drowned bei ng rej oin ed by thei r
souls so they decided that they m ust be conten t to re m ai n
,

s eparated fro m thei r so u ls even as R a is separated fro m ,

h is soul Further on are the T c ha t c h a u or chiefs or

.
, ,
”
task m asters who have been already m entioned and a
, ,

group of souls each of who m stands w ith a loaf of bread

,

an d so m e s eé encu vegetables before it These so u ls r epr e .

sent the great co m pany of those who have been per m itted
to take up their abode by the Lake of F ire call ed S erser ,

i n the very centre of which stood the thron e of Osi ris an d ,

who are fed daily by the order of Osiris T hey receive .

a fixed daily ration the quantity of which n e v er varies i n

, ,

“
fact thei r daily bread Thi s ration was given by the
.

T c h a t c h au or by gods un der their d i rection an d ev ery so u l

, ,

re ce ived its portion wi thout any addition or di m i nution I n .

passing thro u gh the Tuat A fu R a confi r m s this ratio n to ,

15 8 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the soul s who are the faithful servan ts of Osi ris Furthe r .

on is a co m pany of the ene m ies of Osi ris who stand with ,

thei r arm s tied together at the elbows beh ind thei r backs i n
a m ost pain fu l attitude B efore t h ese an d facing the m i s
.
, ,

the m onster serpen t Khati which belches fi re on the m , ,

whilst the seven gods who stand on h is back aid the work
of their destruction The offences w ith which they are
.

charged is conte mpt of secret things the m ysteries ) ,

i nsul t offered to the sacred obj ect called s eé efn and the ,

profanation of the m ysteri es of the Tuat and the p u n ish ,

m ent which H orus t h e Aged i n fl icts u pon the m is m u tilation

and burn ing of their bodies and ann i h ilation of thei r souls
, .

The N I NTH S E C T I O N of the Tuat is guarded by the

“
gate called Aat s h efs h eft the warder of which is the
-
,

S erpent god AB TA
-

n
The pictures wh
. ich illustrate
this S ection represen t the perfor m ance of the cere m on ies
that were carried out i n i t with the v iew of m aking A fu
R a to fi n ish his j ourney i n the Tuat successfully The boat .

of the god is towed as before by fo ur gods but the way of _

,

the god i s blocked by the serpen t A a pep and the c rocodil e

S es h s es h or Sessi
, . T o destroy the m see m s to be i m possible ,

but t h ey m a y be rendered i m potent by m eans of spells cast

on the m by A fu R a Against the m go forth gods posses
.

sing words of power and the Saiu Ape god s an d the Sait
,
-
,

goddesses the second and the third of these groups work

m agic agai nst the m onsters by tying knots i n ropes and ,

m uttering spells over the m as they work H aving taken .

up their positions all these shake out the nets which they
hol d in their han ds and recite thei r i ncantations and A a pep
, ,

and S essi are rendered powerless B etween the m on s ters .

and the groups of gods already described is the prostrate

figure of a god called A a i who is grasping with both hands
,

the end of a rope wh ich is held by th ree m en ar med with

,

harpoons . Aa i has on h is head a s m all disk and two ,

obj ects wh ich rese m ble the ears of an ass H e m a y be .

a for m of the Sun god for the ass is one of the types of
V
-
,

the god or he m a y represen t a icti m w h ich had been

,

placed t h ere to te m pt the crocodile fro m his place N ext .

A fu Ra approaches the serpent K h epr i who h a s a head ,

an d a pai r of hu m an legs at each end of h is body and unde r ,

h im passes a rope w h ich is hauled by the E ight Powers on

1 60 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani
w
of which is the S erpent god AM N ET U F
Qfl fi h
- - -

O nce m ore A a pep appears b u t he is in fetters and the , ,

gods of the S ection stand ready to attack h im with kn ives

if nece s sary N ext co m e four Ape gods each holding a
.
-
,

large hand an d their duty is to stand near the Sun god

,
-
,

two on thi s side and two on that an d hol d up the disk i n ,

the sky and s ing hy m ns to it T he gods who stand on

, .
.

the right of Afu R a place crowns on the head of the Sun

god and give na m es to all h is for m s and drive away S et
, , ,

and s ing hy m ns to the new Sun god Those on the left -

.

carry d isks for h im and open t h e Gate of A kert to h im and

, ,
“m
bear stars and l ike the , orn ing stars i n J ob xxxvi i i 7
, , ,

s ing hy m ns to h im when he is recei v ed i nto the ar m s of

t h e S ky god Nu
F
-
.

The T W E L TH S E C T I O N of the Tuat is guarded by a

gate called T es er t baiu the warders of which
-

O
are the Serpent gods S E P I fi l and R ER I -
T his
gate is d ifferen t fro m all the rest for no co m pan ies of gods
m ,

guard it and tho u gh fla m es of fi re sweep roun d about it to

, ,

keep away ene m ies its C hief protectors are t h e S erpen t ,

gods an d the standards of K heper a and Te m u J ust .

before A fu R a reaches this part of the Tuat he transfor m s

hi m self into the Beetle of K hepera which has the solar ,

disk i n front of i t an d so e m erges fro m the eastern end of

,

the Tuat in to the vestibule which is the i mm ed iate en tran ce

to the sky of this world When the ball of the sun co m es .

to the celestial ocean it is placed by the gods of the dawn

i n the M an t c h et Boat an d it begi ns its j ourney across the ,

sky Thus A fu R a has co m pleted his j o u rney through the

.

Tuat has tri u m phed over all dangers therein has passed
, ,

j udg m en t on h is ene m ies an d bestowed rewards on his ,

friends and as R a i n the eastern sky he begins to dispense

,

heat and l ight an d l i fe to the i nhabitants of this world

, ,
.

All the souls who have acco m pan ied h im i n his boat l i v e
again and they look down fro m i t upon thei r old ho m es
,

and friends T hey l i v e with R a eat of his food are

.
, ,

arrayed i n apparel l ike h is an d partake of his nature ,

.

For the beings in the Tuat who were not pro v ided
for by Osiris existence m ust have been v ery sad for
, ,

they were obl iged to l i v e i n darkness and m isery except ,

 Th e Gd o s of th e B o o k of the D d ea 16 1

for the brief space of ti m e each n ight whe n A fu R a

passed thro u gh the Tuat I n fact the Tuat was a place .
,

of darkness hunge r thi rst an d s u ffering for m any souls

, , , .

The E gyptian s d id not bel ie v e in purgatory or e v erlasting

pun ish m en t ; the souls i n the Tuat l i v ed j ust so long as thei r
friends and relatives on eart h m ade the prescribed funerary
offerings i n thei r to m bs upon ea rth and no longer then , ,

“
they died the secon d death The ene m ies of R a an d .

O si ris that 15 to say the w icked were slaug h tered daily

, , ,

and thei r bodies consu m ed by fi re but each day brought ,

its own supply of these an d thus the avengi ng gods ,

were kept busy daily an d the fi r e pits were filled with ,

-

victi m s daily There 15 n o ev iden ce I n the texts that the

V
.

E gyptians thought that the burn ing of the sa m e icti m s

could go on for e v er .

TH E G O DS OF THE B OO K OF THE
D EA D
Am q
T em
Q] or t u , according
k fifi is ,

to E gyptian tradition the oldest of the gods an d he is , ,

“ “
called the d ivin e god the sel f created the m aker “ -
, ,
“
of the gods the creator of m en “ who S tretched out ”
, ,

the hea v ens who illu m in et h the Tuat with h is

,

E yes the sun an d m oon ) H e ex isted when .

g a o

g ig a
D

f
o O
A
D I I I

s ky, n ot wa s wer e

no
R l ll I T!
wer e
l
bo rn
e

the god s,
4

n ot
m wa s
3

R
d ea t h .
1

I n what for m he existed is not stated but he created ,

for h i m sel f as a place wherei n to dwell the great m as s

, ,

of Celestial Waters to wh ich the E gyptian s gave the na m e

06 0
of N u m m I n these for a t i m e he l ived quite
.
, ,

a lo n e and then
, i n a series of efforts of thought he created
, ,

V OL . I .
1 Py r am id T ex t of P pi
e I , 1 6 64 . .
 162 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

t he hea v ens and the celestial bodies i n the m an the gods ,

d ,

and the earth and m en and wo m en an i m als birds an d

, , , ,

creeping things i n h is own m ind T h ese thoughts o r

, .

ideas of creation were translated into words by Thoth ,

or the i ntell igence or m ind of Te m u an d when he ,

uttered these words all creation ca m e into being The .

great College of the Priests of A nu or H el iopol is m ade

Te m u the head of their Co m pany of the ods and so far back
,

G ,
,

as the I V t h dynasty they m ade R a the god o f the sun to , ,

usurp his place and h is powers and h is attributes I n

, , .

the i r syste m of theology so far as it can be learned fro m

,

the Pyra m id Texts Te m u was m ade to be a for m of the

,

Sun god i n the even ing or early n ight and i n this

-
,

C haracter he generally appears i n the later R ecensions of

the B ook of the D ead I t is i nteresting to note that

.

Te m u i s always depi cted i n the for m of a m a n or king ,

an d he wears the Cro w ns o f the South and the N orth ;

l ike all other gods he carries i n his han ds the sceptre
1 “
] and the sy m bol of l ife M any of the attributes
of Te m u were absorbed by the god K hepera who was ,

also a great Creation god and a for m of the Sun god I n

- -
.

late t i m es the E gyptians for m ulated the existence of a

,

fe m al e counterpart of Te m u called T em t or T em it
/

gi T 2 I n an i nteresting passage i n Chapte r C L I V

n

of the Theban R ecen s ion the na m e of Te m u is co u pled

,

wi th that of Osi ris as bei ng gods whose flesh n e v er

saw corruption O n the part played by T em i n the
.

creation of the great eternal S oul spirit or the L ight spirit -

,
-
,

which is the source fro m wh ich al l the S pirit souls of m en -

are descended see Chapter LXXVI I I

,
.

ODD
Nu .
:
r
~ ~
ww
Q is the na m e given to the vast m ass of
,

water which existed i n pri m eval ti m es and was s ituated ,

presu m ably i n the sky ; i t for m ed t h e m aterial part of the

great god Tern or At m u who was the creator of the
, ,
.

un ive rse an d of gods and m en I n th is m ass wh i ch was . ,

bel ie v ed to be of fatho m less depth and of boundless exten t ,

were the germ s of all l ife an d o f all kinds o f life and for this
, ,

:
reason the god who was the personification of the wate r c c ,
. .

,
“
N u was called the Father of the ods I yfi7713 ] G ,
] z
1 64 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

R 51
6
,
Q is the na m e wh ich was given to t h e Su n
4 ]
1

god by the early E gyptians b u t the m ean ing of the word ,

and i ts origin are u nknown R a accordi ng to dyna s tic .

,

tradition was the fi rst being created by Tern out of the

,

Celestial Waters of N u an d h e was regarded as the v i s ibl e

,

e m ble m of God an d as t h e great god of this world and to

, ,

h im sacrifices and offeri ngs were m ade daily T he seat of .

R a worship was unde r the A n cien t E m pi re s ituated at

-
, ,

A nu or H el iopol is a large city wh ich lay a few m ile s to the

, ,

east of the s ite occupied by m odern Cai ro This city was .

,

fro m the earl iest ti m es the ter m inus of the great caravan
,

road between Syria and E gypt an d was densely pop u lated ,

with i nhabitan ts of m any national ities S e v eral kinds of gods .

m ust have been worshipped there a m ong the m be ing m an y ,

w h o were favouri tes of the caravan m en and m erchan ts

who ca m e fro m A s ia b u t the greatest of the m all was R a
, .

These facts show that the bul k of the people who flocked to
Anu were worsh ippers of R a for the te m ple of the Sun ,

god was m aintained by the offerings of the faithful an d the ,

i m portance of the te m ple proves that the devotees of the

Sun god were very nu m erous an d very well to do The
- - -
.

worship of the s u n was co m m on enoug h at all periods

a m ong the tribes of S yria and the Delta b u t there is n o ,

evidence to s h ow t h at i t was as co m m on a m ong the

inhabitants of U pper E gypt or of any part of the U pper N ile ,

Valley A m ong the bul k of Africans the m oon was and

.
,

still is the favourite obj ect of worsh ip an d not the sun

, , .

A s I h ave gi v en the proofs of this state m en t i n m y Os i r is

a n d Me E t i a n R es u r r ect i on they need not be repeated
gyp ,

here . The i m portance of R a worship in Lower E gypt -

under the Ancien t E m pire was due entirely to the pol itical
i nfl u ence of the priests which was used very skil fully The
,
.

fi rst ki ng of the V t h dynasty was U s er ka f who was a priest ,

of R a and i t see m s that he succeeded i n wre s ting the

,

supre m e powe r fro m the successors of the great king s

K hufu K h afr a an d M en ka u r a Whether this be so or not
, , .

m atters l i ttle but i t is al m ost certai n that he was the fi rst

,

“
king of E gypt who added t h e t itle Son of R a
to his other titles and who gave h i m self an additional na m e
g o , ,

as son of Ra T he priests of R a at that early period clai m ed

.

to have i n thei r bodies the veritable blood of R a and they ,

 T he Gd o s of t h e B oo k of t he D d ea 165

asserted that thei r high priests were the offspring of R a b y

hu m an m others And of the existen ce of this dog m a under
.

the Ancien t E m pi re we have traditional proof i n the

Wes t c a r Papyrus where we read that U s er ka f an d h is two
,

i m m ediate s u ccessors Sa hura and Kaka a were t he sons of , ,

the god R a by R u t tett the wi fe of a priest of the god R a

-
,

of the town of S a kh a bu
a ] §
v e a The three boys .
c

were assisted in to the worl d by the goddesses I sis N eph t h ys , ,

M es kh en et an d Heq et an d by the god K h n em u an d their , ,

future greatness was prophesied at the ti m e of thei r bi rth .

The bel ief that R a ca m e down fro m heaven and was u n ited
to a m ortal wo m an an d that every king of E gypt was ,

the offspring o f such a un ion pe rs isted througho u t the ,

country for about three thousan d years Hatshepsut .

decorated the walls of her te m ple at D er a l B ah ar i w it h

scenes which illustrate the pri n cipal e v ents con nected with
her conception an d bi rth and pro v e con cl u s i v ely that she ,

bel ieved herself to be of the seed of A m en A part of the .

te m ple of A m en het ep I I I at Luxor was decorated with

a series of rel i efs which prove that this king bel ieved
hi m sel f to be A m en R a i ncarnate an d there is no doubt -
,

that e v ery ki ng of E gypt in cl u ding even ki ngs of E gypt of ,

N ubian origin hel d the sa m e bel ief Popular tradition as

, .
,

represented by the Pseudo C a llis t h en es declared that ,

Alexan der the G reat was an in carnation of A m en who took ,

the for m of the last native king of E gypt N ekh t n eb f an d ,

seduced Oly m pias the wi fe of Ph il ip k ing of Macedon

, , .

An d the story of the j ourn ey of Alexan der the G reat to the

te m ple of A m en i n the Oasis of S i w ah i n order to be ,

acknowledged by the god as h is son is too well known to

1
need m ention .

The for m i n wh ich R a was worshipped i n the large

Sun te m ples whic h were built by so m e of th e kings of
-

the V t h dyn a s ty was that of a stone The ston e had .

the shape of a m assi v e truncated obel isk w i th a pyra m id , ,

above i t and i t stood on a strong m ason ry base The

, .

spi ri t of the Sun go d was s u pposed to enter the ston e

-

at certai n periods an d on these o c c a s ro n s hu m an sacrifices

,

t
1
A
l d
tt
s a e men t
an d a n a c c
bo t t h l g g i t o wh i h th i tor h
a u e

o t of it w d i g will b fo d my H
an ua es n c s s y as b een
ra n s at e
, un s an er n s e un In f
i s t ory o

A lex a n der t/ze G r ea t C m b idg

, 89a r e, 1 0 .
1 66 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

were offered to i t The v i cti m s were probably prisoners

.

of war who had been captured al i v e an d foreigners , ,

and when these failed the priests m ust have drawn upon ,

the native population as priests have done in A frica fro m

,

ti m e i m m e m orial .

R a sailed o v er the sky i n two boats ; h is m orn ing

boat was called M an t c h et or M atet or A tet and h is ,
”
, ,

e v en ing boat “
S em kt et H is co u rse was guided by .

M a t t the person ification o f law order un faili ng regulari ty

, , , ,

etc After he set i n the west i n the even ing he entered

.

the Tuat under a different for m and by the help of the ,

gods who were there and by the power which he possessed

,

i n his own person he passed through that region ,

successfully and appeared i n the sky of this worl d the

,

next m orn ing i n h is usual for m A S he passed through the .

Tuat he ga v e ai r an d l ight and food to those who fo r

, , ,

so m e reason o r other ha d been doo m ed to dwell there .

Two fishes swa m before the boat of R a and acted as ,

pilots an d warned h im of co m ing danger these were called

Ab tu
a “
an d “ A n t
i:
respectively q M
.

E ach m orn ing as he was about to en ter the s ky an d ,

j ust before he left the Tuat he engaged i n battle w ith ,

“
the great D evil called Aa pep
0 m
m wh ich aided , ,

by a group of powerful m onster serpents atte m pted ,

to bar h is progress and m ake h is reappearan ce i n this

,

worl d i m possible All A a pep s attacks failed because R a

.
’

fi rst cast spells on h im and when he was i ncapable of ,

m otion the supporters of the Sun god bound h im i n chai ns

,
-
,

then hacked h im to pieces which were fi nally consu m ed by ,

the fla m es of R a The priests of R a told this story of thei r

.

’
god but it is far ol der t han the period when R a s fa m e was
,

great an d the two great protagon ists i n the daily fight

,

between Ligh t and Darkness were Heru u r and S et U nder -

.

the V t h dynasty the priests of R a m ade a v igorous

atte m pt to co m bat the spread o f the cul t of the M an god -

Osi ris wh ich had spread all over the Delta fro m Busi ris
, ,

the n orthern centre of the cul t and al l o v er U ppe r E gypt ,

fro m Abydos the southern cen tre B efore the end of the
, .

V I t h dynasty the priests of Osiris prevailed an d R a was ,

relegated to an in ferior position and the greatest of h is ,

168 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

m any of the ideas which the i nhabitants of the N ile V alley

held concern ing i t still sur v ive i n those co u n tries The .

particular beetle which the E gyptians chose as the sy m bol

of thei r god Khepera belongs to the fa m ily called S ca m
oa eza a e ( C o pr oph a i) of which the S CA R A B E US S A C ER is
’

g A
the type These i nsects for m a v ery nu m ero u s group of
g
.

dun feeding La m ell icorns of wh ich however the m aj ori ty , , ,

l i v e I n tropical co u ntries they are usually black but m any, ,

are adorned with brig h t m etallic colours They fly during .

the hottest part of the day and it was this pecul iarity wh ich ,

probably caused the pri m itive E gyptians to associate the m

with the sun Thus as far back as the V t h or V I t h dynasty
.
, ,

i t is said i n the text of K in g U n as This U n as fliet h l ike

a goose ( or duck ) he a ligh t et h l ike the beetl e ; h e fliet h
,

l ike a goose ( or duck ) he a ligh t et h l ike the beetle u pon

,

QK (M
the e m pty throne i n thy B oat 0 R a , ,

R R R aRR R fiz I R h U R

RRs s fi
E R a R s nR e

fl
- g (
c 11 4 7 6 0 ,

T he beetle wh ich was the sy m bol of Khepera was the

subj ect of m any c u rious theories a m ong ancien t class ical
writers A elia n Porphyry and H o r a po llo thought that
.
1
,
2 3

beetle s were all m ales an d that as there were no fe m ales

,

am ong the m they were all sel f produced This v iew arose -
.

fro m the fact that to the ord inary observer the m ale an d
fe m ale are v ery m uch al ike and because the m ale an d
fe m al e each take part i n roll ing along the ball which is so
frequently seen with the m The fe m ale digs a hole i n the .

groun d i n whic h she deposits one egg Whilst she is doing .

this the m ale goes abo u t an d collects a quantity of dung ,

which he rolls o v er an d o v er agai n until i t beco m es a

tolerably co m pact ball fro m one to two inches i n dia m eter
, .

T his he rolls along to the hole in which the fe m ale has

deposited her egg and so m eti m es alone and so m eti m es
, ,

helped by the fe m ale he pushes the ball into the hole on

,

2
D e N a t A n i ma li u m,
.

D e A bs t i n en ti a , I V , 9
X
.
,
1 5 .

3
E d Leem a n s ,
. 1 1 p . .
 T he Gd o s of t h e B oo k of the D d ea 1 69

top of the egg where it re m ai ns un til the young beetle I s

,

hatched out when the ball serves for its food

,
I t was .

for m erly tho u ght that the ball of dung contai ned m any
eggs wh ich were m ixed u p togethe r w ith the dung on
which the lar v ae were to feed but i t has been pro v ed by ,

ento m ologists that t h e fe m ale of the S ca m oa eu s s a cer only

lays one egg at a ti m e T his fact was probably known to
.

the an cien ts for H o ra pollo says that the scarab denotes

,
”
an onl y begotten p ovoy emj s B e this as it m a y the bal l
-
, .
,

of the sun which was the i m m ediate cause of l i fe to the

,

worl d was supposed to be rolled across the sky by a

,

$
gigan tic beetle K H E PR E R ,
82 8 who was at a very ,

early period ident ified w ith K hepe r a the Creator and the ,

Father of the gods The E gyptians bel ieved

t h at the beetl e was an i n carnation of K heper a an d i m agi n ed ,

so m e rese m blance between t h e ball of food for th e larva

which i t rolled o v er the gro u n d an d th e ball of the sun ,

wh ich was the v is ible expression of the l ife of K hepera ,

an d was rolled across the sky b y h im They thought that .

i f they m ade figures o f the beetle of K heper a and wore ,

the m they would attract the power of the god to the m and
, ,

secure his protection for thei r bodies both when l iving an d ,

when dead The scarab was associated with burial as far

.

back as the I V t h dynasty accord ing to on e tradition and , ,

another tradition shows that i t w a s pl aced on the bodies o f

the dead as an a m ulet u n der the I st dynasty S ee the text .

of Chapter X X X B and the translations of it and the R ubrics

to Chapte r L X I V .

M “

giii
—
or Ptah Lord of L i fe i a 7
Ptah
Z , , ’

was on e of the oldest an d greatest gods of M e m ph is and ,

local tradition asserted that he was the creator of the

un i v erse ; his worship i n o ne for m or another goes back
, ,

to the begin ni ng of the Dynastic Period H e was identified .

“
with Te m u and R a an d was called the very great go d
fl m 6 (fl
j
who existed I n pri m e v al t i m e ? ,
M M M

’
“ a
t h e father of fathers z e the great
, . .
,

“
great grandfather of the gods ; the father of begi nn i ngs
-

the creator of the egg of the sun and m oon “ the lord of ”

,
1 70 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

M aat the king of the two lands the god of the beauti ful
, ,

face w ho created h is own i m age who fashion ed his own

, ,

body the D isk of hea v en who illu m in et h E gypt with the

, ,
”
fi re of h is two eyes etc H e was the great celestial , .

worker i n m etals and the c h ief s m el ter caster and sculptor

, , ,

to the gods H e was the m aster architect of the world

.
,

and he m ade the design for every part O f the fra m ework of
the world H e fash ioned the bodies of m en i n this world
.
,

and also the new bodies i nto which so u ls entered i n the

Tuat H is na m e was j oined to that of se v eral gods with
.

w ho m at fi rst sight it see m s that he co u ld ha v e had l ittl e

i n co m m on eg Ptah As ar ( Pta h Osiris ) P tah H api ( Pta h
, ,
- -
,
-

N ile ) Ptah N u P tah S eke r Ptah S eker A s ar P tah S eker

,
-
,
-
,
- -
,
-

T em Ptah Taten etc which shows that h is priests m ade

,
-
, .
,

h im to usurp the fun ctions and attributes of m any ol der

gods The Theban R ecension of the Book of the D ead
.

“
states that P ta h perform ed the operation of Opening the
M outh on the gods with a m etal instru m en t wh ich he ,

had m ade that is to say he raised the m up fro m inertness

, ,

an d gave t h e m l ife ; and every follower of Osiris bel ieved

that Pta h woul d do the sa m e for h im Ptah is depicted i n .

the for m of a bearded m a n with a bal d head and swathed i n

m u mm y bandages fro m which through an open i ng i n fron t
,

of h im his hands proj ect Fro m the back of his neck .

hangs the m en u t (Q a sy m bol of physical well being and

'

-
,

sex u al i ntercourse and he holds i n h is hands the e m ble m s

“ “
of conten t
1 l i fe
% an d stabil ity ,
fi H e stands ,
.

upon the sy m bol of n ea ci t : 1 Pta h was the C hief m e m ber .

of the great triad of M e m ph is his fe m al e coun te rpart and

k
,

son be ing called S e h m et and N efer -T em i e Young ,

. .
,

:@
T em respectively
, .

05 0
P t a h - Nu ,
g P: and P t a h Ha p
U Q -
2
have no special representations i n the rel iefs for ,

they are m erely for m s of the Celestial Waters and the N ile .

P t a h S e er
D

fié fi -
k
represents the un ion o f Ptah
w ith S ek er the oldest and greatest god of that portion of
,

the Tuat which was set apart for the i nhabitants of the
no m e of M e m phis Seke r was originally a personification .
1 7 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

to death wh ich m an ifested itself I n providing the new bodies

,

i n which the souls of the righteous were to l ive Ptah .

S eker A s ar has to all i ntents and purposes the for m o f

Osiris but E gyptian artists del ighted to depict h im as a
,

squat pig m y w ith a large bal d head an d thick l i m b s with a

, ,

beetle on the top of his head and a lock of hai r on the right ,

side of i t H e thus possessed all the v i rile power of M enu

.
,

an d the creative power of Kheper a an d the youth an d ,

vigour of H a r po kra t es The un ion of Ptah w ith S eker and .

Osiris m a y also be the resul t of an atte mpt m ade by the

priests of M e m phis to m ake those gods subordi nate to
P tah j ust as the priests of Thebes under the N ew E m pire
,

tried to m ake Osiris subordinate to A m en .

P t a h T a t en n
2 13 is depicted in the for m
W

of a god i n m u m m y for m wit h a pai r of horn s and a disk , ,

and a pai r of plu m es on his head an d the ordinary sy m bols ,

of rule A
1T in his hands T a t en n was a v ery ancien t .

god and his attributes were those of a creative god and

, ,

rese m bled those ascribed to P tah The following extract .

fro m a hy m n written about 1 2 00 B C illustrates the v iew

1
, . .
,

of the E gyptians about th is god The wi nds co m e forth .

fro m thy nostrils and the celestial water fro m thy m outh
, ,

and the staff of l ife ( i e wheat barley dhura etc ) .

, , , .

springeth fro m thy back Thou m akest the earth to bring .

forth fruit so that gods an d m en m a y have abundance ,

and cattl e l i ke unto the Cow goddess M ehu r t are seen

i n thy fields When thou art at rest the darkness co m eth
.
,

and when thou openest thy two eyes l ight is produced ,

Thou art the great god who didst stretch

out the hea v ens who m akest thy D isk to revolve in the
,

body of N ut and to enter therei n i n thy na m e of R a ;

,

thou art the fashioner of gods an d m en and of e v erything ,

which exis t et h thou art the m aker of all countries an d

,

lands and of the G reat Green [S ea] i n thy n a m e of

,

8 IK
N

; thou dost bring the N il e out

’
ta -
,

fro m his cavern thou m akest the staff o f l ife to flourish

, ,

thou m akest the grai n to co m e forth therefro m i n thy

na me o f N u the Aged thou m akest the celestial deep to ,

1
F or t h e h i ti t t
era c ex s ee L p i
e s u s, D en t ma ter , A b t h V I ,
-
. Bl . 1 1 8 .
 T he Gd o s of the B oo k of the D d ea 1 73

bri ng forth thou m akest water to appear on the m ountains

,

to gi v e l ife to m en and wo m en A m ong the t itles of .

th is god are
1 B A B E who art born daily
.
, l l1 ,
al9 m
[[
2 . AGED O NE , dweller i n the eternal borders ,

I Ri RI I
’
T
fT
’
s
‘

3 . E X LT E D B E I NG the unapproachable one

A , , A

a e y m
ly h ‘

4 . H I DD E N O NE , his for m can not be known

W . S llT R sfl R f “

Khne m fik fi u, was the fi rst m e m ber of the

great triad of the F irst Cataract which was worshipped i n a ,

te m ple on the I sland of E lephanti ne the secon d an d

$ 592
fl
third m e m bers were S a t i an d A n q et m , ,
w

respectively The cult of this god is v ery ancient and we

.
,

fin d h is na m e preserved by t h e G nostics two or three ,

centuries after Christ T he an i m al i n which Kh n em u .

beca m e i n carnate was the r a m w ith flat horns proj ecting at ,

right angles to his head th is r a m disappears fro m the m on u

m ents before the period of the X I I t h dynasty K h n em u is .

usually depicted as a ra m headed m a n seated or standi ng -

, ,

“
who holds i n h is h an ds the sy m bols of seren ity an d ”

“l ife .H e wears the White C rown to whi ch are attached ,

a pai r of h orn s a pair of plu m es and a dis k H e possessed

, , .

m any attributes an d fro m the earl iest t i m es whether as

, ,

a Water god or a Sun god he was regarded as one of the

-
,
-
,

creators of the un iverse H i s na m e K hn emu see m s to be .

connected with words which m ean to build“ to fashion ”

, ,

“ “
to put together an d he u n ited the sun and m oon at”
,

vario u s seasons of the year an d built u p the gods an d m en , , ,

and the year H e m ade the cos m ic egg w h ich con tai ned
.

the sun and he fas h ioned m a n o n a potte r s wheel

,
’
.

Kh n em u was the god pa r ex cellen ce of the F i rst Cataract ,

and his pri ncipal sanct u ari es were at Philae an d E lephan tine .

I n very early ti m es he was m erely the local Water god of the -

Cataract region and i t is poss ibl e that he was the person i

,

fi c a t io n of the N ile floo d ; but later he was regarded as -

1 74 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the N ile god of all E gypt and the attributes of m any

-
,

c reator gods were bestowed upon h im T hus he was the

-
.

“
father i n t h e begin n ing M A ; the M aker of ,

things which are Creato r of thi ngs which shall be Source , ,

of the lands Father of fathers M other of m others

, ,

fi
fi
E D
.

o \\ m lll J h ffi t l
u
u
’

Father of the fathers of the gods and goddesses lord of ,

things created i n hi m sel f m aker of heaven and earth an d ,

a , ,

aaa
” Q
the Tuat and water and the m ountai ns
, , ,
k I l
”ie

8 supporter of the sky upon M m

its four pillars raised up of the sa m e i n the fi r m a m en t

,

flT i i i fi l llllli flf l le
llé
‘’
e e K h n em u
e

un ited w ithi n hi m sel f the souls of the gods R a Shu K eb , ,

and Os iris and in this aspect he is represented i n p i ctures

,

w ith four ra m s heads upon a hu m an body these according

’

to B rugsch represented fi re ai r earth an d water A legen d

, , , , .
,

which is cu t on a rock on the I sland of S ahal i n the F i rst

Cataract states that a great fa m in e which lasted seven years
,

ca m e upon E gypt i n the re ign of T c h es er a k ing of the ,

I I I r d dynasty This fa m ine was due to the neglect of

.

Kh n em u by the E gyptians and to the n iggardl i ness of the ,

offerings which they m ade to h im When the coun try was .

well n igh ruined the k ing wen t to the te m ple of Kh n em u at

-
,

E lephantine and suitable offeri ngs having been m ade the

, ,

god appeared to h im and proclai m ed hi m self to be the N ile , ,

and pro m ised to restore the I nundation pro v ided that the
ki ng restored h is worship and endowed his te m ples s u itably .

When these things were done Kh n emu m ade the N ile to ,

:
11
)
l
A o
flow forth fro m h is two caverns ( Q er t i
o “ and ,
C
fl
,

prosperi ty was restored to E gypt The E gyptians dis

‘

t in gu is h ed i n the late period

,
seven for m s of Kh n em u : ,

1 . K h n em u t h e m odeller ; 2 K h n em u
, Go v ernor of .
,

E gypt ; 3 Kh n emu the weaver.

4 Kh n em u Governor , .
,

of the H ouse of Li fe ; 5 K h n emu Lord of the Land o f .

,

L i fe 6 K h n emu Go v ernor of the pleasures of the A n kh et

.
,

Cha m ber ; 7 Kh n emu the Lord . , .

1
7 6 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

for m of a wo m an u sually with the head of a l ioness

,

sur m o u nted by a disk or urae u s or both ; i n f a i en ce ,

'

howe v er the twin brother and siste r ha v e the head of

,

a l ion an d the head of a l ioness respecti v ely The .

original ho m e of T efn u t was the N ubian deserts through ,

which she roa m ed dren ched i n the blood of her ene m ies
, ,

whose flesh S h e tore off thei r bodies and ate an d whose ,

blood she drank F i re flew out of her eyes and S h e

.
,

breathed fire fro m her m outh I n the Pyra m id Texts the .

t w o gods play a curious part S h u being supposed to ,

carry away hunger fro m t h e deceased an d T efn u t h i s ,

1
thirst .

K e b the fourth m e m ber of the co m pany of

the gods of An n was the son of S h u husband of N ut
, , ,

and by her father of Osiris I sis Set and N ephthys , , , .

O riginally he was the god of the earth an d is called

a ,

j r”
both the “father of the gods and the ”
a

er p a 13the tribal heredi tary head ) of the gods , .

H e is depicted i n hu m an for m so m eti m es w ith a c rown ,

l
u pon h is head an d the sceptre
l i n his right han d ; and
so m eti m es he has upon h is head a goose wh i ch b ird was ,

one of his i ncarnations I n m any places he is called .

“
Wk k
l
g
fi
”
the great cackler fl
ll g
and he was ,

supposed to have laid the egg fro m which the world

sprang Al ready i n the Pyra m id T exts he has beco m e a
.

god of the dead by virtue of represen ting the earth

wherei n the deceased was laid .

As é r or S er
] jg
the s ixth m e m ber of the co m pany of
,

the gods of An n was according to H eliopolit a n tradition

, , ,

the son of K eb and Nu t and the husband of his si s te r I sis , ,

”
the father of H orus the son of I sis and the brother of, ,

Set an d N ephthys The version by Plutarch of his suffer

.

i ngs an d death has been al ready described ( see pp 5 3 .

Whate v er m a y have bee n the foundation of the legend it is ,

pretty certai n that h is character as a god of the dead was

—

l R l RlI ZCi lJ R Ri
’ ’ ' ‘
l r

Tr a va u x, t . Vp
,
. 10 l( .
 Th e Gd o s of t h e B oo k of t he D d
ea 177

wel l defined long before the versions O f the Pyra m id Texts

known to us we r e w ritten and the only i m portant change ,

wh ich took place I n the v iews of the E gyptians concern i ng

h im I n later days was the ascription to h im of the attributes
whic h i n the early dynasties were regarded as belonging
only to R a or to R a—Te m u O riginally Osi ris was the .

person ification of the N ile floo d an d a m ong h is attributes -

,

was that of a destroying god he m a y also be said to have

represented the su n a fter he had set and as such was the ,

e m ble m of the m otionless dead ; later text s iden tify h im

with the m oon The E gyptian s asserted that he was the
.

father of the gods who had given h im birth and as he was , ,

the god both o f Yesterday 1 e the Past an d of To day , . .

, , ,

the P resent he beca m e the type of eternal ex isten ce

,

and the sy m bol of i m m ortal ity ; as such he usurped not

only the attributes O f R a but those of e v ery other god an d , ,

at length he beca m e both the god of the dead an d the god

of the l ivi ng A s j udge of the dead he was bel ieved to
G
.

exercise fun ctions si m ilar to those attributed to od .

Alone a m ong all the m any gods of E gypt Osi ris was ,

chosen as the type of what the deceased hoped to beco m e

when his body havi ng been m u mm ified i n the prescribed
,

way an d cere m on ies proper to the occas i on ha v ing been

perfor m ed and the prayers said his glorified body shoul d ,

enter i n to the presen ce of Osiris i n hea v en to h im as the

“ “
lord of truth and the lord of etern ity by which ti tle s ”
,

as judge of the dead he was co m m only addressed the ,

deceased appealed to m ake h is flesh to ger m inate and to

save his body fro m decay 1
The v arious form s i n wh ich .

Osiri s is depi cted are too nu m erous to be described here 2

,

but he is us u all y represented i n the for m of a m u mm y

weari ng the White Crown and holding i n his hands
the e m ble m s of sovereign ty an d power and seren ity A .

very co m plete series of illustrations of the for m s of Osiris I s

nr dl a l as
e
l
c o m par e w o o
e
e .

fi fl EQ Q q gq
é
m
f
U
o 111 m m m

S ee C h p t C LI of th Th b R
a er V e e an ec en s io n

y B dg
.

I o og p h of O i i
V
2
F th
or e c n ra s r s s ee u e, Os i r i s an d t in E gyp ti a n
R es u r r ec
ti ol I p 4
on , .
, . 2 .

V OL . I .
 1 78 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

given by La n z o n e i n h is D iz i on a r io t a vv 2 5 8 — 2 9 9 The , . .

cere m on ies con nected w ith the celebration of the e v ents of

the sufferings the death an d the resurrection of Osi ris
, ,

occupied a very pro m inen t part i n the rel igious O bservances

o f the E gyptians and i n the m onth of Choiak a representa
,

tion of the m took place i n various te m ples i n E gypt ; the

text of a m inute description of the cere m on ies perfor m ed at
this m iracle play has been publ ished by M Loret i n
-
.

R ec u eil a o Tr o t/a u x t o m I I I pp 43 ff and i n a subsequen t

’
, .
, . .
,

volu m e A perusal of t h is work explains the sign ification

.

of m any of the cere m on ies con nected with the burial of the
dead the use of a m ulets and certai n parts of the funeral
, ,

ritual and the work i n this for m being of a late date pro v es
that the doctri ne of i m m ortal ity gained through the god ,

“
who was lord of the heavens and of the earth of the ,

“ underworl d an d of the waters of the m ountains an d of

, ,
”
1
all which the sun goeth round i n h is course had ,

re m ained practically unchanged for at least four thousan d

years of its ex istence For the early history of Osiris see .

the chapter en titled T he Legen d of Osiris .

As t or S et
flgfi the seven th m e m ber of the co m pany ,

d
of the go s of A nu was the wi fe of Osi ris and the m other ,

of H orus her woes ha v e been described both by E gyptian

an d Greek wri ters 2
H er co m m onest na m es are the great
.

goddess the divine m other the m istress of words of powe r

, ,

or enchant m en ts i n later ti m es she is called the m other “

“
of the gods and the l iving one ”
S he is usually depicted ”
.
,

i n the form of a wo m an w ith a headdress i n the shape of a ,

seat
j the value of the h ieroglyph for wh ich for m s her
,

na m e The an i m al in which she so m eti m es beca m e

.

i ncarnate was the cow hence she so m eti m es wears upon ,

her head the horns o f that an i m al acco m pan ied by plu m es

and feathers I n one aspect she is identified wi th the
d .

god ess Selk o r S er q and she then has U pon her head a

®
,

W M ! a
q
U
l
v m fi a w ww 1 Q ww
v w
NW W ‘ Q IIIIID I I I I O
Ch b t pp
6 5 ff ) ;
PVol i
2
Un [i ymn e d Os i r i s ( in R evu e A r c/ze XI V ,
'

a as , ologiou e, . .

H or rac k, L es L a men ta ti on s d l s is et de l Vep /zt/zy s , ar s , 1 8 66 Tli e F es t iva l

’

o do
S ongs of [s is a n d M p/zt /zy s ( in A r clza eologi a ,
Golé n is c h efl, D i e M et ter n i clzs tele, Le z , 1 8 7 7
Os i r i de, et c .
'
LI I , L n n,

u t arc h , D e [s i de et ip ig Pl .
1 80 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

of which on earth was the Sph inx ; He ru s m a tau 1 - -

H o r us the un iter of the N orth an d South Heru h eken u -

$ 4 %
7
g H orus
3 of H
6
eken and H eru b ehu te t -

a
,

” 1
63
H or u s of B ehu tet The
’ cippi of H orus .
,
a n

which beca m e so co m m on at a late peri od i n E gypt see m ,

to un ite the idea of the physical an d m oral con ceptions of

H orus the Sun god and of H orus the son of Osi ris and I s is
mjg
-
.

Q
H o r u s the son of Osiris an d I sis ,
appears , ,
I

m E gypt an texts usually as H e u

“H orus
i r -
p kh-
a rt
$ “3 9 13 ,

or the C h ild who afterwards beca m e the avenger ,

of h is father Osi ris and occupied his thron e as we are , ,

told i n m any places i n the B ook of the D ead I n the .

Pyra m id T exts the deceased is i den tified with H eru p kh a r t - -

,

an d a reference is m a de to the fact that the god is always

represented with a fi nger i n h is m outh 2
The curious .

legen d which Plutarch relates concern i ng H a rp o kra t es an d

3
the cause of h is l a m eness is probably bas e d upon t h e
passage i n the history of Os iris an d I sis give n i n a H y m n to
Osi ris of the XV I I I t h dynasty 1
.
‘

S et
pé o r S u t ekh
l g
o g G
M
r 2
eighth m e m ber of the co m pany of the gods of A nu was the
5
7 7 the , .
,

son of K eb and N ut and the husband of h is sister ,

N eph t h ys T he worship of this god is exceedingly old

.
,

and i n the Pyra m id T exts we fi n d that he is often m en tioned

wi th H orus an d the other gods of the H eliopolit a n co m pany
1
F or fig u r es of th es e v io
ar us fo m of H o
r s r u s , s ee La n zo n e, op . ci t .
,

tavv . 2 1 4 If .

D
fi . R ecu ei l de Tr a va u x ,
”
t . Vp
, .
44 (l .

’
} j j if O a ip ul o s i
’

i l
’
3 3 la w Tr v T exe u
p en Te ev n a u eu o
p eu o v,
‘
u
v qq
— xa i ( 30 05 11 7
7 29 xciT w Geu i 2m Ap 7r o xp ci n ]
'
D e [S i de 1
fil 27
e1 0 11 7 11 0 1} 7 0
q v o c s‘ v v. (

Os i r ide, xi x .

T
42>
i n S 2 3 fi ll Ledrain , M on u men ts Egypti en s
XXV
.
,

P E ,
ll . 2, 3 .
 T he Gd o s of t h e B oo k of the D d ea 18 1

i n ter m s of re v erence H e was also bel ieved to perfor m .

friendly offi ces for the deceased and to be a god of t he ,

S ekhet A aru or abode of the blessed dead H e was the

-
, .

ki ng of the S o u th as H o r u s w a s t h e k i ng of the N orth an d the ,

power of each was equal H e is usually depicted i n hu m an .

for m with the head of an an i m al which has not yet been

iden tified i n later ti m es the head of the ass was con fou nded
wit h it but the figures of the god i n bron z e which are pre
,

served in the B ritish M useu m and elsewhere prove beyon d

a doubt that the head of S et is that of an an i m al unknown
to us The S et an i m al is not the oé ap i as so m e E gypto
.
,

logis t s thi nk ; the O pi n ion of natural ists has settled this

question I n the early dynasties S et wa s a b en efi c en t god
.
,

an d one whose fa v our was sought after by the l iv ing an d

by the dead and so late as the X I X t h dynasty k ings
,
“
del ighted to call the m selves beloved of S et A fte r the ”
.

cult of O siris was fi rm ly establ ished and th is god was the ,

“great god of all E gypt i t beca m e the fashion to regard

”
,

S et as the origin of all evil and his statues an d i m ages ,

were so effect u ally destroyed that only a few wh ich escaped

1
by acciden t have co m e down to u S O riginally S et or .
,

S ut represen ted darkness and n ight an d perhaps the

, ,

2
desert and was the opposite of H orus ; that H orus and
,

S et were opposite aspects or for m s of the sa m e god is

proved by the figure gi v en by La n z o n e ( D iz i on a r io ta v 3 7 , .
,

No . where we see the head of S et and th e head

of H orus upon on e body The natural opposition of .

l ight ( H orus ) and darkness ( S et ) was at an early period

confounded with the battle which took place between
H orus the son of I sis and S et wherei n I sis i n tervened
, , , ,

and i t see m s that the m o r a l i dea of the battle of right

3
against wrong beca m e attached to the latter co m bat wh ich ,

Wa s undertaken by H orus to avenge h is father s m urder

’

by S et .

1
b o fig
S ee t h e t wo
y r n ze u r es of the god in t he B iti
r sh M u s eu m
( Fo t g p i
ur h E oo m N 8
t an R os 1 1
91,
Py U y
.
,

I th2
m id ofn a l e ra n s, 1 9 0, h e t ar e c a ll d e t he O

Py
.

o r tw o m b t t d o c a an s an s ee ra m id of T ta l e , . 6 9, wh er e we h a v e the

s pelh n O
g

p .
3

1 1
On the
7 .
p o ifi tio of vil b
ers n ca n e y S et, s ee Wi ed eman n , D i e R eligi on ,
 182 T h eP a pyr u s of Ani

fiQ
g
Neb t -h et or N ephthys ,the last m e m ber of th e ,

co m pany of the gods of An n was the daughter o f K eb and ,

N ut the sister of Osiris and I s is and the s i ster an d wife of

, ,

S et When the sun rose at the creation o u t of the pri m eval

.

waters N eph t h ys occupied a place i n his boat with I sis an d

other deities as a nature goddess she either represents the -

day before sunrise or after sunset but no portion of the ,

n ight S he is depicted i n the for m of a wo m an having

.
,

upon her head the hieroglyphs the values of which for m ,

“
I]
”
her na m e lady of the house
, A legend preserved .

by P lutarch m akes her the m other of A np u or Anubis

1
, ,

by Osi ris I n E gyptian texts A npu is called the son of

.

z
Ra . I n rel igious texts N ephthys is m ade to be the
co m pan ion of I sis i n all her troubles and her grief for her ,
’
brother s death is as great as that of h is w ife .

An p u , or A nubis
Q RQ
S the son o f Osi ris o,
r R a ’ ,

so m eti m es by I s is an d so m eti m es by N ephthys see m s to ,

represen t as a nature god either the darkest part of the -

n ight or the earl iest dawn H e is depicted either i n hu m an .

3
for m with a dog s head or as a dog I n the legen d of
’

,
.

Osi ris an d I sis A nubis played a pro m inen t part i n con

,

n ex io n w ith the fi nding of the dead body of Osi ris ; one

tradition asserts that he only foun d i t w ith the help of dogs .

I n papyri we see h im stan ding as a guard an d protector of

the deceased lyi ng upon the bier ; i n the J udg m en t Scene he
is foun d as the guard of t h e balance the poin ter of wh ich ,

he watches with great dil igence H e was the E m bal m er .

a r ex c ellen ce and as such was the god of the cha m ber o f

p ,

e m bal m m ent an d eventually he presided over the whole of

,
“
the funeral m ountai n H e is al ways regarded i n the .
”

B ook o f the D ead as the m essenger of Osi ris but i n the ,

older text he was the ch ief envoy of R a who sen t h im to ,

e m bal m the body of Osi ris .

1
Up the V -
u a t, of the Pyra m i d Text ,
‘

or
Opener of the ways ,
was depicted i n the for m of a wol f ,

p
y
1 D e [s ide at Os i r ide, 2 ci t 65
14 S ee La n zo n e, op . .
, . .

pi i l i boli bi oft bl
.

3 In c t u r es t h e a n m a wh ch s m zes A n u s en r es em es

j kl dog
a ac
4
Py
a a s m u c h as a

ra m id of
n as , U
1 87 l .
.

.
 184 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the m oon ; an d as the reckoner of ti m e he obtained h is ,

na m e Tenu t i i e “ the m easurer i n these capacities he

. .
,

had the power to grant l ife for m ill ions of years to the
deceased When the great co m bat took place between
.

H orus an d S et or between H orus the son of I sis and Set

, , , ,

Thoth was presen t as j udge and in the struggle between ,

the two gods he ga v e to I sis the cow s h ead i n the ’

place of her own which had been cut O ff by H orus i n h is ,

rage at her i nterferen ce havi ng reference to this fact he is

fz
“
g gg fifi j
’

called U p re bui -
The j udge of the two ‘

M en or F ighters
, O n e of the E gyptian na m es for the .
”

ibis was
$ 0 Teen and the s i m ilarity of the sound of ,

th is word to that of Te bu the na m e of the m oon as a ,

m easure r of ti m e probably led the E gyptians to de ic t the

,

god I n the for m of an ibis notwithstan ding the fact t at the ,

dog headed ape was generally co nsidered to be the an i m al

-

sacred to h im I t has been thought that there were two

.

gods called Thoth one being a for m of S h u ; but the ,

attributes belonging to each have not yet been satisfactorily

defined I n the m onu m ents an d papyri Thoth appears i n
.

the for m of a m a n w ith the head of an ibis wh ich 15 so m e ,

ti m es sur m ounted by the crown i f or [ ] or M o r by ,

I , ,

d isk and horns W ,

or O and he holds i n his left hand
the sceptre
1 and i n the right
, so m eti m es he is depicted
holding his i nk j ar U and the crescen t m oon Q and so m e
-
,

ti m es he appears in the for m of an ape hold ing a palette full

of writing reeds 1 -
Thoth is m en tioned i n the Pyra m id
.

T exts as the brother of Os i ris but whether he is the sa m e

2
,

Thoth who is called the Lord of K h em en u an d the

”
S cribe of the gods is doubtful .

M aa t j g the fe m al e counterpart o f Thoth was , ,

according to H elio polit a n trad ition the daughter o f ,

R a an d a v ery ancien t goddess

, she see m s to ha v e ,

assisted P ta h and K h n em u i n carry ing o u t rightly the

work of creation ordered by Thoth There is no o n e .

word wh ich w ill exactly describe the E gyptian con ceptio n

1

2
Py
S ee Lan z on e, op ci t
ram n as , 1 id of U .

.
.
,

2 36
t av 3 0 4 ,
.
. No . I .
 T he Gd
o s of t h e B oo k of the D d ea 18 5
of M a at both fro m a phys ical an d fro m a m oral poi n t
of v iew ; but the fun da m en tal i dea of the word is
“straight and fro m the E gy pt ian texts i t is clear that
,

m a d! m ean t right t rue truth real genui n e upright

, , , , , ,

righteous j ust steadfast unal terable etc Th u s al ready

, , , , .

“
i n the Prisse Pap yrus i t is sai d : G reat i s m a dt the ,

m ighty an d unalterabl e and it hath n ever been broken ,

”
1
s in ce the ti m e of O siris an d Pta h he t ep counsels his ,
-

”
2
l istener to m ake m a dt or righ t an d truth to flourish , ,
.

? ”
Z j
The j ust upright an d straight m a n is m a dt s u 1
, ,
g .

an d i n a book of m oral precepts i t is sai d od will j udge G

m w
,

m Ky ax k a
‘
”
the right o x

M a at th e , goddess of the unalterabl e laws of

hea v en an d the daughter of R 5 i s depicted i n fe m ale
, ,

for m wi th the feather

,
fle m ble m atic o f m a dt on her head , , ,

or w ith the feather alone for a head and the

S in
, s ce
p t re
K
i n one hand an d E the other , I n the J udg m en t S cen e .
5

two M a at goddesses appear ; on e probably i s the

person ificat ion of physical law an d th e other o f m oral
rectit u de ; or one m a y have presided o v er U pper E gypt ,

and the oth er over Lower E gypt .

“
H et her u , or H a t h o r
-
the house of H orus
d
,

was the god ess o f the sky where i n H orus the Sun
god rose an d set Subsequently a great nu m be r of.

goddesses of the sa m e na m e were de v eloped fro m her ,

an d these were iden tified w ith I s is N ei th I u s as et and , , ,

m any oth er goddesses whose attributes they absorbed .

A group of se v en H a t h o r s is also m en tioned and these

.
,

appear to have partaken of the nature of good fairies .

MP g NE
O

O
j
fl fi fl
2

m
a e I
n
, o

p
M
yp b
3
A m é lin eau , [ a or a le, 1 38 . .

v io i g of ill t t d b d tp g
y yB
4
Th e ar u s m ean n s ma d! a r e us ra e a un an as s a es
fo
r m E
5
g pti t
an ext s b
r u s c h , Wor t er ou c/zg '

.
329 .

S ee L an z o n e, op ( ff , t av 1 0 9 . . . .
186 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

I n one for m H athor was the goddess of lo v e beauty , ,

happiness ; and the G reeks identified her with their own

Ap h rodi te She is often depicted i n the for m of a wo m an
.

having d isk and horn s upon her head an d at ti m es she ,

has the head of a l ion s u r m o u nted by a uraeus O ften .

she has the for m of a cow — the an i m al sacred to her

and i n this for m she appears as the goddess of the to m b
or Ta T c h er t et an d she provides m eat and dri n k for the
-
,

deceased 1
As a Cow goddess she is probably of S u d an i
.
-

origin
m
.

M eh t u r t q fi is the person ification of that

-

part of the sky where in the sun rises an d also of that ,

part of it i n which he takes h is daily course ; she is

depicted i n the for m of a cow along the body of wh ich ,

the two barks of the s u n are seen sail ing Al ready i n .

the Pyra m id Texts we fi n d the attribute of j udge ascribed

to M eh urt an d down to a very late date the j udg m en t
2 -
,

of the deceased i n the hall of Double M a at i n the presence

of Thoth an d the other gods was bel ieved to take place
i n the abode of M eh urt i e i n the sky
3 -
, . .
,
.

or X
xj
N et o r N ei t h
ésfl
,
the d i v ine m other
, , , ,

the lady of hea v en the m istress of the gods was , ,

one of the m ost ancien t deities o f E gypt an d i n the ,

Pyra m id Texts she appears as the m other of S ebek 4

T he .

centre of her cul t was at S a ls i n the Delta Like M eh urt

'

-
.

she per s o n ifi es the place i n the sky where the sun rises .

I n on e form she was the goddess of the loo m an d shuttle ,

an d also of the chase in th is aspect she was iden tified by

the Greeks with A rte m is S h e is depicted i n the for m of a .

wo m an havi ng upon her head the shuttle >c >c or arrows

,

X or she wears the crown

,
y and holds arrows
a bow w an d a sceptre i n her left hand ; she also
,

1 A good s et of ill t t io of th i godd

u s ra ns s es s w ill be fo d un in Lan zon e,
4 f

m
p
o . a t ,
tav 3 1 . .

II R D E fira Hi
‘— [ e
o
R ecu ei l
’
oe Tr a va u x, t . I V, p .
48 (l .

3
Pleyt e, C/zapztr cs su pp /é m m t a zr es a u [ t or e a es
' ’
M or t: ( C ha pp . 1 6 2,
x6 2 ,
*
26 p . .
4
R ea m] de Tr a va u x, t . I V, p .
76 (l .
1 88 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Neh e b fij-
L ka
] m is
kthe na m e of a goddess ,

who is u s u ally represented with the head of a serpent and ,

w ith who m the deceased iden tifies h i m sel f .

Se a bk PJ Q U
fi a for m of H orus the Sun god ,
-
,

m ust be distinguished fro m S eb ak the co m panion of S et , ,

the opponen t of Osi ris ; of each of these gods the crocodile

was the s acred an i m al an d for th is re a son probably the ,

gods the m sel v es were confounded S eb ak R a the lord of .

-
,

O m bos is usually depicted in hu m an for m w i th the head of

m
,

a crocodile sur m ounted by 42

, or m or , ,

T Q Q il
M en u or A ms i ,is 2
one of the ' '

m ost an cien t gods of E gypt H e person ified the power of .

generation or the reproductive force of nature ; he was the

,

father of h is own m ot h er and was iden tified with ,

H orus the m ighty or w ith H orus the avenger of his ,

father U n n efer or Osi ris The G reeks i den tified h im with .

the god Pan and called the chief c ity whe re his worship
,

was celebrated K he m m is after one o f h is na m es H e is

3
,
.

depicted usually i n the for m of a ma n standi ng upon : 1

and he has upon his head the plu m es
A i
, n h is right hand which is raised
an d holds the flail
above h is shoul der,
4
,
m
,

.
,

< 7 “
N eb er t c h er
- -
5 Q
; a na m e whi ch sign ifies lord ,

to the utter m ost l i m it “ lord of the un iverse this

,

na m e was subsequen tly given to Osi ris S o m e have .

thought that i t was given to Osi ris after the co mpleted

r e construction of his body wh ich had been hacked to pieces ,

by Set .

U m mefet fi n a na m e of Os iris i n his ;

capacity of god an d j udge o f the dead 1 n the U nderworl d .

The na m e probably m eans good being .

A s t en n u
0 Q
q
a na m e given to on e of the
Q ,

associates of the god Thoth and to Thoth h i m sel f ,

.

1
La n zon e, op a
'

t tav 35 3 2
A lo s r ea d Kh em .

y
. . . .
,

4
In E g pti
Lan zon e, op
an

.
the

t it ,
t o wn is
t a v 33 2 .
ca

.
ll d A p
e u
Q G Q
 The Gd
o s of t h e B oo k of the D d ea 1 89

M ert -s elger tz pé a the lover of silen ce is, ,

a na m e of I sis or H athor as goddess of the U nderworld .

The cen tre o f her cul t was a portion of Western Thebes .

She is so m eti m es depicted i n the for m o f a wo m an ha v ing ,

1
a disk and horns upon her head .

S er q o r S el k is a for m of the goddess

I sis She is usually depicted i n th e form of a wo m an w ith
.
,

a scorpion u pon her head ; occasionally she appears as

a scorpion with a wo m an s head sur m oun ted by disk and
’

2
horns .

T a -u rt
k o
B\ o the T h o u er is of the G reeks was
’ ,

i den tified as the wi fe of S et or Typhon she is also kno w n

g an d S hepu t
ge
a
un der the na m es A pt gC) fi '

co mm on titles are m istress of the gods an d

m
,

pj fl
z
bearer of the gods S he is depicted i n the .

for m of a hippopota m us standing on her h in d legs w ith ,

disten ded paunch and hanging breasts and on e of her ,

forefeet rests upon

$
8 the sy m bol o f m agical power wh ich
, ,

probably represents a part of the organs of gen eration of

the goddess so m eti m es she has t h e head of a wo m an bu t ,

she always wears the d isk horns and plu m es : , ,

fig
U a t c h it was a for m of H athor an d was ,

identified w ith the appearance of the sky i n the n orth when

the sun rose She is e ither dep icted i n the for m of a wo m an
.
,

hav i ng upon her head the Crown of the N orth an d

V
a sceptre
H d
roun which a serpent is twined or as a w inged
, ,

uraeus weari ng the C rown of the N orth S he was the .

pri ncipal goddess of the town of Buto i n t h e D elta , .

Ne h e it
ljk bo
fi
was a very an cien t goddess the
, ,

centre of whose cult was the town of Nekh eb in U pper

E gypt the E ileit h yia s polis of the G reeks and the m odern
, ,

A l Kab
-
She was t h e tutelary deity of U pper E gypt i n
.

1
S ee La n zon e, t av . 1 24 .
2
M i ni , op . ci t ,
t av 3 6 2
. .
1 90 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

very early dynastic ti m es S he appears i n the for m of .

a wo m an e ither with the vulture headdress or with the

, ,

head of a vultu re an d so m eti m es as a vult u re N ekhebit

,
.

an d U a t c h it divided between t h e m the sovereign ty of all

E gypt
B eb , B eb t i, B a a , or B a u , b b
JJQ JJQ
J §J§ Q 1 Of
J § k l §§ fl
h“ m entioned
three ti m es i n the B ook of the Dead is t h e fi rstborn son ,

of Osiris and see m s to be on e of the gods of generation

, .

fi
fl
H é pi
gg m er h a s originally H ep t , I S the na m e
‘

p p
of the great go d of the N ile who was worshipped i n E gypt
i “ g29
o
under two for m s 2 e Hapi of the S outh
, . .
,
E
6
,
n

ED fi
0

an d H api of the N orth m

a the papyrus , was °

,
a
the e m bl e m of the for m er and the lotus of the latte r , .

F ro m the earl iest ti m es the N ile was regarded by the

E gyptians as th e so u rce of all t h e prosperity of E gypt an d ,

i t was honoure d as being the type of t h e l i fe giving waters -

,

out of the m idst of whic h sprang t h e gods and al l created

thi ngs I n turn i t was iden tified wi th all the gods of E gypt
.
,

n ew or old and its i n fl uence was so great upon the m inds

,

of the E gyptians that fro m the earl iest days they depicted
to the m selves a m aterial heaven wherei n the I sles of the
B lest were laved by t h e waters of a Celestial N ile t he N ile
of E gypt was only a conti nuation of the N ile of heaven .

O thers again l i v ed in i m agi nation on the ban ks of t he

heavenly N ile whereon they built cities ; an d i t see m s as i f
,

the E gyptians n ever succeeded i n conceiving a heaven

w ithout a N ile an d canals The N il e is depicted i n the .

for m of a m a n who wears upon his head a clu m p of papyrus

,

o r lotus flowers ; his breasts are androgyno u s in dicating ,

1
fertil ity La n z on e reproduces an i nteresti ng scene i n
.

wh ich the S outh an d N orth N ile gods are ty ing a papyrus

an d a lotus stal k around the e m ble m of un ion to i ndicate
X ,

the un ity of U pper and Lower E gypt and th is e m ble m ,

is found cut upon the th rones of the kings of E gypt to

i ndicate thei r sovereignty over the regions traversed by the
1
t av
. 1 98 .
1 92 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Tu a m u t ef and his two legs with Am s et and e hs en u f

, ‘
1

and when he entered in to the Sekhet Aar u they a c c o m -

a n ied h im as g u ides and we n t i n with h im two on each

p ,

s ide 2
. They took away all hunger and thi rst fro m h im 3
,

they gave h im l ife i n hea v en and protected it when gi v en 4

,

and t h ey brought to h im fro m the Lake of K he m ta the

boat of the eye of K h n em u 5
I n one passage t h ey are .

called the four K /zu s of H orus

u K“

z
i
2

a §q
and originally they represen ted the
Four H orus gods who held up the four pillars which,

supported the sky

llll or thei r father H orus E ach was
, ’ .

supposed to be lord of on e of the quarters of the world and ,

finally beca m e the god of one of the card inal poin ts Hep .

represented the nort h Tu a m u t ef th e east Am s et the south

, , ,

and e hs en u f the west T he E gyptian s were i n t h e .

habit of e m bal m ing the in testin es of the body separately an d ,

they placed the m i n four j ars each of whi c h was under the ,

protection of one o f the ch ildren of H orus i e under the , . .

,

care of on e of the gods of the four quarters of the e a rth .

T he god of the north protected the s m all viscera the ,

god of the east the heart an d lungs the god of the south ,

the sto m ach an d large in testi nes and the god of the west ,

the l iver an d gall bladder With these four gods fou r-

.

goddesses were associated v iz N eph t h ys N eit h I sis an d , .

, , , ,

S elk or S erq .

Con nected with the god H orus are a nu m ber of m yt ho

logical beings cal l ed H eru s h em s u 7

who appear al ready i n the pyra m id of U n as i n con nection

with H o rus and Set in t h e cere m ony of puri fying and
“open ing the m outh and i n the pyra m id of Pep i I i t is
they w h o wash the king and who recite for h im the
1
R ecu eil de Tr a t/a u x, I I I, t . p .
90 5 ( 11 . 2 1
9
t p
Vp
2
l bzd , VI I, ( 11 2 6 1
'

. 1 50 . . .

3
1 454 , 10 t
( 59 ll
V
. . .
,

]
I $p p (l
Q
4
1 414 ,
t . I I I, .
91 .

(l
5
1 5 111 , t VI I,
. . 1 67 .

6
t VI I,
. p . 1 50 (l .

7
M id , t I I I,
. p . 182 l( .
 T he Gd o s of t h e B oo k of the D d ea 1 93

Chapter of those who co m e forth an d the [Chapter of ] ,

”
1
those who ascend .

I n the J udg m en t Scene i n the B ook of the D ead ,

grouped roun d the pan of the balance wh ich contai ns the ,

heart of the deceased ( see Plate I I I ) are three bei ngs i n ,

hu m an for m who bear the na m es S h a i R en en et an d

, , ,

M es k h en et .

S h ai $ 1q is the p erson ificat ion of F ate an d ,

R en en et
259 of Fortune these na m es are usually
M
1 ,

found coupled S hai an d R en en et are said to be i n the

.

han ds of T hoth the div i ne i ntell ige nce of the gods ; and
,
“
R am eses I I boasts that he hi m self is lord of S hai and ”
creator of R en en et 2
Shai was originally the deity who .

“fated what should happen to a m a n and R en en et as m a y , ,

3
be seen fro m the Pyra m id Texts was the goddess of ,

plenty good fortune and the l ike ; subsequently no

, ,

d istinction was m ade between these dei ties an d the abstract

i deas which they represented I n the Papyrus of A n i .
,

Shai stands b y h i m sel f n ear the pillar o f the Balan ce and ,

R en en et is acco m pan ied by M es kh en et who acted as ,

m idwife an d presided over the bi rth cha m ber I n the -

.

story of the bi rth of the three sons of R a as related i n ,

the W es t c a r Papyrus we fi nd the goddess M es kh en et

m
,

m m Y fl m entioned with I sis N ephthys H eq et and , , ,

the god K h n em u as assisti ng at the birth of children .

D isguised i n hu m an form s t h e four goddesses go to the ,

ho u se of R a user and because they have a knowledge of

-
, ,

the art of m idwi fery they are ad m itted to the cha m ber ,

where the ch ildren are to be born ; I s is stands before the

wo m an N eph t h ys beh in d her and Heq et accelerates the
, ,

birth When t h e child i s born M es kh en et co m es an d

®
.

“
looking upon h im says : A ki ng he shal l rule throughout
D
h G ME —J ‘ l l m
lfih k fi ll
® Q P~ I W W

et c R ecu ei l
’
Tr a va u x, t VI I,
h
p
W e »

l(
W W

de 1 70
No P
. . . .

2
S ee M as p o er , R oma n s et P oes ies
’
du
’
P apy r u s H a r r i s , .
5 00, i
ar s ,
1 8 7 9, p 2
3
.

n
Pyra l
V OL
7
m d of
. I .
U n as , l .
5 64 .
1 94 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

this land M ay K h n em u gi v e health an d strength to

. h is
"
1
body .

The god A m en h is w i fe M ut
their son K h en s u have nothing whatever to do
with the B ook of the D ead ; b u t A m en the fi rst m e m ber ,

of th is great Theban triad m u st be m ention ed i n con nection ,

wi th t h e other gods beca u se he was us u ally iden tified with

,

“
one or m ore of t h e m T h e na m e A m en m eans the h idden
.
,

and see m s to refer to the m ysterious an d u nknown power

that causes conception in wo m en an d an i mals ; on e of his
sy m bols is the belly of a pregnant wo m an A m en is a very .

a nc ient god an d is m e n tioned wi th A m en t i n the Pyra m i d

,

Texts but his c u l t did not assu m e any great i m portance at

,

T h ebes until the X I I t h dynasty when a large te m pl e was ,

built i n h is hono u r at K arnak F ro m that ti m e u ntil the .

close of the X V I I t h dynasty A m en was the chief god of ,

Thebes an d n othing m ore When however the last kings .

, ,

of the X V I I t h dynasty had succeeded i n expell ing the

H yksos and had del i v ered the co u ntry fro m t h e yoke o f
the foreigner thei r god assu m ed an i m portance h itherto
,

unknown an d his priests endea v ou red to m ake his worsh ip

,

the fi rst i n the land B ut A m en was ne v er regarded .

th roughout the e n ti re coun try as its chief god although h is ,

votaries called h im the K ing o f the gods Speaking .

generally i n the ti m e of the X V I I I t h dynasty and onwards

,

the god was the person ification of the m ysterious creating

an d sustai n ing po w er of the un iverse which i n a m aterial ,

for m was typified by the sun H is na m e was changed to .

A m en R a and l ittle by l ittle all the attributes of t h e old

-
,

gods of E gypt were ascribed to h im an d the titles which ,

a m ong western nations are gi v en to God were added to

those powers which A m en had usurped T he follow ing .

extracts fro m a fi ne hy m n illustrate the v iews of the

2

priesthood of A m en R a concern ing the ir god -

l
l fi yflf fi l fi llé rk fi o 51 xc

6 Q ?P } Ak fl
9
gfi E r man , D ze M a r e/zen
’
'
am . o er

P apy r u s Wes lea r ,

2
°

S ee G ré bau t , 1 10
B li
er n , 1 8 9 0 , B 1 1 0 ,
/ mi t e d A m mon -R é
,
1 3, 1 4

ar s ,
. ll .

P i
.

1 874 ; an d Wi ed eman n ,

D i e R eligi on , 6 4 ffpp . .
 1 96 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

everything that belongeth there u nto Thou p r o v ides t .

food for the rats i n thei r holes and for the birds that sit
a m ong the bran ches thou One thou O nly O n e ,

whose ar m s are m any All m en and all creatures adore .

thee and praises co m e unto thee fro m the height o f

,

heaven fro m earth s wi dest space an d fro m the deepest

,
’

depths of the sea thou O ne thou O nl y O n e who ,

hast no second whose n a m es are m an i fol d and

”
i nnu m erabl e .

We have seen above that a m ong other titles the

“
god A m en was called the O ne O n e —a but
fi
the addition of the words hast no secon d
a § O
“who ’

g ‘
6

is re m arkable as showing that the E gyptians had al ready

conce ived the existence of a god who had no l ike or eq u al ,

w hich they hesitated not to proclai m side by s ide w ith

the ir description s of h is m an ifestations Looking at the .

E gyptian words i n thei r si m ple m ean ing i t is pretty ,

certa i n that when the E gyptians declared that thei r god

was O ne an d that he had no second they had the ,

sa m e ideas as the J ews and M u ha mm adans when they

proclai m ed their God to be O ne “ 1
and alone I t has .

been urged that the E gyptians never advanced to pure

m onotheis m because they never succeeded i n freeing
the m sel ves fro m the bel ief i n the existence of other gods ,
“
but when they say that a god has n o second e v en ,

though they m ent ion other gods i t is quite e v iden t that , ,

l ike the J ews they con ceived h im to be an enti rely

,

differen t being fro m the beings which for the wan t ,

of a better word or because these possessed superhu man

,

“
attributes they na m ed gods
, .

The gods above enu m erated represen t the po we rs who

were the guides and protectors and givers of l i fe an d
happiness to the deceased i n the n ew l ife but fro m the ,

earl iest ti m es i t is clear that the E gyptians i m agined the

existen ce of other powers who offered opposition to the
“
dead and who are called i n m any places h is ene m ie s .
”
,

Li ke so m any of the ancient gods these powers were ,

1
1
m D eu t vi , C p 17 3 3 m c ab m m jw 3
1
1
ar , 4 21; r s? n ,

1 1
D en t iv, 3 5 ; and 7 1 7 14 m 171211 7 111 m I s ai ah xlv,
13 1
p p
1
. ,
5 .
 T he Gd o s of t h e B oo k of t he D d
ea 1 97

originally certain forces o f nature wh ich were bel ieved to ,

be O pposed to those that were regarded as b en efi c en t

to m a n as for exa m ple darkness to l ight and n ight to
, ,

day ; with darkness and n ight were also associated the

powers wh ich con tributed i n any way to obscure the l ight
of the s u n or to preven t h is sh i n ing But s in ce the .

deceased was identified with Osiris an d R a and thei r ,

acco m panyi ng gods the ene m ies of the on e beca m e the

,

en e m ies of the other an d the welfare of the one was ,

the wel fare of the other When the E gyptians person ified .

the b en efi c en t powers of nature that is say the i r gods , , ,

they concei v ed the m i n thei r own i m ages ; but w hen

they person ified the destroy ing powers or opposing powers , ,

they gave to the m the shapes of noxious an i m als an d

reptiles such as snakes an d scorpions As ti m e went on
, .
,

the m oral ideas of good an d right were attributed to the

for m er and ev il an d w ickedness to the latter The fi rst
,
.

e r s o n ifi c a t io n s of Day an d N ight or L ight an d Darkn ess

p , ,

were H orus and Set and i n the co m bat— the prototype of

,

the subsequen t l egends of M arduk an d T ia m at B el an d ,

the D ragon St G eorge an d the D ragon and m any others

, .
,

—whi ch took place between the m H orus was al ways the

V i ctor .
,

N ow though the deceased was iden tified w ith Os i ris

,

or R a the v ictory that H orus gained over S et only

,

benefi ted the spiritual bo y wh ich dwel t i n heaven an d d ,

d id not preserve the natural body whi ch lay i n the

to m b The prin cipal ene m y of the natural body was the
.

wor m and fro m the earl iest ti m es it see m s that a huge

,

wor m or serpen t was chosen by the E gypt ians as the

type of the powers which were host ile to the dead an d
also of the foe agai nst who m the Sun god fought Al ready -
.

i n th e Pyra m id o f U n as a long section of the text contain s

noth i ng but for m ulae the recital of which was i nten ded to
,

protect the deceased fro m various ki n ds of snakes and

1
wor m s . These are exceed ingly ancient indeed they m a y ,

safely be said to for m one of the oldest parts of the fu neral

literature of the E gyptians and we fi nd fro m the later ,

editions of the Book of the D ead and certai n Coptic works

that the dread of the serpen t as the e m ble m of physical a nd
1
M as p o
er , R ecu ei l
’
ae T
re w a u x, t . I I I, p . 2 20 .
1 98 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

m oral evil existed a m ong the E gyptians i n all generations ,

and that as will be seen later the bel i ef in a l i m bo filled

, ,

w ith snakes swayed thei r m i nds l ong after they had been
converted to Christ ian ity .

T he charm s against serpen ts i n the Pyra m id Texts of

the V t h an d V I t h dynasties have their equivalents i n the
X X X I s t an d X X X I I I r d Chapters of the B ook of the
Dead wh ich a re found on coffi ns of the K I t h and X I I t h
,

dynasties ; and i n the X V I I I t h dynasty we fi nd v ignettes

1

i n wh ich the deceased i s depicted i n the act of spearing

3
a crocodile and of slau ghtering serpents
2
I n the Theban .

an d S a1te R ecensio ns are se v eral s m all chapters the recital

4

of wh ich drove away reptiles : and of these the m ost

i m portant is the X X X I X t h Chapter which p reser v ed
5
,

the deceased fro m the attack of the great serpent A a pef or

Aa p ep
k w or D a m w h o is depicted with ,

kn i v es stuck i n h is folds m 6
I n the period of the later .

dynasties a ser v ice was perfor m ed dail y i n the te m ple o f

A m en Ra at Thebes to del iver the S u n god fro m the
- -

assaul t of th is fiend and o n eac h occasion it was a eco m , _

a n ied by a cere m ony i n wh ich a waxen figure of A a p ep

p
was burnt i n the fi re ; as the wax m elted so the power of ,

A a pep was destroyed 7 Another na m e of A apep was Nak .

q
O m who was pierced by the l an ce of the E ye of
,

8
H orus and m ade to vo m it what he had swallowed .

The J udg m en t S cene i n the Theban R ecension of the

B ook of the Dead reveals the bel ief i n t h e existence of
a tri for m ed m onster part crocodile part l ion ap d part
-
, , ,

hippopota m us who m the E gyptians called A m m it,

-

1
G ood i
w n , A eg 1 8 66, 5 4 ; s
. ee a s L e s u s , A elt es te p . lo pi
ll ff
Tex te, B 1 3 5 ,
2

1
1.

Naville, oa tm ou e/z, B d I ,
’

1 114 , B d 1, B 1 4 6
T
.
.

44
.

. .
. Bl . .

4
pt
[ e , C h a ers 3 2 , 34 , 3 5 , 3 6 , 3 7 , 3 8 , et c .

pi
.

5 t
F or t h e t ex s ee Naville, Todten ou e/z, B d I , B 1 5 3 ; an d L e s u s , . .

Todten ou elz, B 1 1 8 . .

6
S ee La nzo n e, 1 2 1 p . .

vi pi td
Vol T h e s er c e for t h e Over l/zr ow zrzg of J p ep i is r n e in A r e/za eologla ,
7
'

:
LI I , 393 6 0 8
-
pp
wr
. . .

e
fi n i m
p
m u w —A s tar
Gré b au t , Hy mn e, . . 10 .
2 00 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

a physical poi nt of v iew A a pep the e m ble m of evil .

1
, ,

was here pun ished an d o v erco m e and h ere dwelt the souls ,

of the wicked and t h e righteous who received their pun ish ,

m ents or rewards m eted o u t to the m by the decree of R a ,

and h is co m pany of gods The ch ief instru m ents of pun ish .

m en t e m ployed by t h e gods were fi re and beasts w hich

de v oured the souls and bodies of the ene m ies of R a ; and
we m a y see fro m t h e l i terature of the Copts or E gyptians ,

who had e m braced Christian ity how long the bel ief i n ,

a hell of fire an d torturing fiends sur v i v ed Thus i n the .

“
L ife of Abba S h en u t i a m a n is tol d that the executioners
2
,

of A m enti will not show co m passion upon thy wretched

”
3
soul an d i n the h istory of Pis en t io s a B ishop of Coptos
, ,

i n the se v en th cen tury of o u r era we have a series of details ,

which reflect the Tu at of the ancien t E gyptians i n a re m ark

able m ann er The bishop ha v ing taken up h is abode i n
.

a to m b filled with m u m m ies ca u ses one of the m to tell his ,

h istory 1
After saying that h is parents were G reeks who
.
‘ ‘

worsh ipped Poseidon h e states t h at when he was dying , ,

al ready the avenging angels ca m e about h im w ith iron

kn ives and goads as sharp as spears which they thrust i nto ,

h is s ides wh ile they gnashed thei r teeth at h im when he

,

opened h i s eyes he saw death i n all i ts m an ifold for m s ,

roun d about h im ; and at that m o m en t angel s w ithout

m ercy ( ru e mv eko e ft 4 9 mm) ca m e and dragged h is .

wretched soul fro m h is body an d tying it to the for m of ,

a black horse t h ey bore i t away to A m en ta ( en ert T

l
O O
N ext he was del i vered over to m er c fles s
l ,

tor m en tors who tortured h im i n a place where there were

,

m ultitudes of sa v age beasts ; and when he had been cast ,

i nto the place of outer darkness he saw a ditch m ore than ,

two hundred feet deep filled wit h reptiles each of wh ich ,

had seven heads and all thei r bod ies were covered as i t ,

were with scorpions H ere also were serpen ts the very .

,

2
S ee Le e
S ee
fb
A m é li
u re, P ool:of H a aes
n ea u , M on u men ls p ou r
’

( R ecor ds of
s er w r
[b e P a s t,
a
’
Vol X p
u

l f l zs tozr e
.
,

ae
’
.

l Egypfe
’

p 67
. 1 .

m e r ewlf r ka mw poc
‘

i it
-
8
x s a rt xe
' '
c en a a co n
' r
su
‘

ma u u w pmw m ti r
re
Et u de
P
S ee A m é lin eau , le Clzr ls tza m s me S ep alme
'

4
su r en E gypte an

S zlele, a r s , 1 8 8 7 , i p . 1 47 .
 T he Gd
o s of t h e B oo k of t he D d ea 20 1

s ight of whi ch terrified the beholder an d to one of the m ,

which had teeth l ike i ron stakes was the wretched m a n

given to be devoured ; for five days i n each week the
serpent crushed h im w ith h is teeth bu t on the Saturday ,

and S u nday there was respite Anothe r picture of the .

tor m ents of H ades I S given i n the M a i t yr do m of M a c a r iu s

o f A n tioch wherei n the Sai nt hav ing restored to l ife a m a n
, ,

who had been dead six hou rs learned that when he was ,

a bout to d i e he was surrounded by fi ends g a n z rt k a rt o c , ,

so m e of w h o m had the faces of dragons 11 3 0 fi z pa k w n , ,

others of l ions fi a o rt ,u w o wt others of crocod iles 11 3 0 , ,

rt eu c a g and others of bears fi g o rt ka fi m They tore

, , .

h is soul fro m his body w ith great violence an d they fl ed

with it o v er a m ighty river of fi re i n whi ch they plun ed i t ,
,

g
to a depth of four hundred cubits ; then they took i t out
and set i t before the J udge of T ruth £ 1 rt tk pt T HC ,
.
'

After heari ng the senten ce of the J u dge the fiends took it

to a place of o u ter darkness w h ere no l ight ca m e an d they ,

cast i t i nto the cold where there was gnash ing of teeth .

T here i t beheld a snake wh ich n ever slept q ert T rt Af r ,

'

e n KO T w ith a head l ike that of a crocodile and wh ich was

, ,

s u rroun ded by reptiles wh ich cast souls before it to be

devoured epe 11 1 5 5 3 1 11 T n po vr b a r o n q 6 :
, c 11
- °

11 111 w g g M when the sn ake s outh was full ’

1 t T H o q ; m
it allowed the othe r reptiles to eat an d though they ren t ,

the soul i n pieces i t did not die A fter th is the soul was .

c arried into A m en ta for ever i n ert f g 1

g a é rt eg, T he ’ ‘

m artyr M a c a r iu s suffered i n the reign of D io cletian and the

=
,

M S fro m which the above extract is taken was copied i n

.

t h e year of the M artyrs 6 34 A D 918 Thus the ol d . . .

,

heat h en ideas of the E gyptian T uat were appl ied to the

co n stru ction of the Coptic H ell .

1
S ee H yvern at, L es A eles
’
a es M a r ty r s de P ar s , i 1 8 8 6,
pp
2 02 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

THE PR I N C I PA G O G RA P H I C A L E L
A ND MY T H O O G I C A P AC S L L L E
I N THE B OOK OF THE A DE D
A b I J
tu
fif the
a Abydos of the G fl
reeks ,

( Strabo XV I I, i and the

, 6 6,1111 of the Copts was the “
,

capital of the eighth no m e of U pper E gypt I t was the .

seat of the worsh ip of Osiris i n U pper E gypt and t h e ,

god was bel ieved to have been buried there For m an y .

centuries its priests boasted the possession of the h ead of

Osiris an d the great an nual m i racle play i n wh ich the
,
-
,

sufferings death and resurrection of Osi ris were acted

, , ,

d rew thousands of people to th e festi v al fro m every part o f

E gypt Local tradition m ade the su n to en d its daily
.

course at Abydos an d to enter i nto the Tu at at this place

,

through a gap i n the m ountai ns called i n E gyptian peg ,

These m o u nta i n s lay near to the town ; and i n

the X I I t h dy n asty i t was bel ie v ed that th e soul s of the dead
m ade thei r way into the O ther World by the valley which
led th rough the m to the G reat Oasis where so m e placed ,

the E lysian F ields 2

U nder the N ew E m pi re the to m b of
.

K ing Kh en t at Abydos was identified by local tradition as

the to m b of Osiris an d i t beca m e the obj ect of pilgri mages
,

fro m every part of E gypt U nder the X X I I n d dynasty.

the cul t of Osiris decl i ned an d the town never regained ,

the i m portan ce whi ch i t had enj oyed under the X V I I I t h

dynasty .

Am en t a or Am en t et, ii i or ll
Q

c was origi nally , ’

the place where the sun set but subsequentl y the na m e ,

was appl ied to all the ce m eteries which were buil t i n the
stony plateaus and m ountains on the western ban k of the
N ile So m e bel ieve that A m enta was at fi rst the na m e o f
.
, ,

a s m all district without either fu n ereal or m ythological

,

sign ification The Christian E gyptians or Copts used the

.
, ,

word A m enti to translate the G reek word H ades to which ,

1
S ee B ru gs c h, D 1 et G eog
°

227
.
’
p . .

2
p o
S ee M a s er , E ro des d e My t/zologze,
’
t . I, p .
34 5
2 04 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

A k e rt l] 21
[ Q
a co m m on na m e for the abode of the
dead
W
.

Q
B as t full y m ore
Pa Bast o r Per B ast - -

69
’ ,
Q
the B u b a s t is of the G reek writers ( H erodotus I I 5 9 1 3 7 , , , ,

156 , 1 66 ; S trabo X V I I i the m etropol is of the

, , ,

e ighteenth no m e of Lower E gypt and the seat of the ,

wors h ip of Bast a goddess who was identified with the soul

,

of I sis oa en A s l ,
§ flg “ The city is m entioned i n
w w .

the B ible under the for m n o:9 ( E z ekiel xxx Pi ,

b es et h which t h e Copts have preser v ed i n thei r n a m e for

,

the city 11 07 5 11 6 7 1 ; the A rabs call the place Tell B as tah

7
,

H
N w

H et -b en b en t
2 J J zfl the na m e given W

to m any sun shri nes i n E gypt and the S fi dan and also to
-
,

one of the places i n the O ther World where the deceased

d w elt .

”
a
H et P t a h k a
B 23213
-
the sacred-
na m e of the city
o f M e m phis the m etropol is of the first no m e of Lower
,

Egypt i t m eans the H ouse of the é a o f P tah an d was ,

probably i n use i n the period of the I st dynasty O ther .

“
na m es for M e mphis were 2at :I
A neb h et c h et the ci ty of ,
-
,

the white wal l M en n efer and Kh a n efer t - -

éZ
‘

K a m -u r a na m e given to the d istrict o f

15 1 ,

the fou rth an d fifth no m es of U pper E gypt .

z z Q 0 Q
m
K h em en u
pp( 3 Q 2 :
’

ze the c it y of the
Q
eight great cos m ic gods the H er m opol is of the G reek writers
,
”

( pp
E o woh t n x
n p( vl a m
j S trabo X V I I t I ,
was the , , ,

m etropol is of the fi fteenth no m e of U pper E gypt T h e old .

E gyptian na me for the city is preserved i n its Coptic and

A rabic na m es and E s h m fi n é n
, .

K h er a ha m m
o o

a very anc i en t C i ty wh i ch was

o

O
si tuated on the right bank o f the N ile a l ittle to the south ,

“
of An n n ear the site of which the B abylon of E gypt
,
 P lac es i n t h e B oo k of the D d ea 2 05

‘ ’

( 8 4 . 61 k the B a kaSv q ofip t o u ep vp vov

rr r e ,
’

of S trabo X VI I i 30 ) was buil t

, , ,
.

0 00
M ann j
o a

w or is the na m e g iven to the

ooo j ” ?
region where the sun sets wh ich was bel ieved to be exactly ,

O pposite to the district o f B ekha

J where he rose i n ,

the east ; M anu is a synony m of west j ust as B ekha is ,

1
a synony m of east .

Q IVVW V\

Nekh en or s the na m e o f the sh rin e of the

goddess N ekhebet whi ch is supposed to have bee n near to ,

N ekheb the capital of the th ird no m e of U ppe r E gy pt an d

,

the E ileit h yia s po lis of the Greeks .

C
Net er kh er t et , or K h er t Net er,
-
] w or
E
a co mm on na m e for the abode of the d ead ; it m eans the
d ivi ne subterranean place .

L"
T
G O
Fea d istri ct of the tow n of Per U a t c h et
,
-
, ’
6 0 e
the B uto of the G reeks ( B o il m s S trabo XVI I i
-
, , , ,

w h ich was situated i n the Delta .

“ H ouse
P er
)
-
As ar of Osi ris the B usi ris
E
? 69 , ,

of the G reek w riters I t was s ituated i n the D elta and .

,

was the centre of the cul t of Osi ris i n Lower E gypt .

P u nt the tropical d istrict wh ich lay to the

o a

g
,

south and east of E gypt and which included i n later ti m es . , ,

a part of the A rab ian pen insula an d the eastern coast of

A frica along an d south of So m al iland
R a s tau
- —
Q
fi Oa na m e given to
O O O .

the passages i n the to m b wh i ch lead fro m th i s to the Other

World ; originally i t designated the ce m etery of S a kkar a h
only and its god was Seker later Seker As ar -

+
, , .

Sa
§k éa the S ai s of the G reeks ( Edi e ,

Strabo XV I I i , the m etropol is o f the fi fth no m e of

, ,

Lower E gypt and the seat of the worship of the goddess

,

N eit h .

M
1
S ee ru s c h ,

tfi ologie, t I ,
B
D i et g
d
G eog ,
A p Z i /
1
99 ,
ifl,
.
’
. pp . 2 60

8 6 4,
;
pp
M as p o er
—
, Etu des de
33 2 a
. n e
g e .ls e zr . 1 .
73 76 .
2 06 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani
S ek h em
§g , 0r
g §g ® the Letopol is of
the G reeks and capital of the L et O polit es n o m e ( S trabo
, ,

XV I I i, i t was the seat of the worship of H eru u r

,
-

R fil ’ H orus t he elder , and on e of t he m ost i m portan t

religious ce ntres i n E gypt .

S ek h et Aa n r u -

M 1 Q l] 1 1
m ea , i . e
.
,

F ield of the R eeds was a na m e origi nally given to the

,

islands i n the D elta or to the Oases where the souls of the

, ,

dead were s u pposed to l i v e H ere was the abode of the god .

Osiris who bestowed estates i n it upon those who had been

,

h is followers and h ere the b ea t ified dead led a new existence

,

and regaled the m selves upon food o f e v ery kind which was ,

given to the m i n abundance Accordi ng to th e v ignette of .

the C X t h Chapter of the B ook of the Dead the S ekhet ,

“
A a n r u is the th ird d i v ision of the S ekhet het epu or F ields -
,

of Peace which ha v e been co m pared with the E lys ian

,

F iel ds of the Greeks .

S et Am en t et O
w E
% i
O
, . e .
,
“
the m ountai n of the
U nderworld a co m m on na m e of the ce m etery which was
, ,

u s u ally situated i n the m ountai ns or desert on the west ern

bank of t h e N ile .

S u te n -
h en en M
g ,
m ore correctly H en s u the ,

m etropol is of the twentieth n o m e of U pper E gypt called ,

by the G reeks H e ra kleopo lis M agna ( S trabo XV I I i , , ,

T h e H ebrews m ention t h e c ity H anes ( D313 I saiah x xx 4 ) , ,

as the representati v e of U pper E gypt and i n Coptic ti m es ,

i t was still o f considerable si z e an d i m portan ce ; the Copts

and Arabs ha v e preser v ed the ancient n a m e of the city
u nder the for m s g rt RC and w ml A / ma s ’ .

T a n en et
g il l m a district sacred to the gods
o
’

Osiris and P tah i t was probably s ituated near M e m phis .

T a -t c h es ert fi
i z
m ’ i . e .
,
the H ol y Land , a
co m m on na m e for the Other World .
2 08 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

and hereby was he enabled to partake of the m eat and

dri nk offerings whereof the friends and relatives also ,

partook i n order that they m ight ce m ent and seal thei r

,

m ystic u n ion with the dead and with the god with who m he
was identified .

Certain for m u lae were di rected to be repeated fou r

ti m es :a direction whic h takes us back to the ti m e whe n
the E gyptians fi rst di v ided t h e world into four parts
each correspondin to one of the four pillars which held g ,

up the sky that i s to say to one of the four cardi nal

, ,

po i nts E ast So u th West and N orth presided o v er by

.

, , , , ,

a H orus god The deceased sought to obtain the assistan ce

-
.

of each of the I I o ru s gods and to have the right to roa m -

about i n h is d istrict ; hence the for m ula was repeated four

ti m es O riginally four an i m als or fo u r geese were sacri
.

fi c ed one to each god but subsequently E ast and N orth

. , ,

and West and South were paired and two bulls ( or birds ) , ,

only were sacrificed on e of which was called the Bull of ,

1
the N orth an d the other the B ull of the So u th The
,
.

custo m of fo u r fold repetition continued to the Ptole m ai c

‘

ti m es and even later The priest whose offi cial ti tle was .

é fi er é eé
, m ,
g Jé
recited the prayers i n the T u at
O
,

Cha m ber of the to m b and the , s em or s el em priest

2
presented the prescribed offerings .

3
I Osiris everyth ing that is hateful of
.
,
X hath been
carried away for thee ;
H er e s p r i n le w a t er k .

that e v il which was spoken i n his na m e T hoth hath

advanced and carried i t to Osiris I have brought the .

evil which was spoken i n the na m e of X and I have ,

placed it i n the pal m of thy hand .

1
Th
t X I I pp 7 8 7 9
i
bj t h b l idl di s su d b M p o R il
ec as een uc y scu sse y as er ,
ecu e
’
de

Rom
r a va zex,

F 2
h t t dt
or

8 8 —9 ; M p o R
l tiot
.

e hi p ex
,

an
.

lli [l L é d i F
t I I I pp 7 9 If th
l
,

ra n s a
.

n s , s ee S c a ar e ,
'

z ro e

S
u n er a z,
'

Py m
D
ra

um
t t
i h
e, 1
ol I
D G
’

b /
il d T

t
1

dg t gy f F
za en ex e,

L ip ig 8
0

8 8
V
i
8
as

Of i g Lo do
.
er

,
B ,

u
ecu e

e,
e

ur
r a va u x ,

o
.

u n er a
, . 1

er fz s ,
.

n
e e,

n,

19 9 ; 0 p c 4
en , 5 er ra a as ,
e z ,
1 ,
1 .

X th d
3
d : e ec eas e .
 F u n er a l C erem o n ies 2 09

R ec i t e fou r t i m es .

The flu id of l i fe shall n ot be destroyed i n thee and ,

.

thou shal t not be de s troyed i n it .

Let h im that a dv a n c et h ad v ance w i th his KA .

H orus a dv a n c et h with h is K A .

S et a dv a n c et h w ith his KA .

Thoth a dv a n c et h wit h his K A .

R ec i t e fo u r t i m es and b u rn i n c en s e .

S ep a dv a n c et h w ith his KA .

Osiris a dva n c et h with his K A .

K h en t ariti a dv a n c et h w ith his KA

-
.

Thy Tet
fi ( backbone ) shall ad v ance w ith thy K A .

H ail X The a r m of thy KA is before t hee

, .

H ail X T he a r m of thy K A is behi nd thee

,
.

H ail X T he leg of thy KA is before thee

, .

H ail X The leg of thy KA is behi nd thee

, .

Osiris I ha v e gi v en unto thee the E ye of H orus

, ,

an d t h y face is filled therew ith and the perfu m e of the ,

E ye of H orus is to thee .

This l ibation is for thee Osiris th is l ibation is fo r , ,

thee Osiris X co m ing forth

, ,

H er e p o u r ou t fr o m a v es s el w ate r in w h ic h
tw o g ra i n s o f 1 n c en s e h ave b ee n dl s s o lv ed .

before thy son co m i ng forth before H orus I have

, .

co m e I ha v e brou gh t u n to thee the E ye of H orus

.
,

that thy heart m a y be refreshed thereby I have .

brought i t u nto thee [under] thy sandals an d I have ,

presente d unto thee the efflu x which co m eth forth fro m

thee T here shall be n o stoppage to thy heart with i t
.
,

R e c it e fou r t i m es .

and there shall be a co m ing forth to thee [of offerings]

through the word w h ich is spoken there shall be ,

a co m ing forth to thee [of offerings ] through the word

which is spoken .

[
Cleansing by ] S em m an
[
Cleansing by ] S emm an !
Open thy m outh O X , ,

H er e o ffer fi v e gra i n s of Nekh eb i n c en s e

fr o m t h e c it y o f Nekh eb .

VOL . I .
2 10 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

and taste thereof i n the halls of the god S em m an is .

an e m ission of H orus S em m an is an e m ission of S et

. .

S em m an is the s t a b lis h er of the heart of the two

H or u s gods .

R ec it e fo u r t im es .

Thou art cleansed with natron an d art l ike unto the ,

Followers of H orus Thou art purified w ith natron

.
,

and H orus i s purified with natron thou art purified ,

with natron and Set is purified w ith natron

,
.

H er e o ffer fi ve gra i n s of n a t ro n o f t h e No r t h
fr o m S h et p et .

Thou art purified with natron and Thoth is purified ,

with natron T h ou art p u rified wi th natron an d Sep

.

is p u rified with natron Thou art purified w 1t h natron

.

and thou art establ ished a m ong the m the gods ) .

Thy m outh is l ike the m outh of a sucking calf on the

day of i ts birth .

V Thou art purified w ith natron and H orus is purified ,

w ith natron Thou art purified with natron and S et

.
,

is purified with natron Thou art purified with natron

.
,

H er e o ffe r o n e gra i n of n a t ro n .

and T hoth is purified with natron Thou art p u rified .

w ith natron an d S ep is purified with natron Thou

, .

art purified w ith natron and thy K A is purified wi th ,

natron .

T hou art purified with natron [R ec i t e fo u r t im es ] ,

O thou who art establ ished a m ong thy brethren the

gods Thy head is purified for thee with natron and
.
,

t h y bones have been thoroughly cleansed for thee an d ,

thou art filled with that which belongeth t o thee .

Osiris I ha v e given unto thee the E ye of H orus and

, ,

thy face is filled therewith and the odour thereof ,

[ is spread abroad ] .

V I Osiris X thy two j aw bones which were separated have

. ,
-

bee n establ ished .

H er e p r es en t t h e P es es h kef v .
2 12 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

be m ade unto thee N I GHT hath m ade an offering

.

unto t h ee i n the sky ; the N orth and the So u th ha v e

caused an offering to be m ade unto thee An offering .

hath been m ade u nto thee thou seest the offering thou , ,

hearest thereof There is an offeri ng before thee an d

.
,

an offering behin d thee there is an offering with thee .

H er e o ffe ra c a ke fo r t h e j o u rn ey .

X I I I Osi ris X th e white teeth of H or s are presented

.
, u

un to thee so that they m ay fill thy m o u th .

b
H er e o ffer fi v e u n c h es o f o n io n s , a n d r ec i t e
fo u r t i m es T H E K I NG G I E TH A N O ER I NG T O TH E V FF
X KA OF .

X I V Os iris X the E ye of H orus is prese n ted unto thee

, ,

the bread wh ich tho u eatest .

H er e o ffe r t h e U t en c a e k .

XV Osi ris X
.
, t he E ye of H or s is presen ted unto thee
u .

I t hath been snatched fro m the han d of Set and t h ou ,

hast taken possession of i t

H er e o ff e r a w h it e j ug co n t a in in g two
m ea s u r es of w 1n e .

for thy m o u th , and thou hast open ed thy m outh

therew ith .

XVI Osiris X thy

.
,
m outh is opened by that wh ich floweth
fro m thee .

H er e o ffe r a b la c k j ug co nta in in g tw o
m ea s u r es of wi ne .

XVI I Osiris X there hath been presen ted unto thee that
.
,

wh ich was pressed out fro m thee that which hath .

co m e forth fro m thee .

H er e o ffe r a b k
la c j ug co nt a in in g on e
m ea s u r e of b ee r .

XV I IA O R a m a y every kind of adoration which is m ade

.
,

to thee i n heaven be m ade to X and m a y eve ryth ing ,

offered to thee be offered to the KA of X and m a y ,

every offeri ng m ade to h im be at the sa m e ti m e m ade , ,

to thee .
 F u n er a l C er em o n ies 2 13

H er e
r t h e h oly t a le o f o fler I n gs
o ffe b '

X V I I I [Osi ris ] X the E ye of H orus is presen ted unto

. ,

thee for thee to taste .

H er e o ffe ra T ep t ca k e .

X I X The darkness beco m eth dense and m ore dense

.
,
.

H er e o ff er a n Ah c a k e .

X X [Osiris] X the E ye o f H orus i s presen ted u nto thee

.
,

to e m brace thee .

H er e o ffe r a b r ea s t .

X X I [Osi ris ] X the E ye of Os i ris wh ich was del ivered

.
, ,

fro m S et and was resc u ed for thee is presented unto

, ,

thee and thou dost open thy m outh with it

, .

H er e o ffe r a w h it e v es s el c o n t a inin g on e
m ea s u r e of w 1n e .

X X I I [Osi ris ] X what was presse d out an d ca m e forth

.
,

fro m Osi ris is presented unto t h ee .

H er e o ffe r a b k la c v es s el co nt a i n in g on e
m ea s u r e
r of b ee .

X X I I I [Osi ris ] X the E ye of H orus which was rescued

.
, ,

fo r t h ee is presen ted unto t hee

, ; there is n o i ron
therein i t belongeth u nto thee
, .

H er e o ffe r an iron v es s el c o nt a in in g on e
m ea s u r e
r of b ee .

XX I V [Osiris] X the E ye of H orus is presented nto

.
, u

thee that thou , m ayest be filled the rewith .

H er e o ffe r a v es s el c o nt a in in g one m ea s u r e
of b een
X XV Osiris . X I have filled th ine eye with m l k t oil
, e e e .

R ec i t e fo u r t i m es a n d p r es en t S et h h eb ,
-

u n gu e n t

X XV I Osiris X what hath been pressed out of thy face

.
,

is presented un to t h ee .

H er e o ffe r B e k e n u n gu en t .

X XV I I Osi ris X the E ye of H orus is presented unto

.
,

thee and S et is weaken ed thereby

, .
2 14 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

H er e
r a j a r o f i t u m en o ffe b .

XXV I I I Osiris X t h E ye of H or s is presen ted u nto

.
, e u

t h ee that it
, ma y u n ite with thee .

H er e
j o ffer a a r of N es h m en u n gu en t .

XX I X Osiris X the E ye of H orus is presented unto thee

.
, ,

that the gods m a y be bro u ght unto thee .

H er e o ffe r a j ar of T u atu u n gu en t .

X XX O ye O ils ye O ils which are on the forehead of

.
, ,

H o rus [S a y t h ree t i m es ] set you rselves on t h fore , e

head o f X an d m ake h im to s m ell sweet thro g h you

, u .

H er e o ffer c e a r o il o f t h e fi n es t q u a lit y d .

Let beco m e a K h u ( Sp iri t ) thro u gh you G ive

him .

h im power o v e r h is body and let h im o pen h is eyes ,

let all the S pirits see h im an d let the m all hear h is ,

n am e .

X XX I Behol d Osiris X the E ye of H orus is brought to

.
, ,

thee it hath been sei z ed on thy behal f t h at i t m a y be

,

before thee .

H er e r
n es t L i y a n o il ( T h eh en u )
o ffe th e fi b .

X XX I I Osi ris X with the E ye of H orus th ine eyes are

.
,

painted that they , may be heal thy i n t hy face .

R ec i t e fo u r t i m es , a n d o ffer a b a g o f c 0 p p er
ey e p a i n t , a n d o n e b a g o f s t i b i u m ey e p a i n t
- -
.

X XX I I I Watch i n peace T aat watcheth i n peace

.
, ,
s he

watcheth
H er e o ffe r t w o s w a t h i n gs .

i n peace . T he E ye of H orus i n
Tep ( Buto ) is i n
peace The E ye of H orus i n the te m ple of N eith
.

[ i n S a is
] is i n peace R ecei v e thou the m ilk w h ite .
-
,

bleac h ed s w a t h in gs of the goddess U r a O s w a t hin gs . ,

m ake E gypt to sub m it to X even as it doth to H orus ,

m ake E gypt to fear X even as i t feareth Set B e ye

d
.

before X as go Open a way for h im at the head of

.

the Spi rits let him stand at thei r head Co m e forward

,
.
,

O A npu K h en t i A m enti forward to the Osi ris X , , .

2 16 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

wh ich he was about to present or so m e play u pon words , .

B e s ides the offerings already enu m erated there were given

a R et h u cake a vessel of T c h es er t drink a vessel of
, ,

K h en em beer a cake an d a v essel of dri nk a Shebu cake

, , ,

a r u t j oint two v ases of water cakes of B et in cense a Tun

, , ,

cake a S h ens cake two H eth cakes two N e h ra cakes

, , , ,

fo u r T ept cakes fo u r Peten cakes fo u r Shes cakes four

, , ,

A m ta cakes fo u r K h en fu cakes Heb en t cakes whit e flour

, , , ,

A tet cakes Pat cakes a hau nch of beef a breast of an

, , ,

an i m al two ribs of beef roasted flesh a l i v er a Nen s h em

, , , ,

joi nt a Ha j oi nt a forequarter j oint a R e goose a T h er p

, , , ,

goose a S et goose a S er goose a swallow ( or do v e ) a S af

, , , ,

cake two S h at cakes Nepa t grain M e s t grain Kh en em es

, , , ,

beer or w ine S ekh p et gra i n Pekh grain baskets of figs

, , , ,

N orthern wi ne White w ine Pelu s iu m wi ne Het em w i ne

, , , ,

S en u ( Syene ) w ine H eb n en t win e A sht fr u it B abat fr uit

, , , ,

m ulberries T en b es cakes fr u its of all k i nds flowers of all

, , ,

k i nds v egetables of all kinds etc Certai n articl es of dress

, , .

were also given and we see clearly that the obj ect of the
,

L iturgy was to supply the deceased with everything whic h

was considered to be necessary for h is well being when he -

was al ive The Pyram i d Texts an d t h e m a r ga é a é to m bs

.

prove that this Liturgy was i n use abo u t 3 8 0 0 B C an d . .

,

the papyri of the R o m an Period supply copies of the

text which show that i t re m ained u nchanged in form i n the
secon d century of our era N othing proves m ore cl early .

than th is fact that one of the funda m entals of the E gyptian

R eligion was the bel ief i n the efficacy of sacrifices an d
offerings .
 T H E PA PY R U S OF A NI ,

ITS DA T E A ND C O NT E NT S

T he Papyrus of An i
(k [ g
T hebes and was acqu i red by m e for the T rustees of
?) m
was found at

the E r 1tish M useu m i n 1 8 8 8 I t m easu res 7 8 feet by

.

1 foot 3 i nches is m ounted un der glass i n thi rty seven

,
-

sheets an d bears t h e nu m ber 1 0 4 7 0 I t is the fi nest an d

,
.

the longest of all the pain ted papyri i nscribed with the
T heban R ecension of the B ook of the D ead The Papyr u s .

o f Neb s en i ( N o 9 9 00 ) m easures 7 7 feet 7 —5 i nches by

.

1 3 i nches ; the Papyr u s of N u m easures 6 5 feet 3 2 i nches

by 1 foot 1 2 i nches ( N o the Papyrus of H u n efer

.

( N o .
99 0 1
) m eas u res 1 8 feet 1 0 i nches by 1 foot
33 i n ches ;
the Papyrus o f Q en n a ( at Leyden ) is about 5 0 feet long
d
an the D u bl i n Papyrus publ ished by N a v ille ( D 9 of h is
,

en é u ek
) is 2 4 feet 9 i n ches long The Papyrus . o f
An i is m ade of si x distin ct lengths of papyr u s that vary
fro m 5 feet 7 i nches to 2 6 feet 9 i nches i n length The .

m aterial I S co m posed of three layers of papyrus uppl ied by

plan ts that m easured i n the stalks about 4 1s 2
i n ches in »

d ia m ete r The several lengths have been j oined together

.

with great n eatn ess an d the repai rs an d i nsertion s ( see

,

Plates X XV XX VI ) have been dexterously execut ed

, .

When brought to E nglan d th e papyrus was of a ve ry l igh t

colour si m ilar to that of the P a pyrus of H u n efer ( N o
, .

b u t after i t was un rolled i t beca m e darker the whites

yellows blues an d greens lost thei r i ntense v ivi ness and
, ,
,

d ,
,

certai n parts of the section s contracted .

The papyrus contai ns a large selection of Chapters of

the Theban R ecension of the B ook of the Dea n early all d ,

o f wh ich are acco m pan ied by V ignettes text and Vignettes

have at top and botto m a border of two colours red an d ,

y ellow or
, yellow and orange A t the beginn
. i n g and end
o f the papyrus spaces of 6 an d 1 1 i n ches respecti v ely
V OL . I .
Q
2 18 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

were left blank ; t h ese spaces were allowed so that i n

unrolli ng the papyrus the open i ng V ignette m ig h t not be
da m aged and that i n roll ing i t up the last V ign ette m igh t
,

not be da maged T h e inscribed portion is to all i n tents

.

and purposes co m plete an d the loss of the few characters

,

that were da m aged i n u n roll i ng ( see Plates I X V XX I V ) , ,

does n o t interrupt the text M ore than one scribe see m s .

to have been e m ployed i n copyi ng i t but the un i for m ity of ,

the execution of the V ignettes suggests that they are all the
work o f on e m a n An i as we know fro m his papyru s was
.
, ,

“ ”
a veritable scribe that is to say h is title of scribe was
, ,

not honorary and it i s probable that so m e of the Chapters

,

were copied by his own h and The titles of the Chapters .

,

rubrics catchwords etc are wri tten i n red but the text
, ,
.
, ,

generally is i n black I n so m e in stances the artist who

.

pain ted the Vignettes has occ u pied so m uch space that the
scribe has been obl iged to crowd the text i n Plate X I ) ,

and at ti m es he has been obliged to write it on the border

( see Plates X I V XVI I ) T
,
hese facts suggest that the
.

Vignettes were drawn an d painted before the text was

wr i tten
.

The d ifferen t sect ions of the papyrus were n ot all

originally written for An i for i n several places his na m e ,

h a s been added by a later hand e g i n Plates XV XV I . . .

, , ,

XVI I I XX I I XX V XX VI I I and XXXVI

, , ,
As ,
.
,

however such add itions do not occur i n the fi rst section

, ,

w hich m easures 1 6 feet 4 i nches i n length i t m u st be ,

concl u ded that th is section was written expressly for h im ,

and that the others were so m e of those ready wri tten -

copies in wh ich blan k spaces were left for the i nsertion of

the na m es of the deceased person s for who m they we re
purchased The scribe who filled i n An i s na m e i n those
.
’

spaces wrote hurriedly for i n Plate X V he l eft h i m sel f n o

,
“ “ ”
space to w ri te the word Osi ris i n the phrase An i , ,

E
n
n In
whose word 15 truth before Os 1 r i s o Q
,
n
5 .

Plate XVI I he has written the na m e twice i n Plate XVI I I

he has o m i tted the deter m i native i n Plate XX he wrote
Q
h (Ml : m s t ea d fi
ss u ll fi fl l i
i n Plate XXX he wrote twice probabl y wi th a v iew of ,
 2 20 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

seen that it occupies an independent pos ition in all respects .

Though agreei ng i n the m ai n w ith the papyri of the

XV I I I t h dynasty i n respect of textual re adings the Papyrus ,

of An i has pec u l iarities of spell i ng etc which are not found ,

i n any of t h e m The handwriting of the first section at

.
,

least suggests the best period of the X V I I I t h dynasty ;

,

but as the scribe for m s so m e of the hieroglyphs i n a way

pecul iarly h is own the palaeograph ic evidence on this po i nt
,

is not decis ive T h at the papyrus belongs to the period

.

that produced such docu m ents as the Papyrus of N eb q et -

D ev eria Paris , and the Papyrus of Q en n a

,

Lee m ans Leyden ,

i e to so m e period of the
,
. .
,

X V I I I t h dynasty is tolerably certai n and i t is i m possible

,

not to assu m e that i t is older than the Papyrus of H u n efer ,

wh ich was written during the reign of Seti I For though .

,

belonging to the sa m e class of highly decorated papyri t h e ,

execution of the V ign ettes is fi ner and m ore careful and the ,

free bold for m s of the h ieroglyphs i n the better writte n

,

sections m ore closely rese m ble those of the texts i nscribed ‘

i n ston e u n der the greatest k ings of the XV I I I t h dynasty .

The Lord of the Two Lands i e the k ing of U pper and . . .

,

Lower E gypt m entioned i n Plate I V is probably one of

, ,

1 the last kings of the X V I I I t h dynasty and accord ingly we ,

m a y place the period of the Papyrus of A n i between

1 4 5 0 B C and 1 400 B C
. . . .

O f the bi rth and parentage of A n i we know nothing ,

but i t is m ost probable that h is fa m ily was und istinguished ,

an d that he owed his high offi cial posit ion under the king s
’

favour to h is abil ity and tact H is ti tles are

, .

“veritable royal scribe i e he was .

, .
,

a royal scribe who real ly worked at h is profession and

, ,

not one who enj oyed the honorary rank of royal scribe ,

a title which was often bestowed by the king on o fficials o f

high birth and rank .

H
i
j yfl ] fi
‘ C E
C3 m scribe reckoner , ,

(,or assessor ) o f the divine offerings of a ll the gods B y .

this title i t see m s that we m ust understand that An i was

registrar in chief of the offerings that were m ade by the
- -

devout to all t h e gods of Thebes I t is probable that i t .

also fel l to his duty to assess the a m ounts of produce grain , ,

 G en era l D es c r ipt io 22 1

cattle etc ,
wh ich the various priesthoods of E gypt
.
,

de m anded fro m wealthy E gyptians as obl igatory con tri

butions to the revenues of thei r gods .

3 i Bi u
l m
I I
Q overseer of the g r a n a r ie s ’

of the Lords of Abydos The offeri ngs of grain dhura .

, ,

wheat etc were del ivered by thei r givers to the te m ple

, .
,

granaries o r probably to a s ingle granary wh ich served as

,

a general storehouse for the grain that was the property o f

the var i ous gods This granary was very large and the .
,

m anage m en t of i t m ust have de m anded grea t knowled ge

4
Q
?D ]
==
=
and a b ilit y o n the part of 1 t s m anage r
m “
U
| T
C
scribe of the d
”W ivi n e
Q
.

offerings of the Lords of T lieb es

e
I f the weal th possessed .

by the te m ples of T hebes un der th e X V I I I t h dynasty be

considered for a m o m en t i t will at once be clear that th is ,

office of A n i was on e of very great i m por tance a n d on e ,

de m andi ng not only the highest abil ity b u t t h e highest , ,

i n tegri ty on the part of the holder .

Tutu “
the wi fe of An i is called lady of
, ,

Q
U Ej tfl fi
the house and s fi em dt en A m en $
, , ,
M M M
l D 3 M

i e
. . singing wo m an of A m en
, The fi rst title shows that .

Tutu was A n l s chief wife i f he had m ore than on e w ife , ,

and the secon d that she was o ne of the ladies of good fa m ily
who were offi cially attached to the ser v ice of A m en R a the ,

king o f the gods at T hebes She attended i n the te m ple

, .
,

and was on e of the ladies of the choi r who s ang hy m ns to

A m en an d port ions of the L iturgy S he is usually r ep r e .

sented carrying a s istru m wh ich she rattled as she sang i n ,

the choruses T he w ires of the s istru m m ade a pecul iar

.

sound which was bel ieved to be effi cac ious i n driving away
fiends fro m the sanctuary Thus though A n i was a lay .
,
’

scribe his w ife was a priestess and it is probable that he

, ,

owed so m e of the offices which he enj oyed to her i n flue n ce .

The contents of the P a pyrus of An i m a y be d ivided

1 nto two p arts

P a r t I contains :A H y m n to R a in troductory to the ,

J udg m en t S cene ( Plate I ) a H y m n to Osiris also intro , ,

du c t ory to the J udg m ent S cen e ( Plate I I ) the for m er has

two Vignettes the fi rst bei n g on Plate I and the second on
,
222 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Plate I I The second Vignette represents the Sunrise i n

.

the physical world and the resurr ection of Osiris and also
,

of the deceased who is iden tified with Osiris and is called

,
“the Osi ris "
in the O t her World T his Vignette is .
,

co m m only known as Chapter X VI and as it i mm ediatel y , ,

follows the H y m n to R a it shows that the scribe regarded ,

this in troductory hy m n as a form of Chapter XV .

Following the hy m ns co m es the great j udgm ent S cene ,

which is supposed to take place i n the H all of M aati or the ,

H all of the T wo T ruth goddesses at the en d of which -

,

Osi ris s its enthroned w ithi n h is shri ne T h e weighing of .

the heart of A n i i s depicted i n Plate I I I and the presenta ,

tion of An i to Osi ris by H orus the son of I sis after he has , ,

been declared to be a speaker of the truth by Thoth and

the Gods of An n on Plate I V T he j udg m ent Scene in
, .

the Papy rus of A n i is m ore fully represented and better

described than i n any other papyrus con tain ing the Theban
R ecension U sually the I ntroductory S ection opens with
.

a Vignette of Osi ris an d a short address or hy m n to t he

god but here the H y m n to R a precedes everyth ing Th is
, .

fact suggests that at the close of the X V I I I t h dynasty ,

under the in fluen ce of the priests of A m en the Sun god

d
-
,

began to i nva e the do m ains of Osiris and to assert his

sovereignty over N ight an Dead land as well as over Day d ,

d d
-

an the Lan of the L ivi ng .

P a rt I I con t ains a long series of Chapters of the

T heban R ecension of the Book of the Dead which appear ,

i n the follow in g order

I with V ignette Plates V an d VI
, X X I I Plate VI ;
, ,

R ubric of L XX I I Plate V I XV I I with a long series of

, ,

V ignettes Plates V I I —X CX LV I I the Seven A r it s wi th

, , ,

Vignettes Plates X I and X I I ; CX L V I the Ten Pylons

, , ,

w it h Vignettes Plates X I and X I I X V I I I I ntroductions

, , ,

with V ignettes Plate X I I X V I I I w ith Vignettes Plates

, , ,

X I I I and X I V XX I I I w ith Vignette Plate XV X X I V , , ,

Plate XV XX VI with V ignette Plate XV ; X XX B , , ,

Plates I I I and X V ; L X I with Vignette Plate X V ; , ,

L I V w ith V ignette Plate XV ; X X I X with V ignette

, , , ,

Plate XV ; X X VI I with Vignette Plates XV and XV I ;, ,

LV I I I with V ignette Plate XVI ; L I X with Vignette

, , , ,

Plate X VI ; X L I V with V ignette Plate XVI ; X L V , , ,

w ith Vignette Plate XVI ; X LV I w ith V ignette Plate X V I ;

, , ,
2 24 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

See Plates V and V I The papyri belonging to the early

.

part of the X V I I I t h dynasty call this C h apter The “

“
Chapter of entering into the p r es en c e of the T c h a t c h a u

M
A D H T
? [
O
Chiefs of Osiris ’
The
, < 3
, lél
[
'

l arge nu m bers of the m en attend ing the bier and of the

weeping wo men are pecul iar to the A n i Papyr u s .

“
C H A PT ER I I .The Chapter of Co m ing Forth by Day
and of l i v ing after death See Plate XV I I I . .

C H A PT ER VI I n the Papy rus o i An i this Chapter is

.
,

i ncl u ded i n Chapter CL I See Plate XX X I I I n the . .

Papyrus of Neb s en i ( B rit M us N o 9 9 00 ) the Chapter . . .

“
stands by i tsel f an d is en titled The Chapter of m aking the
, ,
”
U shabti figure to perfor m work for a m a n i n Khert N eter -
,

C H A PT ER VI I I The Chapter of m aking a way

.

through A m en ti an d of co m i ng forth by da y
, See .

Plate X VI I I Th is co m pos i tion is so m eti m es i n corporated

.

with another Chapter .

C H A PT ER I X The Chapter of Co m ing Forth by Day

.
,

having passed through the A m het cha m ber See Plate .

”

X V I I I T he Vignette i n the Papyrus of An i is si m ilar

.

to that wh ich stands at the head of Chapters V I I I an d I X

i n other papyri of this period .

C H A PT ER X or C H A PT ER X L V I I I “ Another Chapter .
,

to be said by a m a n who co m eth forth by day against his

ene m ies i n Khert N eter See Plate X VI I I
-
. .

C H A PT ER X V 1 “A H y m n of Praise to R a when he
. .

riseth i n the eas t ern sky S ee Plate I This version of . .

the Chapter 13 pecul iar to the Papyrus of An i .

C H A PT ER XV 2 “ A H y m n of Praise to Osiris U n
. .

N efer the great god who dwelleth i n Abydos S ee .

Plate 1 1 Osi ris is i n th is hy m n regarded as one of the

.

two for m s of R a an d 13 therefore i ncluded in th is Chapter

,
.

C H A PT ER XV 3 A H y m n of P raise to R a when he
. .

riseth i n the eastern sky an d when he setteth i n the land ,

of l i fe See Plates XVI I I — XX I

O wing to the nu mbering of t he
.

C H A PT ER XVI .

Chapters by Lepsius th is consists of a V ignette only which , ,

as has been al ready said belongs to Chapter XV or to that , ,

pa rt of i t which refers to the rising sun I t m a y be noted .

 G n r lDe e a es c r ipt io n 225

i n passi ng that the Papyrus of An i l ike m any ancien t ,

papyri of the B ook of the D ead contains no Vignette of ,

the Sunset S ee Plate I I . .

C H A PT ER X VI I H ere begin the praises an d

.

l r i f in s of co m ing out fro m an d of goi ng i nto the

g o y g
glorious K hert N eter i n the B eauti ful A m enti of co m ing
-
,

forth by day in all the transfor m ations which i t m a y please

the deceased to assu m e o f playing at draughts an d of , ,

sitti ng i n the Set cha m ber an d of co m ing forth as a ,

l iv ing heart soul S ee Plates V I I —X This is one of

-
. .

the oldest an d m ost i m portan t Chapters of the Theban

R ecension an d i n the for m here given contains the dog m as
about G ,

od and the creation of the sun m oon stars , , ,

and e arth and about Osi ris and the gods an d goddesses
, ,

who were associated with h im as for m ulated by the priest ,

hood o f R a at H el iopol is The variant readings m a y .

represen t the v iews of the priesthood of Thebes A large .

section of the text is qu i te unacco u n tably o m itted by the , ,

scribe and the m issing l i nes have been suppl ied fro m the
,

Papyrus of N eb s en i
A
.

C H PT ER X V I I I Th is is without a ti tl e i n the Papyrus

.

of An i a fact whi ch suggests that the Chapter was regarded

,

by the T heban scribes as the continuation of Chapter X VI I .

A few papyri give i t a title v iz “ The Chapter of ente ring ,

”
i nto the presen ce o f the T c h a t c h a u C h iefs The Papyrus .

of An i contains two copies of th is Chapter I n the fi rst .

the gods of the towns are grouped i n a series of V ign ettes ,

each of which stands n ear the S ection which i t illustrates .

This copy is preceded by an I n trod u ction wh ich is pecul ia r ,

to the Papyrus of An i T he An m u t ef an d S a m er ef priests .

are seen introducing An i to the gods with appropriate ,

speeches and the addresses of An i are given S ee Plates

,
.

X I I — X I V I n the second copy the gods are not separated

.

in to groups but are arranged i n a row above the text ; a

,

few of the gods m entioned i n the text are o m itted i n th i s

copy S ee Plates XX I I I and X X IV
. .

C H A PT ER XX I I “ The Chapter of givi ng a m outh to

.

”
the Osiris An i the scribe and registrary of all the gods
, S ee .

Plate V I This Chapter is w ithout Vignette i n the Papyrus

.

of An i an d i t is re m arkable that it follows Chapte r I

, .

Perhaps the con cluding passage of Chapter I which deals ,

w ith offerings suggested that the text that would prov ide
,
2 26 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

An i with a m o u th to eat the sa m e should follow i m me

dia t ely .

C H A PT ER XX I I I The Chapter of O pen ing the m outh

.

of the Osiris the scribe An i

, this is a kind of supple m en t
to the preceding Chapter See Plate XV . .

C H A PT ER XXV “T he Chapter of bri nging words of

.

power unto the Osiris An i i n K hert N eter See Plate X V -

.
"
.

As i n other ancien t Theban papyri this Chapte r is without

V ignette i n the Papyrus of An i .

C H A PT ER XXV I “The Chapte r of giving a heart

.

unto the Osiris An i i n Khert N eter S ee Plate XV The -

. .

V ignette to this Chapte r i n t h e Papyrus of An i is probably

u n ique .

C H A PT ER XXV I l “ The Chapte r of not letting the

.

heart of a m a n be snatched away fro m h im i n Khert N eter -

.

S ee Plate X V T he V ignette to this Chapter i n the Papyrus

.

of An i is unco m m on .

C H A PT ER X X I X T he Chapter of not letting the

.

"
heart of a m a n be snatched away fro m h im i n K hert N eter -
.

S ee Plate XV N 0 other copy of this Chapter is at presen t

.

known .

C H A PT ER X X I X B “ The Chapter of a heart of car .

nel ian . S ee Plate XX X I I I

”
.

C H A PT ER X X X B “ The Chapter of not letting the

d
.

heart of a m a n be riven away fro m h im i n K hert N eter -

.

S ee Plate X V An i m perfect dupl icate copy is also given

.

i n the j udg m en t S cene S ee Plate I I I . .

C H A PT ER X L I I O nly a portion of the Chapter is

.

given an d that i n tabular form and without title See

, , .

Plate X XX I I I n the older papy ri the ti tle of the Chapter

&k lQ
.

is “ T he Chapter of repulsing slaughter i n H en s u

?
< “
5 2
; L 4]
\ ) ( the H era kleopo lis
”
x . 41
3 g
of the G ree ks ) .

C H A PT ER X L I I I “ The Chapter of not letting the

.

head of a m a n be cut off fro m h is body i n K hert N eter -

.

See Plate X VI I As i n other Theban papyri this Chapter

.

i s without Vignette i n the Papyrus of An i

d
.

C H A PT ER X L IV “T he Chapter of not ying a second

.

ti m e i n Khert N eter -
S ee Plate XVI Chapter C L XX V
. .

has the sa m e ti tle The V ignette is pecul iar to the Papyrus

.

o f An i .
 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C H A PT ER L X X X I A Chapter of m aking the

.
“The
transfor m ation i nto the lotus ( or l ily ) S ee Plate XXV I I I . .

The pool of wate r in the Vignette is unco m m on .

C H A PT ER L XXX I I “The Chapter of m ak ing the

.

transfor m ation i nto the god Pta h S ee Plate X XV I I . .

As i n other papyri of the sa m e period this Chapter has

a V ignette .

“
C H A PT E R L XXX I I I The Chapter of m aki ng the .

transform ation i nto the B enu bi rd ( phoen ix P) S ee .

Plate XX VI I This Chapter lacks the addition that is

.

found in the Papyrus of S u t im es ; several other papyri also

lack the addition .

“
C H A PT ER L XXX I V The Chapter of m aking the .

transfor m ation into a heron See Plate XXV I . .

C H A PT ER L XXX V “ The Chapter of m ak ing the

.

t ransfor m ation i n to the soul of Te m u See Plate XXV I I . .

The Vignette of this Chapte r i s si m ilar to that of the

Papy rus of Tura surna m ed N efer uben f of the X V I I I t h
,
- -
,

dynasty .

C H A PT ER L X X XVI “ The Chapter of m aking th e .

transfor m ation i nto the swallow S ee Plate XX V ”

A
. .

C H PT ER L XXXVI I “ The Chapter of m aking the .

transfor m ation i nto the serpen t S a ta S on of the -

E arth ) S ee Plate X XVI I

”
.

C H A PT ER L XXXV I I I “ T he Chapter of m aking the .

transfor m ation i nto a crocod ile S ee Plate XXV I I . .

C H A PT ER L XXX I X “ T he Chapter of causing the.

”
soul to be un ited to its body i n K hert N eter S ee -
.

Plate XVI I The two standards for censers wh ich stan d

.
,

on e at the head and one at the foot of the bie r are pecul iar ,

to the Papyrus of An i .

C H A PT ER X C I “ The Chapter of not letting the soul

.

”
of a m a n be kept captive i n K hert N eter S ee Plate XVI I -
. .

C H A PT ER X C I I “ T he Chapter of open ing the to m b

.

to t h e so u l and the shadow of co m ing forth by day an d , ,

of getting power over the legs S ee Plate XV I I The . .

V ignette of th is Chapter is unusual and of great i nterest ,

for m i t An i 5 soul acco m pan ies his shadow

’
.

C H A PT ER X C I I I T he Chapte r o f not letti ng a m a n

.

travel to the E ast i n K hert N eter See Plate XV I I -

.
”
.

The arrange m en t of the Vignette of this Chapter is pecul iar

to the Papyrus of An i .
 G n r lD
e e a es c r ipt io n 2 29

C H A PT ER X C I I I A Chapter S ee Plate
.
“Another .

XV I I .

C H A PT ER C X H ere begi n the Chapters of the

.

Sekhet Het epet and the Chapters of Co m ing Forth by

-
,

Day and of going i nto and co m i ng forth fro m K hert

,

N eter an d of arrivi ng i n the S ekhet A aru an d o f being

,
-
,

i n peace i n the great ci ty wherein are fresh bree z es .

S ee Plate XX X IV M any of the details of the Vignette

.

are pecul iar to the Papyrus of A n i an d the text of the

Chapter given only contai ns a few o f 1t s open ing l i nes .

C H A PT ER C X X I V “ The Chapter of going i nto the

.

presence of the T c h a t c h a u Chiefs of Osiris S ee .

Plate X X I V O ne god is wan ting i n the Vignette

. .

“
C H A PT ER CX XV Part 1 The Chapter of entering
, .

i nto the H all of M a ati ; a H y m n to Osi ris S ee .

Plate X X X The text of this part as found i n the

.

Papyrus of An i is not m et with elsewhere .

C H A PT ER C XXV Part I I T h e N egati v e Con fess ion

, .

[ without ti tle ] The Vignette

. possesses four sub Vignettes -
,

which are pecul iar to the Papyrus of An i S ee Plate X XX I . .

C H A PT ER C X X V [O m itted in the Papy rus of A n i ]

. .

C H A PT ER CXX X I I “ The Chapter of m ak ing a m a n .

to return to see again upon the earth S ee Plate XVI I I

A
. .

C H PT ER C XXX I I I A Chapter] to be said on the .

[ ]fi rst day of the m oon S ee Plate XX I . .

C H A PT ER C XXX I I I — R ubric S ee Plate X X I I

A
. .

C H PT ER C X X X I V “ A H y m n of praise to R a on .

the [first] day of the m onth wherei n he s a ilet h i n the boat .

S ee Plate X X I I .

C H A PT ER C X LV I “ The Chapter of the Pylons i n.

the H ouse of Os iris that is i n S ekhet Aa r u S ee -

.

Plates X I and X I I .

“A
C H A PT E R CX LV I I [ Chapter which is to be said .

when An i co m eth to the A r it s S ee Plates X I an d X I I . .

C H A PT ER C X L V I I I “
[ T he Chapter of prov id ing .

An i with food Without title i n the Papyrus of A n i ]

. .

C H A PT ER C L I A series of texts contain ing the

.

S peeches which are m ade by the gods goddesses an d , ,

a m ulet spirits who protect the m u m m y of An i on i ts bier

-

an d i n the m u m m y cha m ber S ee Plates XXX I I I and .

XX X I V S o m e of these texts are so corrupt as to be i n

.

places un intell igible M any of the details of the Vignettes

.
2 30 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

are incorrect and the artist appears not to have un derstood

,

the general plan of the V ignette which he copied

A
.

C H PT ER C L V “ The Chapter of a Tet of gold

. See .

Plate XXX I I I .

C H A PT ER CLVI “The Chapter of a Tet of carnel ian

. .

S ee Plate XXX I I I .

C H A PT ER C L XV I “The Chapter of the headrest

.

whi ch is to be placed under the head of An i See .

Plate X XX I I I .

C H A PT ER C L XXV “ The Chapter of not dying a

.

secon d ti m e .See Plate XX I X This Chapter is in c o m .

let e and breaks off i n the m iddle of a sen tence I t i s

p , .
,

howe v er m ost v aluable for only one other copy of i t is

, ,

known This second copy is found i n a papyrus at Leyden

.
,

but as the begi nn ings an d en ds of a large nu m ber of l ines

,

are wanting i t is i m possible to m ake a connected translation

,

fro m it .

C H A PT ER C L XXX V “ A H y m n of Praise to Osi ris

.

Kh en t i A m enti U n Nefer the dweller i n A btu

- See , .

Plate XX X VI .

C H A PT ER C LX X XVI [A H y m n of Praise to H athor .

i n her character of goddess of the B eautiful A m en ti ] See

Plate X X XVI I .
2 32 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

bracelets and ar m lets I n her right hand she grasps a .

bunch of flowers and a sistru m

3 an d i n h er left are a ,

v i ne branch and a m en dt G
-

T) The m en dt was an obj ect

that was so m eti m es offered to
the gods w ith the sistru m :I t
was presented to guests at a
feast by their host an was , d
reg u larly carried by priestesses
at religious festi v als I t was .

so m eti m es hung roun d the neck ,

an d so m eti m es carried i n the

left hand I t was bel ieved to
.

convey to the holder v i ril ity m “ ,

and strength and was originally ,

an e m ble m of sexual pleasure S ee .

the paper by Lefebure Le M en at “

, ,

et le No m de l eu n u u e
"

q i n P r oc
’

, .

S oc B i bi A r e/z 1 8 9 1 pp 3 3 3— 349 . . .
, , . .

M any very fi ne exa m ples of the

m en dt m a y be seen i n the B ritish
M useu m a g N os 1 7 1 6 6 1 39 5 0 , , .
, .

8 1 7 2 8 1 7 3 2 0 6 0 7 1 8 1 0 9 etc Tutu , , , , .

carries the sist ru m and m en dt as

sy m bols of her position at T heb es
“ ”
as singing wo m an of A m en Ra -
,

the K ing of the Gods She shook .

the s istru m during the serv ices i n

F 10
the 2
sanctuary an d the rattl ing noise ,

m ade by the wi res drove away the

. .

evil spirits who wished to

obstruct the service o f the
god She carried the men d!
.

as a sy m bol of her allegiance

to A m en R a the god of v i ri
-
,

l i ry generation an d c on c ep
, ,

t 1on
x
.

Te t :A r
v e s io n of
C h a p t er
X V I n the older .

papyri the open ing section is F IG

3
always a hy m n to Osiris the
. .

K ing and j udge of the dead but at the close of the ,

 T h e S u nr is e 2 33

X V I I I th dynasty when the power of R a or A m en Ra

, ,
-
,

was para m oun t at T hebes a hy m n to Ra was given the

,

place of honour i n h ieroglyph ic papy ri which al ways begi n ,

at the left —hand end of the rolls The subj ect of the .

hy m n is the glo ry of R a wh o is identified w ith K heper a

, ,

Tatun an d other great cos m i c gods The defeat of A a pep

, .
,

the great adversary of

R a is co m m e m orated
,

i n boastful term s an d ,

the overthrow of all the

fiends of the E v il O ne
i s frequently referred to .

The co m m on est for m _

of the m onste r A a p ep
i s a crocod ile ( F ig I ) .
,

which crouched by the F 4 I G. .

path o f the sun at

dawn ready to swallow up the solar disk N ext we see .

h im i n the for m of a huge speckled python ( F ig then .

as an ordinary serpen t ( F ig an d finally as a huge .

serpen t of m any folds biting the neck of the Ass wh ich ,

represents the Sun god ( F ig -

.

P LAT E II

V i gn et t e A scene representi ng the sunrise H ere .

we see the d isk of t h e sun O resting on the top of the loop ,

“
f
of the sy m bol of l ife i an d supported by two hu m a n
,

ele S
ar m s an d han ds . The ci n
f
,
rests upon the top of the
Tet
fiwh ich rests upon a reed m a t The Tet represen t s
, .

Osi ris who was i n one aspect the dead sun of yesterday
, , , ,
“
an d fro m it proceeds the power of l ife which sends forth ”
,

the solar disk on i ts course O n the upper part of the Tet

.

are the two wi cke t s fi fi

fi or E yes of the Sun
l
and ,

“good
M oon with
,
I the sy m bol of
,
between the m O n , .

each side of the solar disk are three apes w ith thei r paws ,

raised i n adoration of the great lu m inary T hese sing to .

the sun i n the for m of the Spirits of the Dawn whilst he is

rising but as soon as he has risen they turn in to apes O n
,
.

VOL 1 . . R
2 34 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the left of the Tet is the goddess I sis and on the

Q
right the goddess N eb t het or N eph t h ys ; each goddess
-
,
“ ”
kneels on the e m ble m of gold and each has her h ands ,

raised i n adoration of the S u n god Over all is stretched -

.

the vault o f the sky

A This V ignette belongs .
,

properly speaking to the H y m n to R a on Plate I wh ich

, ,

An i was i ntended to say as the su n rose .

Fig 1 is the Vignette o f the Sun rise as i t is foun d in

.

the Papyrus o f H u n efer H ere the sun .

appears i n the well known for m of a -

hawk with the solar disk enci rcl ed by

,

a serpent u pon his head T he apes .

that adore h im are seven i n nu m ber

“
and are called A m é el el R d -
”

a ”
it ! 36
ID B elow the hawk
stands t h e Tet of Osi ris wh ich is here ,

pro v ided w ith a pair of hu m an ar m s

and hands holdi ng the sy m bols of so v e
r ei n t
g y a crook
T and a flail A
,
O n ,
.

F IG .
each
1.
s ide of the Tet stands a goddess ,

that on the left of i t being I sis and ,

“
that on the right N ephthys The legends read : I a m .

”
t h y sister I sis
”
I a m thy sister N ephthys
, .

x
Te t :A H y m n t o O s i ri s
This is a short c o m .

position that m erely en u m erates the titles o f Osi ris a n d ,

refers to h im i n his character of the e v erlasting r u ler of

heaven and gi v er of l ife to m en The V i gn et t e is p ra c .

tically a repetition of that on Plate I .

P LA T E III

V i gn et t e :S c en e o f t h e W eigh i n g o f t h e H ea rt
of the d eceased i n the j udg m ent H all of Osiris A n i and .

h is w i fe Tut u enter the H all of M a ati wherei n the heart 0 ,

e m ble m atic of the conscience is to be weighed i n the ,

B alance agai nst the ostrich feather e m ble m atic of law “ ”

, ,

truth etc Above twelve gods each holding a sceptre

, .
, ,
1 ,
2 36 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

or box with a hu man head This is probably the box that

, .

held A n 1 s navel string é

1
B ehind these stand the

m
.
,

goddesses M E S K H E N ET
p Fi Z and R ennt m ga
the for m er presided o v er t h e bi rth o f An i and the latter ~
C
’
e

“
.

acted as his wet n u rse or -

,

foster m other B ehind t h e .

g is the soul of Ani i n ,

the for m of a hu m an
headed bird standing on a
sepulchral building called
[
i
i
”
S er ekh E On - .

the right of the B alance ,

be h ind A nubis stands ,

T hot h the sel f created w

-
,

F IG .self existen t per s o n ific a

1 .

tion of the m ind of God ,

an d the i nventor of writ ing letters m at h e m atics astrono m y , , , ,

“
and the arts H e stands h ere as the S cribe of the gods
.
”
,

and holds a reed pen and a palette contain ing black and ,

red inks w ith which to record the res u l t of the w eighi ng

,

of t h e heart B ehind Thoth stan ds the m onster A M AM

.
“

E ze “
g
L
e D ev o u r er
, . or as i t is so m eti m es ,

“ “ E ater
§§ Q Q § X
AM M I T Y
called , , i e the Q . .
,

of the dead So m e conte m po

.

rary papyri afford very interest i ng

var i ants of this scen e Thus i n .

F ig 1 the j udg m en t takes place

.

i n a H all i n the presence of the

,

M a ati goddesses only and the

-
,

heart is weighed agai nst a figure

of the goddess of T r u th hersel f .

T h e Ape of Thoth sits by t h e

side of the B alance and n ot on F ,
IG . 2 .

the pillar of i t I n F ig 2 the . .

actual weighi ng is perfor m ed by the goddess Ma at wh ilst ,

in
1
T h e res er a p n v tio of
t h e n a e s r n in E
my Os i r is a n d flu E g p t ia n R es u r r ect i on ,
vl ti g
V y
g pt d g d
an

ol I I p 9 5
.
,
.
U an

.
a is d es c r ib d
e
 T h e E a t er of t he D d ea 2 37

the m onster A m am sits at her feet The Ape of Thoth .

sits on th e left an d wears on his head the d isk of the

,

m oon an d lunar horn s The head of the pillar o f the .

B alan ce is in the for m of that of A nubis I n F ig 3 the . .

Ape of Thoth is seated on the

pillar of the B alance and i t is ,

H orus who takes the place of

A nubis and holds the ton gue ,

of the B alance I n the lower .

register of this V ignette we see

A nubis leading the deceased
i nto t h e presen ce of Osi ris an d ,

presenting the heart of the de

ceased to the god The two .

Apes s ea t ed b Osi ris represen t

F 3 IG , , y o

Thoth an d As tes .

T he E ater of the Dead is also called the D evourer of

A m en ta . I t is a fe m ale m onster w ith the fore part of a -

c rocod ile the h i n d quarters of a h ippopota m us and the body

,
-
,

of a lio n fi m ‘
k li h m
E N E ll
-
fi ?
9’
0 l° a
[k j gQ I t us ally s its n ear the B alance
. u ,

but i n one Vignette ( F ig 4 ) it is seen crouching by the .

Lake of Fire i n the O ther World .

When An i enters the

H all of M a ati to witness the
weigh ing of h is heart he r e ,

cites a n address to h is heart

an d a prayer wh ich togethe r,

for m Chapter X X X B of the

B ook of the D ead H e prays .

that no false witness m a y be

borne agai nst h im and that ,

no ev idence m a y be produced
of a hostile character He F 4
.

IG . .

prays that the T c h a t c h au

A i A fl
, : G
or reat Chiefs of Os iris m a y not oppose h im , ,

an d that the Shen it Chiefs of the co u rt of Osiris m a y not

blacken h is character or as the text says m ake his na m e
, , ,

to stin k i n the nostrils of the god Osiris H e prays also .

t hat no l ies m a y be tol d about h im and that his heart m a y ,

2 38 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

not be separated fro m h im This pathetic prayer is one of .

the oldest part s of the Book of the Dead and a tradition ,

preserved in the R ubric of Chapter L X I V as foun d i n the ,

Papyr u s O f N u asserts that it is as old as the reign of ,

M en ka u r a a king of the I V t h dynasty who flourished

, ,

about 3 7 00 B C I t was used regularly down to the end of

. .

the Ptole m a i c Period i e to the ti m e of the reign of

’

. .
, ,

Cleopatra about 30 B C and so we see that the prayer w as

,
. .
,

current a m ong all classes of E gyptians for at least 3 5 00

years I t m ust be one of the ol dest prayers i n the world
. .

The heart ha v ing been placed i n one of the pans of the

,

B alance is weighed against the ostrich feather e m ble m ati c

, ,

of T ruth An i s guardian angel ( Shai ) and h is H eart soul

.
’

,
-

( )
B a and
,
his na v el string are all presen t ready to bear thei r
testi m ony on behal f of their lord ; and the goddess who
acted as m idwife to h is m other when he was born and the ,

goddess who presided ove r his nursing are prepared to ,

testify to his i ntegrity An u bis exa m ines the po inter of .

the B alance and the Ape of Thoth reports to Thoth that

,

the weigh ing has been carried out fairly and i m partial ly .

F ro m the V ignette we see that the bea m of the Balance is

exactly hori z ontal an d that the heart and the feather o f ,

M a at exactly coun terbalance each other ; i n other words ,

the heart is neither too l ight nor too hea v y an d thus the ,

de m ands of the Law of Osiris are satisfied This being .

done Thoth reports for m ally to the Co m pany of the Gods

that An i s heart has been weighed that his soul has born e
’

testi m ony on his behalf and that h is heart has been foun d ,

right and true by the G reat Balance Therefore An i i s .

sinless H e has not purloined any of the property of the

.

gods that was under h is charge offi cially an d he has har m ed ,

none either by word or deed The gods then accept .

Thoth s report and declare that An i is a m a n true 2 9 and

’

a
right an d they declare that he has neither sinned
o
a a in s t t h em nor done har m to the m i n any way T hey
g .

next order that he shal l not be given o v er to the E ate r o f

the dead an d that he shall be endowed with an estate i n
,

S ekhet het epet with an adequate s u pply of offerings an d

-
, ,

w ith the right to en ter i nto the presen ce of Osi ri s The .

texts that s upply these facts m ake i t clear that the funda
m ental de m ands of the Law fro m a m a n were that he
2 40 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

a to m b I ha v e shown elsewhere that this throne probably

.
1

con tained the gen itals the na v el string and perhaps the , ,

lower jawbone of the god Behind Osiris stan d N eph t h ys .

on his right hand and I sis on his left Facing h im and .

standing on a lot u s flower are the Four Son s of H orus ,

who were identified with the gods of the cardinal points .

The first K est a ( M est a) has the head of a m a n ; the

, ,

second Hapi the head of an ape ; the thi rd Tu a m u t ef

, , , ,

the head of a j ackal ; and the fo u rth e hs en u f the head , ,

of a hawk S uspended near the lotus is the hide of an an i m al

.

fro m wh ich the head has been cut off i n the Papyr u s of
A n i the hide is that of a pied cow or bull but i n so m e , ,

papyri a g the G reenfiel d Papyrus the an i m al is clearl y

, , ,

of the lynx class I n the Papyrus of An i the hide is that

.

Th e F ou r S on s of H oru s .

of the bull slaughtered duri ng the sole m n cere m on ies that

were perfor m ed when Osiris was laid i n hi s to m b The .

slaughter of th is bull sy m bol i z ed the slaughter of S et an d ,

its ski n the ski n of Set T radition declared that when .

I sis and H orus had reun i ted the m e m bers of the body of
O siris that S et had scattered and wished to rev i v i fy the ,

reconstituted body they wrapped i t up i n the ski n of the

,

cow or bull wh ich had been slai n for the funeral sacrifice .

Thi s ski n thus sy m bol i z ed the hu man placenta and when ,

“
O si ris was en v eloped i n i t he received new l ife and h is ”
,

“
ex it therefore was regarded as his new bi rth i e ”

m
.
, .
,

] 52“ 1
r e bi rth
-
The skin was called M es kh en t
l 3
M

m
.

fi “
po um ie bi rthplace but later the na m e was
, . .
, ,

g i ven to the to m b 1 n general and even to the whole o f

0

1
Os i r i s a nd t ile E gyp ti a n R es u r r ect ion , V ol . I I, pp .
93 fl
'

.
 Th e S h r in e of O s ir is on W a te r 241

1
a to m b region or necropol is The roof of the shri ne is
, .

s upported by pillars w ith lotus capitals and is sur m ounted ,

by a figure of H orus S ep t or H orus S eker and rows of -

,
-
,

urae 1 .

I n the cen tre A n i kneels before the god upon a reed

m a t raising his right han d in adoration an d holding i n h is
, ,

l eft the é fi erp sceptre em ble m atic of h is high offi cial

,

position upon earth H e wear s a W ig which appears to be .

,

wh itened but the whiteness is probably i ntended to r epr e

,

sent the shi n i ng grease flowing fro m the con ical obj ect on
the top of his wig This obj ect has al ready been described .

( see p R oun d h
. is neck is a deep collar of precious
s tones N ear h im stands a tabl e O f O fferings of m eat fru it
.
, , ,

flowers etc and i n the co m part m en t s above are a nu m ber

, .
,

o f vessels for wi ne beer o il u ng u ents etc together w ith , , , , .

,

bread cakes geese wreaths and single fl owers

, , , , .

I n so m e papyri the shrin e o f

Osi ri s is i n the for m of a pylon ,

and it us u all y rests upon a pedestal

m ade i n the for m of i e the . .
,

obj ect which sy m bol i z es T ruth

( m a di
) or upon a reed m,at I n .

a v ery i nteresti ng V ignette i n the

Papyrus of H u n efer ( see F ig 1 ) .

t h e thron e of the god is set e ither

upon or by the side of a lake of
water fro m which springs a lotus
,

flower bearing upon it the Four

So ns of H or u s I n the papyri of Fm .
. 1 .

the X X t h an d X X I s t dynasties
the god Osiris wears a differen t ki nd of crown an d instead ,

o f the A i ef crown $2 we see on his head that of Ptah

m
,

S eker A s ar a tri u ne god of the resurrection

-

d
.

O n the left o f the Plate is the ad ress which H orus the ,

s o n of I s is m akes to Osiris when he presents A n i to h is

,

father H e declares to Osi ri s that the weigh ing of the

.

heart of A n i which the gods ordered T h oth to do has taken

, ,

1
S ee M o t
re ,
My s ter es Eg ptzen s ,
’

p . 2
9; j u n k er , Di e S t u n den w a e/zen ,
ff
.

pp 5. 1 .
2 42 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

place and that the heart has been foun d to be “right

,

further it has been prono u n ced that An i has not co m m itted

,

sin against any god or any goddess Therefore H oru s .

entreats O s iris to gran t cakes and ale to An i to ad m it h im into ,

his presen ce an d to i nclude h im a m o n g those deified hu m a n

,

beings who are known as the Followers of H orus On .

the right of the Plate we see A n i kn eel ing as he addresse s

Osiris and says O Lord of Am en t et I a m i n thy presen ce , .

There i s no sin i n m e I ha v e not l ied wittingly I hav e . .

not done a u ght wi th a fal se h eart F ro m this we s ee .

that the onl y m eri t which An i clai m ed before Osi ris w a s

that he had neither spoken l ies nor acted l ies To h im , .
,

and to Osi ris also to tell the truth an d to act honestly w a s

,

t h e ut m ost that a m a n could do to prepare hi m sel f for a l ife

i n the K ingdo m of Osi ris Therefore An i continues h is .

prayer and says G ran t tho u that I m a y be l ike unto t h os e

fa v o u red ones w h o are round abo u t thee I the Osiris , , ,

1
the greatly praised of the B eautiful G od an d beloved o f ,

the Lord of the Two Lands 2

I the real royal scri be .
, ,

lo v ing h im A n i who s e word is tru th before Osiris

, , It .
”

w ill be noted that An i does not ask fo r sep u lch ral offerings ,

or for an estate i n the K ingdo m of Osi ris all he asks is that

Osiris will consid er h im worthy to be i ntroduced into the
co m pany of tr u thfu l Spi rit souls who l i v e alw a ys i n the -

presence of Osiris .

P LA T E V

V i gn ett es : The funeral procession to the to m b

runn ing the whol e length of Plates V an d V I I n the .

centre of Plate V the m u m m y O f An i is seen lying i n a

fu nerary coffer or shrin e m ounted on a boat prov ided with
run ners which is drawn by oxen At the head an d foot
, .

of the coffer are m asses of flowers and bran ches of trees .

I n t h e fore part of the boat is a painted wooden figure o f

-

the goddes s N ephthys and in the ste m is a s i m ilar fig u re ,

of I sis j ust behi nd I sis are the two posts to which a r e

.

fastened s teering oars or paddles B y the side of th e , .

m u m m y kneels An i s wi fe Tutu with her left hand raised

’

1 E

]T t i t l e of t h e ki
A n g of E g pt wh y o wa s re ig i g wh
n n en the P pya ru s

of A i w s w i tt
2
n

[e, .
a
“L
r

o d of pp
r
en .

U er a n d o
L wer E g pty .
2 44 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

I n the upper register are : 1 A ser v ant who carries i n .

h is ri ght hand the staff of A ni and two pots contain ing

m yrrh and unguents 2 A servan t carrying on h is h ead . .

“
An i s co u ch or bed the m odern Angar eb with a fra m e
'

, ,

of ebony and a rope —w ork m a t on wh ich to l ie ; that

,

it was a very heavy piece of furn iture is pro v ed by

the bent knees of t h e m a n who is carryi ng i t 3 A . .

servant bearing on his sho u lders t h e hea v y ebony chai r

i n wh ic h An i used to s it 4 A ser v ant carrying . .

articles con nected wit h A n 1 s profession as a scribe ,

na m ely h is palette
, w ith the traces of
the red and black i n k still u pon i t and the reed pens ,

proj ecting fro m the cavity m ade I n i t fo r the m the scribe s ,

’

wr i st rest and a box contai n i ng m aterials used by the

,

scribe water j ar etc and another s m all box [

,
-
,
E] I t was
.
, .

assu m ed that An i would requi re all the O bjects i n the

Tuat or K hert N eter i e the Other World and they were
,
-
, . .
, ,

there fore being carried to h is to m b i n Western Thebes .

M eanwh ile the funerary coffer or b ier is being hau led

, , ,

a long by two pai rs of oxen wh ich are guided by four of ,

An i s slaves The ropes a r e fastened roun d the horns of

’

the an i m als just as they are i n so m e places i n the S u d an

,

at the present day T h e oxen were i ntended to be offered

.

up as sacrifices duri ng the elaborate funerary cere m on ies

that were perfor m ed eithe r at the door o f the to m b or in the ,

great Tuat Cha m be r inside it wherei n t h e trans m u tation of ,

the offeri ngs i nto food suitabl e for the gods and spi rits was
effected The oxen were fou r i n nu m ber so t h at one m ight
.
,

be slaughtered for each of t h e Four Q uarters of the World .

x
T e t :C H PT E R I A
H ERE B E G I N TH E C H A PT ER S O F .

C O M I NG F O R TH BY D A Y .

P LAT E VI

V i gn et t e The funeral procession continued up to the

.

to m b I n the centre is a group of professional wail ing

.

wo m en who are seen beating thei r breasts and p u lling out

,

thei r hai r These are followed by attendants or slaves

.

carrying on yokes boxes of flowers vases of unguents etc , , .

I n fron t of the wo m en are a c o w and her cal f chairs m ade of ,

 C erem o ny of O pen i n g t h e M ou t h 2 45

painted wood with bunches of flowers etc upon the m and ,

.
, ,

an attendan t w ith shaven head carrying the fore leg of an

, ,

ox which has been newly s laughtered To the right of the

,
.

Plate 13 seen a group of pr i ests who are perfor m ing on the

“
m u m m y of An i the cere m on y of Open ing the M outh .

An i s m u m m y is standing on a reed m a t an d is provided

’

w ith its festal decorations head co v ering lotuses o r l il ies ,

-
, ,

beard etc At its feet kneel s Tutu la m enting the departure

,
.

of her husband B ehind the m u m m y stands Anubis the

.
,

god of e m bal m ing e m bracing it with h is ar m s B ehind

, .

Anubis i s the to m b pain ted white I t consists of a s m all

, .

low rectangular building wh ich 1 n m any respects rese m ble s

, ,

a m as tabah to m b of the Ancien t E m pire sur m ounted by ,

a pyra m idal structure About .

hal f way up t he pyra m idal

portion i s a s m all open i ng or
n iche which was specially
,

m ade to for m a resting place -

for the H eart soul of An i -

,

whenever i t w ished to v is it the

m u mm y i n the cha m ber below
the to m b or whenever i t wished
,

to al ight an d enj oy the sight of

fa m il iar people and thi ngs I n .

the acco m panying cut we see

the so u l descending the pit of
the to m b to the m u m m y cha m
ber i n order to carry ai r to
the m u m m y .

A table piled w it h the usual

offerings is i n front of An i s m u m m y an d standing there ’

before i t we see the S E M pr i est dressed ,

as before an d sprinkl ing with water an d ,

cens ing the m u m m y and another m a n who , ,

m a y be An i s son or an assistant pries t

’

who bore the title S A M E R F

h is loving son
$ 3“
Th is last na m ed hol d s .

“
a re m arkable i nstru m en t called U r heka ”

F IG
i
“
fi
I.
— l ( F ig I ) a na m e which m ean s
l .
,

great one of spells or great one of words

.

O f power B eh ind or beside these priests on the groun d

.
2 46 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

i n a row l ie the other instru m ents which are e m ployed i n

“
perfor m ing the cere m ony of Open ing the M outh of An i ”
.

These are the m eskhet w the box for holdin g unguents ,

C 3 C D
the boxes for purification the n emes bandlet ,

g ,
the l ibation vases U U U the ostrich feather and the
three instru m ents called S eb zi r Tem ci mc and P es é en kef
,

-
,

- -
, ,

M . The K H ER H E B pr I es t stands b eh m d the m r ec 1t 1n g

-

the various sections of the ser v ice fro m a papyr u s The .

“
cere m ony of Open ing the M o u th is
v ery ancient and probably dates fro m ,

the end of the N eol ithic Period i n

E gypt I t was perform ed on the gods .

after they were created and was e v er ,

after perfor m ed on all dead m en whose

relatives co u ld afford to pay for the cere
m ony The E gyptians foresaw that .

F IG .
when 2
a.
m a n had been m ade i nto a
m u m m y i f l ife were restored to h im by ,

m agical m eans it woul d be i m possible for h im to m o v e his

,

m e m bers because of the bandages wi th which they were

swathed an d he co u ld not breathe because h is m outh
,

would be closed by s w a t h in gs also T he priests therefore .

i n v ented a series of
cere m on ies and c o m ,

po s ed a l iturgy to be
recited wh ilst the cere
m on ies were being per
for m ed the effect of
,

which woul d be to
re m ove the s w a t h in gs
fro m the body and to ,

per m it it to O pen the

m outh and nostrils ,

and to breat h e eat , ,

d ri nk thin k and walk

, , .

The K H ER H E B priest -
F 3 IG . .

to u ched the m outh with

the series of i nstru m ents m entioned above and so opened ,

i t an d then perfor m ed a nu m ber of cere m on ies i n which

,

all the other obj ects played sy m bol ic but very i m portant
2 48 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

i m possible for the king to contribute to the funeral of e v ery

m a n buried i n a to m b throughout t he
length an d breadth of E gypt The .

re m ain ing part of the i nscription reads :

Osiris K h en t i A m en t et Lord o f , ,

E tern ity Creator everlasting Lord , ,

to who m praisings are m ade F i rs t ,

of his Co m pany of Gods hail A npu , ,

dweller i n the m u m m y cha m ber great ,

god governor of t h e d i v ine house ;

,

m a y they grant to the KA of the Osiris ,

him who is praised ( or fa v oured ) o f ,

his god H u n efer [the power] to go i n , ,

an d to co m e forth fro m Khert N eter -

,

an d to follow i n the train of Osiri s

d u ring all his festi v als of the N ew
Year an d to rece i ve offerings of cakes
, ,
”
and to appear i n his presence .

AP P ENDIX

D E S C R I PT I O N O F TH E CERE M O N I E S OF

O P E N I NG TH E M O UTH
1
The cere m on ies wh ich took plac e
at the door of the to m b i n an E gyptia n
fu neral are of considerable i nterest .

The priest called K H ER H E B holding -

,

the S E M priest by the a r m gives dir ec ,

“
t ions for the slaughter of a bull o f
the South The slaughterer standin
.
,

on the bull cuts off a fore leg ( F ig I

,
-
.

and takes out the heart A wo m an .

,

called the Tc /zer a u a r who pers o n ifi es

’

,
’

I sis then whispers i n the deceased s

,

ear : B ehold thy l ips are set i n order

,
”
thy m outh m a y be opened N ext an .
,

follo wi g d ipt io of b d po pt
th i
P s
1 T he
bj t i D umi h D G
su
l t ff pp 3 ff
a es I
ec

.
n

.
n

.
es c r

c en ,
n

er
t h em
raé
is as e u n

pa /a s t des P a t u a men ap,

t he c ha
P er s

art
on

I I,
,
 T h e B oo k of O pen i n g t h e M ou t h 2 49

an telope and a duck are brought by order of the K H ER

1 2

H E B and thei
,
r heads are cut off 3
The K H ER H EB the n .
-

“
addresses the S E M priest : I have sei z ed the m for thee '

“ I have brought u nto thee thine ene m ies H is hands .

bring his head [as ] his gift I have slain the m for thee . ,
”
O T m u ; let not his ene m ies rise up against th is god ‘

T he slaughterer then presen ts the thigh to

the K H ER HE B and the heart to an offi cial
-
,

whose title was S M ER an d all three

“
then place the thigh an d the heart upon
the ground before this god Osiris ) .

T he K H ER HE B then says to the deceased

-
.

represen ted by his m u m m y or statue I

have brought unto thee the th igh ( F ig 2 ) .

as the E ye of H orus I have brought .

unto thee the heart l et there be no rising F la , 2 ,

u
p against this god I have brought .

un to thee the antelope h is head is cut off ; I have brought

u nto thee the duck h is hea is cut off H ere the ,
,

d .

sacrifice ends .

The next part of the cere m ony ,

ie “ the open ing of the m outh and . .

,

eyes is perfor m ed by the S E M priest , ,

who addresses the deceased I have

“ m
co e to e m brace thee I a m thy ,

son H orus I have pressed thy ,

m outh ; I a m thy son I love thee , .

H is m other beats her breast and

weeps fo r h im an d those who are ,

i n chains with h im I s is and

N eph t h ys ) beat their breasts T hy .

m outh was closed but I ha v e set i n order for thee thy ,

s men n u .

th
3

mi
e en e
l ght of t h t lop d d k t pifi d th d t t io of
Th e
of t h d es
s au

d ; f wh H o d t o d t h
er

e ec eas e
e an e

mi of or,
e an

en
uc

ru s
y y M

es r
M

e
@

e
e es ru c

e en e
n

es

hi f th
s a O i i erh t ff t h i h
s r s, d [w h i h t ook ] t h
e cu fo m ofod k i er ea s c e r uc s n
“t h ky m ki g th m t
e s f ll h dlo g t o t h g o d i th fo m of
a n e o a ea n e r un n e r
,

t lop d i to th w t i t h fo m of fi h t
S
”
an e es , an n F eth t a er n e r s es . or e ex ,
s ee

hi p lli 1 1 L ib d i F l :d g/i A t / E g m ( i A lli d ll

’ ’ ' ' '

c a ar e ,
ra e u n er a e n zc zz zzza n e a

R A md m R om p 9 4 ; N ill
’ '

d d
' ’

. c le ; za 883 ez zn cez e, 1 an . av e,
T dt b /
o en h p u c z, c
34 a . 1 .

V OL . I .
25 0 Th e P a pyr u s Of Ani

m outh and thy teeth 1

The K H ER HE B nex t calls on the .
-

“
S E M priest four ti m es : O S E M take the S eb zer ( F ig 3)
2
,
-
.

and open the m outh and the eyes and while the S E M priest
is perfor m ing the cere m ony the K H ER HE B continues “ Thy -

“m
outh was closed but I have set i n ,

order for thee thy m outh and thy teeth .

I open for thee thy m outh I open fo r ,

thee thy two eyes I ha v e opened for ,

thee thy m outh wi th the i nstru m en t o f

Anubis I have opened thy m outh .

w ith the instru m en t of Anubis with ,

the i ron tool with which the m ouths

of the gods were opened H orus O pen .
,

the m outh H orus O pen the m outh , , .

H orus hath opened the m o u th of the

dead as he whilo m O pened the m outh o f ,

Osiris with the i ron which ca m e forth fro m S et with the

, ,

i ron tool ( F ig 4 ) with which he O pened the m ouths of the

.

gods H e hath O pened thy m outh w ith it The dead

. .

shall walk and shall speak an d h is body shall [be] with ,

the G reat Co m pany of the Gods i n the G reat H o u se of the

Aged one i n An n and he shall receive there the u r er et ,

crown fro m H orus the lord of ,

m ankind The K H ER H E B n ext

.
”
-

“
says : Let the AM I K H E NT priest -

( F ig 5) stan
. d behi nd h im the
deceased ) and say M y father m y , , ,
”
father fou r ti m es ,
The eldest son
’
.

of the deceased then stands behi n d

the deceased and i n his na m e the ,
“
K H ER HE B says : H is m other beateth
-

her breast an d weepeth for h im ,

and those who are in chains with P 5 ro . .

”
h im also beat thei r breasts An .

other priest called AM K H E NT H ER U takes up the sa m e

,
- -
,

“
position and says : I sis goeth unto H orus who em ,

1 i p lli 1 1 L ib
S ee
M p o L R it l
S ch a ar e ,
ra a ei
’
F u n er a li degli A n tiefii E gi zi a m ;
F u n em i r e ( in R evu e a e l f f i s tai r e def
’ '
’

fi
’ ’
as er S
,
e ue da a er z ee

R ligi
e 8 8 7 pp
on s ,59 1 ,
. 1

2
M F or a c o mpl t li t of th
e e s es e i t
n s ru ments , s ee

S
.

i p lli
c h a a re ,
1 1 L i br a dei F u n er a li degli A n tze/zi E gi zi a m ,
' ’

p . 1 09 .
25 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

hath opened thy m outh I have stablished thy m o u th .

fi r m ly H orus hath opened for thee thy m outh H orus

. ,

“ hath opened for thee thy two eyes .

”

The K H ER H E B then speaks on behalf -

“
of the S E M priest : Thy m outh was
“ closed up I have ordered aright for .

thee thy m outh an d thy teeth Thy .

m o u th is fir m ly stabl ished Thy m outh .

was tightly closed H is m outh is .

fi r m ly stabl i s hed an d [h is] two eyes ,

are fi r m ly stabl i s hed The S E M priest .

next presents to the deceased ( F ig 7 ) a .

F 8 IG

A
. .

cone shaped offering } and at the sa m e -

“
ti m e the K H ER H E B says : Open the m outh and the two
-

“ eyes open the m o u th and

,

the two eyes Thou hadst .

tightly closed thy m outh ,

thou hast [agai n ] opened

”
thy two eyes Then the .

K H ER —H E B says on behal f of
the S M ER ( F ig 8 ) priest who .

stands behind the deceased

“O ne co m eth unto thee for
”
thy purification N ext the .
Fm 9 . .

S A M E R F co m es forward with
d
- -

four boxes ( F ig 9 ) i n his han s an d the K H ER HE B says

.
,
-

O S A M E R F take the fo u r boxes - -

,

of purification press the m outh ,

and the two eyes an d open the ,

m outh and the two eyes with

each of the m four ti m es and ,

say Thy m outh and thy two ,

‘

eyes are fi r m ly stabl ished and ,

they are restored aright and ,

’

say also I have fi r m ly pressed ,

F IG . Io
thy.
m outh I ha v e O pened thy ,

m outh I have opened thy two ,

eyes by m eans of the four boxes of purification The .

S E M prie s t then approaches the deceased ( F ig I O ) w ith the .

R
1
A l g e c oll ec t io of s c h ofi e i gs is exh ibi t ed i t h e T h i d Eg p t i a
oo m .
ar n u
'

r n n r y n
 T he B oo k of O pen i n g t h e M ou t h 253

i nstru m en t V } and the K H ER HE E at the sa m e ti m e says -

O S E M priest lay the fi es b erz é ef upon h is m outh an d

,
- -
,

say I have stabl ished for thee thy two j aw bones i n

,
‘
-

’
thy face which was d iv ided i nto two parts The S E M .

priest n ext m akes an offering O f

grapes ( F ig I I ) the K H ER HE B .
,
-

“
saying : O S E M priest place the ,

grapes upon his m outh an d say ,

H e bringeth to thee the eye of

H orus he gra s p et h i t ; do thou
,

also grasp i t After an ostrich.

’

feather has bee n offered ( F ig 1 2 ) .

by the S E M priest an d a nu m ber ,

of the cere m on ies described above F IG . I I .

have been repeated and other ,

an i m als slaughtered the K H ER H E B addresses the S E M ,

-

“
priest and says : Take the i nstru m en t Tu n iei ( thri ce ) z -
,
”
an d O pen the m outh an d the eyes ( four ti m es ) H e then .

“
conti nues : O S E M priest take the i ron i nstru m ent o f ,

Anubis f u n fez ( thrice ) Open the m outh an d the t w o

,
-
.

eyes ( four ti m es ) an d say I open , ,

‘

for thee thy m outh w ith the i ron

i nstru m ent O f Anubis wi th which he
O pened the m ouths of the gods .

H orus openeth the m outh H oru s ,

O peneth the m outh H orus O peneth ,

the m outh with the i ron which co m eth

forth fro m Set wherewith he hath ,

O pened the m outh of Osiris Wi th .

F IG .
the
12 .
i ron tool ( m es é b et
) wherewith he
opened the m ouths of the gods doth
he open the m outh H e [the deceased] shall go i n an d .

he shall speak [ agai n ] an d his body shall dwell with the ,

Co m pany of the G reat Gods i n A n n wherei n he h ath ,

received the u r er ei crown fro m H orus lord of m en H ail , .

,

H orus opened thy m outh an d thy two eyes w ith the

i nstru m ent S eb a r or Tem em w ith the i nstru m e nt Tzen fat
3 -
,
-

1
I t is ca ll d
e P es /z en -kef T M
?
I

S ee D u mi c h en , D er
P
-

E D
G r a bpa la s i a es
'
P a t u a men ap , a t I
r ,
pp . 1 8, 1 9
2
l C 3 . M h .

0
25 4 T h e P a pyr u s Of Ani

of the Opener O f the R oads Anubis ) wherewith he

opened the m outh of all the gods of the North H orus .

the G reat co m eth to e m brace thee I thy son who

1
.
,

loveth thee ha v e O pened thy m out h and thy two eyes

, .

H is m other beateth her breast in grief while she em b ra c et h

h im and the two sisters I sis
,

and N eph t hys ) who are on e , ,

strike the m selves i n grief All .

the gods open thy m outh a c c o r

ding to the book of the service .
’

The K H ER H E B n ext i nstructs the -

S E M priest to clothe the m u m m y

or stat u e of the deceased with the
n an zas
2
band or fillet ( F ig I and .

F IG I
to say : LO ! the n am es fillet the ,
3. .

n am es fillet which co m eth as the

light which co m eth as the l ight ; I t co m et h as the eye

,

of H orus the brill iant ; i t co m eth forth fro m Nekh eb

, .

The gods were bound therewith bound round is thy ,

face with it i n its na m e of Hel en ( z a l ight or brill iance ) .

, , ,

co m ing forth fro m Nekh eb All that could do harm .

to thee upon earth is destroyed The S E M priest .

,

holding a vase of O int m en t i n his left hand an d s m earing ,

the m outh w ith his fore fi n ger ( F ig -

.

says : I have anoin ted thy face

with O i nt m ent I have anointed ,

thi ne eyes I have pai nted thi ne

.

eye with n a n /i and with m as t e/zam .

M ay n o ill luck happen through

-

the dethrone m ent of his two eyes

i n his body even as no evil for
,

tune ca m e to H orus through the

overthrow of his eye i n his body F 4
.

IG . 1 .

Thy two eyes are decked there

with i n its na m e O f Ua i eb wh ich m aketh thee to give forth
,

fragrance i n its na m e of S weet s m ell ing

, A nu m ber o f -
.

scented unguents and perfu m es are brought forward and at ,

the presen tation of each a short sentence is recited by the

1
H em -u r, t h e H aroeris of t h e G reek s .

in
c

r
z e -
25 6 T h e P a pyr u s of An i

perfor m ing the cere m on ies which had resul ted i n the resur
rection of Osiris As Osiris con fo u n ded his ene m ies so
.
,

the deceased has con founded h is ene m ies as Thoth proved

the words of Osiris to be true so also does he prove that ,

the words of An i are truth An i also clai m s to have

.

perfor m ed the priestly duties of the S E M priest and of Ptah ,

an d to have ploughed the earth i n Hen s u ( H era kleo po lis ) ,

an d to ha v e worked in to it the blood O f his slaughtered

ene m ies j ust as did H orus for his father Osi ris H a v ing
, .

perfor m ed all these m eri torio u s acts and been declared

in nocen t i n the J udg m en t he de mands ad m ission i nto the
,

presence of Osi ris and the right to hear and see what the
,

gods hear and see an d to stan d up an d si t down as they do

, .

I t was not however easy to reach the H ouse O f

, ,

Osi ris for i t was situated far away fro m this earth on the
, ,

re m ote side of Dead land A soul m ight easily lose i ts

-
.

way i n trying to cross that awful country or i t m ight be ,

m olested and driven back by hostile souls or by those ,

souls who could never hope to wi n thro u gh to the kingdo m

O f Os iris The only certain m eans of traversing Dead lan d
.
-

i n safety was to O btain the services of so m e benevolen t god ,

or gods who knew the roads and could act therefore as

, ,

trustworthy guides to the soul s who w ished to reach the

E lysian F ields H ence we fin d An i praying to the
.

O peners O f the ways or d ivi ne gu ides to lead h im to

, ,

the H ouse of O si ris and to protect h im fro m the evi l

,

action s of those who m ight atte m pt to turn h im out O f his

”
path and m ake h im to lose his way i n the bush
,
Such .

guides were the servants of Os iris an d they would only ,

conduct the s o u ls of the loyal follo w ers of Osiris to their

lord and i t was n ecessary for souls to convi nce the m that
,

they really were followers of O si ris by reciting the words of

power of the B ook O f the D ead or by producing authori z ed ,

a m ulets When thi s had been done the guides led the souls
.

of the b ea t ified through Dead lan d and helped the m to pass -

,

through the fortresses of Osiris i n safety until they entered

the presence of the god .

Accord ing to a supple m entary text which is known as ,

“
the Chapter of m aking the S anta to enter in to K hert
N eter on the day of the funeral the road between th is ,

world and the next was in fested with snakes which l ived ,

“ upo n the bodies of m en and wo m en an d fed upon thei r

 Ani and T u t u i n t h e O t h er W rld o 25 7
blood I n the recently discovered Papyrus of I u aa these
.

snakes are sai d to be n ine i n nu m ber an d the i r na m es are ,

as follow :

I .

g 1 RL! m : 52 .
)
N ar t i an kh
- -
em - S en - f .

RJ m A H er -
f -
em -
q eb -
f .

” ”

fg
i
fi A nkh -
em - fen t u .

ig j m u
S am -
em -
q es u .

mxmg f m fl H a hu t iam s a u ( )
9

6 .
g m flm
'
S h ept -
te m esu .

flk g fifi
» : Q m
E U ne m -
s ah u .

z R 5 §m {
M l
m
y

S m m f
1 a -
e -
s ne .

S
i g k j fi} M m
‘

. A kh m betu m itu
a n e .
1
1

P LAT E VI I

The Vignettes which run along the tops of Plates V I I —X

all illustrate the X V I I t h Chapter O f the Theban R ecens ion ,

the text of wh ich i s written below the m .

V i gn et t es I An i an d h is wi fe Tutu seated i n a bower

.

or cha m ber wh ich appears to be m ade of m ats stiffened

, ,

an d supported by poles A n i is seated on a chai r w ith a .

back an d is engaged i n m oving a piece on a chequer board

,
-

w ith his right hand i n his left he holds an obj ect m ade O f
l i nen the use an d sign ifi cation O f which are unknown
, .

Tutu is seated a l ittle behi nd her husban d on a stool which

d
is provide w ith a cush ion ; the feet of both husban d and
,

wife rest on footstools m ade of m atting or perhaps on ,

leather covered cushions

-
I n the Papy r us of H u n efer .

L XXXV
1
B dgS ee u e, T/ze C lzap ter s
I I I , Lo n n , 1 90 9do .
f
o Comi ng F ar t/z by D ay , Vol . I, P lt
a e
2 5 8 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

( F ig ) we. see one

I figure of the deceased seated i n the
z cha m ber
s aZ and two outside it with the e m ble m of
, ,

Am en t et and sy m bols of bread and beer between the m .

One of the two out

s ide figures is going
i nto the s alz cha m ber
and the other is lea v
i ng it I n the Papy .

rus of M u t em u aa - -

the queen ( Fig 2 ) is .

seated before a table

pm with a box of unguent
,

on it and she is play ,

i ng a ga m e on a d raught board H er H eart soul stands .

-

outside and is adoring the two H orus gods or the gods of

,
-
,

the rising an d setti ng s u n .

2 T he H eart —souls of A n i and Tutu in the for m of

.
,

hu m an headed hawks standing upon the roof of thei r to m b

-
,

before each is a pot i n which i ncense is burn ing Above .

h
the head of An i is the legen d the B a soul O f -

the Osiris [An i ] .

3 A l ight
. table or altar with a pillared
, stand on wh
, ich ,

rests a vase
with a spout
1
D probably
,

con ta I n I n g
wine On .

the table are

two lotuses
or lilies F IG . 2 .

These O b
ec t s probably r ep r es en t t h e O fferings wh ich were m ade to
'

j
An i and Tutu by thei r kinsfol k upon earth
=
=
.

4 T wo
. l ions seated back to back and supporting the
hori z on over wh ich extends the sky c m The l ion on
the right is calle S EF [ l
6
d fl ia Yesterday an that , . .
, , d
“
on the left TU A U To day -
( to illustrate
U I 3 1 6) -

d
.

5 The B
. enu bi with a l ibation vase an
lotus resting on a im The B enu bird is
.
260 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

P LAT E VI II
I}?

8The figure of a god pain ted dark bl u e or cobalt and

. , , ,

m arked with wavy l ines to i nd icate his nature as a Water

god H e wears the long characteristic African beard and
.
,

has a so m ewhat pendulous sto m ach H is androgyno u s .

nature is i ndicated by his left breast which is that of a ,

“ ”
wo m an O n his head is the sy m bol for year an d i n his
.
,

right hand he hol ds a s i m ilar sy m bol he is called H eh

e n ren u t
-
p if i an d he m a
y be a pri m itive E gyptian
or N ilotic Year god H is left han d is extended over an
-
.

o v al within which is the E ye of H oru s VI) ( to illu s t ra t e l .

Q
N
“
The god whose na e is U a t c h t u ra
m
E
’

9 .

E“
0
[ lg iii
w z a the god of the Great reen or the
, . .
, G ,

god O f the S ea whether of the R ed Sea or of the M ed i

,

terranean can not be said H e is painted red wears ar m lets .

,

and bracelets and has round h is waist a gi rdle the ends o f

, ,

which fall down i n front O f h im H is ar m s are extended .

,

and his hands are stretched out over two rectangular lakes
that under h is hand is called S b a an b as nzen - -
,

at : “
m m Lake of N atron and that under
w right
“Lake
j k fi §
0
hlS left S na an m et a l 1 m , ,
I 3

of Sal t This god see m s to be of androgynous nature

.

also for his le ft breast l ike that of the god i n V ignette 8

, , ,

is that of a wo m an ( to illustrate 11 4 7 .

I O A doorway i n the for m of a pylon w ith pal m leaf

.
,
-

corn ice an d two leaves which are shut and bolted ; its
,
“
0 Q
na m e is R a s t a or R a s ta n ,— lm wh ich m ean s the “
Q
door of the corridors i n the m ountain This Vignette .

illustrates ll 5 1 ff fro m which we learn that i t i s the

. .
,

south gate of A n r u tef a distri ct of H er a kleo po lis an d the , ,

northern gate of the Lan d of the D ead The na m e was .

given originally to a gate i n the k ingdo m of S eker the god ,

of D eath which lay to the south of M e m phis I n an y case

, .

i t is the gate which all souls m ust pass th rough on l e av ing

th is worl d to enter the Tua t o r O ther World and a picture , ,

of i t i s given here so that souls m a y gain an i dea of what it

w as l ike .
 M eh u r t t h e S ,
ky g dd -
o es s 26 1

I I A funerary buildi ng pai nted whi te wi th a pal m

. , ,

leaf corn ice The door is unl ike that of R a s ta Abo v e is

. .

the R ight E ye o f R a which is supposed to rise up out of ,

the b u ilding This building probably represents the door

.

through which the sun e m erges at sun r i se when he s tarts ,

on his J ourney across the heavens ( to illustrate l 7 3 ) .

“
A very ancien t S ky goddess called M eh u r t arit
\
oo
o
M eh u r t the daughter
”
Ra
fi , z a . .
, ,

of R a .H e r face i s yellow
an d her body red She has .

a deep collar or halter roun d , ,

her neck to wh ich is fasten ed

,

a m an dt e m ble m of v i rility
, ,

fecundi ty and fe m ale s exu

,

al ity which l ies along her

,

back ( F ig Above her

.

back is a flail She l ies along .

the top O f a 1O W buil di ng .

F , IG . 1 ,

wh ich rests on a m a t I n .

the Papyrus of H u n efer ( F ig 2 ) we see the god Thoth .

kneel ing before her and presenting to her the E ye of R a ,

o r the S un The allusion here I S to the ancien t legend

.

i n whi ch i t is said that S et carried away the sun fro m the

sky and atte m pted to destroy
i t Thoth set ou t i n quest O f .

the sun overtook S et and ,

having i n fl icted great I nj ury

upon h im took the sun and
carrie i t back and placed i t d ,

F
i n
IG
the sky2
i n its proper place ,

( to ill ustrate ll
. .

75 .

1 3 A funeral chest or coffer which represen ts the burial

d
.

groun or the great ce m etery of Abydos g s

The supports and do m ed cove r of the coffer are painted
i
g reen and red an d the s ide is black O n this are traced
, .

i n outl ine the figures of the Four S ons of H orus K est a ,

( M est a) and H ap i faci ng T u a m u t e f an d e h s en uf Above .

the cover rise the head o f a m a n presu m abl y that of A n i , ,

an d his forear m s an d hands i n each of wh ich he grasps the ,

“
sy mbol of l i fe I t was at Abydos that Osi ris arose fro m
262 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the dead and it is suggested by this Vignette that An i will

,

rise there also This coffer is suppo sed to contai n th e

.

i nternal organs of the deceased wh ich are under the pro ,

t ec t io n of the Four S ons of H orus O n the left O f the .

coffer stand two of the Sons of H orus K est a ( M est a) ,

]Q qq
2
m a n headed and Hapi or H epi -
ape , ,

headed on the right stan d the other two na m ely Tu a m u t ef ,

”(
x Q é] j ackal headed and e hs en u f
hawk headed ( to illustrate l l 8 2 an d
-
,
l 1p g -

.
,
? e

P LAT E IX

H ere follow figures O f three gods who together

4I . , ,

w ith the Four Sons O f H orus for m the Seven Spirits ,

referred to i n These are :

I . M AA -
TE
A F “
j a
o
man -
headed an d seated on
a mat .

2 . K H ER I B E Q F [ll
seated on a m a t
- -

J 21 et c .
, ma n -
headed and

®
.

3 . H ER U K H E N T I AR I T
seated on a m a t
-

k -

.
fl
h hawk headed and -

15 The god A npu ( Anubis )

.

an d seated on a m at
q § j ackal headed -

G
.

1 6 A group of S even
. ods who accord ing to so m e , ,

authorities for m ed the S even Spirits and accord ing to

, , ,

others the S even Gods who watched over the To m b of

,

Osiris Thei r na m es are :

.

Wfifi
‘
lq

lfi
m

. N E TC H E H NE T C H E H , man headed .

lk
[ ] ? li Q
e
AA Q ET Q E T , snake headed .

B A
l Q
[
Tl HEH
lllll [ K H E NT I F, man headed
- - -
na . .

I
g ,
X
AM MI -
U NN U T - F , snake hea ed -
d .

Q T E S H E R -A I R TI ma n -
headed .
2 64 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Ra . B ehi nd the Cat is the fa m ous Acacia T ree which ,

flourished i n very early ti m es i n An n i a O n or H el iopol is , . .

, , .

The slaying of the python by

the Cat is sy m bol ic of the
1 fa m ous slaughter O f the foes
O f R a or Osi ris wh ich took , ,

place at H el iopol is e ither i n ,

the P redynastic Period or i n

early dynastic ti m es The .

appearance of the Acac ia

T ree here s u ggests that a
tree c u lt once existed at H el iopol is
-
.

1 9 Three seated gods two m a n headed an d the th i rd

.
,
-

hawk headed ; each holds a large kn ife They probably

-
.

represent the gods Sau H orus of S ekh em an d N efer T em

, ,
-
.

2 0 The god K heper a i n the for m O f a beetle headed

.
,
-

m a n seated i n his boat

, B e h ind h im i s the sy m bol of
.

“
servant
a or bodyguard , The tops of the steering
poles and posts are i n the for m of the head of the hawk of
.

H orus I n the bows of the boat are a l ibation j ar on a

.

stand an d a lotus Over the prow of the boat hangs a ree d

.

m a t or a m ass of reeds on wh ich the look —out god usually

, ,

takes his place I n th is case the stand is occupied by

.

a swallow I n fron t of the boat kneel An i and h is wi fe

.
,

wi th thei r hands raised i n adoration of the god The solar .

character of the boat is indicated by the a t e/ea t which

i s painted on i ts si de .

21 Two seated dog headed apes with their forepaws

.
-
,

raised i n adoration of the E ye O f R a before each is a

fi v e rayed star
-
These apes represent I sis and N eph t h ys
. .

2 2 T e rn
Q .

@ the god of the setting sun seated

, ,

within his disk i n the S ek ret B oat ; the god wears the
Crown of the S outh and N orth and h is face is towards
y
-

the right hand I n the bows O f the boat is the S ign a

.
.

I n front of the boat are a lotus an d a l ibation vase on a

stand .

2 3 The god R e hu i n the for m of a l ion lying on a long

.

low building O ver his back are ben t so m e large plants

. ,

1
r V
T h i s fo m of t h e ig ette is ta k en f o m a p ap
n s i D bli r y ru n u n.
 W ate r ,
t he P r i m eva l G o d 265

round the stal k o f one of which is coiled a uraeus B ehind .

these is
Q
the sy m bol of U a t c h et the Lady O f F la m e
, , .

Te tx :[C H A PT ER XVI I ] H ERE B E G I N TH E P RA I S E S

A N D G LO R I F Y I N G S O F CO M I NG O R TH R O M A N D O F G O I NG F F
I NT O TH E GL O R I O US K H ER T N E T ER WH I C H I S I N TH E
F F
-
,

B E A UT I UL AM E NT E T A N D O F C O M I NG O R TH BY D AY I N
A L L TH E F ,

O R M S O F E X I ST E N C E WH I C H I T M A Y PL E A S E TH E
'

K
D E C E A S E D T O T A E O F PLA Y I NG A T D R A U G I I T S A S H E
,

S I TT E TH I N TH E S E H C H A M B ER A ND O F A PP E A R I NG A S A
V
L I I NG S O UL .
,

This Chapter is m ost di ffi cul t to understand but its ,

i mportan ce fro m a m ythological poin t O f v iew cannot be

o v er esti m ated
-
Why i t is i ncluded i n the Book of the
.

D ead at all is i m possible to say but as i t is found in all the ,

great papyri i t m ust ha v e been regarded as a m ost precious

docu m ent by the theologians O f E gypt I ts subj ect m atter .

is the creation of the w orld an d the origin o f the gods and ,

the v iews set forth i n i t represent the special doctri nes

taught by the priesthood of H el iopol is The oldest copies .

of i t date fro m the K I t h dynasty an d a co m plete copy is ,

fo u nd i n the Turi n Papyrus wh ich m a y be assigned to the ,

X X V I t h dynasty or a l ittle later therefore i t is C lear that

,

the Chapter was i n use for about two tho u san d years I t .

i s the only ancien t E gyptian exegetical work known .

Speaking generally the Chapter consists of a series of ,

state m ents each of which is followed by a de m and for an

,

explanation of what has been stated T hus i n the Papyrus .

of N eb s en i we have “ I a m Te rn when he existed alone

i n N u R a i n his r 1s m gs I n his beginn ing rul ing what he , ,
”
had m ade These words are followed by the de m and
.
,

E xplai n it What does this ean or To who m does

,
m ?

th is refer T hen co m es the explanation “ This is R a i n

h is b egin n I n g [when he was] r u l ing what he had m ade
, .

I n the begi nn ing was R a risi ng on the throne of ,

sovereignty [over] what he had m ade When the pillars .

of Shu ( z a of heaven ) d id not exist he was on the high

. .
, ,

groun d ( or hill ) I n K h em en u ( H er m opol is ) B ehold .

,
”
there were given to h im the i nert ones i n K h em en u .

O r again ,

I a m the G reat od who created hi m sel f G .

E xplai n this .

VOL . I .
266 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

The Great G od who created hi m sel f I s N u the father ,

of the gods .

There is however another reading which says that

, ,

the Great God who created hi m sel f is R a who created ,

the N ine Gods ( or the Co m pany of the Gods ) out of his

,

own na m es .

E xplai n this .

I t is R a who m ade his own na m es i nto his m e m bers ,

”
and these beca m e the gods who are i n his following .

The author of the Chapter begins by m ention ing Te rn ,

a v ery ancien t god O f H el iopol is and then refers to the ,

000
” Q
M
ti m e when T em existed by h i m sel f I n N u B ut
N u was also a god an d we know fro m the hieroglyphs ,

which for m his na m e that he was the personification of the

pri m eval Celestial Waters therefore there was so m ething in
existence before T e m an d that so m ething was the pri m e v al
,

waters According to t h e E gyptian theologian everything

.
,

that ex ists had i ts origi n i n these waters N ow the author .

of the Chapter w ished to pro v e that the Sun god R a the -

,

greatest O f the H eliopo lit a n gods fro m the I V t h dynasty

onwards was di rectly descended fro m Nu the Celestial
, ,

Waters and he therefore identified h im at once with T em

,
.

S i nce however so m e m ight thin k that the sky was older

, ,

than the Sun god R a he goes on to affi r m that R a was on

-
,

the high ground I n K h em en u ( i a H er m opol is the city of . .

,

Thoth ) before the supports of the sky ( Shu ) were created ,

m ean i ng that R a existed before there was any sky at all .

An d when he says that R a was rul ing what he had m ade

he i ntends us to understand that R a m ade everythi ng that
ex ists I t was a co m m on bel ief at H eliopol is when the
.

Pyra m id Texts were written ( V t h and V I t h dynasties ) that

the i m m ediate descendants O f Tern were Shu T efn u t K eb , , ,

Nu t Osiris I sis S et N ephthys and H or u s ( or Anubis )

, , , , , ,

R a i n fact was not m entioned i n the group

, . The onl y .

way out of the diffi cul ty was to iden tify R a w ith T em and ,

th is was the course adopted by the author of the Chapter

:
.

“ ”
With referen ce to the inert ones or children of revolt
m
,

g
and
%“
g )'
J E D Q ?
) l l
the questions
What were they ? arise naturally
Who were they
When the
?
, ,

Celestial Water god w ished to create Te rn he found that

-
,

all the forces of i nertness were arrayed against h im ;

2 68 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

The section of the X V I I t h Chapter that is o m itted i n

the Papyrus of An i is naturally without illustrative Vignettes ,

and we cannot therefore know the for m s of A n af and of

S h es m u the heads m an of Osi ris and the si m il itude of the
, ,

dread god M atchet also is n ot depicted All m ust regret .

,

too the want of Vignettes referring to the god who watched

,

by the B end i n the Lake of F i re and the heart O f Osi ris , ,

and the M es q et C ha m ber wherei n the deceased was r e born

,
-
.

The frequent prayers found throughout the Chapter prove

that An i was a fi r m bel iever i n the doctrines enunciated i n it ,

and that the C ha m ber of torture i n the O ther World ,

“
wherein were m erciless gods with cruel fi ngers which ,

sl iced up the bodies of the dead and sh redded thei r flesh ,

and a bloodthirsty executioner who slaughtered always were ,

to h im very real things i ndeed N otwithstanding the m any .

d i ffic u lties that beset the m odern studen t of this Chapter ,

due partly to the perplexing character of the subj ect m atte r

and partly to the m istake s and o m issions i n the text its ,

general m ean i ng is C lear and it is easy to see that a

,

knowledge of its contents was held to be absolutely

i nd ispensable to that soul who hoped to reach the K ingdo m
of Osiris and to l ive with the god who alone could sustai n i t ,

who was the only destroyer of wrong and the Guide to the
paths O f E tern ity I t was not N u the father of the gods or
.
, ,

T em or R a who had the power to bestow everlasting l i fe

, , ,

but Osi ris an d Osi ris only

,
.

P LA T E S X I AND XI I
T he E gyptians bel ie v ed that t h e country for m ing the
K ingdo m of Osiris was d ivided i nto districts or parts the , ,

boundary O f each o f which was m arked by a fortress or

stronghold wh ich was hel d by a group of ser v ants of the god
, .

They also thought that these forts were used by the souls
of the dead on thei r j o u rney to the C ity O f od m uch as G ,

m odern travellers i n the S u d an or Persia or M esopota m ia , , ,

u s e the
“ ”
khans or i n ns or halting places wh ich supply -
, ,

the weary wayfarer with shelter and food and enable h im to ,

enj oy so m e days of rest i n security At one ti m e these .

”
forts or strongholds or gates we re thought to be seven
, , ,

i n nu m ber and at other ti m es the E gyptians bel ieved the i r

,

nu mber was ten or fourteen or s ixteen or even twenty one

d
-
.
, , ,

The seven forts that form ed a C hain across Dea land were -
 The M a n s io n s of O s ir is 2 69

called Ar it s a word wh ich is often translated M ansions

, ,

or H alls .E ach Arit was provided with a doorkeeper a

”
,

watcher or offi cial who kept a good l ook out to an nounce

,

the arrival of a tra v eller an d a herald who i nter v iewed the , ,

v isitor an d enquired his na m e an d reported i t to h is ,

co m pan ions This arrange m en t i s identical with that wh ich

.

has been co m m on i n all parts of Africa fro m ti m e i m m e m orial

i n respect of the forts that are built at the entrances to
towns and v illages I n the case O f the Se v en A r it s n o soul
.

could hope to gain ad m ission to anyone of the m unless i t

was able to state the na m es of the doorkeeper an d watcher
an d herald and to repeat a for m ula wh ich would convi nce
,

the m of its good faith T he writer of the B ook O f the Dead.

co m pos ed a Chapter i n which the na m es of all the O ffi cials

of the A r it s were given as well as the se v en form ulae that , _

secured for those who knew the m ad m ission in to the A r it s .

I n Plates X I and X I I we see A n i an d his wife T u tu

_

approach ing the A r it s and pictures of the gods who ,

g u arded the m .

V i gn ett e 1 T H E F I R ST A R I T The corn ice of the

d
. .

$
oor of the F i rst A ri t is orna m ented with sy m bols of l ife 3
stability
the fi rst
and power
1 At the entrance sit three gods
ving the head of a hare the secon d the head of
.
,

a serpent and the third the head of a crocodile T he fi rst

, .

holds a whisk m ade probably of the tail of so m e an i m al

, ,

and each of the others a kn ife

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER C X L V I I ] .

T he na m e of the Doorkeeper i s S ekh et h eras h

t aru .

The na m e of the Watche r is M et ih eh .

The na m e of the H eral d is H a kh er u .

These are followed by the form ula that An i reci tes .

V i gn ett e 2 T H E SE CO ND AR I T This A rit is guarded

. .

by three gods the fi rst has the head of a l ion the second
the head of a m a n and the third the head of a og E ach
, d
,

holds a kn i fe
x
.

T e t :The na m e of the Doorkeeper is U nh at .

T he na m e of t h e Watcher is S eq ether .

The na m e of the H erald is U s et .

These are followed by the form ula that An i recites .

2 70 Th e P a pyr u s of Ani

V i gn et t e 3 T H E T H I R D A R I T This A ri t is guarde
. . d
by three gods the fi rst has the head of a jackal the second ,

the head of a dog and the thi rd the head O f a serpent

, .

T he fi rst holds a whisk and each of the others a kn ife

x
, .

Te t T h e na m e O f the Doorkeeper is U n em h a u
a u en t
p hu i
e .

The na m e
of the Watcher is S er es h er _
.

The na m e
of the H erald is A a .

These are followed by the for m ula that An i recites .

V i gn et t e 4 T H E F O U R TH A R I T This A rit is guarded

. .

by three gods the fi rst has the head of a m a n the secon d ,

the head of a hawk and the th ird the head of a l ion T he

, .

fi rst holds a whisk and each of the others a kn i fe

x
, .

T e t :The na m e O f the Doorkeeper is K h es efh er as h t

kheru .

The na m e O f the Watcher is S er es t epu .

T he na m e of the H eral d is K h es efa t .

These are followed by the for m ula that An i recites .

. F
V i gn ett e 5 T H E F I TH A R I T This A ri t is guarded .

by three gods the fi rst has the head of a hawk the second ,

the head of a m a n and the thi rd the head of a serpent

, .

T he fi rst holds a whisk and each of the others a kn i fe

,
.

T ex t T he na m e of the Doorkeeper is An kh fem fen t .

The na m e of the Watcher is Shabu .

The na m e of the H erald is Teb her keh a kh eft .

These are followed by the form ula that An i recites I n .

“
i t the deceased says : I have bro u ght unto thee thy j aw
bones i n R asta I have brought u nto thee thy backbone
,
”
i n A nu gathering together all thy m e m bers there
,
The .

“
word j awbones ar t i has been understood by so m e to
, ,

m ean the upper and the lower j aw but th is is not the case , ,

for i t i nd icates the right and left sides of the lowe r j aw only .

T he Arab physicians i n E gypt thought that the lower j aw

consisted of two parts wh ich we re j oined at the c h in and
, ,

the ancien t E gyptians probably thought the sa m e The .

m ention here of the bringing of the “ j awbones is m ost ”

inte resting for i t sho ws that at one ti m e i n E gypt the lowe r

,

j a w and the backbone were carefully preserved so that they

m ight be r e used i n the reconstitution of the body

-
On .

the preservation of the j awbone i n U ganda and the beari ng

2
7 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the text of a prayer is added to the Vignette of each A rit ,

which i n so m e papyri consists of a door by wh ich only on e

god is seated .

I t has al ready been said that the fortresses i n Dead lan d -

were so m eti m es bel ieved to be ten or fourteen or sixteen , , ,

or even twenty one i n nu m ber ; the Papyrus of A n i m akes

-
,
“
the m to be ten and calls the m S eb kh et or Pylons ” ”
, , .

I n Plates X I and X I I we see An i and h is w i fe Tutu

advancing to the Ten Pylons with thei r hands raised i n ,

adoration E ach Pylon is guarded by a m in istering god or

.

goddess seated on a ma t As the deceased arrived at each

,
.

Pylon he m ade to it a short address wh ich to all i ntents ,

and purposes form ed the na m e of the Pylon an d of the

de ity inside i t Thus when he ca m e to the F i rst Pylon he
.
,
“
said : I have m ade the way I know you I know thy . .

na m e I know the na m e of thy warder NE B T S E TA U Q A T

. .
- -

S E BT H ER T N E E T K H E B K H E B S ER T M E TU K H E S F E T NE S H NI
- -

”
- -

N E H M ET U A I E N I is thy na m e
- -This na m e translate d
~
.

m eans : Lady o f tre m bli ngs [ surrounded by] lofty walls , ,

“ the C h ieftainess lady of destruction the d isposer of the
, ,

words that drive away stor m s an d del iver fro m destruction

h im that travelleth along the way .

V i gn ett e I T H E F I R ST P YL O N I n this Pylon is

. .

seated a vulture headed goddess wearing a d isk on her -

head and hold ing a whisk Above the Pylon is a row of

, .

which presu m ably represent spears or a protecting

wall
x
.

Te t : [ C H A PT ER CX LV I
] An address to the goddess
d
.
,

an the na m e of the warder of the Pylon — NE R U I T .

V i gn ett e 2 T H E S E CO ND P YL O N I n this Pylon is

. .

seated a l ion headed goddess hold ing a whisk and on i ts

-
, ,

roof l ies a m onster speckled serpen t

x d
.

T e t :A n address to the god ess an d the na m e of the

d
war er O f the Pylon — M E s P TA H -
.
,

V i gn et t e 3 T H E T H I R D P YL O N I n th is Pylon is
. .

seated a m a n headed deity holding a whisk and above it

-
, ,

are the two E yes of heaven the Sun and the M oon with , ,

the e m ble m s of etern ity wate r an d a vase between the m , ,

0
fi fi fi ’

U
 The G a t es o f t h e O t he r W rld o 2 73

x
T e t :An address to the dei ty of the Pylon and the ,

na m e of its warder— S E B A O .

V i gn ett e 4 T H E F O U R TH P YL O N I n th is Pylon is
. .

seated a hornless cow headed goddess holdi ng a wh isk

,
-
, ,

an d above i t is a corn ice for m ed of urae i with solar d isks

on thei r heads
x
T e t A n address to the goddess an d the na m e of the ,

warder of the Pylon — NE KA U .

V ign et t e 5 T H E F I TH P YL O N I n th is Pylon is
. F .

seated a h ippopota m u s goddess H er forefeet rest upon the

-
.

sy m bol O f an organ of her body and betw een the m she ,

holds a large kn i fe Above the roof of the Pylon are the

.

“ “
sy m bols of heat and the strength of youth or perhaps
mmm
,

Ga m a y ft .

x
T e t :An address to the goddess and the na m e of ,

the warder O f the Pylon — H E NT ET A R Q I U -

.

V i gn ett e 6 T H E S I X TH P YL O N
. I n this Pylon is .

seated a squat dwarf who holds i n his right han d a ,

wh isk and i n h is left a large kn i fe O n the roof l ies a .

m onster speckl ed serpen t T he s i z e O f this serpen t cannot

.

be co m prehen ded and it is sai d to have been born i n the

,

presence O f the S till H eart i a Osiris -

x
. . .
, ,

T e t :An address to the god and the na m e of the ,

warder of the Pylon — S E M AT I .

Vi gn et t e 7 T H E S E E NTH P YL O N I n this Pylon

. V .

i s seated a r a m headed god holding a whisk O n the roof

-
,
.

is a row O f
x
T e t :A n address to the god and the na m e of the ,

warder of the Pylon — S AK T I F .

V i gn ett e 8 T H E E I GHTH P Y L O N I n this P ylon is

. .

th e hawk of H orus standi ng on a sepulchral build i ng called

P®
c >
s ar eali he wears the doubl e crown of the
fifi ;

S outh a n d the N orth an d has a w hisk before h im and

d
an u i e/za t XE behi n h im O n the roof of the shri n e are
d
.
,

two hu m an heade hawks e m ble m s of the S ouls o f R a

-
,

K 3$
“
and Osiris and two e m ble m s of l i fe 6
,
3
2 74 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Te t x :A n address to the god and the na m e of the ,

warder of the Pylon — K H U T C H ET E F .

Vi gn et t e 9 T H E N I NTH P YL O N
. I n th is Pylon is .

seated a l ion headed deity with a d isk on his head an d

-
,

holding a whisk Above the shrin e is a series of u raei

x
. .

T e t :An address to the deity and the na m e of the ,

warder o f the shrine— AR I S U TC H E S E F .

V i gn et t e 1 0 T H E TE NTH P Y L O N I n this shrine is

. .

‘
seated a r a m headed deity wearing the A i ry Crown
-

and holding a wh isk O n the roof of the Pylon are two

.

serpents
x
.

T e t :An address to the deity and the na m e of the ,

warder of the Pylon — S E K H E N U R The texts O f the 1 1 t h .

2 1 s t Pylons are wanting i n the Papyr u s of An i I n the .

Papyrus O f T h en a ( N a v ille op c i t B l C L X I I I F ) fourteen

, . .
, .
,

V ignettes are given and each is qu ite different fro m any of

,

the V ignettes in the Papyrus of A n i The doors are .

decorated with a variety of strange des igns a g the , ,

eleventh door has on i t the solar d isk floating on water

O
the th ird is decorated w ith
fifi fi l and
gllll ’

18
s ixth with four u rae i on a standard [
2 18181 , etc .
; and
m any of the doors are sur m ounted by b u llS heads l ions ’ ’

heads etc I n the Turi n Papyrus the fi rst ten Pylons are
,
.

sur m o u nted by serpents the ele v enth by two cats t h e

, ,

twel fth by a serpent t h e thi rteenth by figures of the two

,

N ile gods the fourteenth by a bull s head and a serpent and

’
-
, ,

the fi fteenth by a row of

P L AT E S XII ( c on t in u ed) a nd XIII

I NT R O DU C T I O N TO C H A PT ER XVI I I
Vi gn et t e 1 The Osiris A n i standing with his hands
.

raised in adoration of the series o f gods who preside over

the great C ities of E gypt ; behind h im stands h is wi fe Tutu ,

hold ing a sistru m i n her right hand and the green head of
so m e plant i n he r left .
2 76 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

weari ng a low crown m ade of feathers with a sort o f ,

strea m er which falls down behi nd his back ( 3) The

,
.

Lioness goddess T efn u t also of S u dan i origin wearing o n , ,

her head the solar d isk ( 4 ) The god Osiris wearing the .
,

A t af Crown and a m an a i H is face i s green which see m s

’

.
,

to s u ggest ol d age and he has the usual pointed and curved

,

A frican beard ( 5 ) The god Thoth ibis headed

.
-
.

x
,

Te t : [C H A PT ER X V I I I
] Wi thout title The open .

i ng section of th is Chapter is unaccountably o m itted i n the

Papyrus of A n i and a version of i t is suppl ied i n m y
,

translation fro m the Papyrus of N eb s en i .

Vi gn ett e 2 T he gods and godde sses of Te tu ( B usiris )

.

( I The god Os iris as before ( )

2 The goddess I sis , .
,

ll
with on her head ( 3) The goddess N ephthys w ith the .

hieroglyph for her na m e on her head

H orus son of I sis hawk headed
E ( 4 ) The god .

, , .

x
T e t :S ection relating to setting up the fat i n Te tu .

V i gn ett e 3 The gods of S ekh em ( Letopol is )

.

( )
I Osiris as before ( )
2
, H orus wearing the Crowns of .
,

the South and the N orth ( 3 an d 4 ) The two E yes of Ra .

,

each on a pylon 5 ) T he god Thoth . .

x
T e t :S ection relating to the
”
“ Th ings of the N ight
Festival i n S ekh em .

V i gn ett e 4 The gods of P e Tep ( B uto I n the Delta )

.
-
.

H orus as i n the secon d Vignette ( 2 ) I sis as before

, .
, .

K est a ( M est a) a son of H orus m a n headed ( 4) Hapi

d
.
, ,

ep
) a son
, of H orus ape he a ed ,
-
.

x
T e t :Section relating to the setting up o f the canopied
throne for H orus after the overthrow of S et and his fiends
by the follo w ers of H o rus .

Vi gn et t e 5 The gods who are i n Taiu R ekhti

.
-

( )
I Osiris as before ( )
2
,
I sis as before ( 3) Anubis .
,
.
,

j ackal headed ( 4) A bearded god ( 5 ) The god Thoth

. .
,

with a crescen t m oon having the full m oon i nside i t on h is , ,

head .

x
T e t :Section referring to the la m entation of I sis fo r
Osiris .
 The Gd o s of t h e O s i is r -
C i t i es 2
77

P L AT E XI V

V i gn et t e 6 The gods who are i n Abydos ( I ) Osi ris

.
,

as before ( )
2 I
. sis as before ( )
3 Anubis as
,
before .
, .

( 4) The f at with the T wo E yes of R a fi

x
T e t :S ection referring to the j udg m en t O f the dea d
and the in fliction of pun ish m en t upon those who are con
dem n ed to destruction i n the j udg m ent .

V i gn ett e 7 The gods who preside o v er the j udg m ent

.

of the dead :( I ) Thoth as before ( 2 ) Osiris as before , .

, .

A qp fi
a

3) Anubis as before ( )
4,
A bearded god sten . fi , ,

the associate of Thoth .

x
T e t S ection relating to the con de m nation of S et and
his fiends an d to the carrying out of their sentence of doo m
, .

V i gn ett e 8 The three gods who presided over the

.

ploughing up of the earth i n Te tu and the m i ngl ing o f the ,

blood of the rebels with the earth .

x
T e t S ection referri ng to the slaughter of the followers
of S et an d the pouring out of thei r blood on the earth
,

before the gods an d the digging of the blood i nto the

,

gro u nd This section shows that a great slaughter of the

.

ene m ies of Osi ris took place at Te tu as well as at Hen s u ,

( H era kleo o lis

p ) and it is C lear that the sacrifices m ade there
,

were offered up to the gab the sy m bol of a god who was ,

worshipped at B usi ris in predynasti c ti m es .

V i gn ett e 9 T he great gods of An r u tef a district of

.
,

Hen s u in Upper E gypt ( I ) R a hawk headed and wearing ,

-
,

the solar disk on h is head ( 2 ) Os iris as before 3 ) Shu .

, .
,

the S u d an i god fro m B a q em with a green face an d wearing , ,

a crown of feathers fro m which a sort of strea m e r falls

,

down behind ( 4 ) B eba the fi rs t born son of Osiris dog

.
,
-
,

headed T he for m s of the na m e of the god last m ention ed

mian Is
.

M M ,
Ba a
h
is
and Ababi
kjkj ll
Te t x :Section relati ng to the deposi t of the rel ics of
Osiris the th igh the leg an d the heel at
, , , A n r u tef, the place
where nothing grows .
2 78 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

V i gn et t e 1 0 The gods of R asta :( I ) H orus hawk

.
,

headed and wearing the Crowns of the South and the

,

North ( 2 ) The god Osiris wearing the A i ef Crown

.
, .

( )
3 I sis wearing the
,
sy m bol of a S u d an i goddess on her
head i nstead of
j ( 4 ) A god who
. is unna m ed We m a
y .

note i n passing the o m ission of two of the Sons of H orus

, , ,

Tu a m u t ef and e hs en u f fro m the V ignettes , .

x
T e t :S ection referring to the satisfaction of heart of
Osiris and to the existence of peace i n the east and west
, .

The X V I I I t h Chapter contains ten addresses by the

deceased to Thoth who is prayed to m ake h is word truth
,

before his en em ies j u s t as Thoth m ade the word O f O s ir is t ruth

,

before his ene m ies I n each address reference i s m ade to

.

one of the very critical e v ents which took place i n the

history of Osiris I t will be noted that none of the great
.

cos m i c gods took part i n these occurrences .

b
The R u ri c states that the recital of the Chapter shall
cause the deceased to co m e forth by day to escape e v ery fi re ,

i n the O ther World and to take any and e v ery for m he,

pleases and S hall purify h im fro m all unclean ness and free
, ,

h im fro m all the disabil ities that cl ing to h im upon earth .

P LAT E XV

V i gn ett e :A seated statue of An i the scribe Facin g .

i t is a figure of the S am priest who is C lad i n l inen

’
gar m ents over which he has put a leopard s skin H e .

holds i n his hand the wooden instru m en t u r /zaé a L] g ,

“
ia
. . the m ighty one of spel ls which has one en d i n the
, ,

for m of a ra m s head I n fron t of the statue is a s m all box

’
.

contain ing unguents an d colours the i nstru m en ts S abu r , ,

”
if and Tu n a
?
and the P as /z eu b af - -

fi
,
n

The priest touches the m outh the nose and

v .
, ,

the eyes of the statue wi th these i nstru m ents an d thereby ,

perfor m s the great and sole m n cere mony of U n r a

“
fi
g 1
-

or Open ing the m outh These cere m on ies ga v e to the.

deceased i n the O ther Worl d the power to eat d rink thin k , , ,

2 80 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

or been carried away fro m h im to return to h im no m atter , ,

how far away they had been carried When the Chapte r .

was recited b y An i h is spells would return to h im m ore ,

swiftly than greyhounds can r u n and qu icker than the light , .

I ts recital too would O btai n for h im the help of h im that

, ,

~w w x Q Q
X78 ga
Q

brought the ferry boat of -

Ra ,
g Q

Sfl
Q
?
<
i . of the god
a
.
,
3 s“ who ferried H er fh a f a
’

the s ouls of the righteous over to the I sland of F i re ,

wherei n Osiris reigned The word of power which An i .

wanted to possess was that the utterance of which would

enabl e h im to recreate h i m sel f Closely con nected with .

this C h apter is the X X V t h a rendering of which is given ,

i n the Append ix The recital of this Chapter enabled a .

m a n to recall to m e m ory his na m e i f by any chance he ,

forgot i t an d also the na m e O f any and e v ery god who m he

,

m ight happen to m eet As we have al ready seen the .

,

deceased was called upon to declare the na m es of the

guardians of the A r it s and Pylons i n the land of Osi ris ,

and if he were unable to re m e m ber these na m es he woul d

, ,

assuredly not be ad m itted i nto the m The na m eless soul .

i n the O ther World coul d not be presented to the G reat

God and as his na m e could not appear i n the l ist of the
, ,

na m es O f those who were to receive thei r rations fro m the

table of the god he would perish The na m e of a m a n was ,
.

an i ntegral part of h is being and to steal i t fro m h im was to ,

ensure his destruction N o greater har m could be done to .

the deceased than the erasing of h is na m e fro m his statues ,

stelae or to m b for the destruction of h is na m e was

, ,

equi v alen t to the destruction of his i ndividual ity .

V i gn ett e The scribe An i stan ding upright and arrayed

i n white H is right hand is laid on his breast over his
.
,

heart and w i th his left he touches a necklace which

, ,

pres u m ably he is receiving fro m the god A n u bis The .

necklace is co m posed of se v eral rows O f beads and to i t is

'

attached a pectoral i n the for m o f a pylon m ade of fa i en ce

‘

, ,

and i nlaid with a figure of the B oat of R a with the solar ,

1
d isk resting i n it A nubis is j ackal headed and he holds .
-
,

p p b; p im ibit d Fo t h
y B in t h e
1
Or er h a s a s cara s ee t h e s ec en s exh e ur

E g pt i an R oo m i n the iti h M
r s u s eu m .
 O f P res erv i n g t h e H ea rt 28 1

a sceptre i n the right hand and a sy m bol of “l ife

,

the left
x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER XXV I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F G I I NG V
A H E A R T T o TH E O S I R I S A NI I N K H ER T N E T ER The -
.

obj ect of th is Chapter was the restoration of the heart of the

d
decease to h im I n pri m itive ti m es the i n ternal organs
.

were re m o v ed fro m the body after death and destroyed ,

b u t when m u m m ifi c a t io n of the bodies of the wealthy

beca m e general the heart lungs gall bladder etc were
, , ,
-
,
.
,

m u m m ified separately As it was Anubis who presided

.

over the m u m m ific a t io n of the dead and who had therefore ,

authority over the hearts O f the dead i t was necessary to ,

i nvoke his goodwill and to persuade h im to return to the

,

deceased his heart i n K hert N eter I n the Vignettes to -

.

this Chapter we see the god return ing to the deceased his
heart or gi v ing to h im a n ecklace w ith a pectoral contai n ing
,

a ston e scarab on which were w ritten the m agical words of

the m ost i m portant of the Chapters o f t h e H eart ( X X X B ) .

The heart was the ho m e of the B a so u l on which the K A -

, ,

or Double depended for existence The destruction O f the

,
.

heart in v olved the an n ihilation of the B a soul an d the K A ; -

and i t was the B a soul which partook O f the O fferings m ade

-

to the dead I n the Chapter An i says clearly : I f I ha v e

.

no heart I can not eat of the cakes O f Osiris and I can not ,

sail u p and down the N ile to Abydos and Te tu ( B usi ris ) .

With the restoration of his heart An i gai ned the power to

u s e h is m ind an d un derstanding to use his hands and legs , ,

and to do whate v er his K A called upon h im to do and to ,

re v isit this earth at pleasu re .

V i gn e t t e :[Wanting i n
the Papyr u s of A n i ] I n .

the Papyrus of N eb s en i the

V ignette to this Chapter
shows us the heart of the
deceased bei ng weighed
agai nst h i m sel f by an ape
i n the presence O f Osi ris
( see illustration ) I n other papyri the deceased is seen
'

addressing h is heart which rests on a standard or the , ,

V ignette is si m ply a heart or a heart pectoral ,

-
.

V OL . 1 .
282 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

Te t x :[C H A PT ER X X XB ] THE C A H PT ER O F
L E TT I NG TH E H EA R T O F TH E S
O I RI A NI ES V
B D RI E N WY
NOT

F
A A

R O M H M N K H ER T N E T ER
I I -
. T h is Chapter
is one of the
m o s t i m portan t of the Chapters of the Book of the Dead ,

and it is u nq u estionably one of the oldest I t is fo u nd on .

coffi ns of the X I t h dynasty and i n all great papyri which

,

ha v e not been m utilated and upon hundreds of hard green

,

stone scarabs .E gyptian traditions assign to i t great

“
antiqui ty one of the m declaring it was foun d cut upon
,

the pedestal of a statue of Thoth in the reign of Hes ept i

( Se m ti,) a ki
“
ng of the I st dynasty and another assuring us ,

that i t was fo u nd by Prince H er u tataf the son of Khufu ,

( Cheops ). The older tradition states that it was the work

of Thoth h i m sel f The copy of the Chapter given i n th is
.

Plate is l ike that found i n the J u dg m en t S cene ( Plate I I I )

, ,

i nco m plete b u t the reader w ill find the m issing words

,

s u ppl ied i n the hieroglyph ic text The contents of the .

Chapter have al ready been discussed i n the description of

the j udg m ent and nothing further need therefore be
,

said here .

V i gn et t e The scribe An i arrayed i n white apparel

.
,

hugging closely to his body his B a soul which is i n the ,

for m of a m a n headed hawk

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER L X I ] T H E C H A P T ER O F N OT
L E TT I NG TH E B A S O UL O F A MA N B E SN A T C H E D A WA Y R O M
-
F
H I M I N K H ER T N E T ER The title of this Chapter 15 easy
to under s tand for a bel ief has always been co m m on i n
,
’
m any parts of A frica t h at a m an s soul can be bewitched
out O f h im and that i f an ene m y succeeds i n steal ing the
,

so u l the m a n whose soul has been stolen will d ie B u t the

,
.

con nection of the title w ith the contents of the Chapter is

not so e v ide n t for the deceased says that he ca m e forth fro m
,

the pri m eval waters a ba b

k ,Q and
that he m a y have abundance of water and ha v e the m astery
he pray s
xJ
,

over strea m s of water I n the Papyrus of Nefer u ben f

.
- -

this Chapter for m s part of a m uch longer co m posi tion which ,

co m prises Chapters L X L X I an d L X I I and which has

, , ,

for it s Vignette the picture of a m a n washing out h is m outh

S
by the ide of a lake or strea m I n the S a1te R ecension .

the Chapte r has a Vign ette with the figure of a m a n holding

2 84 T h e P a pyr u s Of Ani

P LA T E XV I

Vi gn et t e :The scribe An i arrayed i n white apparel , ,

standing with both hands raised i n the attitude of prayer to

his heart which is resting on a stan d i
,

seated on the c u bit of m a at

t Facing h im
are four bearded gods who
.
,

represent the Four S ons of H orus K est a ( M est a) Hapi , , ,

Tu a m u t ef and e hs en u f
x A
.
,

T e t :[C H PT ER XXV I I ] T H E C H A PT E R O F N O T
K F
.

L E TT I NG TH E H E A R T O F A M A N B E T A E N R O M H I M
.

I N K H ER T N E T ER This Chapter is an address to the gods

-
.

who steal hearts and cru s h the m and who reward a m a n

, ,

accord ing to the deeds of h is heart An i calls on the m .

not to touch his heart becau se i t belongs to the god of ,

m any na m es ( T em or R a or T hoth ) An i declares that

, , .

h is heart is m ade n ew that he has power o v er i t that i t , ,

and his m e m bers obey h im and that i t shall ne v er lea v e h is ,

body . I n the Appendix translations are gi v en of the

supple m entary Chapters XXV I I I X X I X A and X X X A , , .

T he fi rst part of Chapter X X XA rese m bles that O f a part

of Chapter X X X B but the ending is d ifferent and the S ons
, ,

O f H orus are entreated by the deceased to i ntercede for

h im with R a an d to cause the terrible goddess N ehebka to

,

do h im no har m The Vignette of Chapter XXV I I I is of

.

i nterest for we see i n it a m onster i n hu m an for m with a

,

S h aggy m ane an d whiskers ro u nd his face and a tail ; and

h is general appearance suggests that he was intended to
represen t a gorilla or chi m pan z ee tho u gh of course these
, ,

an i m als have no tails I t is probable that the artist drew

.

the m on s ter of which he m ust ha v e heard by report s that

,

filtered down the N ile fro m the So u thern S ti dan and added ,

a tail because he thought he oug h t to have one .

V i gn et t e T he scribe An i and h is wi fe Tutu standing

up to thei r knees i n a canal or a r m of the N ile s cooping up ,

water in to thei r m outh s wi th the i r right hands An i hol ds .

$
i n his left hand a sail X L sy m bol ic of ai r or wind and Tutu ,

holds i n her left hand a fan B y the side O f the wate r

two young pal m s and a large m ature pal m are growi ng an d ,

fro m the le a fy crown of the large pal m hang two clusters of

ripe dates .
 b
O f O t a i n in g A ir 285

Te t x A
:[C H PT ER L V I I I ]
C H A PT ER O F B RE A TH I NG THE
V V W
.

TH E A I R A N D O F H A I NG D O M I N I O N O ER TH E A T ER I N
,

K H ER T N E T ER About the m ean ings of the V ignette and

-
.

of the title of th is Chapter there is no roo m for do u bt they

refer to the dri nki ng of water and to the breathi ng of ai r by
A n i i n the Other World The text of the Chapter see m s .

to i ndicate that An i wishes to en ter i n to a certai n part O f

the O ther Worl d i n the co m pany of the M erti goddesses
, .

S o m e god n a m e un known asks h im who he is what i s h is

,
,

W
na m e an d here he 1 5 goi ng An i refers to a boat which
,

.
,

he has and repeat s the m agical na m es O f i t and i ts parts

, .

The Chapter ends with a prayer for cakes bread ale a nd , , ,

flesh of which he wi shes to partake i n the te m ple O f Anpu

,
.

Th is Chapter is not fo u nd i n other papyri contain i ng the

Theban R ecension and its title i n the Papyru s of An i ,

m u st have been given to i t by m istake .

V i gn et t e :The scribe An i arrayed i n whi te apparel , ,

kneel ing i n adoration under the branches of a large fi ne

syca m ore tree which is gro w ing by the side of a lake O f
,

water Al m ost hidden i n the branches is the figure of

the goddess N ut who is gi v i ng to An i a tab le O f food w ith
,

one hand and a vessel of pure water with the other The
, .

tree appears to be the syca m ore fig tree an d to be laden -

,

with fruit This Vignette s u ggests that at one t i m e tree

.

worship was co m m on i n E gypt as i t is i n certai n other ,

parts of Africa at the present day

x FF
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER L I X ] T H E C H A PT ER O F SNU I NG
A
TH E A I R ND O F H A I NG P O ER O ER TH E WA T ER I N K H ER T
,
V W V
N E T ER An i s petition fo r the water an d ai r which are i n
.
’

Nu t i a the Sky of which godde s s the syca m ore was the

,
. .
, ,

sy m bol A n i agai n identifies hi m s el f with the E gg of the

.

G reat Cackler w ith the l i fe i n wh i ch h is own l ife is bo u n d up

, .

V i gn et t e :T he scribe An i arrayed i n wh ite apparel

.

, ,

seated upon a chair o f state w ith a h ig h back I n his right .

han d he holds the K narp sceptre sy m bol ic of his authority , ,

an d i n the other h is staff of office B efore h im is a tabl e . .

I n the Turi n Papyrus the deceased stand s before a

sepulchral shrine
x A
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X L I V ] T H E C H PT ER O F N O T .

DY I NG A S E C O ND T I M E I N K H ER T N E T ER T h e E gyptians -
.
2 86 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

believed t h at the KA U or Dou bles of the dead l i v ed on the

, ,

so u ls of the offerings t h at were m ade re gularly i n t h e to m bs

wherei n their bodies were laid and that i f for any reason ,

an in terruption i n the supply of food took place the KA U ,

suffered hunger and thirst The K A U m ight wander about .

and prolong thei r existen ce by eating offal i n t h e desert ,

and by dri nki ng d irty water b u t unless the supply of ,

offerings was renewed t h ey starved to death M oreo v er .

,

i t was possible they also tho u ght t h at the KA U m ight s u ffer

, ,

deat h a second ti m e thro u gh the displ easure of the

T c ha t c h a u C hiefs an d the S h en iu offi cials who ad m in istered
the K ingdo m O f Osi ris This Chapter was written to enable
.

the deceased to iden tify hi m sel f wi t h the n ever setting or -

,

i m perishable stars and with R a and H orus who were

, ,

i m m ortal H e who was crowned K ing of the ods could

. G
,

not d ie a second ti m e .

V i gn et t e : The m u m m y of the Osi ris An i being

e m braced by An u b is t h e god of the e m bal m m en t cha m ber
,

and m aster of m edical knowledge

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X LV ] T H E C H A PT ER O F NOT .

R O TT I NG I N K H ER T N E T ER The obj ect of this Chapter is

-
.

qui te clear na m ely to preven t the m u m m y of the deceased

, ,

fro m rotting away thro u gh the effects of i m proper or

unskilful m u m m ific a t io n An i wished to be m u m m ified by
.

Anubis who carried out the m u m m ific a t io n of Osiris

,

whilst I sis recited spells t h at had been co m posed for her

by Thoth Anubis e m bal m ed O si ri s wi th such skill that
.

the flesh of the god n ever decayed or cru m bled away or , ,

fell i nto dust and the m edica m en ts and s w a t h in gs whi ch he

,

e m ployed i n the work w ere of the finest qual ity and ,

posses s ed preservative properties i n the highest de gree .

The reci tal O f this Chapter pro v ided the deceased with the
ser v ices O f Anubis Chapters C L XX V and C L XXV I bear
.

the sa m e title and were written wit h the sa m e obj ect a s

,

this Chapter .

Vi gn et t e A doorway presu m ably the doorway of the ,

to m b B y one j a m b stands the H eart so u l of An i i n the

.
-

for m of a m a n headed hawk and by t h e other a B enu bird

-
, ,

which sy m bol i z ed the soul of R a

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X LVI ] T H E C H A PT ER O F NO T
V
.

P ER I SH I NG A N D O F B E C O M I NG A L I E I N K H ER T N E T ER The
,
-
.
288 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

han d and t h e sy m bol of “l i fe

i n his left I n a Vignette .

publ ished by Na v ille a figure of the T et , or sy m bol of

the u terus of I s is is seen grasping the l eft a r m of the
fl ,

deceased with a pai r o f hu m an ar m s and hands

x .

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X C I I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F NO T .

L E TT I NG A M A N B E T RA NSP O R T E D T o TH E E A ST I N K H ER T
N E T ER The m ean i n g of the text of this Chapter is c o m
.

a r a t iv ely plain I t opens with an add ress to the Phall us

p .

of R a and con tinues w ith a prayer i n wh ich An i begs that

,

he m a y not be carried by force to the E ast or be m ade to ,

take part i n the festivals that are held there The K ingdo m .

of Osiris we know was situated to the west of the N ile

, , ,

an d i t is possible that the onl y obj ect of the reci tal of th is

Chapter was to preven t An i fro m bei ng set on the wrong
road and fro m arriv ing at the place of S laughter i nstead
,

of the real m s of j oy of Osi ris O n the other hand i t see m s .

,

that there m ust be so m e m ean ing i n the C h apter which we

have not grasped and the m ention O f the phall u s of R a
,

an d the V ignette of the gen ital organs of I sis see m to

s u ggest that the E ast was a place of abo m i nation to the
E gyptians because sexual orgies of an i rregular character
,

were c a r r I ed on there .

V i gn et t e :The scribe An i arrayed i n whi te l inen ,

apparel standing an d addressing a god who has his face

, .

turned roun d behind h im and who i s seated i n a boat ; ,

An i grasps his palette in his left hand This is the god .

H h K
e r f a f Q h
m .
fi
who was the celestial Ferry m an and
,

who ferried over the souls of the righteous to the I sland O f

,

F i re where Osi ri s reigned N one but the j ust could en ter .

h is boat and his face was turned round i n order that he

,

m ight see what was going on behi nd h is back and preven t ,

i m properly qual ified souls fro m m aking use of his boat I n .

the Turi n Papyrus there is a table of O fferings i n the boat ,

and i n front of the boat i tsel f is the sy m bol of the E ast if .

I t is not clear why An i is grasping his palette an d i n the ,

Turi n Papyrus the deceased has both h ands e m pty

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X C I I I A ] A N O TH ER C H A PT ER I n . .

other papyri these two Chapte rs for m one and the Turi n
Papy r us s u ggests that i t hould properly only have o n e S ,

Vignette na m ely that i n which Her f ha f appears

, ,
.
 O f Keepi n g t h e H d ea on t he B o dy 289

Vi gn et t e :T he scribe A n i add ressing th ree gods .

The Turi n Papyrus pro v es that the V ignette wh ich is

described abo v e under Chapter X C I I I really belongs to
Chapter X L I I I an d that either t h e artist who illustrated
,

the Papyrus of An i pain ted it i n the wrong place or the ,

scribe m isplaced the text

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X L I I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F NO T .

L E TT I NG TH E H E A D O F A M A N B E C U T O F F H I M I N K H ER T
N E T ER I n th is Chapte r An i i den tifies h i m sel f wi th the
.

G reat O n e an d the Son of F i re to who m his head was ,

given after i t had been c u t off S i n ce the head of Osiris .

was cut off An i could not expect to avoid a si m ilar fate

, ,

but the head of Osiris was not taken away fro m h im and ,

An i prays t h at h is head m a y never be carried away for he ,

is Osiris h i m self I t is now well known that i n pri m iti v e

.

t i m es i n E gypt t h e bodies of t h e dead were dis m e m bered

be fore burial probably as the resul t of rel igious bel iefs
, .

Th i s is clear fro m passages l i ke the follow ing where i n we ,

read that the gods

G ive to thee t hy head , u
[ l O .

Presen t to thee thy

bones ,
Q — fl
ll l v ‘
233 1 0

Collect thy m e m bers , ca

M AP ‘
8 4

B ri ng to thee thy heart

i n thy body , INS PZ
[ Q P
J U
K
As the practice of e m bal m ing gre w and spread i n E gypt
i n early dynastic ti m es as the res u l t O f the growth of the
,

cult of Osi ris the custo m O f dis m e m beri ng the body

,
'

gradually fell in to d isuse and at l ength the only portions ,

of the body which we re re m o v ed fro m i t duri ng the process

of e m bal m ing were the v iscera an d these were m u m m ified ,

separately A t the ti m e when the Papyrus O f An i was

.

w ritten there was l ittle chan ce O f the head being se v ered

fro m the m u mm y wil fu lly n e v ertheless A n i had the Chapter
,

i ncl uded i n h is papyru s wish ing to run no risk o f d is

,

m e m ber m ent acciden tal or otherwise

, .

1
Py ra m P
i d of pi I le ,
. 1 1 0 .
2 90 T h e P a pyr u s Of A ni

V i gn et t e :The m u m m y of An i lying on its bier with ,

a stan d contai n ing b u rn ing i ncense at the head and at the

foot O f it Above the m u m m y hovers h is H eart soul i n the
.
-

for m of a m a n headed hawk holding i n h is claws s /zen Q

-
, ,

the sy m bol of the sun s course and of etern ity This t h e

’
.

s oul is presenting to its body with t h e view of m aking it

e v erlasting
x A
.

Te t : [ C H PT ER L XXX I X ] T H E C H A PT ER O F C A US I NG .

TH E H E A R T S O UL T O B E U N I T E D T O I T S B O DY I N K H ER T
-

N E T ER B y the recital of this very i m portan t Chapter A n i

.

hoped to gai n possession of his H eart soul ( B a ) and of his -

Spi rit soul ( Khu ) and to effect the un ion of the for m er
-
,

with its m aterial body é /za t and the un ion of the

,

latter with its Spirit body s ci ] ; H eart soul and body

- -

wo u ld then exist eternally upon the earth and the Spi rit ,

soul and its ethereal an d i ndestru ctible envelope wo u l d have

thei r bei ng a m ong the gods The R u ri c of the C h apter . b
orders that an a m ulet i n the for m of a H eart soul m ade of -

gol d and inlaid with precious stones shall be tied to the neck
of the m u m m y I f th is were done i t was bel ie v ed that the
.

gods woul d co m pel An i s H eart so u l to v isit its body ’

-

reg u larly an d so preven t i t fro m decaying an d that both

, ,

H eart soul and body would be able to v isit during the

-

seasons of festi v als the city of A nu where H eart souls we r e ,

-

un i ted to thei r bodies by thousands I n t h e Turin Papyrus .

i t is expressly stated that the presence of such an a m ulet on

the body would prevent i t fro m decayi ng and would preven t ,

the H eart soul fro m leav i ng i t

-
.

Vi gn et t e :The H eart soul of the scribe An i i n the -

,

for m of a m a n headed bi rd stand ing-

,

i n front of the door O f h i s to m b .

The papyri afford m any v arian ts of

the V ignette of this m ost in teresti ng
Chapter I n the Papyrus O f K hari
.

( Fig . I
) we see the deceased standing
before his to m b of which he has ,

O pened the door

E and his H eart
so u l i n the for m o f a m a n headed
F
,

-
IO . 1 .

hawk flying out to m eet h im I n the Papyrus of Am en het ep .

2 92 T h e P a pyr u s of An i

Te t x :[C H PT ER X C I I ] A
C H A PT ER O F O P E N I NG THE
A A
.

TH E T O M B T O TH E H EA R T S O UL ND TH E SH D O W A ND O F
F A V W V
-
,

C O M I NG O R TH BY D Y A N D O F H A I NG P O ER O ER TH E ,

L E GS The recital of th is Chapter procured for An i the

.

“
power to lea v e the to m b on the day of so u ls zle All ,

So u ls Day and to see R a seated i n h is boat and to behold

’

, ,

the Great God on the day when so u l s were c o u n t ed u p '

( or i nspected or j udged ) and to sit down ,

a m ong the Chiefs ,

i n the O ther World A soul that possessed a knowledge of .

this Chapter had no need to fear the O pposition of the fiends

who fetter the m e m bers of Spirit so u ls and S h u t in Spirit -
,

souls an d who wished to do har m to it

,
.

P LAT E XV I I I

V i gn et t e :The boat con tain ing the shrine or ark O f , ,

the god S eker or D eath person ified resting u pon its sledge
, ,

before i t kn eels the Osi ris An i w ith both hands grasping ,

a part O f the boat

x F
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER L XX I V ] T H E C H A PT ER O F L I T
F W K F
.

I N G UP TH E EE T A L I NG A N D O F C O M I NG O R TH
OF
) ,

UP O N TH E E A R TH This Chapter contains a petition to .

S eker who had the power to stand on h is feet i n K hert

,

N eter for strength to walk An i identifie s hi m sel f w ith the

, .

god who illu m ines the great constellation of the Thigh ,

i e the G reat B ear i n the northern sky

. .
, The Thigh was .

i n the older m ythology associated with Set who it w ill be , ,

re m e m bered was wounded i n the thigh by H orus because

,

he had swallowed the crescent m oon one even ing when

wanderi ng abo u t the sky The lack of power to wal k .

which characteri z ed the dead body was associated by the

E gyptians with the e v il i n fluence of S et This co u ld only .

be o v erco m e by the power of the god of l ight i e the E ye , . .

,

of H orus and when An i had identified h i m sel f w ith this

, ,

god the power to stand on his feet and wal k was ass u red
,

to h im .

V i gn et t e The Osiris An i standi ng before the M oun

tai n of A m enti by whi ch are placed a v essel of drin k and
,

a loaf O f bread .

T e x t :[C H A PT ER VI I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F P A SS I NG
F
.

TH R O UGH A M E NT I A N D O F [C O M I NG O R TH BY D A Y ] In ,
.
 b
O f O t a i n i n g Life a ft e r D ea t h 2 93

this Chapter An i clai m s the power to pass through A m enti

because he is Osiris an d because he has del i v ered the E ye
,

of H orus that is to say he has secured for hi m sel f the

, ,

attrib u tes and strength of Thoth An i also identifies .

hi m self with the M oon god who was a for m of O si ris and
-
,

the sy m bol an d type O f new bi rth or resurrection This , .

Chapter is i m portant as showing that Osiris was certainly

regarded as the god of the m oon unde r the XV I I I th dynasty ,

an d that the death O f the body was co m pared to the period

of the m onth d u ring which the m oon was i nvisible As .

surely as the m oon reappeared i n the S ky so surely woul d ,

_

An i appear i n heaven ; and his co u rse through A m enti

would be as triu m phan t as that of the m oon through the
hea v ens .

V i gn et t e [Wanting i n the Papyrus O f An i ]

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F C O M I NG
V F
.

F O R TH BY D AY A N D O F L I I NG A T ER D EA TH
,
T his .

Chapter is an address to the O ne who m akes his presence

V S
isible by hin ing fro m t h e m oon A m ong m odern African
“
.

nations he is called the spirit of the m oon An i appeals to .

h im as the great sy m bol O f the resurrection and as the ,

being who r ev iv ified hi m self an d who has gathered about ,

h im the spi rits who S hare his nature and his attributes .

The fa v our of the god of the m oon enabled A n i to m ake

his way successfu lly through the O ther World to the real m
of Osi ris and this Chapter is one of the oldest and m ost
,

i m portant spells i n the B ook of the D ead .

V i gn ett e :A R a m god sy m bol ic of the Soul god O f

-
,
-

Te tu standing upon a sep u lchral b u ildi ng which rests on

, ,

a m a t H e has on his head a high crown with plu m es

.
,

which together w ith a d isk rests upon a pair of long

,

hori z ontal horns T his r a m i s identical i n for m ith the

.
,

W
r a m that was the incarnation O f K h n e m u the great god of ,

the F i rst Cataract B efore h im is a stan d with offerings

.

u pon it and i n fron t of h im is An i arrayed i n wh ite apparel

, , ,

with his hands raised i n adoration

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER I X ] T H E C H A PT ER O F C O M I NG
AV
.

F O R TH BY D AY H I NG P A SS E D TH R O UGH A M H E T The .

recital of th is Chapter by A n i gave h im power to pass .

th rough the awful cha m ber of A m h et in the ki ngdo m of

2 94 Th e P a pyr u s of Ani

S eker the god of Death and to tra v erse e v ery path i n

, ,

D ead land s u ccessfu lly and to e m erge before Osiris so u nd

,

“
an d well An i cr i es out i n triu m ph : I ha v e stabbed ( 0 r
.
,

D O
cut out this heart O f S uti
l E “
’

“
whic h is only a figurati v e way of sayi ng I ha v e slai n .

death . I n the land of Death S u ti z e Set ruled supre m e , . .

, , ,

an d e v ery soul who entered unprovided with the kno w ledge

O f the words of this Chapter suffered death final and ,

absol u te B ut An i has tra v ersed his do m ain and slai n the

.
,

heart O f Set by m eans of these words and he confidently

.

calls u pon the gods and the Spirit souls in the kingdo m of -

the Soul god to m ake a path for h im a m ong the m as the

-
,

beings have done in D ead land -

.

V ign et t e :The scribe An i arrayed i n white apparel , ,

an d holding i n his right hand a sy m bol O f his O ffi ce and i n

t h e other a long staff such as was carried by high O fficials ,

standing before the door of a ho u se

x
.

Te t :[ C H A PT ER C XXX I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F
AK
.

M I NG A M A N T O RE TU R N T o S EE H I S H O US E UP O N E A R TH .

The reci tal O f this Chapter enabled An i to revisit his house

upon the earth B y m eans of it he identified hi m sel f with
.

the Lion god and with the E ye O f H orus and was enabled ,

thereby to transfor m hi m sel f i nto its l ight and to co m e ,

upon the earth and to look upon his old ho m e I n the .

V ignette to the Chapter in the B rocklehurst Papyrus we

see the H eart so u l of the deceased ho v ering abo v e the house ,

close to which is a tree O ne papyrus ( Na v ille 0p ed.

,
. .
,

Bd I
. B l I 4 S) adds the apparently i rrelevant words :
, .

B ehold I have advanced I have not been found l ight l n

, ,

the B alance which is rid of m y case $

, A
§ [ ]
§ H
“ T KPP P ‘
E Q PRB K WW E

MR i
E
V i gn et t e :T he scribe A n i arrayed i n white apparel , ,

spearing a serpen t .

T ex t : [ C H PT ER X R X LV I I I
] T H E C H A PT E R O F

F
A O .

A M A N C O M I NG F O R TH BY D A Y A G A I NST H I S O E S I N
K H ER T N E T ER B y t h e recital of this Chapter An i O btained
-
.
2 96 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the gods i n heaven and who is here addressed as the god

,

who raises u p the dead to look upon h im and who bestows ,

u pon the m the ai r that they breathe This is followed by

S
a Litany contain ing n ine hort sections after each of which
were repeated a petition by An i for power to conti nue his
.

j o u rney i n the O ther World i n safety and a declaration ,

that his words were tr u e that he had not told l ies knowingly
,

nor co m m itted any fra u d u lent or decei tful act This Litany .

i n the for m i n which i t here appears i s found in no other

Theban papyrus of the period .

P LAT E XX

V i gn et t e :Osiris i n the for m of a m u m m y standing i n

,

a shrine w ith I sis H e wears the Crown of the South and

, .
,

holds i n his hands A

] ? sy m bols of sovereignty an d
do m in ion I sis e m braces the body of the god wi th her
.

right a r m
x .

T e t :[ C H A PT ER XV ] A H Y M N O F PR A I S E T o R A
A V
.

WH E N H E R I S E TH I N TH E E ST ER N PA R T O F H E A E N This .

i nteresting c o m pO S 1t 1o n contains a series of addresses to the

Sun god a m ong which are several S hort personal praye rs
-

that are put i nto the m outh of A n i hi m self I t is i m portan t .

to note that An i wishes to appear i n the sky w ith the S u n

god when he rises i n the m orn ing and to sai l with h im i n ,

the A n t c h et and S ekt et Boats and to enter with h im into ,

the n ight sky when he sets upon th is world Thus An i

-
.

beco m es a worshipper of R a and a devout v otary O f the ,

S u n god and i t see m s as i f he will be content wi th nothing

-
,

less than l iving i n the absolute presence of the god hi m sel f .

The l ight of R a is to draw h im forth fro m the to m b an d to ,

renew the l ife of all h is m e m bers and An i beseeches the ,

god to raise h im to li fe again because he says I a m on e

, ,

of those who worshipped thee when thou liv eds t upon the
”
earth . I t is d ifficul t at fi rst sight to recon cil e h is
adherence to the c u l t of R a with his bel ief i n Osi ris and ,

to under s tand how he could l ive i n the B oat of R a all day

and yet be a loyal servant of Osi ris carrying out the behest s
O f that god at the sa m e ti m e
,
The true explanation of the
.

m atte r is that R a and Osi ris are only two for m s O f one god .

R a was the for m which that god assu m ed d u ring the day
ti m e and O s i ris was the for m which he took during the
,
 H ymn to Ra 29
7
hours of the n ight T he sun was the hab i tation O f this god
d d
.

uring the day an the m oon was his dwell ing place during
,

the night .

The secon d section of the H y m n contains m editations

upon the greatness and m aj esty of the god of the sky
d
.

H aving once entere upon h is course he follows i t by a la w

that cannot be al tered As he passes over the sky with .

i rresistible force every face watches the sy m bol of the god

who m akes h i m self v isible to all m en at da w n and at even .

T he strength of h is light and the variety of its colours can

ne ither be told nor described The god who is inv isible .

by day because of the da zz l ing S plendour i n wh ich he is

enshrin ed is O ne and one only and i t is only through h is
, ,

o w n will and word that he beco m es the P rin ce of H ea v en .

The speed of the S un god m ade the author of the hy m n to

-

m arvel for i n one m o m en t the god travels a distance wh ich

,

i t wo u ld take a m a n m ill ions of years to acco m pl ish ; an d

by h is j ourneying the hours of the n ight as well as those Of
the day are nu m bered E qually worthy of wonder is the .

daily birth O f R a whose m e m bers are fashioned and whose

,

body is born i nto the sky w ithout any pai n arising i n the
being of h is creator .

P LAT E XX I

[C H A PT ER X V T he great god the ,

begetter an d m aker of R a i s the creator of etern ity and , ,

is m ightier than the gods ; to h im An i gives his heart

'

unhesitati ngly M oreo v er this god is al m igh ty for he is

.
, ,

able to o v erthrow all the powers of ev il an d to stabl ish his

throne despite the powers of wickedness an d darkness ;
,

and he can destroy all s in T herefore to h im An i appeal .

to m ake h is word truth i n K hert N eter an d to m ake h im -

,

sinless therein O nly by his help can An i hope to O btai n

.

a place w ith the vassals of the Spirit souls of R a and to -

,

l ive a m ong the souls i n the Land of H ol iness ; unl ess the
S un god m akes to prosper his j ourney he can n ever hope
-

to arri v e safely i n Sekhet Aaru The two paragraphs at

.

-
.

the end of the hy m n suggest that the Sun god is speak ing -

to An i for the text reads “Thou shalt appear i n hea v en

, ,
“ thou shal t tra v erse the S k
y thou shal t be S ide by s ide ,

with the gods of the stars and he is assured that he shal l ,

have a place i n the B oat of the Sun an d shal l see the T W O ,

VOL . I . X
2 98 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

F ishes the A b tu and the A nt perform ing thei r evolutio ns

, ,

by the prow of the B oat and shall behold Thoth and M aat ,

directing the B oat an d H orus acting as its steers m an An d

, .

he shall be with the gods who welco m e R a .

Vi gn ett e R a hawk headed with the solar d isk upon

,
-
,
“
his head and the sy m bol of l ife upon h is knees seated on ,

m a c?! i n one of the B oats of R a wh ich rests upon heaven ;

before h im i n the boat stands An i with his hands raised
i n adoration O n the m a t that falls over the prow of the
.

boat a swallow is perched

x
.

Te t [ C H A PT ER C X X X I I I ] The title of this Chapter .

is wanting an d the only note at the begin n ing of the text is

,

to the effect that the Chapter is to be recited on the da y

O f the m oon i e on the fi rst day of the N ew M oon
, . .
, In .

other papyri i t is called the B ook of m aking perfect the

Spirit soul i n K hert N eter i n the presence of the G reat
- -

”
Co m pany of the Gods The text refers to the strength
.

an d soundness of the body of R a and to h is triu m phan t

O
,

j ourn ey towards A menti to which he co m es in a r e con ,

-

stituted body daily The recital of th is Chapter renewed

.

the m e m bers and l ife of An i as those of R a were renewed ,

and secured for h im a welco m e fro m the gods si m ilar to that

accorded to R a h i m sel f M oreover i t pre v ented h im fro m
.
,

re m ain ing inert in the earth and gave h im the power to ,

hear and to see everything said and done i n K hert N eter -

.

Above all i t transfor m ed the flesh of An i into the d ivin e

,

fl esh of R a and when he seated h i m sel f i n the B oat of

,

R a the gods bel ieved that they were looking upon R a

hi m sel f
.

P L AT XX I I E
Vi gn et t e t o t h e R u r i c The god R a hawk headed b ,
-
,
”
w ith the solar d isk upon h is head and the sy m bol of l i fe
E
S upon his knees seated on m a d! i n one of the B oats o f
, ,

R a which rests on heaven The paddles wh ich are fastened .

,

to hawk headed supports ha v e curved handles in the for m o f

-
,

the urae i of I sis and N eph t h ys and the B oat is protected ,

by an u t cka t a m ulet on the port bow I n fron t of the B oat .

”
is a heaven of stars .

RUB R I C The recital of the above Chapter woul d

co m pel the gods to m istake An i for R a provided that th e ,
3 00 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

reptiles z e crocodiles etc H orus however penetrated

, .
, .
, ,

their d isgu ises and pursued the m relentlessly and S lew

, ,

the m This sa m e H orus i s seen i n the Boat of R a i n the

.

Vignette and the rec ital of thi s Chapter by An i secured for

,

h im the protection of the god Accord ing to the R u ri c . b

the words of the Chapter were to be said over a plaque on ,

which were painted figures of H orus and the gods already

m entione d
and a figure of the decease d seated i n a boat
, , ,

or over a m odel of the Boat of R a i n which figures of the

gods were placed i f this were done the deceased would be
able to travel with the Sun god everywhere -
.

Vi gn ett e A la der d
x
.

T e t :I n the Papyrus of A n i there is no text given

with the Vignette of the Ladder an d i n the Theban ,

R ecension of the B ook of the Dead there is no Chapter of

the Ladder although there are several allusions to the
,

Ladder . Thus i n Chapter X C V I I I the deceased N u ,

says “ The god Shu hath m ade m e to stand up the Light ,

“god hath m ade m e vigorous by the two sides of the

L A DD ER and the i m perishabl e stars m ake m e to advance
,

an d lead m e away fro m S laughter I n Chapter C X L I X .

(“A at X I ) he says I rise up l ike R a I a m strong l ike the .

E ye of H orus M y heart once brought low is now

.
, ,

m ade strong I a m a spiri t i n heaven and m ighty upon

.
,

the earth I fly l ike a hawk I cackle l i ke the S w en goose

.
, ,

and I al ight by the Lake of the T high I stand up and .

s i t down by it I rise up l ike a god I eat food i n the

.
,

F iel d O f Offerings I ad v ance to the real m of the S tar

,

gods . T he doors O f M a at are opened to m e and the ,

doors of the sky are u nbolted before m e I set up a .

L A DD ER to heaven [to ascend to the gods ] and I a m a ,

d i v ine bei ng a m ong the m And i n Chapter C L I I I A .

”

: “
( lines 34 3 5 ),i t says The Osiris Nu whose word is truth , ,

appeareth upon the L A DD ER that R a hath m ade for h im ,

and H orus and Suti hold h im tightl y by the a r m [ as he

ascendeth
The bel ief i n the Ladder as a m eans of reaching heaven
is very O ld and a tradition existed a m ong the E gyptians
,

which stated that Osi ris hi m sel f was obl iged to ascen d i nto
heaven by a Ladder R a stood on one s ide of it and
.

H orus on the other and they l i fted Osi ris up the Ladder
,
 The La dd r H e to eav e n 3 0 1

1
step by step A m ong the texts cut on the walls of the
.

Pyra m i d of Pepi I ( l 1 9 2 f ) we fi nd a version of the

. .

“
Chapter of the Ladder which reads : H o m age to thee
, ,

O d ivine Ladder ! H o m age to thee O Ladder of S et ! ,

S tand thou u pright O d ivine Ladder ,

S tan d thou .

upright O Ladder O f S et S tand thou u pright O Ladde r

, .
,

of H orus whereby Osiris appeared i n heaven when he

,

used the words of powe r of R a Pepi is thy son ,

Pepi is H or u s Thou hast begotten Pepi even as thou

.

hast begotten the god who is the Lord of the Ladder .

G ive thou unto Pepi the Ladder of the god [H orus] gi v e ,

tho u unto h im the Ladder of the god S et whereby Pepi ,

S hall appear i n heaven when he hath m ade use of the

,

words of power of R a H ail thou god of the KA U

.
,

( Doubles ) who advance when the E ye of H orus s o a r et h

upon the wi ngs of Thoth on the eastern side of the Ladder

of the god H ail ye who desire that your bodies shall
.
,

go into heaven Pepi is the E ye of H orus an d whenso

.
,

ever the E ye of H orus di recteth itself to any place where

he is Pepi goeth by its side H ail breth ren of the gods .
, ,

rej oice ye for Pepi j ou r n eyet h a m ong you T he brethren

, .

of the gods shall be glad when they m eet Pepi even as ,

H orus is glad when he m eeteth h is E ye which he placed ,

before his father K eb E ve ry god and e v ery Spirit —soul

.

reach out thei r han ds to Pepi when he appeareth i n

heaven fro m the Ladder Pepi needeth not to plough .

or to collect offerings and he n eedeth not to go to the

,

H all i n A nu ( H el iopol is ) or to the Tuat Cha m ber i n ,

Anu for that which he seeth an d that wh ich he heareth

shall feed h im an d nourish h im when h e appeareth i n -

heaven fro m t h e Ladder P epi standeth up l ike the .

uraeus on the forehead O f R a and e v ery god and eve r y ,

goddess stretch out the hand to Pepi on the Ladde r .

Pepi hath collected h is bones and gathered together h is ,

flesh and he hath gone speedily i nto heaven by m eans of

,
”
the two fingers of the god of the Ladder .

According to the text of Pepi I I ( 11 9 7 5 ff ) the sides of . .

the Ladder were cut i nto shape by an ad z e wielded by

the god S a s h s a the rungs were m ade of the si news of
,

K asut the B ull of the Sky an d they were fastene d to the

, ,

1
T ex t of U n as , l .
5 79 .
3 0 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

sides of t h e Ladder by thongs cut fro m the hide of the god

U tes the son of Hesat
,
E lsewhere we read that the
1
.

Ladder was carried by Kh en s u Aa hes Te tun and Sep t , , , ,

who set up the Ladder for Pepi and who m ade it to stand ,

fi r m ly The gods m entioned i n the last extract are gods of

.

the South or S ud an i gods a fact which suggests that the

, ,

legend of the Ladder reaching fro m earth to heaven is of

S u d an i origin When Osiris ascended the Ladder he was
.

covered w ith the covering of H orus he wore the apparel ,

of Thoth I sis went before h im N eph t h ys followed behind

, ,

h im U pu a t u opened out the way

,
cleared a path ) for
h im Shu bore h im up the S ouls of A nu drew h im up
, ,

the steps one by one an d the goddess N ut ga v e h im her

, ,
”
hands ( Pepi I l I n pri m itive ti m es i t was
, .

custo m ary to place m odels of the Ladder of Osiris i n the

to m bs so that the souls of the dead m ight have the m eans
,

whereby they could ascen d to heaven provided that they ,

were properly equipped with an adequate knowledge of the

na m e of the Ladder an d of the words of power t h at were ,

necessary to m ake it to raise i tsel f up and to stan d fi r m .

I n later ti m es when the custo m had fallen i nto disuse the

, ,

scribes see m to ha v e pain ted figures of the Ladder on

co ffins and papyri but whether with or w ithout the text of
,

t h e Chapter of the Ladder cannot be said The Ladder i n .

the Papyrus of A n i is a very i nteresting proof of the survi val

o f the bel ief in the effi cacy of a picture of the Ladder i n
the Theban Perio d
E
.

P L AT XX I I I

V i gn et t e :The scribe An i arrayed i n white apparel

kneel ing upon on e knee an d with h is han raised in ,
,

d ,

adoration of the gods of

I . A nu ( H el iopol is ) Te m u Shu and T efn u t , , , .

2 Te tu ( B usi ris ) Osiris

. I sis N ephthys and H eru, , , ,

n et c h tef f - -
.

em Letopol is ) Heru khe o ti en ariti and Thoth

3 . S e kh ( ,
- - -
, .

4 . P e Tep ( B uto ) H orus I sis K est a ( M est a) and

-
, , , ,

Hapi .

5 Taiu R ekhti I sis H orus and K est a ( M est a)

.
-
, , , .

6 A b tu ( Abydos ) Osi ris I sis and U pu a t u

.
, , , .

7 The J udg m en t of the D ead T hoth

=
.

P pi
.
,

1
e I, I . z oo Pepi I I , I 9 36 . .
3 4
0 T h e P a pyr u s of A ni

n ext refers to the purity of the food which he has eaten ;

filth is an abo m ination to h im and he will not eat it or , ,

touch it or e v en wal k upon i t H is food is the food O f R a

,
.
_
,

an d i t is brought to h im by the B oats of R a the A n t c h et ,

and the S ekt et H is position a m ong the gods i s a very

.

S trong one and he threatens any god who m a y wish to attack

,

h im that i n the even t of his so doing he shall be j udged

, ,
“
by the ancestors of the years or the gods O f the year , ,

and that Osiris shall de v our h im when he co m es forth fro m

Abydos “
H e shall also be j udged by the ancestors of
.

Ra ,
and by the great Spirit soul or Light god H ere -
,
-
.

cl early we have an allusion to the ancien t gods of the year

who were worshipped i n E gypt before Osiris or R a was
known And An i has the power to hold converse with the
.

d isk and w ith the solar gods H e sits side by side with .

Osiris who speaks to h im i n the language of the gods an d

, ,

An i repl ies i n the speech of m en A n i a b s o r b s the attributes

.

of all the gods of A n n Te tu Hen s u Abtu A pu and Senu

, , , , , ,

an d beco m es the great S ah u of heaven the coun terpart o f ,

Osi ris an d the overlord of every god and goddess i n Khert

,

N eter . I t m ust be noted that the gods K est a Hapi , ,

T u a m u t ef and e
, h s e n u f who presided over the safety of
,

h is m u mm i fied intesti nes also beca m e h is j udges a fact that

, ,

suggests the existence of a bel ief that the testi m ony O f the
i nternal organs of a m a n m ight be given by the m for or
against h im i n the j udg m en t H all of Osiris before Osiris ,

and his Forty two Assessors -

.

P L AT E XXV

Wi th this Plate begins the series of very i m portan t

Chapters of the B ook of the D ead that are known as the
”
Chapters of m aking the T ransfor m ations The O bj ect O f .

the for m ulae O f which they are co m posed was to enabl e the
d
decease to take any for m he pleased and to m ake h i m sel f ,

to appear in any guise so long as i t assisted h im i n m aking

his way through Dead lan d i nto the K ingdo m of Osiris
-
.

V i gn et t e :A swallow perched on a con ical obj ect

painted i n stripes red an d green What this O bj ect is
, .

cannot be said but i t is probably m ean t to represent the

,

al ighting place of the swallow that carried the n ews of the

death of H orus and the grief of I sis to the gods .
 Of B ec o m i n g a S w a llo w an d a H k aw 3 5
0

Te t x[C H A PT ER L XXXV I
] T H E C H A PT ER O F M A I NG K
F
.

TH E T R A NS O R M A T I O N I NT O TH E SW A LL O W B y the rec 1ta1 .

of this Chapter An i transfor m ed h i m sel f i nto the swallow ,

which was an i ncarnation of S er q et the S corpion goddess ,

-
,

the daughter of R a and of I sis The swallow was a harbinge r .

of glad tidings and was and S til l is welco m ed everywher e

, , ,

i n E gypt and the S u d an The glad tid ings that An i .

proclai m s is that H orus sits on the throne of his fathe r

Osiris and that he is the Captai n of the B oat of R a and
, ,

that S et is boun d fast and is a helpless prisoner i n the

,

fetters wh ich An i had prepared for h im An i proclai m s h i s .

i nnocence an d his purity of soul and body an d clai m s the ,

right to en ter i n a m ong the gods because he is holy as they ,

are holy All roads are k nown to h im an d n o door i s

.
,

closed to h im and as the swallow flies about everywhere in

,

the sunsh ine so does he travel about over S ekhet Aaru

S
.
,

S in ce I sis took the for m of a wallow an d raised u p Osi ri s ,

to l ife An i on taking the for m of a swallow is able t o

,

restore to l i fe h is dead body that is lying i n the earth T h e .

soul that kn ew not this Chapter was doo m ed t o re m ai n in

D ead land
-
.

Vi gn et t e :A golden hawk hol ding a flail or wh ip A , ,

stan ding upon the sy m bol O f gold m a .

T e t :[ x C H A PT ER LX XV I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F M A I NG K
F A K
.

TH E T RA NS O R M A T I O N I NT O A H W O F G O LD The recital .

of this Chapter enabled An i to take the for m of the golden

hawk with pin ions that were four cubits fro m tip to tip an d
, ,

plu m age in colour l ike the precious fl a i r é ston e that is foun d /

i n the S outh T he object of tak ing this for m w as to obtai n

.

the m ean s of flying fro m th is earth up i nto the sky and so

_
,

i nto the A n t c h et and S ekt et B oats of the Su n god I n the -

.

for m of a hawk he coul d fly up a m ong the gods and take

his seat with the m and he coul d v isi t the F iel d of Offeri ngs
,

and refresh hi m self on celestial food at will O nce there h e .

coul d tran sfor m hi m self i n to a Spiri t soul an d l ive w ith the -

,

Spi rit souls of Os i ris and R a T he celestial G rain god

-
.
-

N epr a would supply h im w ith food an d R a wo u ld l isten t o ,

h is words as to those of the B enu bird in to wh ich the soul ,

of the Sun god transfor m ed itsel f The early E gyptian s

-
.

bel ieved that the souls o f the j ust passed fro m earth to
heaven on the wings of the ibis of Thoth but the late r ,
3 6
0 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

E gyptians preferred to travel thither by taking the form of

the hawk of gold .

V i gn et t e A green hawk holding a whip and stand ing , ,

upon the roof of the sepulchral b u ilding called s er eé k

x
.

Te t : [C H A PT ER LX XV I I I ll I—I 6
] T C H PT ER
K F K
H E A , . .

O F M A I NG TH E T R A NS O R M A T I O N I NT O TH E G O D H A W -
.

This Chapter is at once the longest of all the Chapters of

T ransfor m ations an d the m ost i m portant The obj ect of .

the recital of the Chapter was not only to enable the

deceased to take the for m of any hawk but to incorpo rate ,

hi m sel f in that v ery hawk i n which H orus the son of Osi ris ,

and I sis who was begotten by Osiris when dead and who
, ,

was concei v ed and brought forth by I sis fro m h is father s ’

seed appeared on earth

, An i and e v ery worshipper of
.
,

Osi ris wished to beco m e soul of the soul of H orus heart o f

, ,

the heart of H orus and flesh of the fl esh of H orus T he

, .

attain m ent of this desire m ade An i to be the son of Osiris

and I sis an d the son of the Sun god R a his being was
G
-
, ,

therefore m erged i n that of the G reat “ od and he

beca m e al m ighty and everlasting and the r ec ipI en t of the ,

“
ho m age which the gods paid to thei r Overlord H e .

beca m e the G reat Spirit —soul wherein all Spirit souls l ived -
,

and the G reat S ahu o r Spiri t body wherei n all S ah u l ived

,
-
, .

With this exalted and d i v ine relationship An i was not fain

to be conten t The E gyptians i m agined a ti m e very far
.

“ ”
back when the gods did not exist and when ne ither ,

O siris nor R a had co m e i nto bei n g T here was no heaven .

and no earth no sun no m oon no stars no death and no

, , , , ,

m en and wo m en and what existed was the great m ass of

Celestial Waters wherei n dwel t the great al m ighty i n v isible , , ,

unkno w able God who m the E gyptians called T em or Te m u

d
.
,

At so m e period un known to gods and m en this T em create

P LAT E XX V I

[C H A PT ER L XXVI I I

a Spi rit soul and caused i t to l ive i n a creation of l ight

-

§ fi fl“fi fit Q
f
e t
?
“ '
N ow this Spi ri t soul
. proceede -
d
”
fro m the eye of the Lord O ne and I
a

i t was the essence of Te rn and his very being and it was ,

3 0 8 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the N ile or any strea m without danger to hi m sel f The

, , .

crocod ile has always been worshipped in E gypt an d the

S ad an and as late as the reign of M u ha m m ad Al i a sacred
,
‘

crocodile was kept i n a tank at K hart u m and v enerated by

the people there O n the B lue N ile until q uite recently the
.

nati v es bel ieved that by m eans of m agi c m en co u l d be

transfor m ed into crocodiles an d so have the power of ,

crossing the N ile at will At the presen t day the gen itals .

of the crocodile fin d ready purchasers who cut the m up ,

i nto s m all pieces and sell the m as an aphrodisiac I n very .

early ti m es the crocodile was considered to be a form of the

Sun god -
.

V i gn ett e The god P tah standing i n a shrine H e is .

i n m u m m y for m and holds a sceptre i n h is hands and

, ,

stands upon the cubi t of M a at ; fro m h is neck hangs the

m en dt sy m bol ic of v iril ity and sexual ple a sure
, B efore the .

shrine is a S tand w ith O fferings upon i t

x K
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER LX XX I I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F MA I NG
F
.

TH E T RA NS O R M A T I O N I NT O TH E G O D P TA H This god was .

.

originally a m aster blacks m ith but d ivi ne honours were ,

paid to h im after h is death and eventually he was regarded ,

as one of the great cos m i c gods who executed the c o m ,

m ands of Thoth when he decreed the m aking of the

hea v ens and the earth The recital of th is Chapter secured
.

for An i the strength of Pta h and an abundance of offeri ngs ,

and enabled h im to iden t ifiy hi m sel f with Te m u and R a

G
.

H e beca m e thereby the B ull of the ods of A nu his strength ,

i n creased m o m en t by m o m ent and h is loi ns w ere m ade ,

strong to endure for m illions of years .

V i gn et t e :A R a m sy mbol ic of the S oul god of Te tu

,
-
,

i e Bus iris
x
. .
, .

Te t : [ C H A PT ER L X XXV ] T H E C H A PT ER O F
K F
.

M A I NG TH E T R A NS O R M A T I O N I NT O TH E S O UL O F T E M U .

This Chapter for m ed a m ost powerful spell the O bj ect of ,

which was to transfor m An i into the Soul god o f N u or -

,

the heaven s ; i ts contents rese m ble those of a part O f the

L X X V I I I t h Chapter The Soul god who was s y m bol i z ed
.
-

by a r a m was the counterpart of the pri m eval Soul wh ich

Te m u t h e Father of all the Gods placed i n Ra the S un
, ,

god and whi ch ca m e in to being under the na m e of

,
 O f B ec o m i n g P t a h an d T em u 30 9

K hepera S i nce An i abo m i nates si n and l i v es i n T ruth

.
,

he has the power to take the for m of the G reat Soul and to
beco m e an e m anation of the L ight god -
.

V i gn et t e :A B enu bird .

x
T e t :[ C H PT ER LX X X I I I ] AT H E C H AP T ER O F
K F
.

M A I NG TH E T R A NS O R M A T I O N I NT O TH E B E N U B I R D The .

B enu bird wh ich was at a later period identified w ith the

,

d d
.

phoen ix was suppose to be self produced an was there

,
-
,

fore a type o f the god K heper a a god who was sel f produced ,
-

and sel f begotten B y the reci tal of this Chapter An i was

-
.

able to declare that the ger m s of every god were i n h im ,

and that he was Yesterday i e Osiris and that he was , . .

, ,

K h en s u the M oon god who was i rresistible

,
-
The allus ion , .

C :
to the Tortoise is not qu ite clear b U t ] L4 ] ,
P T g

R ?k
C
see m s to m ean that An i is clothed with a
'

-
tttz
"
v

gar m ent which is as durabl e as is the shell of the Tortoise

or Turtle The R u r i c which is found i n so m e papyri
. b ,
,

i nfor m s us that a knowledge of this Chapter will provide

the deceased w ith the food which Os iris eats will enable ,

h im to take an y for m he pleases to travel o v er the earth ,

with R a to see this god daily and to be free fro m the

, ,

in fluen ce of every e vil th ing for ever .

P L AT E XX VI I I
V i gn et t e A heron .

x
T e t :[ C H A PT ER L XX X I V ] T H E C H A PT ER O F
K F
.

M A I NG TH E T R A NS O R M A T I O N I NT O A H ER O N O wing to
our lack of knowledge of the iews that the E gyptians hel d V .

concern ing the bi rd figured in the Vignette i t is i m possible ,

to say exactly what the recital of this Chapter was supposed

to effect an d what benefi t woul d accrue to An i fro m taking
,

the for m of a heron The text suggests that i t would give

.

h im power over the an i m als that were bro u ght for sacrifice ,

i n other words that he woul d be abl e to s u pply hi m sel f

,

w ith food I t also asserts that An i has rendere d service to

.

the dweller i n H er m opol is i e Thoth that he has set t h e , . .

, ,

gods i n thei r places that he knows N ut the S ky goddess , ,

-
,

and Tatun a very an cien t E arth god and the

, R ed -
,

Goddess ( T es h er tt ) an d Heka the great god of spells

”
, ,
3 1 0 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

and incantations As An i proclai m s h is truthful ness and

.
,

his daily progress towards T ruth i t is clear that he co u l d ,

n ever hope to take the for m of the heron unless he was

sinless i n word and i n deed The concluding l ines of this .

Chapter as found i n the Papyrus of An i d id not really

belong to it for they for m the last part of Chapter L XX XVI
, ,

which the scribe appears to ha v e copied here because there

was no roo m for i t i n i t s proper place .

Vi gn ett e A hu m an head springing fro m a lotus flower

growing i n a pool of water 123mm
x
.

Te t :[ C H A PT ER L X X X I A ] T I I E C H APT ER O F
K F F
.

M A I NG TH E T RA NS O R M A T I O N I NT O A L O TUS LO W ER .

The lotus or l ily was bel ie v ed to be the favo u rite flower

, ,

of R a and to be the product of an e m anation of that god

, .

The flower here referred to is however the celestial lotus , , ,

fro m the calyx of which the rising sun or H a rpo kr a t es rose

day by day Thus the idea of resurrection was associate
.
, ,

d
with the lotus a n d when An i w ished to have the power to
,

transfor m hi m self in to the lotus i t was i n order that he ,

m ight be able to give n e w birth to h is body and to e m erge ,

in to heaven daily l ike the Sun god I n the second version .

of this Chapter the lotus is said to be the sy m bol of N efer

T em i e Young T em who was the son of P ta h an d
, . .
, ,

the goddess S ekh m et Chapter L XX X I I gave An i the .

power to transfor m hi m sel f i nto Ptah one of the great ,

creator gods and the knowl edge of Chapter L XXX I

-
,

enabled h im to beco m e the son of Ptah The fi rst version .

of this Chapter helped h im to take the for m of H orus bu t ,

H orus an d Nefer T em were only j u v en ile for m s of one an d

-

the sa m e god i e the rising sun I n the older for m of the

, . .
,
.

V ign ette as given i n the Papyrus of Nebs en i we have ,

a lotus i n full flower but no hu m an head and the text , ,

“
proves that the lotus was growing i n the fiel d of R a an d ”
,

not i n a l ake or pool of water I n m any papyri the .

Vi gnette is the sa m e i n both versions .

V i gn et t e :A seated bear ed god wi th the solar disk ,

d ,

on his head
x K
.

Te t : [ C H A PT ER L XXX
] T H E C H A PT ER O F M A I NG

F V
.

TH E T R A NS O R M A T I O N I NT O TH E GO D WH O G I E TH L I GHT
IN K
TH E D A R N E SS The Lan d of the D ead c o n t a med .
3 12 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

this god as the secretary of O siris will know all h is m aster s

, ,
'

secrets There is however no explanation forthco m i ng ,

d
.
, .

N ext An i finds hi m self i n a place of un fatho m able epth ,

darker than the darkest n ight and where there is neither ,

water nor air Wh y he is there or where the place is is

.

not clear After th is we have allusions to H o rus and the

.
,

d weller i n the Lake of F i re and the B oat of M illions o f ,

Years etc but it is i m possible to fi t the m together i n a

,
.
,

con nected fash ion w ith the prayers of An i who is supp osed ,

to be in doubt about the con ti nuity of his existence i n the

O ther World Agai n he appl ies to T hoth an d asks h im
d
.
,

h o w long he has to l ive

’
Thoth s answer i s both efin ite .

“
and satisfactory for he repl ies : Thou shal t l ive for m illions
,

o f years a l i fe of m ill ions of years

,
The rest of the .

Chapter refers to the succession of H orus to the throne of

O siris the departure of S et the fel icity of An i i n the Other
, ,

World the destruction of h is foes etc

, According to , .

M Na v ille who bases his v iews upon a m in u te study O f

.
,

the Chapter as found i n the Leyden papyrus th is co m pos i ,

t ion contains the re m ains of a H er a kleopolit a n legend of

the Flood T em is supposed to tell An i that he is about
.

to destroy everything that he has m ade by the F lood which

he will bring upon the earth E veryth ing shall be destroyed .

except hi m self ( T em ) an d Osi ris an d a very s m all serpen t ,

which no god shall be able to see After t h e Flood Osiris .

shall establ ish h is kingdo m i n the I sland of F i re and after ,

h is departure his son H orus shall S it upon h is throne I f .

this view be correct th is Chapter throws considerable l ight

upon the m ental attitude of An i who v entured to suggest ,

by i t that Thoth woul d regard h im with such favour and

confidence that he the god who was the person ification o f
, ,

the m ind of God woul d reveal to h im the purpose of the

,

C reator an d m ake known to h im his design to destroy m a n

,

and beast by a Flood I t is in teresting also to note that A ni

.

“
could i m agine Thoth pro m ising to h im a l i fe of m ill ions
O f years and bel ie v e that he alone a m ong m en woul d
,

s u r v ive the death and destruction that the F lood would

bring upon the earth .

P LAT E S XX I X A N D X X X

V i gn ett es :I The scribe An i arrayed i n whi te l in en

.
,

apparel standing w ith both hands raised i n adoration of the

,
 O f E n t er i n g t h e H a l l o f J u gm en t d 3 13

god O siris I n fron t of h im are altar stands an d table s

.

loaded w it h offering s of e v ery k i nd which he i s presenting ,

to Osiris ; behin d h im stands his w i fe Tutu holding a ,

sistru m a m en dt an d flowers i n he r hands

, ,
.

2 T h e god O s iris bearded and wearing the Wh ite

. ,

C rown standing i nside a funerary c h est or coffer the

, ,

roof of wh ich is s u r m oun ted by a head of the hawk that

represen ts S eker the god of D eath an d uraei Thi s chest
, , .

i s sy m bol ic of t h e kingdo m of S eker Osi ris is i n m u mm y .

for m and his body is decorated w ith a sort of scale work

,
-

design which was probably pain ted on his s w a t hin gs i n

,

colours F ro m t h e back of his neck hangs a m en dt an d he

.
,

holds two sceptres and a whip

T ] A i n his hands
wh ich e m erge fro m h is s w a t h in gs an d he stands u pon the
,

cubi t O f m a d! : 1 The face an d han ds and wrists of

.

Os iris are pai nted green to indicate that Osi ri s is old .

Out of the poin t of the cubi t grows a lotus fl ower i n full

bloo m on whi ch stand fig u res of the Fo u r Sons o f H oru s
, ,

v iz
.
,
K est a ( M est a) Hapi T u a m u t ef an d e hs en u f
, , , .

B ehin d Osi ris stands I sis whose right a r m i s e m brac in g ,

h im S h e wears I] the hieroglyph for her na m e upon h er

, ,

head and carries i n her left han d the sy m bol of l i fe “

,

The c h est i n which the two gods stand rests upon or is a ,

conti nuation of the sepul chral pylon s h aped building which ,

-
,

repre s en ts the to m b of Osiris

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER C XXV I NT R O DU C T I O N O R P A R T I ]
A
.
, .

T H E C H PT ER O F E NT ER I NG I NT O TH E H A LL O F M A AT I .

T hi s Chapter is one of the m ost i nteresting and re m arkabl e

i n the Book of the D ead and it well illustrates the lofty ,

m oral and spi ritual conceptions of the E gyptians un der the

X V I I I t h dynasty The i deas that i t e m bodies are as O ld
.

as dynasti c civil i z ation but the for m i n which they are here
,

p resented is probably not ol der than the X I t h dynasty .

The deceased is supposed to be stan ding before the door s

of the H all of J udg m en t which are guarded by Anubis an d , ,

to h im he describes the various acts of piety which h e has

perfor m ed his obj ect bei ng to see the great gods an d t o
,

feed with the m on thei r celestial food H e has v isited .

Te tu ( B usi ris ) and Ab tu ( Abydos ) and has taken part i n ,

the cere m on ies perform ed there an d he has seen the gods ,

of K a m ur an d N eru t ef Anubis is satisfied th a t An i know s

.

VOL . I . Y
3 14 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

the towns and the roads i n K hert N eter and the s m ell of h im -
,

is to Anubis as that of one of the gods B efore he per m its .

An i to enter i nto the H all of J udg m en t he m ust be certai n

t h at An i knows the m agical na m es of these doors an d he ,

questions h im on the subj ect When An i has told thei r .

na m es A nubis says : Pass on for thou knowest [the ,

na m es ] The I ntroduction ( Part I of this Chapter i n

.

the Papyr u s of An i ) 1s quite different fro m that found I n the

other papyri of the period and is far m ore suitable to ,

Parts I I and I I I than the usual I ntroduction I n the .

Papyr u s of Neb s en i and the Papyru s of N u the deceased

states that he knows the na m e of Osi ris and the na m es of ,

the Forty two J udges who s it w ith h im i n j udg m en t and he

-
,

then goes on to enu m erate the sins and m oral O ffences which
h e has not co m m itted in short he declares that he has not ,

si n ned against God or m a n I n Part I I w h ich is co mm only

.
,

known as the N egati v e Con fession the deceased addresses ,

each of the Forty —two gods by na m e and then m akes to ,

h im a categorical den ial that he has co m m itted such an d

such a si n Thus i n the papyri generally the subj ect m atter
.

of Parts I and I I is the sa m e only i n Part I I the deceased ,

states the na m es of the Forty two gods of who m in Part I -

he professes to know the na m es .

P LAT E S XXX I A N D XXX I I

V i gn et t e :The H all o f M a ati or the J udg m en t H all ,

of Osi ris i n which An i has to address severally the Forty

,

two gods who are seated i n a row down the centre of the
H all At each end is a door :that o n the right is called
.

N eé m a a t lzer z t ep -
r et m -
f U
5 E

”
t3
<®
“ fi i@
f>
T
Si A“ , an

M
that on the left N eé ¢ efi t z Mes m en m en t Q 7 B fi fl ~
..
‘

fi j ti :
m
’
Q ‘
M i O v er t h e centre of the roof which is
.
,

crowned with a series of feathers of 7mm ! and urae i arranged

“

al ternately is a seated deity wi th ar m s an d hands exten ded

, ,

the right over the E ye of H orus and the left o v er

a pool of water 1mm H e is pai nted bl u e and sy m bol i z es
.
,

the pri m e v al Water god who was the creator of the heaven s
-
,

and the earth H e is d iscussed fully in connection wi th a

.

s i m ilar V ignette that is found above a part of Chapter XV I I

3 I 6 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

long stride Fen t i of the nose “H e

U ne m kh a ibit u -
,
“
E ater of shadows N e ha hau S tin king body S et -
,

“
q e su ,
B one cr u s her H etch
-
abe hu H e of the white -
,

“
teeth U ne m s n ef E ater of blood H er fh a f He
W
-
, ,

hose face is t u rned beh ind h im etc

x V
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER C XXV T H E N E G A T I E C O N F E S .

S I O N O R PA R T
, This co m position contains a series of
forty two addre s ses to the J udges or Assessors who si t
-
,

with Osiris i n the H all of M a ati A n i addresses each god .

by h is na m e and m entions the na m e of the place where his

,

shri ne is and says I have not co m m i tted such and s u ch

, ,

a sin a g , H ail Crusher of bones who co m est forth fro m

,
, , ,
”
H en s u I have not uttered falsehood
, .

[ The V i gn et t e an d T e x t of Part I I I of Chapter C XXV

and the R u b ri c are wanting i n the Papyr u s of A n i .

“
A translation of the Address which the righteous heart
”
m aketh to the gods i n the H all of Ma ati and of the ,

R ubri c m ade fro m the Papyr u s of N u w ill be found i n the

Appendix to Chapter CX XV ] .

P LAT E XX X I I

V i gn et t es :I A bearded m a n god N u
.
-
, .

2 R a hawk headed w ith the solar d isk

.
,
-
,

on h is head .

3 H athor i n the for m of a wo m an with

. , ,

d isk and horns on her head .

? The Wol f god U p uatu on

-
a standard ,
-
, .

9 The 1
J ackal god A npu seated -
, , .

9 A scorpion 341553 holding s /zen Q and

5
The
7
goddess I sis wo m an headed ,
-
.

1 The R a m god B a n eb Tet

5
-
,
- -
.

The goddess U a t c h it serpen t headed

9 ,
-
.

9 The goddess M ert with a cluster of ,

plants on her head fig standing upon ,

the sy m bol of gold ( m .

I I The goddess N eith i n the for m of a

.
,

wo m an with a vase on her head

, .

1 2 T he god S et i n the for m of a bearded

. ,

man .

13 . A god i n the for m of a bearded man .

14 . A god i n the form of a bearded ma n .

 O f E s c a pi n g S la u gh t er 3 17

V ign ett es :1 5 The goddess S ekh m et i n the for m of

. ,

a wo m an hav ing the head of a l ioness

with the solar d isk on her head .

1 6 An a t e/ mt or E ye of H orus resting on
. , ,

a sepulchral build ing .

17 The M an god Osi ris seated an d wear

.
-
, ,

ing the A t ef Crown .

18 The goddess N ut i n the for m of a

. ,

wo m an with a v ase on her head ,

.

1 9 A bearded god i n m u m m y for m with

. ,

a m en d! at the back of h is n eck ,

holding a sceptre
m a dt
'
and standing on
.
1
20 . A five rayed star s ym bol ic of S ahu
-
, ,

or O rion .

“
Three l i v ing uraei ”
21 . .

The form s of the V ignette of this Chapter vary i n the

other papyri Thus in the Papyrus of Nefer uben f the
.
- -

deceased is seen touching h is m outh with the tip of a finger

of his left han d ; i n the Papyrus of S u t im es the deceased is
lassoing the top of a fezpillar ( P) an d i n a papyrus i n the
B ritish M useu m ( N o . he is adj uring a serpen t wh ich ,

see m s to be taking to fl ight I n the Papyrus of A m en.

het ep i n Cairo the Vign ette contains the fi gures of eighteen

g ods
x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER X L I I T H E C H A P T ER O F RE P ULS I NG
K V
.

TH E SL A UGHT ER I NG N I E S I N HE N S U T h I S title is .

wanting i n the Papyrus of A n i ] The obj ect of th is Chapter

.

was to enable the deceased to escape fro m the slaughter

that took place i n H en s u an d presu m ably fro m decapitation
,

an d dis m e m ber m en t I t see m s as though the deceased

.

feared that he m ight be m istaken for an ene m y of Osiris

an d be slain accidentally The only way to avoid this was
.

to place each m e m ber of the body under the protection of

a god or goddess and to identify i t w ith h im or her I n
, .

the Pyra m id Text of Pepi I the co m position that in later

ti m es beca m e Chapter X L I I was m etrical i n character and ,

see m s to have been chanted or sung w ith a sort of refrai n

( see the Appendix to the Chapter ) I n the Theban .

R ecension the refrai n has been d ropped and the various ,

l ines relating to the deifi c a t io n of the m e m bers have been

3 18 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

grouped together and for m a m iddle section i n the Chapter

, .

I n the Papyrus o f An i and i n the later papyri down to

,

the Ptole m ai c and R o m an Periods this section is arranged

’

i n tabular for m and illustrated with V ignettes

, I t was .

very highly pri z ed by the followers of Osiris in all periods ,

for it was bel ie v ed to m ake the deceased a god and the ,

son of a god and to cause h im to m erge h is being i n the

,

“Only O ne who proceedeth fro m an O nly O ne The

, .

concluding portion of the Chapter as foun d i n the Pyra m id

Texts is totally different fro m that of Chapter X L I I i n the
T heban R ecension .

P L AT E XXX I I I

Vi gn et t e :A Lake of F i re or of boil i ng water fro m ,

the four sides of which fi re o r boil ing stea m [ rises At

each corner a dog headed ape is seated
-
A .

x b
.

T e t A R u r i c wh ich after referring to the state of

,

physical co m fort i n which An i shall l ive i n the O ther World ,

and to the abundan t supply of O fferings that shall be m ade

to him goes on to order that a pict u re of a t able of offerings
,

be drawn upon a clean plaque which shal l be buried i n a

,

fiel d whereon n o swi ne have trodden I f i n addition to th is .

picture the text be written upon the plaque his children s ,

’

children shall fl ourish u pon earth an d he hi m sel f shall l i v e

,

with the Followers of Osi ris and wi th the K ings of E gypt ,

and he shall s it at m eat w ith the gods .

I n the Papyrus of N eb s en i we fi nd the Vignette placed

a m ong the text of the Thi rd Part of Chapter C XXV of ,

which i t see m s to be an integral part ; on the other hand ,

there is no reference to a lake of fi re i n the text nor to the ,

Four H oly Apes As regards the R ubric i t is found at

.

the end of Chapter C XXV ( see Na v ille op ( ff B d I , . .

, .
,

B] . and i t i s then clearly to be considered a part of

Chapter C XXV Thus there see m s to be good reason
.

for assu m ing that both the V ignette and the R ubri c i n the
Papyrus of An i belong to Chapter C X X V althou gh the ,

Chapte r of the D eific a t io n ( or Assi m ilation ) of m e m bers is

i nserted between the m and the N egati v e Con fession So m e .

scribes however place the V ignette w ith a differen t text and

, , ,

treat t h e m as a separate Chapter n a m ely Chapter CX XVI

, ,
.

Th is is the case i n a papyrus i n the B ri tish M useu m

3 2 0 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

set upright con fu sed with

,
fl The t et bone or bones
ca m e to be regarded as a very powerful a m u let at a
.

ve ry early period an d under the M iddl e and Ne w E m pi res

,

m odels of i t were m ade O f gold glass fa i ence and so m eti m e s

'

, , ,

o f lap zs la z u li and of wood painted black Large wooden

'

, , .

m odel s of the fat are often fo u nd i n the wooden hands that

l ie on the breasts of anthropoid coffi ns and u nder the later ,

dynasties large figures of the { at were painted on the

botto m s of coffi ns either i nside or out The s e are so m e
,
.

t i m es between fi v e an d six feet long A fi ne collection of .

l et a m ulets is exh ibi ted i n the Fourth E gyptian R oo m i n

the B ritish M u seu m .

T ex t :[ C H A PT ER C L V ] T H E C H A PT ER O F TH E TE T .

O F G O LD This Chapter was a m ighty spell that enabled

.

the deceased to rise u p an d because he was provided with

, ,

h is backbone and his neck vertebrae to stand in his place ,

on his feet i n other words it effected h is resurrection I n .

t h e m iracle plays that were perfor m ed annually at Abydo s

“
an d other to w ns i n E gypt the setting upright the l et an d ”

placing the head of Osiris upon i t was t h e m ost i m portan t

scene an d i t i ndicated that the body of the god h a d been
,

reconsti tuted and that he had risen fro m the dead I t is

, .

i nteresting to note that the t at referred to i n the Chapter is

m ade of gold This m etal was bel ie v ed to possess great
.

a n d peculiar properties because the blood of the Sun god

,
-

was m ade of gol d .

V i gn et t e :The a m ulet T E T which has been co m m onl y ,

c alled a
“ “ ”
buckle or tie b u t there is no doubt that this ”
,

figure really represents the ute rus of I sis with the adj ace nt
o rgans . That i t was supposed to posse s s ve ry great po w er
i s pro v ed by the large nu m ber of m odel s of i t which are
found i n all i m portant E gyptian collections I t is u s ually .

m ade of red or reddish stone red gla s s red porphyry etc , , , .

,

a n d large m odels o f i t m ade of painted wood are found I n

the wooden hands that l ie on the breasts of anthropoid

coffi ns . Thus the deceased wen t i nto the O ther VVO r ld
beari ng i n his hand s sy m bols of the principal generati v e
o rgans of Osi ris an d I sis t h e great An cestor god and ,
-

A ncestress goddess of E gypt

-

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER C L V I ] T H E C H A PT ER O F A T ET O F .

CA R N E L I A N The obj ect of the recital of this Chapter is

.
 T he H ea rt and P i l low A m u l et s 3 2 1

clear I t brought to An i the protection that was to be

.

deri v ed fro m t h e blood and m agical knowledge and , ,

utteran ces and words of power of I sis and kept away fro m
, ,

h im every bei ng or thing that was an abo m i nation to h im .

W h en a car n el ian m odel of the T E T was on his n eck ,

especially if the words O f t h is Chapter were cut upon i t i t ,

wa s as i f the very l i fe blood O f I sis were presen t there and

-
,

h is resurrection was assured .

V i gn et t e A h u m an heart
A
.

T ex t [ C H PT ER X X I X B ] T H E C H A PTE R O F A H EA R T
O F CA R N E LI N A
This is one of the three versions of th is
.

Chapter of w h ich two have already been described B y the

,
.

recital of t h is Chapter An i iden tified hi m sel f wi th the B enu

bi rd wh ich was t h e i ncarnate for m of the heart of R a i a
, ,
. .
,

he beca m e the heart of the Sun god H e could then -

.

perfor m the labours O f R a and d i rect the gods who were , ,

for m s of h im S i nce thei r H eart souls ca m e forth on earth

.
-

to carr y out the orders of thei r Doubles An i sees no reason ,

why hi s H eart so u l sho u ld not co m e forth to do the w ill O f

-

h is Double This Chapter well illustrates the relationship

.

that existed between t h e phy s ical heart w h ich was the seat ,

O f the H eart soul and the K a or Do u ble which directed

-
, , ,

the desi res and i ncl i nations of the H eart soul -

.

V i gn ett e :An Afri can pillow or head rest -

x
, .

T e t :[ C H A PT ER C L XVI ] T H E C H A PT ER O F TH E
WW
.

P I LLO H I C H I S T o B E PLA C E D U ND ER TH E H E A D O F TH E
,

W
O S I R I S A N I T o A R D O F F E I L R O M TH E D E A D B O DY V F
O F TH E O S I R I S The recital of this Chapter caused the head
.

of An i to be l i fted up not onl y O ff the earth but i nto t h e,

hori z on and according to the fu ller v ersion of the

, ,

C h apter that is fo u nd i n the Papyrus of N eb s en i i t sec u red ,

for h im the ser v ices of Pta h the M aster crafts m an who ,

-

buil t u p his body an e w an d also of H oru s t h e son o f , ,

H athor and of the F i re goddess N es er t The last na m ed

,
-
.
-

goddess woul d s u pply his body with h eat and H or u s would ,

pre v ent h is head fro m being cut O ff duri ng the sl aughters

that took place fro m ti m e to ti m e i n K hert N eter S i n ce -
.

A n i ha d power to l i ft up his head i n that region i t followed ,

a s a m atter of course that all h is e ne m ies were destroyed .

3 2 2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

P L AT E S XXX I I I ( con ti n u ed) A N D XXX I V

V i gn et t e :A general v iew of the m u m m y cha m ber -

showing the figures of the gods and the a m u lets that

protected An i s m u m m y I n the centre of the cha m ber
’

stands the bier wi th a canopy on which t h e m u m m y l ies

, , ,

and beneath i t are the v a s es that hol d A n i s m u m m ified ’

i nternal organs only three vases are shown i nstead of fo u r .

B y the left side of the m u m m y stands An u bis who is resting ,

his hands upon i t i n an attitude of protection At the head .

of the bier kneels N ephthys and at the foot I sis ; each ,

goddess i s leani ng forward with her han ds resting on Q ,

“
the sy m bol of etern ity I n a space at each of the two ”
.

t o p corners is a figure of the H eart soul of An i i n the for m -

of a m a n headed hawk standing on a funerary b u ilding or

-
,

h is to m b A t each of the fo u r corners of the i nner rectangle

.

stands a bearded god i n m u m m ified for m ; these repre s en t

the Four Sons of H orus K est a ( M est a) Hapi Tu a m u t ef , , , ,

and e h s en u f and they stand there to protect t h e i nternal

,

organs of An i which are i n the fo u r j ars N ow we know

, .
,
“
fro m Chapter C XXXV I I which treats of the four bla z ing ,

torches ( for the fu ll text and translation see V ol I I

”
.
,

Append ix at end ) that an a m ulet was placed i n a cavi ty

,

O f each of the walls of the to m b to protect the m u mm y

fro m any ene m ies that m ight approach that wall to do
har m to the m u m m y Th u s a fat of crystal was placed .

i n the We s t wall a figure of Anubis i n t h e E ast wall a

, ,

ca é l z fig u re i n the S outh wall and a reed to represen t a

'

s/ , ,

pal m i n the N orth w all E ach of these obj ects was placed
, .

upright i n a brick m ade of cr u de m u d an d then set i n a ,

cavi ty wh ich wa s walled up I n the V ignette i n the

, .

Papyrus of An i we see the { at at the top of the plate and

the fig u re of Anubis at t h e botto m on the right han d i s a
pot of b u rn ing i ncense g whi c h here represen ts the reed !
,
'
,

an d i n the botto m left hand corner is the s /ca é t z fig u re -

,

stand ing belo w a second pot O f burn ing i n cense As to this .

being the M a at i there is no doubt for clo s e b y it is written ,

'

the text of Chapter V I whi ch was co mm only cut upon ,

a s b a bt ca figures Thus the artist m ade a m istake an d pu t

’

.
, ,

i n two pot s of b u rn ing i ncense i nstead of one and m o v ed ,

the s /za é t z fro m i ts proper place H a v i ng m ade this bl u nder

'

he co m m itted anot h er for the sake of giving the V ignette a

3 4
2 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

O those which g u ard the F i rst A rit o f the K ingdo m of

f
Os iri s S ee Chapter C X L V I I
. .

3 An i seated i n a boat w h ich is protected by the u t c/za t

.
,

an d contai ns a table of O fferi ngs ; he appears to be

taking t h is to the god at the en d of the register T he boat .

is si m ilar i n for m to t h at in wh ich R a tra v e ls .

4 An. i with one a r m

,
extended as i f i n the act of
addressing a god .

5 The hawk of H orus standi ng on t h e s er eé /z

. .

6 A god in m u m m y for m S tanding upright ; before h im

.

is an al tar stand on w h ich are a l ibation vessel and a lotus

-

flower This god m a y be an ancestor of An i his fat h e r or

.
,

grandfather .

7 Three
. o v als which represen t lakes These have no , .

na m es i n th is V ignette but i n the Papyrus of Neb s en i they ,

are called U rti Het ep and Q et q et O riginally they appear

, , .

to ha v e been s m all islands T h e two short l ines of hiero .

M F
fi 4
glyphs read L iving
’

M ;
i n S ekhet H et epet [with ] ai r i n the nose
-
.

11 . S ec o n d \
R egi s t e r :1 A n i reaping wheat with the
. ,

words .
t i .

the Os m s reapeth
2
.

J
2Three oxen tread ing out the corn on a circ u lar piece
.

of groun d w ith a raised edge to pre v en t the grain fro m

be ing scattered An i is urging round the oxen with cries
.

and the flourishing of a w h ip .

3 An i standi ng w ith both hands raised i n adorat ion

. .

A bi rd o n a perch sy m bol of “abundan ce or the

4 . , ,

N ile god
-
.

5 An i holding the é/zerp sceptre sy m bol ic of his high

.
,
,
,

rank kneel ing before two large heaps of grain either dhura
, ,

an d wheat or dhu ra and barley , T h e words U U U .

§
A
see m to i ndicate that the grai n is the food of
t h e K a zc and K Azc i e o f the Doubles and Spi ri t souls , . .
,
-
.

6 Three o v als which represent th ree lakes ; i n the

.
,

Papyrus of N eb s en i the lakes are four in nu m ber and they ,

are called N eb t a u i U a kha K ha and Het ep , , ,

.
 T h e E gy pt ia n H ea ve n 3 5
2

11 1 . T h ir d R egi s t er . An i ploughi ng l Ll
[ k 34
w ith a yoke of oxen i n S ekhet Aa n r u
Qi]
t u n
q 1 1 1

g a d i v ision of Sekhet H e t ep et The h ieroglyphi c

, .

text read s M outh of the can al a strea m [one thousand

“
c u bits ] wide I ts length can n ot be S tated N o fi s hes o f
. .

any kind l ive i n it t h ere are n o worm s serpen t s )

,

0
W
5 55 Q; ii w R H" )

i
m

DT
i l l O
h U [
lh
qh i e

I V F o u rt h R egi s t er :1 T wo bifurcat ions of the

. .

strea m s whereby two islan ds are for m ed The uppe r .

”
island is the B irth place o f the god of the city Q en q en ,

accord ing to the Papyr u s of N eb s en l on the lower i s a

lfi m
” 1 A

fl ight of steps i f] and the legen d

2A boat each end of which ter m inates i n the head and
.
,

neck of a serpent lying at the end O f a short canal I n the

, .

centre of i t is a fl ight O f steps and it has eight oars four o f , ,

whi ch were used i n propell ing it i n one direction and four ,

i n the opposite di rection B y the side of it are the words .

jfl lsfi
the god therei n is U n n Nefer - fi and t h e -
,

na m e of a part of a canal A shet A boat ”

q M .
,

i n which i s a fl ight of steps floating on one of the ,

strea m s of the region i n the Turi n Papyrus it is said to ,

“
be the boat wherei n R a H eru K huti sails in S ekhet
W
” S
H et epet 2
Above is written the word t c/cefa zc
.

k $2 c m z e. .
, di v i ne food .

i lh an w
mj lh
Pq
‘

fi é lh
g

eflé w

Q .
3 2 6 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

3 At the other end of this R egister are the words :

FTT§ lll
I l ll

flD § Q l $ “i ii f q gfigM M M M
i

“
k p Q P”
S S t h e pla c e o f t h e S p ir it
l
,

so u ls who are seven cubits h igh The wheat ( or dhura )

,
.

is three cubi ts high [and ] the Spirit bodies reap i t

x
.

T e t :[ C H A PT ER C X ] H ERE B E G I N TH E C H A PT ER S
K
.

O F S E H E T H E TE PE T A N D TH E C H A PT ER S O F C O M I NG F O R TH
F F
-
,

BY D A Y A N D O F G O I NG I NT O A N D O F C O M I NG O R TH R O M
,

K H ER T N E T ER A N D O F A RR I I NG I N S E H E T A R U A N D O F V K A
V A F
- -
, ,

L I I NG I N TH E G RE T C I TY WH ERE I N I s RE SH A I R I n the .

older papyri Chapter C X is v ery long and it contains a ,

nu m ber of repetitions The O bj ect of the Chapter was to .

provide the deceased with an estate i n the K ingdo m of

Osiris wherein he woul d l ive u nder cond itions closely
,

rese m bl ing those under which he l ived when upon earth .

T he recital of the Chapter wo u ld enable h im to obtain food

and drin k in abundance to plough sow and reap there to , , , ,

m arry to sail about i n a boat on the canals and to l ive a

, ,

l i fe wholly unaffected by any personal d isabil ities or by any ,

of the tro u bles that for m ed the necessary conco m itants of

the l ife upon earth H aving placated H orus and Set the
.
,

“ Two F ighters he would never be o v erco m e by any of

” ‘

the m inor fiends who acknowledged S et to be thei r overlord ,

and ha v i ng triu m phed over death and put away all the ,

defects and the sins which appertained to h is m aterial body ,

he felt confident that he wo u ld enj oy the happiness and th e

bl iss of l i fe everlasting This Chapter is qu ite d ifferen t .

fro m the C X t h Chapter i n the Papyrus of Neb s en i and ,

only the open ing words of the secon d paragraph rese m ble
any part of the text O f the older papyrus I t is probable .

that the artist did not leave space suffi cien t for this long
Chapter and that the scribe had only roo m to write down
,

a ser i es of short sen tences by which he strove to give the

general sense of the ancient proposition .

P LAT E S XXX V ( con ti n u ed) A N D XXX V I

V i gn ett e :T he Osi ris A n i arrayed i n wh ite l inen ,

apparel with h is hands raised i n adoration presenting the

, ,

two l ibation vases and the two lotus flowers wh ich are ,

placed on stands to the god Seker O si ris This god is i n

,
-
.
3 2 8 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

triad s represent four gods only na m ely the Fo u r Sons o f , ,

H or u s w ho appear there i n their characteristi c for m s

, .

Te t x :An addres s to the Father gods and M other -

goddes s es w h o dwell i n hea v en and i n K hert N eter and

,
-
,

who are entreated to del i v er the deceased fro m e v ery e v il

thing that can be done unto h im by m en and by gods an d , ,

by the Spiri t souls and by the dead Only the open ing
,
.

part of this address 13 gi v en i n the Papy rus of An i .

This C hapter 15 on e of the m ost i m portant i n t h e B ook

of the Dead for i t was written w ith t h e obj ect of pro v iding
,

the deceased with an i m al food and m il k i n the O ther World .

O ne fact I n con nection with i t m ust be re m e m bered T he .

god addressed 15 O s iris or on e of h is for m s and Osi ris was, ,

h i m self the B ull of A m en ti ; the food therefore that Osi ris l s

asked to gi v e is h i m self N ow the seven k ine are only .

i ncarnations of I sis H athor and othe r goddes s es and the

, , ,

m ilk with w h ich the kine supply the deceased is t h e m il k o f

the s e goddesses he therefore drinks the divine m il k
whereon the gods the m sel v es l ive Viewed fro m another .

aspect the k i ne and the bull suppl ied the celestial m eat and
m ilk upon which R a the S u n god l i v ed and the R u r i c -
,
b
states disti nctly that i f th is Chapter be recited at sun rise on
behalf of the deceased its effect w ill be to ens u re to h im a
,

perpetual supply of food i n abun dance That a v ery great .

m yste ry was associated with this Chapter is pro v ed by the

R ubri c to i t gi v en i n the Papyrus of N u where it is ordered ,

that this B ook of U n Nefer be not recited by a m a n i n -

t h e presen ce of anyon e except hi m sel f I n the Turin .

Papyrus ( ed Lepsius B l L X I X ) the Chapter is said to be

.
,
.

a v ery great an d real m ystery

6 ‘ é 11

t h at no other ( z e outsider ) l s e v er to know i t 1 ,

{
w il: l] fl o
J
that it is to be repeated to no on e
g ,

M M
lU

Q?
5
that n o eye to see and no ear
ca Y
n
I
I as
18 It,

w
7k wQ
2 J
to hear an d that
0 ‘

It m ,

[ ] §U
A <
none of the dwellers i n the Delta i s to know it J

@
%k E
] @i
g The ma n that taught the
 T h e F u n era ry M ou n ta in at T he b es 3 9
2

Chapter to h im that recites i t m a y be present at the recital ,

as well as the reciter s dearest friend l ( ll and

{
’

6 .

V ign ett es The scribe A n i an d h is wi fe stand ing

before a tabl e of offering s with hands raised i n adoration of ,

the god Seker Os i ri s -

A
.

T ex t :[ C H PT ER C L XX X V ] A H Y M N O F P R A I S E T o .

O S I R I S K H E NT I A M E NT I I n thi s h y m n An i praises the .

Lord of Lord s and K i ng of K i ngs the Prin ce and G od of ,

Gods and prays that Osi ris w ill gran t h im a seat with t h e
,

followers of the god and will per m i t h is K A to have ,

aut h ority i n the Tuat o v er all who are there and to go in ,

and co m e out at will .

P LA T E XXX VI I
Vi gn et t e :The god S eker Osiris i n m u m m y for m -
, ,

standi ng i n a fu nerary coffer the roof o f w h ic h i s s ur m ounted ,

by a hawk and u raei H e wears the Wh ite Crown wit h .

,

two pl u m es attached and holds i n his han ds a whip A and ,

two sceptres
T1
H e is called S ekri Osiri s Lord of the
.
,

S h et a it shri ne great god Lord of K hert N eter -

U “
“
, ,

0 a
ha v
e s
i
tles ] 6i v
?
V i gn ett e : I The H ippopota m u s godde s s Ta urt
.
- -

standing u pon the roof of a sepulc h ral b u ild ing O n h er .

head is a pair of horn s with a di s k between the m and she ,

holds i n her right fore foot a whi s k ( P) and i n her left -

, ,

which rests u pon $the sy m bol of the m agical fl u id of l i fe

“l ife
8 ,

the sy m bol of B efore her are two altar stands

,
-

on wh ich rest m any offerings cakes j oints of m eat fruit , , , ,

v egetables flowers etc

, ,
.

V i gn et t e :2 The to m b of An i i n the m ountai n of

.

Western Thebes The to m b is a rectangular building w ith

.

a corn ice sur m o u nted by a pyra m id i n one side of which is ,

the n iche i n wh ich An i s H eart soul rested when i t ret u rned ’

-

fro m the Other Worl d to visit his body i n the to m b .

V OL . I . z
33 0 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani
S i m ilar niches m a y still be seen i n t h e pyra m ids at M eroe ,

and i n front of one at least is a ledge on which the soul m a y

al ig h t I n fron t of t h e to m b I s a s m all portico the roof of
.
,

which is s u pported by a pillar with a papyrus capital .

Fro m a s m all pool or lake close to the to m b spr i ng a

nu m ber O f large flowering plants Fro m the m ountai n
.

i tself proj ects t h e head of the Cow goddess H athor i n her

c h aracter of goddess of A m enti Between her horns are a
.

d i sk and two pl u m es.

T ex t [C H A PT ER C L XXXV I. Witho u t t itle

]
. The
text of the Chapter is i nco m plete and lacks the prayers that
are found i n other papyri only a few of the titles of H athor
are enu m erated With these words and the acco m panying
.

V ign ett es the Papyrus of An i co m es to an end .

 2
3 3

m ess i a h .

he R i se

l li h h l R XV I I I —XXI
R
‘

l
o
I

e
a c

XV II
VII X

[
A l g
ar e s ec t io n o m itt ed ]

X V III In t r od tio
uc ns

bi
( A an d B ) t t ex

Wi t o t t i l ]
,
A XI I - XI V

J ,
an d Ru r c .
[ h u t e

XV III Du p li t op w ith o t
ca e c y ,
u I n t r o du c
W it o t
XX XX V
III, I
t io b t wi t h R b i
n, u u r c .
[ h u

t itl ] e

XX II

XX III

XX V I

X XV I
 3 33
PLAT E

XX XI

XX XI B
XXX III

XXX B

X XX B

X LI I I
XV II

X V LI

XV L I
3 34 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C HA T R
XV
P E

XVL III
3 ’ :
I
C1
o
, fi § III

L XXV III
3 ,
9m
1
q X XV , XXV I
33 6 T h e P a pyr u s of Ani

C HA T R
P E PL T
A E

XV
“
XC I I I
Sm K . 3 11 Ak II

h h
O o

a O
e
l
.

GI
Q
“
R
“l
.l

C X V XI [
11
q O
A
u u
°
H —I
XX V I

C XXV P ar t 1 .

i < 3 xxx

Pi W

i
e
—
WW
o tio to
A n I n r du c
o f io
n

p li
the t Ntog tiv
e a e

P y
C n es s n
a p of
ru s Ani
ec u ar th e

C XXV P ar t II . The “
i
Nof gF tiv
e a eC o f io
n es s

iv
n, XXX XXX
I, II
i

Fo t
.

tt
e , a s er es
.

s a em en s

r y t wo
-
t
m a de
u dges J wh
y
o r t y- t wo n ega t

b A i
o
n

s at
to t h
w i th
e

O i i s r s in t h e H a ll of M at i a

XXV P oft [W ti g P py
C ar III . an n in the a ru s

] Ani

C XXV R i pl d
Vig tt of C pt CXXV
RU B IC

ne
.

e
Th s is
ha er
ac e u n der

I
the

C XXV V ig tt o l y
I ne e n XXX III

C XXX XV
II
w w lE 12
l o

A 1 3»
o III

“
j
4 2> h h it
I I :

si g h ?
 L is t of H ym n s and C h a pt ers 33 7
CHAPT R E

C XXX III RU B R IC

C XXX V I XX II

X O I

C XV
L I II Of t h e
s
givi g of food t o t h pi it
o l i Kh
u n
n

t d of er t - N e er ,
e

an
S r XXXV XXXV
,
I

d liv i g h im f o m ll vil t h i g
W
e

t
A n i]
h
er n

[ o t t i tl i t h
i u p of
e
r

n
a

e P y
e

a ru s
n s .

C LI Th e
W
pl of th
i t
an

o t t i tl
e M u mm yP p y
-
c ha m b er

of
XXX
. X X X V
I I I, I
[ h u e in the a ru s

A n i]

C LV I
i w ww X XX III

CL V I
D
a
:
—U N W W \
XXX III

CL XV I I
u
m XXX III

XXV > a XX X
fi fi k i§fl
fl
<
CL

“
1 I

CL XXXV R
51 113} a i
1
0 N VVV “
f
Q Q

XXXV I

I II 0 i l
Q
. a

CL XXXV I Wi th o u t
[
A n i]
t i tl e in the P pya ru s of XXXV II